You are on page 1of 1052

CALYPSO

Basics

Operating Instructions

The design and delivered components of the CMM, its options, the program packages, and the relevant documentation are subject to change.
This manual must not be circulated or copied, or its contents utilized and
disseminated, without our express written permission. Persons misusing
this manual are subject to prosecution.
All rights reserved, especially in cases of granting a patent or registering
a utility model.
This manual is subject to modification. All rights pertaining to changes in
the CMM and its options reserved.
All product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of the corresponding proprietors.
Although utmost care has been taken in preparing the information given
in this manual, we cannot assume any liability for its completeness and
correctness, except in case of willful intent.

CALYPSO
Version 5.6
Operating Instructions
2013-05-24
61212-2011002

Table of contents
Preface
Information about these operating instructions
............................................................................... Preface 1
Configuration of safety instructions .................. Preface 6

Chapter 1

Introduction
Welcome to CALYPSO ................................................... 12
Starting CALYPSO .......................................................... 13
The main window of CALYPSO .................................... 16
Working with CALYPSO ................................................ 18
Operating CALYPSO ....................................................................... 18
Using shortcuts ............................................................................... 19
Entering alphanumeric characters with the mouse ........................ 110
Using context menus .................................................................... 110
Working with toolbars .................................................................. 111
Directory structures in CALYPSO ................................................... 113

Important terms in CALYPSO ...................................... 115


Overview of important terms ........................................................ 115
Features ........................................................................................ 115
Characteristics .............................................................................. 115
Measurement plans ...................................................................... 115
Coordinate systems ...................................................................... 116
Clearance planes .......................................................................... 116

Measurement plan-oriented measuring with CALYPSO


....................................................................................... 117
Options and licenses ................................................... 119
Options ........................................................................................ 119

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

Licensing ...................................................................................... 119


Activating and deactivating licenses .............................................. 120
Using licenses in the network ........................................................ 121

User support for CALYPSO .......................................... 123


Support in the submenu ? ............................................................ 123
Using the Online Help ................................................................... 123
Videos in the Online Help ............................................................. 126
Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy ...................................................... 127
ZEISS training block ...................................................................... 128

Exiting CALYPSO .......................................................... 130

Chapter 2

Working with the CAD window


Basics about the CAD window ..................................... 22
Functions in the CAD window ........................................................ 22
CAD model in the CAD window ..................................................... 22
Work area in the CAD window ....................................................... 23
Working in the CAD window .......................................................... 24

Buttons in the CAD window ......................................... 27


Defining features in the CAD window ...................... 210
Selecting and defining features in the CAD window ..................... 210
Selecting features in the CAD model ............................................. 210
Displaying individual features or all features .................................. 210
Defining probing points in the CAD window ................................. 211
Defining a space point .................................................................. 212
Defining an edge point ................................................................. 213
Defining a circle ............................................................................ 213
Defining a 2D line ......................................................................... 213
Defining a rectangle ..................................................................... 214
Defining features for the distance check ....................................... 214
Defining a coordinate system in the CAD window ........................ 214
Extracting features ........................................................................ 215
Defining/selecting the geometry ................................................... 215

Defining the display in the CAD window .................. 216


Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining the amount of data to be loaded and the CAD view ...... 216
Defining the view of the CAD model ............................................ 216
Controlling the loading of the CAD model .................................... 217
Moving the CAD model in the CAD window ................................. 218
Zooming the CAD model in or out ................................................ 218
Changing or resetting the model perspective ................................ 219
Rotating the CAD model ............................................................... 219
Displaying the CAD model as a solid ............................................. 221
Splitting the CAD window into several areas ................................. 221
Saving and loading the CAD view ................................................. 223
Deleting a CAD view ..................................................................... 224
Deleting a CAD model in the CAD window ................................... 225
Redrawing the CAD model ........................................................... 225
Saving the CAD view settings ....................................................... 225

Displaying measuring results in the CAD window ... 227


Display options in the CAD window .............................................. 227
Displaying actual points ................................................................ 228
Displaying characteristics .............................................................. 228
Displaying features ....................................................................... 228
Modifying a representation ........................................................... 229
Banners in the CAD window ......................................................... 229

Output of the CAD model ........................................... 232


Output methods ........................................................................... 232
Printing the CAD model ................................................................ 232
Outputting the CAD window ........................................................ 232
Outputting the CAD window as a plot .......................................... 233

Working with the CAD model .................................... 235


Ways of working with the CAD model .......................................... 235
Transforming the CAD model ....................................................... 235
Modifying the CAD model ............................................................ 235
Creating features on the CAD model ............................................ 238

Working with the data of the CAD model ................ 244


CAD model and CAD file .............................................................. 244
Creating a new measurement plan from a CAD file ...................... 244
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

Updating a loaded CAD model ..................................................... 245


Remedying problems in the CAD model display ............................ 246
Saving the CAD model as a CAD file ............................................. 247
CAD models consisting of several parts ......................................... 248
Transforming coordinate systems and CAD entities ....................... 249

Chapter 3

Preparing the measurement plan


Measurement plan basics ............................................. 32
Components of the measurement plan ........................................... 32
Creating a new measurement plan ................................................. 33
Opening and displaying a measurement plan .................................. 34
Saving and naming the measurement plan ..................................... 34
Settings for measurement plans ...................................................... 35
Editing the representation of features ............................................. 36
Compatibility of measurement plans ............................................... 38

Measurement plan area .............................................. 310


Tabs and color bars ....................................................................... 310
CMM index card ........................................................................... 311
Measurement Plan tab .................................................................. 311

Connecting the CMM .................................................. 313


Validity of the reference point ....................................................... 313
Connecting the CMM ................................................................... 313

Preparing the stylus system ........................................ 315


Validity of the stylus system .......................................................... 315
Inserting the stylus system ............................................................ 316
Re-qualifying a stylus system ......................................................... 317

Defining the CT properties ......................................... 318


Setting the base / start alignment ............................. 319
Working with the base/start alignment ......................................... 319
Part alignment basics .................................................................... 320
Loading an existing base alignment/start alignment ...................... 323
Creating a new base/start alignment ............................................. 324

Adapting a base / start alignment ................................................. 327


Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Customizing a base alignment iteratively ...................................... 328


Alignment by means of computed iteration .................................. 330
Editing a base / start alignment ..................................................... 333
Moving or rotating the base / start alignment ............................... 334
Rotating reference axis by secondary reference ............................. 337
Loading a secondary alignment for a base / start alignment .......... 342
Calculating a base alignment back to the CAD origin .................... 347
Accepting local alignment from the CAD model ........................... 348
Deleting a base alignment ............................................................ 349
Setting a base alignment to zero ................................................... 349
Alternative alignment methods ..................................................... 349

Prerequisites for the rotary table ............................... 355


Defining the clearance planes .................................... 356
Use of the clearance planes .......................................................... 356
Components of the clearance planes ............................................ 356
Defining the clearance planes with the CMM ................................ 357
Defining the clearance planes manually ........................................ 358
Defining the clearance planes by probing ...................................... 359
Generating the clearance planes automatically .............................. 360
Testing the clearance planes ......................................................... 360
Blocking individual edges of the clearance planes ......................... 361

Editing printout settings ............................................. 363


Working with measurement plan editors ................. 364
Overview of the measurement plan editors ................................... 364
Measurement plan editor for features ........................................... 364
Measurement plan editor for characteristics .................................. 365

Temperature compensation ........................................ 367


Purpose of temperature compensation ......................................... 367
Activating the temperature compensation .................................... 369
Determining the temperatures by manual probing ........................ 370
Configuring automatic temperature probing (CNC) ...................... 371
Determining the workpiece temperature externally ....................... 375
Entering temperatures manually ................................................... 376
Temperature compensation of the base alignment ........................ 378
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

Chapter 4

Defining features
Defining features ........................................................... 42
Options for defining features .......................................................... 42
Preassignments for features ............................................................ 43
Features index card ......................................................................... 44
Definition template for features ...................................................... 45
Automatic feature recognition and automatic feature end ............ 411
Deriving features from CAD files ................................................... 415
Importing features from the CAD model to the measurement plan ...
420
Multiplying features by patterns .................................................... 421
Relative measurement ................................................................... 425
Copying properties of features ...................................................... 435
Tips and tricks for defining features .............................................. 436

Details on definition of the features ......................... 438


Further information on the definition of the features .................... 438
Overview of the features ............................................................... 439
Point feature ................................................................................. 442
Circle feature ................................................................................ 445
Plane feature ................................................................................ 446
2D Line feature ............................................................................. 448
3D Line feature ............................................................................. 450
Cylinder feature ............................................................................ 450
Cone feature ................................................................................ 452
Sphere feature .............................................................................. 455
Curve feature ............................................................................... 455
3D Curve feature .......................................................................... 455
Ellipse special geometry ................................................................ 456
Slot special geometry .................................................................... 457
Rectangle special geometry ........................................................... 458
Torus special geometry ................................................................. 458
Offset Plane special geometry ....................................................... 462
Symmetry Point special geometry .................................................. 463
Symmetry Plane special geometry ................................................. 463
Step Cylinder special geometry ..................................................... 464
Radius point special geometry ....................................................... 467

Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Sphere Point special geometry ...................................................... 468


Angle Point special geometry ........................................................ 469
Circle on Cone special geometry ................................................... 470
General Surface special geometry ................................................. 472
General Curve special geometry .................................................... 472
Free Form Surface special geometry .............................................. 473
Holos and Gear additional features ............................................... 479
Turbine Blade additional feature ................................................... 481
Profile Elements additional feature ................................................ 483
Point Set additional feature ........................................................... 484
Station Point additional feature ..................................................... 489
Greater accuracy by gage correction qualification ......................... 492

Linking features in constructions ............................... 495


What is a construction? ................................................................ 495
Overview of constructions ............................................................. 495
Defining constructions .................................................................. 497
Defining features by recalling ........................................................ 497
Perpendicular construction .......................................................... 4115
Intersection construction ............................................................. 4116
Symmetry construction ............................................................... 4132
Edge Point construction .............................................................. 4141
Projection construction ............................................................... 4141
Tangent construction .................................................................. 4142
Minimum Point construction ....................................................... 4144
Maximum Point construction ...................................................... 4145
Minimum Feature construction ................................................... 4145
Maximum Feature construction ................................................... 4145
Average-Feature construction ..................................................... 4146
Cone Addition construction ........................................................ 4146
Plane with Offset construction .................................................... 4148
Circle in contour best fit construction ......................................... 4148
Kink Point construction ............................................................... 4154
Step Point construction ............................................................... 4156

Measurement strategies for features ...................... 4160


What is a measurement strategy? ............................................... 4160

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

Managing measurement strategies ............................................. 4160


Editing a measurement strategy .................................................. 4162
Defining the measurement strategy for a feature ........................ 4162
Using the context menu of the strategy list ................................. 4163
Evaluation range ......................................................................... 4164
Point list ..................................................................................... 4169
Alternative probing methods (self-centering probing) .................. 4170
Automatic stylus search .............................................................. 4175

Path generation measuring features automatically


..................................................................................... 4178
Purpose and use of the path generation ..................................... 4178
Adding a path generation method to a strategy list .................... 4179
General settings for the path generation method ........................ 4180
Path generation methods in detail .............................................. 4180

Chapter 5

Defining characteristics
Basics about characteristics .......................................... 52
Calculation of geometric elements .............................. 53
Computed feature .......................................................................... 53
Best-fit methods ............................................................................. 53

Defining characteristics ................................................. 57


Options for defining characteristics ................................................. 57
Characteristics index card ............................................................... 58
Inserting characteristics into the measurement plan ........................ 59
Extracting characteristics from CAD files ......................................... 59
Characteristic definition templates ................................................ 517
Connecting characteristics to features ........................................... 518
Datums for characteristics ............................................................. 524
Characteristics with indexes .......................................................... 528
Nominal values and tolerances in characteristics ............................ 531
Copying properties of characteristics ............................................. 540

Evaluation parameters for features ........................... 542


Overview of the evaluation parameters ......................................... 542

Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Filtering and outlier elimination ..................................................... 543


Excluding ranges by masking from the form characteristics ........... 552
Reference point for feature ........................................................... 555

User-defined characteristic attributes ........................ 557


Working with user-defined characteristic attributes ....................... 557
Assigning values for characteristic attributes ................................. 558
Importing characteristic attributes with values ............................... 559
Reference: INI file for characteristic attributes ................................ 560
Example: Configuration file for user-defined characteristic attributes
..................................................................................................... 561

Details on defining characteristics ............................. 563


Overview of characteristics ............................................................ 563
Radius Measurement characteristic ............................................... 573
Length of Perpendicular characteristic ........................................... 573
2 Point Diameter characteristic ...................................................... 574
Profile characteristic ...................................................................... 576
GDT Symmetry characteristic ........................................................ 579
Circular Pitch characteristic ........................................................... 580
Linear Pitch characteristic .............................................................. 584
Minimum, Maximum and Average characteristics ......................... 586
Roundness with reference angle characteristic .............................. 587
Flatness with reference length characteristic ................................. 588
Straightness with reference length characteristic ........................... 589
Result Element characteristic ......................................................... 590
Special Program characteristic ....................................................... 591
Maximum Waviness characteristic ................................................. 593
True Position with Best Fit of Bore Pattern characteristic .............. 5106
Characteristics in practice (instructions) ....................................... 5110

Utilities ....................................................................... 5112


Overview of the utilities .............................................................. 5112
Utilities for alignments ................................................................ 5113
Geometry Best Fit utility .............................................................. 5113
Probing System Qualification utility ............................................. 5114
Qualification of stylus system holders utility ................................ 5115
Erosion Module utility ................................................................. 5115
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

Text Element utility ..................................................................... 5118


Graphics Element utility .............................................................. 5120
Saving an alignment ................................................................... 5120
Loading an alignment ................................................................. 5121
Deleting an alignment ................................................................ 5121
Base Alignment Match utility ...................................................... 5122
CAD Presentation utility .............................................................. 5127

Chapter 6

Editing the measurement plan


Overview: Editing the measurement plan ................... 62
Editing the entire measurement plan .......................... 63
Overview: Editing the entire measurement plan .............................. 63
Managing measurement plans ....................................................... 63
Saving measurement plan versions .................................................. 64
Editing compatibility settings .......................................................... 65
Exchanging styli in a measurement plan .......................................... 67
Editing a measurement plan ........................................................... 68
Specifying feature names in the measurement plan ...................... 618
Mirroring a measurement plan ...................................................... 624
Combining several measurement plans ......................................... 627

Editing features of the measurement plan ............... 629


Overview: Editing features of the measurement plan .................... 629
Adding features or characteristics to a measurement plan ............. 629
Highlighting features and characteristics ....................................... 630
Editing a measurement plan feature ............................................. 630
Copying measurement plan features ............................................. 631
Moving features or characteristics ................................................. 632
Deleting features or characteristics ................................................ 632
Working with the waste basket .................................................... 633
Grouping and ungrouping characteristics ...................................... 633
Copying features with references .................................................. 633
Renaming measurement plan features .......................................... 635
Undoing changes in the measurement plan .................................. 635
Searching and replacing measurement plan feature names ........... 636

10

Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Converting selected cylinders to circles ......................................... 636

Formula input and run control ................................... 637


Overview of the formula input and run control ............................. 637
Formula input ............................................................................... 637
Entering formulas ......................................................................... 638
Entering formulas for clearance planes/clearance groups ............... 638
Showing formulas in the measurement plan ................................. 639
Setting conditions ......................................................................... 640
Inserting loops .............................................................................. 642
Run control with external batch files ............................................. 648

Using macros in the measurement plan .................... 650


Purpose of macros in the measurement plan ................................. 650
Basics about macros in measurement plans ................................... 651
Using macros in CALYPSO ............................................................ 653

Toolboxes ..................................................................... 657


What are toolboxes? ..................................................................... 657
Creating toolboxes ....................................................................... 657
Working with the toolbox ............................................................. 658
Deleting a toolbox ........................................................................ 658
Super characteristics ..................................................................... 658

Editing the travel paths .............................................. 664


Overview of the travel paths ......................................................... 664
About travel paths ........................................................................ 664
Clearance planes/clearance groups ............................................... 665
Checking the travel paths ............................................................. 667
Editing travel paths between features ........................................... 668
Editing travel paths within a feature .............................................. 671
Additional travel paths and positions ............................................ 672

Multimedia user information ..................................... 675


Information files in the measurement plan .................................... 675
Adding an information file to a measurement plan ....................... 675
Loading the information file of a measurement plan ..................... 676

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

11

Chapter 7

Running a measurement plan


Measurement plan run .................................................. 72
Defining the scope of measurement ............................ 73
Options for defining the scope of measurement ............................. 73
Measuring the current selection ...................................................... 74
Working with measurement plan groups ........................................ 74
Working with mini-plans ................................................................. 74

Entering printout header data ..................................... 76


Overview of the printout header data ............................................. 76
Entering global printout header data .............................................. 76
Entering local printout header data ................................................. 76

Starting a measurement ............................................... 77


CNC run and manual run ................................................................ 77
Starting a CNC run ......................................................................... 77
Manual run ..................................................................................... 78

Checking and controlling the measurement plan run


....................................................................................... 711
Basics about the measurement plan run ........................................ 711
Setup Mode for features ............................................................... 711
Continue at missing probing ......................................................... 711
Working with the Stop Light window ........................................... 712
Working with the light signal window .......................................... 719
Working with the remark window ................................................ 721

Repeating measurements ........................................... 723


Use of repeat measurements ........................................................ 723
Repeat measurements in CALYPSO ............................................... 723
Preparing a repeat measurement .................................................. 724
Performing the repeat measurement ............................................. 726
Evaluating repeat measurements .................................................. 728
Behavior in the case of insufficient measuring force ...................... 728

Manual measurements ................................................ 730


Surface measurement with single points ....................................... 730

12

Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Alternating operation with CALYPSO and UMESS ... 731

Chapter 8

Viewing, presenting and editing measuring results


Printouts in CALYPSO .................................................... 82
Overview of the printouts in CALYPSO ............................................ 82
Printout modes and printout types .................................................. 82
Working in the Single Printouts mode ............................................. 86
Working in the Multiple Printouts mode ......................................... 89
Outputting EXCEL reports ............................................................. 812
Displaying and printing printouts .................................................. 813
Examples of printouts ................................................................... 814

Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts ...821


Custom printout and compact printout ......................................... 821
Structure of custom printouts and compact printouts ................... 821
Automatic fields in the printout header ......................................... 822
Result presentation in the custom printout .................................... 822
Designing printouts with the printout format editors .................... 823

Outputting form and location plots with the graphics elements ............................................................................ 840
Outputting form and location plots ............................................... 840
Layout of a form and location plot ................................................ 840
Defining graphics elements ........................................................... 842
Examples of form and location plots ............................................. 844
Creating single templates with the graphics editor ........................ 860
Creating graphics forms with the printout header editor ............... 867
Working with the plot window .................................................... 870

Outputting form and location plots for characteristics


....................................................................................... 872
Defining the output in the definition template .............................. 872
Form and location plots for characteristics .................................... 872
Output of form or location plot .................................................... 873
Format files for form and location plots ........................................ 878
Working with the form and location plot window ......................... 882
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

13

Exporting measuring results into files ....................... 885


Overview of the export of measuring results ................................. 885
Defining paths and names individually for output files .................. 888
Saving measuring results as files ................................................... 889
Exporting points during CNC run .................................................. 891
Exporting points manually ............................................................. 892
Configuring the DMIS output ....................................................... 894
Table files with measuring results .................................................. 895
Copying the measuring results file ................................................ 899

Evaluating measuring results subsequently ............ 8100


Basics about the subsequent evaluation of measuring results ...... 8100
Saving measuring points ............................................................. 8100
Evaluating measuring points ....................................................... 8101

Programmed access to measuring results ............... 8104


Basics about the programmed access to measuring results .......... 8104
Permitting access to measuring results ........................................ 8105
Syntax of the CalypsoInterface ................................................ 8106
Example: VBScript Application (WSH) ......................................... 8112

Chapter 9

Creating protocol templates with the PiWeb


BasicReporter
Introduction to the PiWeb BasicReporter .................... 92
Designing the protocol template ................................. 93
PiWeb BasicReporter program window ....................... 94
Setting up the pages of a protocol template .............. 95
Master pages and report pages ....................................................... 95
Setting up headers and footers ....................................................... 96
Generating a table of contents ....................................................... 97

Designing pages by means of the toolbox .................. 99


Adding elements from the toolbox ................................................. 99
Text and variables in protocol templates ....................................... 910
Images and views in protocol templates ........................................ 911

14

Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Lines in protocol templates ........................................................... 912


Printouts and tables in protocol templates .................................... 914
Form plots in report templates ...................................................... 917
Changing element properties ........................................................ 919
Arranging elements on one page .................................................. 920

Linking an element to a characteristic ....................... 922


Undoing and restoring changes ................................. 924
Designing interactive protocols ................................. 925
Saving the protocol template and closing the BasicReporter ................................................................................... 926
Modifying and creating element templates .............. 927

Chapter 10

Managing CALYPSO
Saving and installing CMM data ................................ 102
If a software error occurs the error report ............. 103
Components of the error report .................................................... 103
Preparing the error report ............................................................. 103
Error report - preparing saving ...................................................... 104
Using the error report ................................................................... 105

Modifying system settings ......................................... 108


Overview of system settings .......................................................... 108
Example: Modifying system settings .............................................. 109
User management ........................................................................ 109
Changing the environment ......................................................... 1013
Changing the CMM configuration .............................................. 1013
Changing the measurement parameters of the CMM ................. 1014
Displaying system messages ........................................................ 1014
Activating licenses and displaying program parameters ............... 1014
Initializing the CMM ................................................................... 1015
Using the taskbar ........................................................................ 1015
These system settings can be modified ........................................ 1015

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

15

Chapter 11

Styli and stylus systems


Overview of the chapter ............................................. 112
Editing stylus systems and styli .................................. 113
Procedure for stylus systems and styli ............................................ 113
Defining a new stylus system ........................................................ 113
Adding further styli to a stylus system ......................................... 1111
Renaming a stylus ....................................................................... 1112
Entering data of the master stylus ............................................... 1113
Setting the angle positions of an RDS stylus ................................ 1115
Creating and editing the RC List ................................................. 1117
Automated creation of a stylus list for an RC system ................... 1120

Qualifying the reference sphere .............................. 1122


Principle of qualification with reference sphere ........................... 1122
Determining the position of the reference sphere ....................... 1123

Qualification of styli .................................................. 1125


Basics about stylus qualification .................................................. 1125
Limit values for styli .................................................................... 1127
Measuring the stylus values ........................................................ 1128
Sensor monitoring for 3D microstyli on the F25 .......................... 1129
Selection of the qualification method .......................................... 1132
Performing stylus qualification .................................................... 1134
Qualifying stylus system with measurement plan ......................... 1139

Stylus system management ...................................... 1143


Stylus system management window ........................................... 1143
Editing stylus data ....................................................................... 1144
Creating a new stylus ................................................................. 1144
Working with overviews ............................................................. 1145
Outputting stylus data ................................................................ 1146

Reference sphere management ................................ 1149


Basics of reference spheres ......................................................... 1149
Reference sphere correction ........................................................ 1149
Transfer of reference sphere data ............................................... 1150
Reference sphere management window ................................. 1151

16

Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Creating a new reference sphere ............................................... 1152


Editing reference sphere data ..................................................... 1153
Semi-automatically defining the RSH shaft direction .................... 1154
Outputting reference sphere data ............................................... 1155

Chapter 12

Measuring with the rotary table


General information on using the rotary table ......... 122
Advantages of the rotary table use ............................................... 122
Safety instructions for RT-AB rotary tables ..................................... 123
Mass moment of inertia (MMI) of rotary tables ............................. 123

Prerequisites for the rotary table ............................... 127


Steps for preparation .................................................................... 127
Logging in the rotary table ............................................................ 127
REWI additional correction for rotary table operation .................. 1210
Setting the rotary table axis for measurements ............................ 1213
Qualifying the rotary table axis .................................................... 1215
Additional prerequisites for the rotary table ................................ 1229

Using the rotary table for measurements ............... 1234


Overview of the use of the rotary table for measurements .......... 1234
Using the rotary table passively ................................................... 1234
Positioning the rotary table manually .......................................... 1235
Visualizing the tilting moment of the RT-AB rotary table ............. 1238
Using the loading mode for the RT-AB rotary table ..................... 1239
RT clearance planes ................................................................... 1240
Rotary table parameters in the feature ........................................ 1241
Measuring a feature in a number of rotary table positions .......... 1243
Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary table coupling ........... 1244

Chapter 13

Stylus system changer


Stylus system change .................................................. 132
Stylus system change in CALYPSO ................................................ 132
Stylus system changer for certain stylus systems ............................ 133
Multi-stage stylus system change .................................................. 133
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

17

Setting the change behavior for multi-sensor systems ................... 134

Special aspects with stylus system changers ............. 136


Overview: Special aspects with stylus system changers .................. 136
Renishaw MCR20 stylus system changer ....................................... 136
SCR200 stylus system changer ...................................................... 137
ACR3 stylus system changer ......................................................... 138
Stylus system changer for RDS ...................................................... 139

Setting up the stylus system changer ...................... 1310


Setup in the system settings ........................................................ 1310
Configuring the stylus system changer ........................................ 1311
Setting up holders ...................................................................... 1312
Color coding of holders .............................................................. 1314
Rack assignments ....................................................................... 1315
Defining length of master stylus .................................................. 1317
Defining the RDS geometry ......................................................... 1318
Defining approach parameters and paths .................................... 1320
Defining holder positions ............................................................ 1327
Assigning a stylus system to a holder .......................................... 1333
Automatically changing the stylus system ................................... 1334
Semi-automatically changing the stylus system ........................... 1334
Changing stylus system assignments ........................................... 1335
Setting up an SP25 stylus system with an FCR25 rack ................. 1335
Setting up an XXT stylus system with an XXT rack ....................... 1337

Qualifying the stylus changer rack in the CNC run ...1341


Suitable holders for CNC qualification ......................................... 1341
Qualifying holders in the CNC run .............................................. 1342

Chapter 14

AutoRun interface
Introduction to AutoRun interfaces ........................... 142
Basics about AutoRun interfaces ................................ 143
Purpose and basic terms ............................................................... 143
Layout of the AutoRun interface ................................................... 143
Basics about desks ........................................................................ 144

18

Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Basics about measurement plan icons ........................................... 145


Basics about pallets ....................................................................... 146
Basics about branches ................................................................... 149
Basics about keywords .................................................................. 149

Working with AutoRun ............................................. 1410


Preset AutoRun interface ............................................................ 1410
Your user privileges .................................................................... 1410
Preparing a measurement start for AutoRun ............................... 1410
Starting a measurement in AutoRun ........................................... 1415
Entering printout header parameters .......................................... 1416
Controlling measuring runs in AutoRun ...................................... 1417
When a measurement in AutoRun is completed .......................... 1417
Visualization of the measuring results ......................................... 1418
Displaying printouts subsequently ............................................... 1419

AutoRun for system administrators ......................... 1421


Tasks of the system administrator ............................................... 1421
Configuring AutoRun ................................................................. 1421
Mapping the workpieces ............................................................ 1426
Mapping a pallet ........................................................................ 1430
Defining measuring runs for a pallet ........................................... 1432
Assigning keywords to icons ....................................................... 1436
Creating branches between desks ............................................... 1437
Preparing a measurement ........................................................... 1437
Managing AutoRun .................................................................... 1443

Chapter 15

Duplex mode
Duplex mode with CALYPSO ...................................... 152
Preparing the duplex mode ........................................ 154
Prerequisites for the duplex mode ................................................. 154
Configuring CALYPSO for duplex mode ........................................ 154
Files for duplex mode .................................................................... 157
Establishing the connection and coupling the measuring ranges ... 158

Using the duplex mode ............................................. 1515


61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Table of contents

19

Notes on measuring in duplex mode ........................................... 1515


Measuring with a duplex CMM ................................................... 1515

Chapter 16

Setup and use of the RTP20 probe


Contents and purpose of this chapter ....................... 162
RTP20 probe ................................................................. 163
Basics about the RTP20 probe ....................................................... 163
Configuring the RTP20 in the system settings ............................... 164

Particular aspects of semi-automatic operation ........ 165


Semi-automatic operation with RTP20 .......................................... 165
Prerequisites for semi-automatic operation with RTP20 ................. 165
Qualifying the pivot sphere with the RTP20 ................................... 166
Semi-automatic angle positioning by CALYPSO ............................. 168

Entering the current angular position in CALYPSO ..1611

Chapter 17

Using the VAST XTR gold probe


Contents and purpose of this chapter ....................... 172
VAST XTR gold probe .................................................. 173
Basics about the VAST XTR gold probe ......................................... 173
Prerequisites and conditions .......................................................... 174

Particularities for the use ............................................ 176


Particularities for the measurement ............................................... 176
Stylus system change with VAST XTR gold .................................... 177

Alphabetic index

20

Table of contents

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Preface
Information about these operating
instructions
These Basics Instructions are intended for users who want to learn about
the use of CALYPSO and the rational execution of their CALYPSO measuring jobs.
These operating instructions describe how to work with the base module
of CALYPSO. To take full advantage of additional functions, you must
purchase the corresponding option.
NOTICE
The additional CALYPSO options are described in separate manuals.
Reference information about the windows and dialogs can be found in
the dialog reference in the CALYPSO Online Help.
Overview

These instructions contain:

Chapter Introduction [ 11]


Contains background information illustrating the basic procedures
and general concepts of CALYPSO.

Chapter Working with the CAD window [ 21]


Describes the possibilities of the CAD window and how to use them.
You also get information on how to work with CAD data.

Chapter Preparing the measurement plan [ 31]


Describes how to open a measurement plan and the prerequisites
necessary before you can run a measurement plan automatically.

Chapter Defining features [ 41]


Describes the definition of the features (e.g. a plane or cylinder) and
explains how to work with strategy macros and scanning.

Chapter Defining characteristics [ 51]


Describes the principles of the fitting methods that CALYPSO uses and
shows how to define characteristics.

Chapter Editing the measurement plan [ 61]


Explains how to manage a measurement plan, work with the toolbox
options, create custom printouts and work with the travel paths of
the CMM.

Chapter Running a measurement plan [ 71]


Describes how to start CNC runs and how to work with the measuring
results.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Preface

Information about these operating instructions

Chapter Viewing, presenting and editing measuring re-

sults [ 81]
Describes which types of printouts are available and how to work with
them. How to save the measuring results in files of different formats
is also described.

Chapter Creating protocol templates with the PiWeb BasicReport-

er [ 91]
Opens the PiWeb BasicReporter for creating and editing the protocol
templates (PTX files) for Basic Reports.

Chapter Managing CALYPSO [ 101]


Shows how to install CALYPSO and how to view and modify all system
settings of Calypso.

Chapter Styli and stylus systems [ 111]


Describes the installation, qualification and administration of stylus
systems and styli for CALYPSO.

Chapter Measuring with the rotary table [ 121]


Describes the login, setup and qualification of the rotary table and the
special aspects of the measuring run with the rotary table.

Chapter Stylus system changer [ 131]


Contains the instructions for using the CALYPSO stylus system changer.

Chapter Automatic Run [ 141]


Explains how the system administrator sets up an AutoRun interface
and how users work with AutoRun.

Chapter Duplex mode [ 151]


Contains the instructions for preparing, performing and evaluating
measurements with duplex CMMs.

Chapter Setup and use of the RTP20 probe [ 161]


Contains the instructions for setup and use of the RTP20 probe which
allows semi-automatic angle adjustment.

Chapter Using the VAST XTR gold probe [ 171]


Explains the structural features and the procedure for the use of the
VAST XTR gold probe.

Additional documents
for CALYPSO

The following operating instructions describe the options of CALYPSO as


well as special devices.

Curve Measurement (option)


Contains the basics of curve measurement, how to set up features
and characteristics, and how to operate on the results.

Preface

Parameter-coded measuring runs (option)

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Information about these operating instructions

Explains the basics of the PCM programming language. It also provides directions for and examples of using PCM with CALYPSO, with
formulas, input and output parameters, conditions and loops.

Simulation (option)
Simulation
If you have used the stylus system library to copy the styli of your
CMM virtually, CALYPSO is able to simulate the stylus movements in
the CAD window.

DMIS Export (option)


Explains the basics and the procedure for the export of CALYPSO
measurement plans to DMIS.

DMIS Import (V2) (option)


Explains the basics and the procedure for the import of measuring
runs programmed in DMIS toCALYPSO.

Characteristic IN (option)
You can use the Characteristic IN option without a connected CMM
to import suitable CAD data or Agipp data for manufacturing segments and convert this data into a CALYPSO measurement plan.

OVCMM Measuring Uncertainty Definition (option)


Describes the configuration and use of the OVCMM that can be used
to determine the measuring uncertainty of measurement plan results.

Qualifying the RDS with CAA (option)


Describes how to qualify an RDS on a system with the RDS-CAA option (Computer Aided Accuracy). A small number of physical probings
is all that is needed to qualify all 20,736 possible angular positions of
an RDS.

VAST Navigator (option)


With the VAST Navigator, you can achieve maximum precision during
high-speed scanning thanks to the refined equipment technology,
control technology and algorithms. Tangential probing and helical
scanning now become possible.

Automation (option)
Describes the Automation option, with which automation projects are
realized in combination with the CMM-OS.

QS-STAT Interface (option)


With the QS-STAT Interface option, you can evaluate measuring results that have been saved by CALYPSO in the Q-DAS format in the
qs-STAT statistics program.

Dynalog and Dynalog P control consoles


Describes how to operate CALYPSO using the Dynalog control console.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Preface

Information about these operating instructions

Metrotomography (option)
With the Metrotomography option, you can load, visualize and measure CT data records gained by METROTOM.

CALYPSO DME Interface (option)


The CALYPSO DME Interface option allows you to use CALYPSO for
the control of a DME server.

AIMS Interface (option)


The AIMS Interface option allows you to import measurement plans
from AIMS to CALYPSO and to export the results calculated by means
of these measurement plans back to AIMS.

Calypso Barcode (option)


The CALYPSO Barcode option makes it possible to use barcode information on workpieces for partially automated quality testing.

Calypso Tube Measurement Program (option)


The Tube Measurement Program option enables you to define, measure and evaluate curved tubes.

VAST Performance (option)


The VAST Performance option enables you to use the FlyScan function
which makes it possible to measure paths interrupted by grooves
much faster and more conveniently in one go. Furthermore, you have
access to the quick stylus system change.

PiWeb FlexReporting (option)


The PiWeb FlexReporting option allows you to evaluate the measured
values of a measurement plan in separate reports. The reports may
contain graphic representations, integrated statistical evaluations and
interactive elements and can be updated by pressing a button after
selecting the desired measurements.

PC-DMIS Import (option)


You can use the PC-DMIS import option to import a program created with PC-DMIS and to have it converted to a CALYPSO measurement plan. Provided you have a licensed and executable version of
PC-DMIS installed on your computer.

Supplementary literature

Simply Measure And what you should know to do it right, A metrology


primer
Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division, Order number: 612302-9002

ZEISS training block

You can order the training block from Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology
Division, D-73446 Oberkochen.
Order no.: 600331-8052-000

Preface

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Information about these operating instructions

Text conventions and


symbols

Icons

Text conventions The following text conventions and symbols are used in
these instructions:
Example

Description

Features

Text element of the graphics screen


display.

Comment

The Comment button on the


screen.

<machine name>

Variable text or dummy for a name.

C:\windows\w.ini

The w.ini file in the windows directory on the C:\ drive.

For this section...

A passage containing important information.

Preface

This is a cross reference. When


viewing this manual on the screen,
you will be guided to the indicated
text passage by clicking the reference.

Plan CNC-Start

The Run command in the Plan


submenu of the main menu.

CTRL+A

Press the CTRL key and the letter A at


the same time.

Three special icons containing important information are used in this


manual. The icons appear in the marginal column next to the respective
text.
You will find a detailed explanation of the safety instructions under Configuration of safety instructions.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Preface

Configuration of safety instructions

Configuration of safety instructions


Safety instructions indicate a personal health hazard. We distinguish three
different levels: Danger, warning and caution. All three safety instructions
are marked with the same warning symbol. The designation of the safety
instruction is shown beside the symbol. The safety instructions used are
described below.

Configuration of a safety instruction


A safety instruction may have the following components:

Warning symbol and designation of the safety instruction (signal


word): Danger, warning or caution.

Source and cause of the danger

Consequences for the user due to non-observance of the safety instruction

Required measures to be taken by the user to avoid possible consequences

A measure may cause an intermediate result.

At the end of all measures, a final result may be caused.

Personal health hazard


DANGER
A danger indicates an imminent risk to life and limb.
Non-observance of this safety instruction when the described risk occurs
causes death or serious injuries.
Example: Electric shock due to high electric voltage.

WARNING
A warning indicates a possible risk to life and limb.
Non-observance of this safety instruction when the described risk occurs
may cause death or serious injuries.
Example: Risk of severe crushing of the body caused by heavy loads.

CAUTION
A caution indicates a personal health hazard.
Non-observance of this safety instruction when the described risk occurs
may cause slight to moderate injuries.
Example: Risk of minor crushing of the limbs caused by small loads.

Risk of material damage


If there is no personal health hazard, but the CMM or components may
get damaged, this is pointed out by the following notice.

Preface

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Configuration of safety instructions

This symbol refers to possible damage to the CMM.


Non-observance of this safety instruction when the event occurs may cause
damage to the CMM or one of its components.
Example: Collision of the ram with a workpiece.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Preface

Configuration of safety instructions

Preface

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Chapter

Introduction

.................................................................................................................

This chapter contains:


Welcome to CALYPSO ............................................................................. 12
Starting CALYPSO .................................................................................... 13
The main window of CALYPSO ................................................................ 16
Working with CALYPSO ........................................................................... 18
Important terms in CALYPSO ................................................................. 115
Measurement plan-oriented measuring with CALYPSO .......................... 117
Options and licenses .............................................................................. 119
User support for CALYPSO ..................................................................... 123
Exiting CALYPSO .................................................................................... 130

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-1

Welcome to CALYPSO

Welcome to CALYPSO
CALYPSO was developed to make the job of measuring easier for you.
To this end, CALYPSO utilizes the entire know-how pool of Carl Zeiss, the
technology leader in the world of metrology.
Straightforward programming

CALYPSO automatically recognizes the geometry features that you probe


and generates probing paths and strategies, retraction movements and
travel paths between the features.
In contrast to conventional software, the styli are qualified with the aid
of CNC programs. As a consequence you need only perform the first
probing of the reference sphere manually, CALYPSO will perform all of
the remaining steps for you.
In CALYPSO, you enter the measurement parameters in accordance with
a predefined structure, which means that nothing can be inadvertently
omitted. You will find, for example, that the parameters in the input menus offer you default values. There are only a few items that call for manual input in CALYPSO, and they are highlighted to draw your attention
to them right away. Logical sequences, indicators, prompts for confirmation, and plausibility checks matching the individual characteristics are all
in place to make sure that you omit nothing and to make measuring as
straightforward as possible.

You see what you're


measuring

CALYPSO offers you a clear view of the workpiece at all times. The CAD
model is right in front of you on the screen and you can follow every detail
as measurement proceeds. Of course, you also have the option of directly
importing CAD data so that you can quickly generate error-free measurement programs of your own.

Versatile measurement
logs

You can be sure that you'll have the results of measurement without delay, and afterwards you can still depend on CALYPSO to help. You can
customize measurement logs to suit your needs and preferences,for example you can assign colors to tolerance overshoots or select full-graphics
display modes for the results.
If you want to import the results into other mainstream Windows applications, CALYPSO can export the result files, so you can present the data
as graphic or in table form, or in presentation programs whatever you
want.

1-2

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Starting CALYPSO

Starting CALYPSO
1 Wait for the Windows desktop to appear and double-click the Calypso icon.
- or Select Start Programs Zeiss CALYPSO 5.6 CALYPSO
5.6.
The Log In window opens and you must identify yourself by entering
the user name and the password.
Exceptions:

If System login (LDAP) is activated in the User notebook in the


system settings,
CALYPSO sends, via the IP address set, user name and password to
the LDAP server, which will compare this data to the data stored in
the server. If the data corresponds to each other, CALYPSO is started.
However, the prerequisite is that the users are defined with the same
user name and password (pay attention to upper and lower case!),
not only in the system used by the LDAP directory (e.g. the Microsoft
Active Directory) but also in the CALYPSO user management.

If Automatic login is activated in the User notebook in the system


settings, CALYPSO starts automatically without login.

Login in the CALYPSO window

1 Select your user name from the User Name list.

Note: If you click Memos, you find information left for you by the
operator on the previous shift.
2 Type in your password and click OK.
When you log in for the first time, CALYPSO prompts you to confirm
your password:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-3

Starting CALYPSO

3 Type in your password again and click OK.


Once you have logged in, the following will be opened depending on the
default settings:

Starting to work

the CALYPSO program

the AutoRun user interface

the counter display

the task bar

If the CALYPSO program starts with an empty user desk according to your
settings, you can call in the What do you like to do? window one of
the functions that you require most frequently when starting to work or
switch to one of the measurement plans last opened.

How do you want to start?


The most important tasks

Measurement plans used last

Create New Measurement Plan

Engine block

Open Measurement Plan

Gear

Load CAD Model

Rotary table

Manage Stylus Systems


Change Settings

Calypso 5.6.0000
Version 5.6.0000 (01.05.2013)

1-4

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Starting CALYPSO

NOTICE
Consult your system administrator if you encounter problems when logging in.

The CALYPSO program window


After starting, CALYPSO opens several windows: the main window, Stop
Light window, status window, Tips and Tricks and, if necessary, the light
signal window.
Make your entries in the CALYPSO main window. The other windows are
only for information and checking.
NOTICE
Never close ACIS Interface when CALYPSO is running.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-5

The main window of CALYPSO

The main window of CALYPSO


The CALYPSO work area appears once you have logged in.
This graphic shows the main window with an open measurement plan.
The CAD window contains the model of the workpiece.
Menu bar
Toolbar
Measurement plan
area with four tabs

Current index card of


the measurement
plan range
CAD window

CAD icons

The main window and its principal elements are described briefly below:

Menu bar
The menu bar contains the basic commands for working with CALYPSO.

Toolbar
Icons allow you to run frequently required commands quickly.

Note: Use the Toolbar Editor to configure the toolbar.

Measurement plan area


The measurement plan area comprises four tabs. The small squares
of the boxes on the tabs indicate the status of the tab.

1-6

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

The main window of CALYPSO

CMM

Here you find the CMM settings and the stylus system dialogs.

Measurement plan

This is where you quickly find the important dialogs for preparing the measurement plan.

Characteristics

This is where you define the characteristics in the order in


which they are carried out in the CNC run, and where you
edit them.

Features

This is where you create and edit lists of the features.

CAD window
The CAD window contains a three-dimensional model of the workpiece and each feature. The model is permanently updated when you
define new features or edit existing ones.

Note: The view requires a certain period of time to create itself. If you
do not require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
CAD View Hide CAD View.

CAD icons
The icons allow you to define features in the CAD window and to
work on their representation.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-7

Working with CALYPSO

Working with CALYPSO


Operating CALYPSO
You can work with CALYPSO the same way as with many Window software packages: using the keyboard and mouse. You can use a mouse
with 2 or 3 buttons and a mouse with a scroll wheel. You can also use
the scroll wheel of the mouse to scroll lists up and down.
Two- and three-button
mouse

The table shows which key combinations of a two-button mouse correspond to the keys of the three-button mouse.
Two-button
mouse

Three-button mouse

left button

corresponds to

left button

right button

corresponds to

middle button

Ctrl + right button

corresponds to

right button

Alt + right button

corresponds to

Alt + right button

NOTICE
The descriptions in this document are based on a two-button mouse.
Using a 3D mouse

For convenient rotation and displacement of three-dimensional objects in


the CAD window, you can also use a 3D mouse which is also called space
mouse.
For example, the SpaceNavigator by 3DConnexion has been tested and
released in combination with CALYPSO.
NOTICE
Note that the 3D mouse cannot be used instead of the normal mouse
but must be connected in addition.
For further information, please refer to the operating instructions of the
corresponding 3D mouse.

Routines

CALYPSO offers shortcuts [ 19] that enable you to call functions


quickly.
If you are unwilling or unable to use the keyboard, you can also make
entries using the mouse [ 110].
The context menu [ 110] is available in lists and in the CAD window
in addition to the menu items in the main menu and submenus.

Switching from one


measurement plan to the
other

If you want to switch between several open measurement plans, use


Window Meas. Plan Name to go to the desired measurement
plan.

1-8

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with CALYPSO

Clicking through lists


with open windows

In the lists of features and characteristics, you can open the definition
template for each item which defines the element. You can open additional windows in the definition template.
By selecting another element in the list, the open windows are updated.
It is not necessary to close the windows and to open them again for the
other element.
You can open the strategy window for a feature, for example,and then
view and edit the strategy for any other feature desired without having
to close the strategy window prior to this.
NOTICE
All changes made in the open windows are accepted and saved automatically.

Using shortcuts
If a shortcut is available for a menu item, it is shown next to the menu
item. You can use the following shortcuts:
Shortcut

Function

CTRL+N

Creating a new measurement plan

CTRL+O

Opening a measurement plan

CTRL+S

Saving the measurement plan

CTRL+F

Opening the Search window

CTRL+H

Opening the Replace window

CTRL+A

Select All

CTRL+Z

Undoing the last action

CTRL+C

Copying the selection to the clipboard

CTRL+X

Cutting the selection

CTRL+V

Pasting the selection from the clipboard

F2

Renaming the selected feature

DEL

Deleting the selected feature

ESC

Closing the box without applying the changes

RETURN

Closing the box and applying the changes

RIGHT

Opening the feature and characteristic window for the selected feature

CTRL+RIGHT

Opening the strategy window for the selected feature

ALT+RIGHT

Opening the evaluation for the selected feature

ALT+F4

Exiting CALYPSO

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-9

Working with CALYPSO

Entering alphanumeric characters with


the mouse
If you prefer using the mouse to enter text strings, CALYPSO can display
an input field with a keyboard.

Activating the typewriter


1 Select View Configuration.
2 In the Touch Screen index card in the Datum Features window, tick
the Use typewriter for inputs check box.

3 Click Close.
The Typewriter dialog box will appear on the screen whenever a
change is made to an input field.

Using context menus


CALYPSO has context menus that change depending on where you are
in the software.

Calling a context menu


1 Click with the right mouse button.
Note: Sometimes, the context menus offer commands that are
available nowhere else.
In the context menu of a feature, use the Details submenu to open the
Clearance Data, Evaluation (Feature) and Strategy windows.
Thus you edit a feature without opening the feature beforehand.

1-10

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with CALYPSO

Working with toolbars


Toolbar editor
Use the Toolbar Editor to customize the toolbar to fit your requirements.
This provides all the functions of the menus that have graphical icons, as
well as the additional icons of the toolbar.
NOTICE
In every configuration, the right end of the toolbar forms the icon group
for stylus administration. This stylus group cannot be deleted, and its
icons cannot be selected.
You can only add icons to the toolbar according to the space available
above the main window. As soon as the space has been used up, the
toolbar editor refuses to insert additional icons.
Toolbar per user

The toolbar is saved on a user-specific basis: After you have logged in,
CALYPSO automatically displays your toolbar.

Saving and loading toolbars

You can save and load toolbars. The toolbars are saved as *.config files.

Restoring the standard

The standard toolbar can be restored using Presetting and activated


for your main window using Apply.

Restructuring toolbars
Use the Toolbar Editor to specify which icons appear in what order in the
toolbar.

Creating and adopting a new toolbar


1 Select View Toolbar Editor.
In the upper window, the current working state of the toolbar is displayed. In the lower window, all the available icons are shown.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-11

Working with CALYPSO

2 Select the representation of the available icons:


All buttons: All icons appear successively in a list.
Sorted by menu: All the icons appear in a hierarchical list according
to menu items of the main menu.
3 Select the desired icon and, if appropriate, tick the check box for the
spaces to be inserted.
4 To append the icon at the right end of the toolbar (in front of the stylus
group): Click Insert at end.
- or To insert the icon in another position in the toolbar: In the upper window, select the icon after the desired position and click Insert before selection.
If there is no more space for the icon to be inserted, a message appears.
5 In order to remove an icon from the toolbar: Select it in the upper
window and click Remove button.
6 When the toolbar corresponds to your wishes: Save it using Save
as ... if you want to adopt it into your main window later.
- or Click Apply to let the toolbar take effect immediately.
7 Click OK to close the two dialog boxes.

1-12

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with CALYPSO

Operation with the keyboard


In both windows, you can operate all the functions with the keyboard
(corresponds to Windows standard). In particular, you can use ENTER to
insert the marked icon at the end of the toolbar; with CTRL+ENTER a space
is inserted before it.

Operation with the mouse


You can use the mouse to drag icons from the list in the lower window
into the toolbar in the upper window.
If you press CTRL at the same time, a space is inserted in front of the icon.
If you press SHIFT at the same time, a space is inserted behind the icon. If
you press both keys, spaces are inserted both in front of and behind the
icon.

Directory structures in CALYPSO


To meet the specifications of Microsoft Windows, the directory structures
of CALYPSO version 5.6 have been modified.
The data in CALYPSO is grouped in the following categories:

Program files
The files required for CALYPSO operation.

User data
The data you process during a CALYPSO session.

This data is stored in different directories. The program files are located
in the program directory and in the program data directory. The user data
is stored in the user directory.
NOTICE
The folder names depend on the language of the installed Windows version. If you install the English Windows version, the folders, too, will have
English designations.
To display the folder names in the address line in the installation language, a certain INI file must be available for each folder. If this file is
missing, this folder will be shown with the English designation.
The program files and the user data are located in the following directories in CALYPSO:

CALYPSO program directory


Windows XP: C:Programme\Zeiss\CALYPSO 5.6
Windows 7: C:\Programs (x86)\Zeiss\CALYPSO 5.6

CALYPSO user directory


Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Zeiss
\CALYPSO 5.6

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-13

Working with CALYPSO

Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6

CALYPSO program data directory


Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data
\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6
Windows 7: C:\ProgramData\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6

CALYPSO temporary data directory


To get access to the temporary data, enter the following in the address
line of the Windows Explorer:
Windows XP: %Temp%\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6
Windows 7: %Temp%\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6

Representation in the documentation


The names of the directories for program data and user data differ depending on whether Windows XP or Windows 7 is used. Therefore, placeholders in angle brackets are used in this documentation (<user directory>). For example, if the <user directory>\daten\excel_report\ directory
is indicated in the documentation, replace the placeholder <user directory> with the corresponding path in your Windows version to determine
the directory.
Example

If you use Windows XP on your computer, the file is stored in the C:

\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Zeiss\CALYPSO 5.6\daten


\excel_report\ directory in this example.
NOTICE
In the address line of the Windows Explorer, some folders are displayed
with a different designation than that shown in the navigation bar. For
example, the name of the folder Shared documents is shown with the
abbreviated name Documents in the address line.
However, the folder name shown in the navigation bar is important.

1-14

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Important terms in CALYPSO

Important terms in CALYPSO


Overview of important terms
It is a good idea to familiarize yourself with the most important basic terms
of CALYPSO so that you will be able to understand the following chapters
and make optimum use of the features offered by CALYPSO:

Features [ 115]

Characteristics [ 115]

Measurement plans [ 115]

Coordinate systems [ 116]

Clearance cuboid [ 116]

Features
There are two types of feature in CALYPSO:

Automatic feature recognition

A physical feature of a workpiece such as planes (lateral surfaces) and


cylinders (holes),etc.

A constructed feature that does not physically exist. Features of this


nature are needed for lines of intersection and cylinder axes, for example.

CALYPSO automatically recognizes most geometric elements as you


move the CMM stylus to probe them. The software's measurement algorithm is smart and takes into account the location of measurement
points as well as the probing direction. For example, if you take measurements at three points on a workpiece, CALYPSO will determine
whether the feature is a line, plane or circle.

Characteristics
An engineering drawing requirement. You use characteristics to specify
the dimensions, shape or location of features along with any applicable
nominal and tolerance values (e.g. the diameter of a hole, the perpendicularity of a hole to a plane and the distance between two planes).

Measurement plans
A measurement plan is the CALYPSO version of what you might be familiar with as a part program or control data. A measurement plan
contains the information the system needs to perform a measurement,
for example:

the characteristics with their tolerances

the features

the names of the stylus systems

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-15

Important terms in CALYPSO

the part alignment

the clearance planes around the workpiece

The measurement plan is displayed as three lists with icons that represent
the characteristics, the features and the other components to be evaluated.
There are two ways of generating measurement plans:

You can begin by using the CMM or a different way to define the
part's features that you want to measure and the characteristics to
evaluate for those features.

Or you can create the characteristics and then determine all the requisite features.

Once you have created a measurement plan, you can run it to automatically evaluate the characteristics on a specified workpiece.

Coordinate systems
For exact location definition and reliable performance of measurements,
precisely defined and convertible coordinate systems are essential.
Machine coordinate system

The machine coordinate system is the basis of travel commands and


measurements of the CMM. For concrete measurements on a workpiece,
however, this is impractical. A coordinate system referred to the workpiece must be used as the user-defined reference coordinate system of a
measurement plan.

Part Alignment

A part alignment is bound to the workpiece. For CALYPSO and the CMM,
it locates the position and alignment of the workpiece on the measuring
table. There may be several part alignments for a single workpiece.

Base System

One of the part alignments is defined as the base alignment for the
measurement plan. All other part alignments can be converted to this
base alignment.

Local feature alignment

In addition, you can also use the local feature alignment for each feature;
the zero point and alignment of this coordinate system are defined in a
specified manner by the feature.

Clearance planes
Six planes define a safe area around a part and any associated fixture
where the stylus can move without risk of collision. Outside the clearance
zone formed by these planes, the stylus can be moved without risk of
collision.
CALYPSO determines the part's clearance planes using only two positions.

1-16

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement plan-oriented measuring with CALYPSO

Measurement plan-oriented measuring with


CALYPSO
CALYPSO is used for quality assurance and is a powerful tool for measuring workpieces quickly and reliably. When you measure with CALYPSO,
you begin by creating a measurement plan containing all the requisite
tolerances and nominal data in the form of characteristics and all the
requisite geometric data in the form of features.

Working close by the machine and from a remote position


Your measurement determines how you define the characteristics and
features. You can adopt the values CALYPSO suggests as standard for
the nominal values and tolerances when probing the workpiece.
Alternatively, you can import data directly into the measurement plan
from a CAD file or enter the values manually. CALYPSO supports you
through these steps with automatic feature recognition and an extensive
library of tolerance tables.
CALYPSO Planner

These functions make it easy to generate a measurement plan away from


the machine. The CALYPSOPlanner makes it possible to work on a computer without a connected CMM in the Simulation operating mode.
NOTICE
To simulate measuring results, you can generate actual values that differ
from the nominal values due to translation and random dispersion. The
dispersion and translation are set under Extras Settings Measurement.

DME Interface

When using CALYPSO with the DME interface, you can control all CMMs
supporting the DME interface.
Common to all these procedures is the fact that the characteristics and
features, once defined, are grouped in the measurement plan. This means
that random samples taken from series production can be measured automatically without any need for manual probing.

Output of measuring results


The measuring results are output in standardized printouts. The measuring results can be exported and edited in other applications (e.g. statistics
programs).
This user guide takes you through the process step-by-step, all the way
up to the measured results. The diagram below illustrates the path we
are going to follow.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-17

Measurement plan-oriented measuring with CALYPSO

1-18

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Options and licenses

Options and licenses


Options
The CALYPSO program consists of a main program and additional purchase options for special purposes. The options offered are shown in the
Carl Zeiss product sheets.
The main program can be operated in three versions which differ with
regard to the control of the CMM:

Manuals for the options

CALYPSO MAN / CNC

CALYPSO Planner

CALYPSO DME Interface

This documentation has a similar structure.

The main documentation is intended for CALYPSO MAN / CNC and


CALYPSO Planner. You will receive an additional manual for the CALYPSO DME interface.

You will receive additional manuals for the purchased options.

Licensing
Licenses for options and measurement plans
Options

You can only use an option if the appropriate license is installed on your
system. The licenses installed on your computer are shown in CALYPSO
under Extras Settings Miscellaneous on the Licenses notebook page.

Protected measurement
plans

Furthermore, licenses for individual measurement plans created and protected by Carl Zeiss are also available. To run such a measurement plan,
the corresponding license is required.

Licensing using the Zeiss License Activation Utility


As of version 5.4, you can use the new licensing procedure of the Zeiss
License Activation Utility. It offers more options than the procedure of the
Zeiss License Manager. With the Zeiss License Activation Utility, the licenses are not so dependent on the hardware used and you can use licenses already in use in the network. The Zeiss License Activation Utility
can be installed if required and is described in a separate document.
Licensing using the Zeiss License Activation Utility offers the following
options:

PC-related license with hardware ID. In the event of major changes to


the hardware, you can repair the license yourself.

License for use on any PC with software protection device (dongle)

Licenses for free use of any number of licenses in a network.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-19

Options and licenses

You manage the licenses in the network on a server which distributes


them to clients. Activate the licenses in CALYPSO under Extras Settings Miscellaneous on the Licenses notebook
page. Once the maximum number of usable licenses in the network
has been reached, no new activation is possible.

Licensing using the Zeiss License Manager


If you do not want to use the new licensing procedure of the Zeiss License
Activation Utility, you must uninstall the Zeiss License Activation Utility.
Then the Zeiss License Manager will be activated automatically. It enables
you to determine your system's hardware ID and to install the licenses
personalized for your system via the hardware ID by Carl Zeiss.
Licensing via the Zeiss License Manager offers the following options:

PC-related license with hardware ID.


In the event of hardware changes, you must determine the new
modified hardware ID and request new personalized licenses.

License for use on any PC with software protection device (dongle)

Activating and deactivating licenses


For PC-related licenses or licenses protected by a software protection device (dongle), you can define the licenses to be used by CALYPSO. This
can be useful in the following case, for example:
You can use different CALYPSO installations on several CMMs. For example, on one CMM, CALYPSO is used with the VAST Navigator option
and on another CMM, CALYPSO is used without this option.
If you now create a measurement plan on the CMM with the VAST Navigator option and set optimum speed for a feature in this measurement
plan, CALYPSO cannot interpret this measurement plan correctly on the
other CMM (without VAST Navigator).
To avoid this, deactivate the licenses not required for the current measurement plan in the system configuration.

Activating and deactivating licenses


1 To do so, select Extras Settings Miscellaneous and open
the Licenses notebook page.
The appearance of the notebook page differs depending on whether
you use the Zeiss License Activation Utility or not (here without Zeiss
License Activation Utility).

1-20

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Options and licenses

2 Activate or deactivate the desired licenses with a click.


A check mark in front of the name of the license or in the Activated indicates that the license is activated.

Using licenses in the network


For freely applicable licenses in the network, you can define on each individual client PC which of the available licenses can be used by CALYPSO.

Activating licenses
1 To do so, select Extras Settings Miscellaneous and open
the Licenses notebook page.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-21

Options and licenses

2 Activate or deactivate the desired licenses.


If the maximum number of applicable licenses in the network is
reached, a message to this effect is issued. In this case, you can only
activate the license on this PC after having deactivated it on another
client PC.

1-22

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

User support for CALYPSO

User support for CALYPSO


Support in the submenu ?
CALYPSO helps you use the program in many different ways. In the ?
submenu, you will find help and support:
Menu item

Function

Bubble help

Displays programmed help texts when moving the mouse pointer


over an object.

Global Help

Opens the start page of the Online Help.


The chapter Using the Online Help [ 123] in the Online Help
describes the use of the Online Help system.

Operating In- Displays the Basic Operating Instructions for CALYPSO as a PDF file.
structions
You can print PDF files relating to the various topics from the Online
Help. Links to the PDF files can be found as PDF files under Operating
Instructions.
Tips and
Tricks

Shows notes and tips regarding practical questions relating to the


work with CALYPSO.

Release Info

Shows the release information regarding the new functions of the


current version of CALYPSO as a PDF file.

Product Information

Opens the product information of Carl Zeiss in the internet.

CZ IMT on the IMT on the Internet: Opens the start page of Carl Zeiss IMT on
the internet.
Internet
Academy Web: Opens the Academy Web Login window from
where you can access the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy.
About...

Shows the version numbers of the currently installed versions, service


packs and interfaces.
Furthermore, the Online Help contains videos with example instructions
that can be played from within the Online Help under Videos in the
Online Help [ 126].

Using the Online Help


The CALYPSO Online Help has an intuitive interface to take you right to
the information you need. It is a good idea to read the following notes
even so, because they will help you find the most efficient way of using
the CALYPSO Online Help system.

How to access the Online Help

Press the F1 key or click Help in the corresponding dialog.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-23

User support for CALYPSO

How to use this Online Help


You can use the Online Help in much the same way as a standard internet
page.

Navigator

The navigator enables you to go straight to the help pages of your choice.

Content
You can view a topic by double-clicking it in the table of contents.
Double-click a book icon to view the list of topics covered in the books
subsections.

Note: If the Navigator is not visible on the screen, click the Show
button at the top left of the help window.

Index
Double-click a term in the alphabetical index to view the help pages
that contain occurrences of the term.

Search
Use this function for full-text searching through the entire Online Help
system. You can use the ? and * wildcards.
Examples: ?D curve finds 2D curve and 3D curve. *stylus
finds spherical-tip stylus, disk stylus, conical stylus, etc.

Favorite places
You can insert bookmarks as shortcuts that will take you quickly back
to pages of your choice.

Display area

The help pages with text and illustrations appear in the display area.
The text contains hotlinks (words or phrases that are underscored and
color-highlighted). Clicking a hotlink takes you straight to another page
containing more information of relevance to the original subject.

1-24

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

User support for CALYPSO

There are arrow icons at the bottom of each help page:


Takes you to the top of the help page
Takes you to the previous help page (referring to
the table of contents).
Takes you to the next help page (referring to the
table of contents).
Routemap

The hotlinks to other help pages in the CALYPSO Online Help are grouped
in categories.
Basics and background information
Step-by-step instructions
Details and detailed information
Examples
A list of related topics is displayed when you click one of the Routemap
icons. Select one of the topics from the list in order to go straight to the
corresponding help page.

Buttons

The following buttons are arranged along the top edge of the Help window:
Shows the Navigator.
Hides the Navigator.
Returns to the previous page.
Returns to the page where you last clicked the
Back button.
Takes you to the start page in the Online Help.
Prints the current page (with or without all related
topics, according to your choice).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-25

User support for CALYPSO

Opens a menu with a wide range of options for


customizing the window.
Takes you to the internet pages of Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division.

Context menus

Context menus that you open by right-clicking provide access to additional functions.

Typographic conventions
The following typographic conventions are employed in the Online Help
system:
Highlight

Meaning

Bold

Dialog element on the screen Example: the OK


button
Term
Example: the DMIS export

Italic

A passage containing important information


Example: Click with the right mouse button...

Warnings and notes


Passages drawing the attention to risks of injury or damage to equipment
and passages containing important information have a color background:
You will find a detailed explanation of the safety instructions under Configuration of safety instructions.

Videos in the Online Help


Playing videos
You can find videos that you can play with a simple click for the following
topics in the text and as a summary in this table:
Video

Topic

File name

AutoSave

Saving measurement plan versions [ 64]

001_e_Autosave_/001_Autosave_e.htm

Inserting your own logo into Preparing printout header dathe printout header
ta [ 827]
Recalling (1): 3D line from
circle centers

Defining features by recall-

ing [ 497]

Recalling (2): one element in- Recalling a feature in its entireto a new coordinate system ty [ 4103]

1-26

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

003_e_Protkopf_aendern/
003_2_demo.htm
011_e_Rueckruf1/011_Rueckruf1.htm
012_e_Rueckruf2/012_e_Rueckruf2.htm

User support for CALYPSO

Video

Topic

File name

True Position (1): base align- Characteristic definition temment as reference, using the plates [ 517]
tangential element

015_e_DINPos1/015_e_DinPos1_CZLogo.htm

Setting filters and eliminating outliers

Evaluation parameters for features [ 542]

018_e_AusreisserFilter/
018_e_AusreisserFilter.htm

Stylus qualification: VAST


XXT with RDS

Qualification of styli [ 1125]

022_e_TasterEinmessen_XXT/
022_e_TasterEinmessen_XXT.htm

Angle schema for RDS quali- Automated creation of a stylus


fication with styli list
list for an RC system [ 1120]
Features: keep position

Duplicating features [ 48]

4_8Update_Movie12_e/4_8Update_Movie12.htm
4_8Update_Movie27_e/4_8Update_Movie18.htm

Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy


As a user of CALYPSO, you can access the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy
on the internet even if your CALYPSO computer does not have internet
connection.
Within the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy, Carl Zeiss provides you with
information on metrology, e.g. in the form of a glossary, teach media and
links to interesting pages.
However, it is possible to communicate with other users. Carl Zeiss provides you with the frame and you can discuss in forums all questions
regarding metrology and the use of the ZEISS programs.
Call

To access the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy:


1 Select ? CZ IMT on the Internet Academy Web Login.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-27

User support for CALYPSO

The Academy Web Login window shows the internet address and
the registration code. At the first call, the button is called Register
and then it is called Open.
2 Open the access page of Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy:
If your CALYPSO computer is equipped with internet access: Click
Register or Open.
If you want to open the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy on
another computer with internet access: Enter the indicated access
address (with registration code) in a Web Browser.
The access page of the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy opens.
Your registration code is already entered under Register User.
3 Use a login name and a password to log in for the first time to the
Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy.
From now on you can log in at any time to the Carl Zeiss Metrology
Academy by using your selected login name and your password and
use the offered options.

ZEISS training block


You can order the training block from Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology
Division, D-73446 Oberkochen.
Order no.: 600331-8052-000

1-28

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

User support for CALYPSO

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

1-29

Exiting CALYPSO

Exiting CALYPSO
Exiting CALYPSO
1 Select File Exit.
CALYPSO prompts you to save or reject the changes. CALYPSO then
closes the CALYPSO User Desk, logs you off in CALYPSO and displays the Log In window.

2 To leave a message for the following users, click the Memos button
and enter your message in the Memo Editor.

Note: If system login or automatic login is activated in the User notebook in the system settings, then this window is skipped when logging
in and logging off.
3 Click the Terminate button in the Log In window.
CALYPSO is terminated and all dialog boxes opened by CALYPSO (e.g.
Simulation, Events) are closed.

1-30

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Chapter

Working with the CAD window

.................................................................................................................

This chapter contains:


Basics about the CAD window ................................................................. 22
Buttons in the CAD window .................................................................... 27
Defining features in the CAD window .................................................... 210
Defining the display in the CAD window ................................................ 216
Displaying measuring results in the CAD window ................................... 227
Output of the CAD model ...................................................................... 232
Working with the CAD model ................................................................ 235
Working with the data of the CAD model .............................................. 244

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-1

Basics about the CAD window

Basics about the CAD window


Functions in the CAD window
The CAD window shows a CAD file containing the workpiece you want
to measure as well as other elements of the CMM.
NOTICE
The view requires a certain period of time to create itself. If you do not
require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
CAD View Hide CAD View.
Showing the CAD model

A three-dimensional model of the loaded CAD file is shown. You can


supplement the data and set the model to obtain a photo-realistic mapping of the workpiece.
A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. You can rotate,
move or enlarge the CAD model in the CAD window with the mouse.

Using a 3D mouse

For convenient rotation and displacement of the CAD model, you can also
use a 3D mouse, e.g. the SpaceNavigator by 3DConnexion.
NOTICE
Note that the 3D mouse cannot be used instead of the normal mouse
but must be connected in addition.

Interactive processing

If you use a measurement plan, the selected feature is shown on the CAD
model. You can process features and define new features.
The points to be probed are shown in the CAD window during the manual
CNC run.

Saving a CAD model

You can save the CAD model together with the measurement plan or
separately. If a workpiece is to be processed with different measurement
plans, you require less memory space by saving it separately.

Outputting the CAD


model as plot

You can include a saved CAD model in your evaluations and, for example,
output it as a plot (see in the Online Help under Outputting the CAD
window as a plot [ 233]).

Stylus simulation

If you have the Simulation option, you can display the stylus system in use
in the CAD window and trace the stylus movements during the CNC run
or its simulation (see Simulation (option) in the Online Help).

Showing the work area

You can define the representation of the CMM, the stylus changer rack
and the clamping device and save it as a work area. Depending on the
requirements of the corresponding measurement plan, you load the appropriate work area in addition.

CAD model in the CAD window


The CAD window shows a CAD file containing the workpiece you want
to measure as well as other elements of the CMM.

2-2

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Basics about the CAD window

A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. You can rotate,
move or enlarge the CAD model in the CAD window - depending on the
type of view required.
NOTICE
The CAD window is only for viewing a CAD file. By editing the displayed
CAD model, you do not edit the CAD data on which it is based.
Load settings

If you do not need the complete CAD model with all functions, you can
reduce the amount of data and thus the loading time.
Depending on the setting, only one view of the CAD model or only the
number of geometric elements is loaded:

Saving a CAD model separately

You can modify the view of the CAD model but you cannot extract
any features from it.

In the display of the geometric elements, the CAD model is not shown.

You can save the CAD model together with the measurement plan or
separately. Define the type of saving in the Settings (CAD) window which
you open via CAD Settings. The measurement plan remembers
where the CAD model is stored and loads it from there into the CAD
window.
By saving a measurement plan, the CAD model is saved either together
with the measurement plan or not at all, depending on the setting.
If you save the CAD model separately, you can use it for several measurement plans. It is not possible to process this external CAD model in
an individual measurement plan.
NOTICE
You can save only one CAD model per measurement plan.
If you want to edit a workpiece which consists of several CAD files, you
must load all files before you save them together.

Work area in the CAD window


You can define and save the representation of the CMM, the stylus
changer rack and the clamping device as a work area.
You then load the appropriate work area in addition for the open measurement plan.
NOTICE
By saving the measurement plan, the work area is not saved.
Defining the work area

The elements of the work area as well as the workpiece are defined by
means of CAD data.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities and activate the Hierarchy tab.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-3

Basics about the CAD window

2 Deselect the Part setting in the context menu of the CAD entity and
select Work Area.
Thus, the selected CAD entity is assigned to the work area.
Positioning CAD entities

The Position function allows you to compile your work area by means of
CAD entities and to position it on the base plate.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities and activate the Positioning tab.
2 Set the offset and rotation of the desired CAD entity.
The Position function executes the positioning of the entity.
Use Repeat to carry out again the previous transformation.

Saving the work area

A defined work area must be saved to use it again.


1 Select Planner Save Work Area.
The work area is saved in <user directory>\workarea\CAD-workarea.

Loading the work area

You can add a defined and saved work area to your measurement plan.
1 Select Planner Load Work Area.
2 Select the desired work area and click Load.

Working in the CAD window


The illustration shows the CAD window and buttons used to manipulate
the model of the workpiece.

2-4

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Basics about the CAD window

CAD window

CAD icons

Most of the functions can also be selected from the CAD menu.
Switch to Feature Menu /
Define feature

Use mouse to
Rotate CAD
image

Show selected Features


only

Zoom Out
Rotate -> by
increments
Rotate <by
increments

Show
solid model
Render

Show all Calypso Features


Show edges

Working away from the


machine

Use mouse to
Pan CAD image

Select
Rotation mode

Select view

Zoom In

Use Mouse
to Zoom

Fit to CAD
window

The CAD file of the workpiece allows you to work your way through the
preparations without using the CMM. You use the mouse to define features and their probing points.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-5

Basics about the CAD window

You can also generate an entire measurement plan on the basis of the
CAD model.

Simulating probing with the mouse


You can define probing points and entire features with the mouse in the
CAD window by clicking the requested CAD window.
Defining probing points
in the CAD window

You can add further probing points to existing features. In this case, the
definition template of the corresponding feature must be open. The
probing points will be added to the existing point list.

Defining features in the


CAD window

You can also define new features in a plane of the part alignment with
probing points. The list of features has to be open for this purpose. The
mouse takes over the function of the stylus with the full functionality of
automatic feature recognition (Defining features using automatic feature recognition [ 414]).

Defining a coordinate
system in the CAD window

You can define coordinate systems in the CAD window if the CAD model
contains local coordinate systems (Defining a coordinate system in the
CAD window [ 214]).

2-6

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Buttons in the CAD window

Buttons in the CAD window


The table describes the dialog elements available in the CAD window and
their functions.
You can access additional information by opening this section in the Online Help.
Dialog element

Function

Switch to
Feature
Menu / Select/
Define/Extract mode

The selection list includes the following options:


Select Already Extracted Features, see Selecting features in the CAD model [ 210] in the Online Help
Define points, see Defining probing points in the CAD
window [ 211] in the Online Help
Define a Space Point, see Defining a space
point [ 212] in the Online Help
Define Edge Point, see Defining an edge
point [ 213] in the Online Help
Define Circle on a Cylinder, see Defining a circle on a
cylinder [ 213] in the Online Help
Define Line on a Plane, see Defining a 2D
line [ 213] in the Online Help
Define Rectangle, see Defining a rectangle [ 214] in
the Online Help
Distance check, see Checking the wall thickness and wall

deviation [ 5110]
Select Alignment, see Defining a coordinate system in

the CAD window [ 214]


Extract Features, see Extracting features [ 215] in the
Online Help
Define/Select Geometry, see Defining/selecting the geometry [ 215] in the Online Help
Show selected Features only

Shows only the selected features.

Show all Calypso


Features

Shows all features.

Select a feature from the list or in the CAD model (see in the
Online Help under Displaying individual features or all features [ 210]).
Use this icon if only selected features were displayed or the solid
or rendered model was shown (see Displaying individual features or all features [ 210]).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-7

Buttons in the CAD window

Dialog element

Function

Show solid model

Shows a solid model if a CAD model is available. The solid


model can be rendered into a three-dimensional model with
illuminated sides by using the Render icon.
To return to a view of the features of the model, click Show
all Calypso Features (see Displaying the CAD model as
a solid [ 221]).

Show edges

Switches on or off the display of the edges in the CAD model.

Render

Toggles the view of the CAD model as a three-dimensional


solid with illuminated surfaces.
To create a solid model before rendering it, first click Show
solid model (see in the Online Help under Displaying the
CAD model as a solid [ 221]).

Use mouse to Pan


CAD image

Moves the model.


This icon remains enabled until you click either the Use
Mouse to Zoom or Use mouse to Rotate CAD image button (see in the Online Help under Moving the CAD
model in the CAD window [ 218]).

Use mouse to Rotate Rotates the model about the axis selected with the Select
CAD image
Rotation mode icon (see in the Online Help under Rotating the CAD model [ 219]).
Select Rotation
mode

Sets the rotational axis of the CAD model: X, Y, Z or free axis


(center of the CAD window).
To rotate the model, click the Use mouse to Rotate CAD
image button (see in the Online Help under Rotating the
CAD model [ 219]).

2-8

Rotate -> by increments

Rotates the CAD model one increment (according to the setting


in Settings (CAD)) clockwise about the selected axis (see in the
Online Help under Rotating the CAD model [ 219]). Default: 10 degrees.

Rotate <- by increments

Rotates the CAD model one increment (according to the setting


in Settings (CAD)) counterclockwise about the selected axis (see
in the Online Help under Rotating the CAD model [ 219]). Default: 10 degrees.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Buttons in the CAD window

Dialog element

Function

View

Changes the view of the model.


You can load a view or choose one of the following views: isometric (or three-dimensional), +X or -X (left or right side), +Y
or -Y (front or back), +Z or -Z (top or bottom).
The default view is isometric. Choosing the isometric view also
resets the model to the home position (see in the Online Help
under Changing or resetting the model perspective [ 219]).

Zoom Out

The view zooms out.


The factor can be set under Settings (CAD) (see in the Online
Help under Zooming the CAD model in or out [ 218]).

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.


The factor can be set under Settings (CAD) (see in the Online
Help under Zooming the CAD model in or out [ 218]).

Use Mouse to Zoom

Zooms in an area of the model.


This icon remains enabled until you click either the Use
mouse to Pan CAD image or Use mouse to Rotate
CAD image button (see in the Online Help under Zooming
the CAD model in or out [ 218]).

Fit to CAD window

Fits the CAD model into the CAD window (see in the Online
Help under Zooming the CAD model in or out [ 218]).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-9

Defining features in the CAD window

Defining features in the CAD window


Selecting and defining features in the
CAD window
If you work away from the machine or without the CMM, you can view
existing features, add probing points to them and define new features.
To do so, use the menu items for the selection and definition in the CAD
toolbar.

Selecting features in the CAD model


You can select individual features in the model view and have them displayed on their own (the rest of the model will be hidden), or you can
define characteristics for them.
1 Make sure that the features are shown in the measurement plan area.
2 For selection and definition, select Select Already Extracted Features from the selection list.
3 Click a line of the feature you want to define.
The color of the lines of this feature is changed. The feature is highlighted
in the list of features.

Displaying individual features or all


features
If many features are defined for a workpiece, you can have an individual
feature shown to you and the rest of the model hidden.
1 Select the feature.

2-10

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features in the CAD window

2 Click the Show selected Features only icon.


The selected feature is shown on its own. Click the icon again to
smooth the lines.
The illustrations show a model with a highlighted feature before and
after you have clicked on the Show selected Features only button.

3 To return to the view of the entire model, click Show all Calypso
Features.

Defining probing points in the CAD


window
This option is suitable if you wish to define features away from the machine or if the workpiece is not available to you when you are defining
the measurement plan.
You place one probing point after the other until CALYPSO recognizes
the feature.

Defining a feature with probing points


1 For selection and definition, select Define points from the selection
list.
2 Select the stylus (see Preparing the stylus system [ 315]).
3 Click the locations in the CAD window at which you would like to place
probing points.
A probing point will be produced each time you click on the model in
the CAD window.
By holding down the shift key at the same time, the probed point will
be projected onto the nominal height of the feature.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-11

Defining features in the CAD window

The automatic feature recognition allows CALYPSO to select automatically the correct definition template and to fill it with values.
4 Click OK to confirm the definition of the feature.
The new feature is included in the list of features.
As soon as you run the measurement plan automatically, the CMM will
move precisely to these probing points.

Defining a space point


This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Probing is also possible without the CMM.
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before you can
directly define the point in the CAD window with the mouse. The point
must lie on a feature shown in the CAD model.
1 For selection and definition, select Define a Space Point from the
selection list.
2 Click the location in the CAD window that is to define the point.

2-12

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features in the CAD window

The PointX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here the
serial number of the defined points in your measurement plan.

Defining an edge point


This function allows you to define an edge point for the edge measurement.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Edge Point from the selection list.
2 Click a plane on the CAD model.
The point closest to the selected point on the edge of the selected
plane is inserted as an edge point in the list of features. Any additional
parameters must be entered in the definition template of the feature.

Defining a circle
This option is particularly suitable for defining features away from the
machine.
Conditions:
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the circle in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Circle on a Cylinder
from the selection list.
2 Click the depiction of a cylindrical or tapered bore or an external cylinder in the CAD window.
The CircleX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here
the serial number of the defined circles in your measurement plan.

Defining a 2D line
This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Conditions:
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the 2D line in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Line on a Plane from
the selection list.
2 Draw a line while holding down the left mouse button.
The 2-D LineX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here
the serial number of the defined 2D lines in your measurement plan.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-13

Defining features in the CAD window

Defining a rectangle
This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Conditions:
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the rectangle in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Rectangle from the selection list.
2 Click the depiction of a rectangular body in the CAD window.
3 Select a point of the body.
- or If the specification of an individual point is not sufficient, select another
point.
The RectangleX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here the serial number of the defined rectangle in your measurement plan.

Defining features for the distance check


This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Conditions:
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can define two space points suitable for the distance check in
the CAD window with the mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Distance check from the selection list.
2 Click the location in the CAD model at which you would like to measure and check the distance.
This must be a suitable point at which the opposing surfaces are parallel (at least locally).
Two features, PointX and PointX+1, appear in the list of features. X represents here the serial number of the defined points in your measurement
plan.
You must create the appropriate characteristic in order to use these two
points for the distance check (see Checking the wall thickness and wall
deviation [ 5110]).

Defining a coordinate system in the CAD


window
This function makes it possible to extract a coordinate system from the
CAD model and transfer it to the measurement plan.

2-14

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features in the CAD window

1 For selection and definition, choose Select Alignment from the selection list.
The CAD model shows all its coordinate systems with offset and rotations.
2 Click the desired coordinate system.
A new coordinate system with already assigned special functions is
added to the measurement plan.

Extracting features
This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before you can
directly define the plane, cone and cylinder features in the CAD window
with the mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Extract Features from the selection list.
2 Make sure that features or characteristics are shown in the measurement plan area.
3 Click a plane, cone or cylinder of the model in the CAD window.
If you produced a plane, you will have to define a measurement strategy for this plane (see Measurement strategies for features [ 4160]).
The feature with the addition X after the name is included in the list of
features. X represents here the serial number of the defined features in
your measurement plan.

Defining/selecting the geometry


The Define/Select Geometry option is particularly suitable for defining features away from the machine. Combine the Select Already Extracted Features and Extract Features options so that you do not
have to switch between these options.
1 Make sure that the features are shown in the measurement plan area.
2 Select from the CAD buttons the Define/Select Geometry mode.
3 Click a plane, cone or cylinder of the model in the CAD window.
If the feature has already been created, it is called and selected in
the measurement plan area.
Otherwise, CALYPSO creates the feature. You can rename the feature if required (F2).
4 Define the measurement strategy for new features (see Measurement strategies for features [ 4160]).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-15

Defining the display in the CAD window

Defining the display in the CAD window


Defining the amount of data to be
loaded and the CAD view
Defining the amount of
data to be loaded

The CAD window is where you view a CAD file containing the workpiece
and the work area. With the load settings, you set the amount of CAD
data to be loaded [ 217]. If you do not need all the functions of the
CAD model, you can load the complete CAD model or only some of the
CAD data. This way the loading time is reduced considerably.

Hiding the view completely

If you do not require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
CAD View Hide CAD View.

Changing the view

CALYPSO is set up so that the CAD model always appears in a perspective


view. You can change the view or enlarge or reduce the model size.

Saving the view

A CAD model can be saved [ 223] together with your defining


parameters and restored at any time. The CAD model must be saved before you can output this CAD model as a plot [ 233].

Defining the view of the CAD model


There are several settings possible for the display of the CAD model in
the CAD window:
1 Select CAD CAD Model Control <menu item>.
Menu item

Function

Show Silhouette

Displays the silhouettes of the features.


Example: A cylinder is represented by two circular sections. If the features are displayed with silhouette, you can see form lines connecting
these two circles.

Note: With large models, displaying silhouettes leads to long computing times and is switched off when loading a CAD model.
Points

Shows the points defined in the CAD model and selected in the list
of features.

Always display points

Permanently shows all points defined in the CAD model.

Show PMIs from CAD model (Only for CAD models with extractable form and location data):
Switches the display of the form and location icons on and off.
CT Point Cloud

Shows the loaded CT point cloud (Metrotomography option).

CAD Model

Shows the CAD model. (Default: enabled).

Display Clearance Plane

Shows the dimensions of the clearance planes in shaded form over


the CAD model.

Highlight selected Feature(s) Shows the features selected in the list of features (default: enabled).

2-16

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining the display in the CAD window

Menu item

Function

View faces from either side

Shows also the opposite side of faces.


Activate this function if the normals show the wrong direction to
ensure that all faces are externally visible.

Hide CAD View

Hides the CAD view.

Show Model Coordinates

The coordinates of the point of the model surface on which the


mouse pointer is positioned are displayed in the upper left corner of
the CAD window.

Show Probe Object

(Manual measurement) Shows a stylus or a reflector at the stylus position.

Display Form and Location

(Only for CAD models with extractable form and location data):
Shows the extracted form and location data in the form of small
banners located next to the features.

Comment

Opens the Show Text dialog box where you determine the contents
and representation of an additional text line. When outputting the
CAD view as a plot, this text is also output.
NOTICE
Most of these settings can also be made via CAD Settings in the
Settings (CAD) window under Model Display.

Controlling the loading of the CAD


model
If you do not need the complete CAD model with all functions, you can
reduce the amount of data and thus the loading time.
1 Select File CAD Load settings....
2 Select the desired setting in the Load Settings window.
Model: the entire CAD model is loaded. You can use all functions
of the CAD model.

Note: This is the only option which makes it possible to edit or extend
the measurement plan!
No Model: only the features of the CAD model are loaded. Only
individual, unlinked features are shown in the CAD window.
Model View: only one view of the CAD model is loaded. You can
rotate, move or enlarge the view of the CAD model. You cannot
extract any features.
Only surfaces used: only the features of the surfaces used are
loaded. Only individual, unlinked surfaces are shown in the CAD
window.
3 Click Close to save the setting.
The settings will take effect the next time you load a CAD model.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-17

Defining the display in the CAD window

Moving the CAD model in the CAD


window
With the Use mouse to Pan CAD image function, you can move the
CAD model in the CAD window. This is the default function that remains
active until you click Zoom in or Rotate.
1 Click the Use mouse to Pan CAD image icon.
2 Drag the model to the desired position.

Zooming the CAD model in or out


CALYPSO offers various options to zoom the CAD model view in and out.
You can zoom the CAD model in and out at any time.

Continuously zooming in and out


1 Position the mouse in the CAD window.
2 When using a mouse with wheel, rotate the wheel of the mouse.
- or With a three-button mouse, hold down the middle mouse button and
drag the mouse over the model.
With a two-button mouse, hold down the right mouse button together with the Ctrl key and drag the mouse over the model.
To zoom out, drag the mouse away from the model.
To zoom in, drag the mouse towards the model.
The CAD model is zoomed in or out in microsteps.
For incremental zooming in and out, you must set the increments for
zooming out/in in CAD Settings under Handling.

Incrementally zooming in and out

1 Click the Zoom in or Zoom out icon.


With every mouse click, the CAD model is zoomed out/in by the preset
factor.

Displaying a relevant portion on the entire screen


1 Click the Use mouse to Zoom icon.
A magnifier is displayed as mouse pointer.
2 Drag a rectangle over the desired area.
The size of the model is adjusted so that it is completely visible in the
CAD window.

2-18

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining the display in the CAD window

This mode remains active until you switch to the Use mouse to Pan
CAD image or Rotate mode.

Showing the CAD model on the entire screen


1 Click the Fit icon.

Changing or resetting the model


perspective
You can load a saved CAD view or define the direction of the view.

Changing the view of the CAD model


1 Select the desired view in the View selection list.
You have a choice of the following settings:
Load View
Isometric (three-dimensional)
+X or -X (from left or right)
+Y or -Y (from the front or rear)
+Z or -Z (from the bottom or top)

1 Click View and select Isometric (three-dimensional view) to reset


the view.

Rotating the CAD model


You can rotate the CAD model about a selected axis or freely about any
rotation point.
The default setting is free rotation and the rotation point in the center
of the CAD window. You can change the rotation point if no feature is
open.
NOTICE
The step width for rotating the CAD model must be set in Settings (CAD)
under Handling.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-19

Defining the display in the CAD window

Rotating the model freely in space


1 With a three-button mouse: Hold down the right mouse button and
move the mouse.
- or With a two-button mouse: Hold down the right mouse button together with the ALT key and move the mouse.
Defining the rotation
point

You determine the rotation point via the context menu or the menu:

Determining the rotation point via the context menu


1 Select Define rotation point On in the context menu of the CAD
window.
2 Click the point that is to represent the new rotation point.

Determining the rotation point via the menu


1 Select CAD View Define Rotation Point.
2 Click the point in the CAD window that is to represent the new rotation point.

Resetting the rotation point to the center of the CAD


window
1 Click the Fit icon.

Defining the rotational axis


1 Select the desired rotational axis in the Select Rotation mode selection list.

Rotating the model by any angle about the axis


1 Click the Use mouse to Rotate CAD image icon.
The mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a hand.
2 Drag the mouse in the desired direction in the CAD window.

Note: The Use mouse to Rotate CAD image icon remains active
until you click Use mouse to Pan CAD image or Use Mouse to
Zoom.

Rotating the model clockwise or counterclockwise


about the axis

2-20

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining the display in the CAD window

1 Click the icon with the desired direction of rotation.


Each time you click the icon, the CAD model is rotated 10 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise about the selected axis.

Displaying the CAD model as a solid


You can display a model as a three-dimensional image with illuminated
side faces if a CAD model is loaded:
1 Click the Render icon.
Click Render again to return to the line drawing.

Splitting the CAD window into several


areas
You can split the CAD window into four areas. In each of these areas, the
CAD model is shown from a different perspective. Thus you maintain your
overview, e.g. if the workpiece is very complex.

Splitting the CAD window


1 Select CAD View Split View.
The window is then split as follows:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-21

Defining the display in the CAD window

The upper right area is your CAD work area. The three smaller areas each
show the CAD model from a different axis direction.

Changing the split


1 Click the axis to be moved and zoom the corresponding windows in
or out.

Undoing the split


1 Remove the check mark in front of Split View.

2-22

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining the display in the CAD window

Saving and loading the CAD view


You can save the current view of the CAD model under a separate name.
This function allows you to toggle between various CAD views quickly.
Example: The CAD window displays a rendered view of your model (seen
in +X direction) that you require for practice. Another view shows a wire
frame model, with visible feature names, from a particular perspective.
Save both views under different names to toggle from one view to the
other quickly.
NOTICE
The CAD model must be saved under a name before it can be output as
a plot.

Saving the CAD view


1 Make sure that the CAD model is displayed in the CAD window as you
would like to save it.
2 Select CAD View Save View.
3 Enter a name for the view, e.g. new_view.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-23

Defining the display in the CAD window

Liste of saved CAD


views

Entry field for new


names

A default view is automatically saved under model for each measurement plan. You will see this view each time a measurement plan is
loaded.
4 Confirm the input with Enter.
5 Click OK.

Loading a CAD view


1 Select CAD View Load View.
2 Select the desired view.
3 Click OK.
If you do not see anything at first, click the Show all Calypso Features icon.

Deleting a CAD view


1 Select CAD View Load View.
2 Select the name of the view you would like to delete.

2-24

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining the display in the CAD window

3 In the context menu, select Delete.

Deleting a CAD model in the CAD


window
You can delete the CAD model displayed in the CAD window.
1 Select CAD View Delete.

Redrawing the CAD model


Displaying CAD models requires a large amount of processing power. It
is possible that an action will not be performed or shown in the CAD
window.
Redrawing the CAD model will cause the computer to regenerate the
CAD model from the beginning. This function causes actions that might
have become stuck in the computer to be executed.
1 Select CAD View Redraw CAD Model.

Saving the CAD view settings


You can change the view of the CAD window and set further parameters
for the CAD window in the Settings window.

Display of the view

Display of boundary curves

Display of grid lines

Use of colors

Display of (scanning) technologies used

Display of texts

Display of 2D and/or 3D objects

Zoom factor and rotation angle

Storage location for the CAD model

Conversion settings

Extraction settings

Outputting and printing the CAD views

Displaying the CAD program window

Changing settings
1 Select CAD Settings.
2 Select in the tree view in the Settings (CAD) window to the left the
desired branch to open the tab.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-25

Defining the display in the CAD window

3 Make the changes in the right-hand area.


4 If necessary, define your changes as defaults for new measurement
plans.
5 Click OK.

2-26

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Displaying measuring results in the CAD window

Displaying measuring results in the CAD


window
Display options in the CAD window
As soon as characteristics have been evaluated and calculated for a measurement plan, you can display the measuring results in the CAD window.
You can display the measured actual points or banners with the result
data of the characteristics.
The illustration shows a CAD window containing both the actual points
of a feature (with arrows) and all data from the associated characteristic.

Make the settings in the Results Presentation window which you


open via CAD Evaluation.
See also:

Displaying actual points [ 228]

Displaying characteristics [ 228]

Displaying features [ 228]

Modifying a representation [ 229]

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-27

Displaying measuring results in the CAD window

Displaying actual points


As soon as a feature or characteristic has been measured and evaluated,
you can display the actual points in the CAD window.

Show Actual Points


1 Select CAD Evaluation.
2 Make the settings on the Actuals tab in the Results Presentation window.
3 Close the window.
The CAD model will be updated as soon as you highlight the characteristic
of a feature. If this does not happen, there might not be any actual points
yet.

Displaying characteristics
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can display all relevant
data of the characteristic (e.g. tolerances or deviation) in the CAD window.
1 Select CAD Evaluation.
2 Select on the Characteristics index card in the Results Presentation window the data to be displayed.
3 Close the window.
The CAD model will be updated as soon as you highlight the characteristic
of a feature. If not, the reason might be that no measuring results have
been calculated yet.

Displaying features
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can display all relevant
data of the corresponding characteristic (e.g. tolerances or deviation) in
the CAD window.

Displaying the results of a feature


1 Select CAD Evaluation.
2 Select on the Features tab in the Results Presentation window
the data to be displayed.
3 Close the window.
The CAD model will be updated as soon as you highlight the characteristic
of a feature. If not, the reason might be that no measuring results have
been calculated yet.

2-28

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Displaying measuring results in the CAD window

Modifying a representation
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can modify the measured data, e.g. invert the deviations or load and use the corrections.

Modifying results
1 Select CAD Evaluation.
2 Select on the Modification tab in the Results Presentation window the data to be modified and saved.
3 Close the window.

Banners in the CAD window


You can show the measuring values and measuring results on the workpiece in the CAD window by means of banners. You can define the orientation, division, contents and representation of these banners and save
them with the CAD view.
General definitions

Make the general definitions for the CAD view and the banners on the
three tabs Actuals, Characteristics and Features in the Results
Presentation window. These settings can be saved as own CAD view.
The banners are displayed as soon as you have selected measurement
plan features in the measurement plan area or clicked them in the CAD
window.
You can define individually the orientation, division, contents and representation of the banners in the CAD window. To do so, use the context
menu of the banners.

Defining the contents of the banners in the CAD window


1 Select one or more banners using the multiple selection method if
necessary.
2 Select Properties from the context menu of any banner.
The CAD View Parameters dialog box appears on the screen.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-29

Displaying measuring results in the CAD window

3 Enter the contents of the banners under Banner.


4 Define the representation of the banners under View.
These changes have an immediate effect on the selected banners.
5 Click Apply to all to accept the changes for all banners.
NOTICE
By clicking Apply to all, the changes are entered immediately in the
Results Presentation window.
With CAD View Save View or with Save view in the Results
Presentation window, you can save and reload them.

Defining the positions and orientation of the banners


in the CAD window
1 To define the positions of the banners, select in the context menu of
any banner the Positioning function and one of the submenu items.
Set to feature position
Set to border
2 To define the orientation of the banners, select in the context menu
of any banner the Alignment function and one of the submenu
items.
Left / Middle / Right
Top / Center / Bottom
3 To define the spacing of the banners, select in the context menu of
any banner the Spacing function and one of the submenu items.
Equal horizontal spacing
Increase /Decrease horizontal spacing

2-30

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Displaying measuring results in the CAD window

Remove horizontal spacing


Equal vertical spacing
Increase /Decrease vertical spacing
Remove vertical spacing
NOTICE
With CAD View Save View or with Save view in the Results
Presentation window, you can save and reload the changes made.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-31

Output of the CAD model

Output of the CAD model


Output methods
Current view

You can print the CAD model in the current view [ 232]. Only the
currently visible area will be printed.

Saved views

You can define and save different representations in the CAD window
(zoom factor, scope of model, rotation angle, offset, magnification factor
etc.) as your own views. You can output this drawn model with spatial
effect in the CNC run.

Output via the CAD Representation utility [ 232]


The CAD Presentation utility allows you to output the set CAD
view in the selected format on the selected media in the CNC run.

Output as a plot in the characteristic [ 233]


You activate the output of the CAD window as a plot in exactly the
same way as the form plot using the Graphic icon in the definition
template of a characteristic.

Printing the CAD model


You can print the CAD model in the current view. Only the currently visible
area will be printed.
1 Select CAD View Print CAD Model.
Printing will start as soon as you have made a selection.

Outputting the CAD window


You can output any view of the CAD window in the CNC run or directly.
To do so, a CAD Presentation utility must be added to the measurement
plan.
1 Use CAD CAD Presentation to add a CAD-Presentation utility to the list of characteristics.
Alternatively, you can also click the icon in the Results Presentation window to add a CAD-Presentation utility in which the current CAD view is already preset.
2 Double click to open the definition template for the CAD presentation.

2-32

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Output of the CAD model

3 Define the output method (screen, printer).


4 Select the format of the output (portrait or landscape) by means of a
format file.
5 Select from the list the CAD view to be represented.
6 Click Plot to output the presentation immediately if necessary.
The selected CAD view is output on the selected media (screen, printer)
during the CNC run.

Outputting the CAD window as a plot


You can freeze the model in the CAD window and output it as a plot.
1 Create the desired model in the CAD window.
2 Select CAD Evaluation and define the result presentation in the
CAD window in the Results Presentation window.
3 Save the associated parameters with CAD View Save View.
Calypso saves the workpiece name,scope of the model, offset, rotation angle, zoom factor and magnification factor etc.
4 Activate the Graphic check box in the definition template of the
characteristic.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-33

Output of the CAD model

5 Click Graphic in the definition template of the characteristic and select the name of the CAD model as the name of the graphic file.
Once the measurement plan has been completed, the set CAD model will
be output as a plot during evaluation of the respective characteristic.

2-34

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the CAD model

Working with the CAD model


Ways of working with the CAD model
You can work with the CAD model as described below:

You can change the geometric position of the model with respect
to the base alignment [ 235].

You can modify the CAD model [ 235], i.e. transform, position
or mirror the model.

You can create features from the CAD model [ 238], i.e. create
new or modified CAD entities and features.

Transforming the CAD model


You can transform the CAD model, i.e. shift and rotate it in the base
alignment. This is necessary if the position of the CAD model does not
coincide with the selected base alignment.
1 Select CAD Modification CAD Model Transformation.
The CAD Model Transformation window is opened.
2 If you want to shift the CAD model, enter the coordinates of the
translation vector in the Translation group.
3 If you want to rotate the CAD model, select the space axis in the
Rotation group and enter the rotation angle.
4 Click Apply.

Modifying the CAD model


Modify CAD Model window
You work with the parts and elements of the CAD model in the Modify
CAD Model window.
On the Hierarchy index card, the hierarchically ordered structural view
of all elements (bodies and surfaces) of the CAD model is helpful.
In this window, you can

Edit CAD entities (one or several entities) [ 236],

Edit the hierarchy of the CAD model [ 236],

Edit point clouds [ 236],

Edit solid bodies [ 237],

Mirror the entire CAD model [ 238]

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-35

Working with the CAD model

Editing CAD entities


Editing the CAD model
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities.
The Modify CAD Model window is opened.
2 Select the CAD entity you want to edit in the CAD window or on the
Hierarchy tab (multiple selection with the CTRL key).
3 Activate the Edit tab.
The symbols whose actions can be applied to the entity are activated
on the tab.
You can delete the entities or reverse their normal vectors.
4 Click the corresponding symbol.
5 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.

Editing the hierarchy


You can create new groups of features and hide groups or features in the
CAD model. Thus you can view the CAD model, if necessary, and show
structures that are usually not visible.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities.
2 Activate the Hierarchy tab.
3 To add a group: Select Add Group in the context menu.
A new group (desk) is added to the hierarchy.
4 To define the group: Select Define Group in the context menu.
In the Desk Definition window, you can add CAD entities to the
group by clicking them in the CAD window or by extracting them from
the CAD model.
5 To hide a feature: Select the desired feature in the structure tree and
select Hide Feature in the context menu.
The feature will not be shown in the CAD window.
6 To show a feature again: Select the desired feature in the structure
tree and select Show Feature again in the context menu.
The feature will be shown again in the CAD window.
7 To remove a feature from the CAD model: Select the desired feature
in the structure tree and select Delete in the context menu.
The feature is removed from the CAD model.
8 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.

Editing a point cloud

2-36

You can edit point clouds loaded via files.


61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the CAD model

1 Select CAD Creating features.


2 Activate the Hierarchy tab in the Create feature window.
3 Click the point cloud in the tree view and select Edit in the context
menu.

4 Make your changes in the Edit window.


5 Click Close.

Editing solid bodies in the CAD model


You can edit solid bodies.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities.
The Modify CAD Model window is opened.
2 Select the entity you want to edit in the CAD window or on the Hierarchy tab (multiple selection with the CTRL key).
3 Activate the Edit body tab.
The symbols whose actions can be applied to the entity are activated
on the tab.
You can delete the entity or entities or reverse the normal vectors
of all surfaces.
You can (logically) combine several solid bodies.
You can name the solid body.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-37

Working with the CAD model

You can choose the color of the solid body.


4 Click the corresponding symbol.
5 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.

Mirroring a CAD model


You can mirror the CAD model.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities.
2 Activate the Edit body tab in the Modify CAD Model window.
3 Under Mirror on plane, select the coordinate plane of the base
alignment on which the model is to be mirrored.
Next to it on the left-hand side, a schematic representation of the mirroring type is shown.
4 Click Apply.
The entire CAD model is mirrored on the selected plane.
5 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.

Creating features on the CAD model


The Create feature window appears on the
screen.
You can create new CAD entities using the existing entities in the Create
feature window. You can create planes, cylinders, cones, circles, ellipses, slots, rectangles, lines, curves, points and point grids.
The new entities appear in the list of features and as new CAD entities in
the CAD model.
Various options are available on three index cards:

Create CAD entities from existing CAD entities [ 238],

Create a curve with planar section [ 241] or

Create a 3D curve by means of an intersection with a cylinder [ 242],

Create new elements from a space-point grid [ 240].

Creating new entities in the CAD model


1 Select CAD Creating features.
The Create feature window will open.
2 Select the CAD entity you want to edit in the CAD window or on the
Hierarchy tab (multiple selection with the CTRL key).
3 Activate the Creation tab.

2-38

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the CAD model

Desired element

The symbols whose actions can be applied to the entity are activated
on the tab.
Procedure
Prerequisites/result

Plane, Cylinder,
Cone

The corresponding surface element


Click the Geometry icon and
then the icon for plane, cylinder or appears in the measurement plan.
cone.

Circle

Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with one or more edges
must be highlighted (e.g. a line).
necessary, enter an Offset.
If full circle has been activated, the
full circle will also be created when
clicking a circular arc.

Ellipse

Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with one or more edges
must be highlighted (e.g. a line).
necessary, enter an Offset.

Slot

Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with at least four edges
must be highlighted.
necessary, enter an Offset.

Rectangle

Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with four edges must be
highlighted.
necessary, enter an Offset.

Line

Click the symbol on the left.

An edge must be marked.

Multiple creation

Click the symbol on the left.

Creates all selected or marked elements in one cycle.

Curve

Click the Curve symbol and enter The vector normal to the plane of
the desired number of points under intersection is automatically calculated for each point.
Points.
By activating Per Segment, each
segment has the same number of
points.

Point

Click the CAD model. The computed coordinates appear in the input
fields. You can correct the coordinates subsequently or enter approximate values from the outset.

The entered coordinates are projected orthogonally onto the CAD


surface. The position of the point
feature represents the perpendicular base point.

Select the point mode. Click the


Point symbol.

Simultaneously, the normal for the


point feature is computed from the
CAD model.

4 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.

Generating a new 3D curve from an intersection


1 Select CAD Creating features.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-39

Working with the CAD model

The Create feature window will open.


2 Select the CAD entity you want to edit in the CAD window or on the
Hierarchy tab (multiple selection with the ALT key).
Use the mouse to draw a rectangle and mark all entities in the rectangle.
3 Activate the Points tab.
4 Select the Curve option under Feature to be created and confirm
with OK.
The new 3D curve is created and added to the list of features.

Creating a space-point grid in the CAD model


You can create space points in a defined grid.
1 Select CAD Creating features.
The Create feature window will open.
2 In the CAD model or on the Hierarchy index card, highlight the surface on which you want to create space points.
3 Activate the Points tab.

4 Select the type of feature you want to create from the points.

2-40

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the CAD model

5 Enter parameters for creating the space-point grid.


6 Click Create.
The new space points are shown in the CAD model.
7 If you would like to adjust the parameters based on the display: Click
Delete and repeat the steps after step 4.
8 To add the displayed space points to the list of features: Click Create
Feature.
The feature selected above is created from the space points in the CAD
model.
9 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.

Creating a curve in the CAD window using the


unknown cut method
You can create a curve in the CAD window using an intersection with the
CAD model. The curve is added to the list of features as a 3D curve.
1 Select CAD Creating features.
2 Activate the Intersection tab in the Create feature window.
3 Click Plane and define the intersecting surface by specifying the center, normal vector and expansion.
The intersecting surface is symmetrical about the center.
4 Click Intersection.
As an intermediate step, CALYPSO creates the actual intersection contour as a CAD entity.
5 Activate the Hierarchy tab and highlight the intersection contour.
6 Activate the Creation tab.
The symbols whose actions can be applied to the intersection curve
are now activated on the index card.
7 Plane, cylinder, cone: Click the Geometry symbol and on one of the
symbols for plane, cylinder or cone to create the corresponding surface
element.
8 Circle, ellipse, slot, rectangle, line: Click one of the symbols on the left
and, if necessary, enter an Offset to create the corresponding feature.
Circle: A feature with one or more edges must be highlighted (e.g.
a line).
Ellipse: A feature with one or more edges must be highlighted (e.g.
a line).
Slot: A feature with at least four edges must be highlighted.
Rectangle: A feature with four edges must be highlighted.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-41

Working with the CAD model

Line: An edge must be marked.


9 Curve: Click the Curve symbol.
The curve is inserted into the measurement plan with the number of
points specified under Points.
The vector normal to the CAD surface is automatically calculated for
each point.
103D Curve: Click the Curve symbol.
The curve's vectors from the CAD surface you clicked will be adopted
in the measurement plan with the number of points specified under
Points.
The vector normal to the plane of intersection is automatically calculated for each point.
The 3D curve is added to the list of CAD entities and to the list of
features.
11Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.

Creating a curve in the CAD window by means


of an intersection with a cylinder
You can create a curve in the CAD window by intersecting a feature with
a cylinder. The curve is added to the list of features as a 3D curve.
1 Select CAD Creating features.
2 Activate the Intersection tab in the Create feature window.
3 Click Cylinder and define the lateral surface by specifying the center,
axis vector (under Normal Vector) and expansion (height and diameter).
The intersecting surface is symmetrical about the center.
4 Click Intersection.
As an intermediate step, CALYPSO creates the actual intersection contour as a CAD entity.
5 Activate the Hierarchy tab and highlight the intersection contour.
6 Activate the Creation tab.
The symbols whose actions can be applied to the intersection curve
are activated on the index card.
7 Circle, ellipse, slot, rectangle, line: Click one of the symbols on the left
and, if necessary, enter an Offset to create the corresponding feature.
Circle: A feature with one or more edges must be highlighted (e.g.
a line).
Ellipse: A feature with one or more edges must be highlighted (e.g.
a line).

2-42

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the CAD model

Slot: A feature with at least four edges must be highlighted.


Rectangle: A feature with four edges must be highlighted.
Line: An edge must be marked.
8 3D Curve: Click the Curve symbol.
The curve's vectors from the CAD surface you clicked will be adopted
in the measurement plan with the number of points specified under
Points.
The vector normal to the plane of intersection is automatically calculated for each point.
The 3D curve is added to the list of CAD entities and to the list of
features.
9 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-43

Working with the data of the CAD model

Working with the data of the CAD model


CAD model and CAD file
The CAD model contains a large volume of data all features and their
coordinates are stored in the model.
You can save this data in a CAD file [ 247], and reload and edit this
data.
You can import CAD files to CALYPSO and use them to filter out
features for a measurement plan [ 244].
As this process takes a longer time in the case of complex CAD models,
it is possible in this case to convert CAD files in the background in
advance [ 416]. Converted files can be loaded more quickly.

Creating a new measurement plan from


a CAD file
If a workpiece is available in the form of a CAD file, you can define a
complete, automatically executable measurement plan in the CAD window without the need to use the CMM.
As the tasks involved in this process are very diverse, only the general
procedure will be described below. However, the individual steps include
references to more detailed information.
1 Open a new measurement plan [ 33].
2 Extract the features from the CAD file [ 415].
3 (Only with Catia V5, Unigraphics and ProE) If the CAD file also contains
information on form, location and size:
Extract the information on form and location and use the information to generate characteristics [ 59].
4 Create a new base alignment [ 324].
5 Create the clearance planes [ 360] if the measurement plan is
to be executed automatically.
Bear in mind that some of the features do not yet possess specific probing
points because they were adopted from the CAD file. The section Defining probing points in the CAD window [ 211] describes how to define probing points in the CAD window.
If you want to set the same technology for all features of a certain type
(2D line, plane, circle, cylinder or cone), select CAD Filter Set
Default Measurement Strategy and make the necessary settings
in the Strategy defaults window.

2-44

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the data of the CAD model

Updating a loaded CAD model


You have created a measurement plan from a CAD file and you now have
a newer version of the CAD data. In the case of slight changes or additions, you can import the CAD file as supplement for the existing CAD
model and accept or ignore the changes.
Conditions:
The strategy is defined for all features to be measured in the measurement plan.
1 Open the measurement plan.
2 Select CAD CAD File Load.
3 Select in the Open CAD File window the new CAD model belonging
to the measurement plan.
4 Select CAD CAD File CAD Model Comparison.
5 Enter in the CAD Modification List a distance in mm to be used
as tolerance criterion.

6 Click Comparison.

CALYPSO compares the entities of the new CAD model with the probing points of the features in the measurement plan. The features,
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-45

Working with the data of the CAD model

whose probing points are separated from the corresponding CAD entity less than the specified distance, are shown in the list under Features inside tolerance.
Under Features outside tolerance, all features are shown that
are outside the specified distance to a CAD entity.
7 Click the desired entity in the modification list.
In the CAD window, the feature from the measurement plan to which
the CAD entity marked in the list can be adapted is highlighted in color
and the CAD model is rotated so that the feature is visible. If you ticked
the Show strategy when selecting Feature check box under
Strategy in the Settings (CAD) window, then the strategy of the
feature is also highlighted in color.
Note: Double-click the line to open the definition template for the
feature. You can compare the element's plan values with the actually
measured values. Similarly, the next surface is highlighted in the CAD
window. This ensures that CALYPSO has recognized the right feature.
8 To adapt the feature to the new data of the corresponding CAD entity,
click with the mouse the feature in the CAD window.
- or Mark in the modification list those lines that you want to transfer
to the measurement plan and click Apply.
The adapted feature is shown in italics in the modification list and
moved to the end of the list Features inside tolerance.
If the feature could not be adapted, it is shown in italics in the modification list and moved to the end of the list Features outside tolerance.
9 Click Close to terminate the comparison.
10Save the measurement plan.

Remedying problems in the CAD model


display
If your CAD model cannot be displayed in rendered form, it was not possible to import all entities of the model.
The CAD model will have to be revised in this case. During revision, all
CAD source files are once again converted to the ACIS format.
1 Select CAD CAD File Automatic Healing.
2 Activate the check boxes for the desired healing steps in the Healer
Settings window.

2-46

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the data of the CAD model

Simplification: Free form surfaces are converted to simpler geometric objects (cones, spheres, cylinder, planes). You can modify
the tolerance.
Stitching: Free surfaces, i.e. surfaces that do not belong to bodies, are joined to bodies.
Build Geometry: The entire CAD model is healed geometrically.
Errors and inconsistencies are corrected. This includes the Simplification and Stitching functions.

Note: This process can take some time to complete, especially for larger CAD models.
Correct boundary curves: Gaps in the boundary curves of surfaces and sections which are not exactly aligned are corrected.

Note: In most cases, this setting is sufficient for a successful healing.


3 Press OK to confirm.

Saving the CAD model as a CAD file


However, you can save the CAD model independently of the measurement plan in a separate file and edit it with CAD programs.
1 Select CAD CAD File Save.
2 Select the CAD format:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-47

Working with the data of the CAD model

Format

File name

ACIS

*.sat

ACIS

*.sab

IGES

*.igs

VDAFS

*.vda

STEP

*.stp

CATIA

*.model

PARASOLID

*.x_t

STL

*.stl

3 Enter the target directory and the file name.


4 Click Save.

CAD models consisting of several parts


Work area and workpiece
You can structure a work area with work area elements such as clamping
devices and pallets, and position the CAD model of a workpiece in this
area. Thus, you simulate the arrangement of the work area elements and
the workpiece in the real measuring situation.
Assigning CAD entities

When running the measurement plan, CALYPSO distinguishes between


the work area and the workpiece. This is why you must specify in the case
of CAD models which consist of several CAD entities for each CAD entity
whether the entity is a work area element or the workpiece.

CAD entities with the Part element assignment are considered as a


workpiece. The CAD entity is saved in the measurement plan.

CAD entities with the Work area element assignment are considered as part of the work area. The CAD entity is not saved in the
measurement plan but as work area.

CAD entities without assignment are saved in the measurement plan


but they are not used for the measurement.

For information on the assignment of CAD entities to the work area,


please refer to Editing the hierarchy of the CAD entities [ 248].

Editing the hierarchy of the CAD entities


For example, to show, hide or position a clamping device and a pallet
together in a CAD window, it is possible to group both CAD entities. For
any actions carried out with this group, the modifications will be active
at the same time for both CAD entities.

2-48

You work with groups on the Hierarchy tab of the Modify CAD
Model window.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the data of the CAD model

1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities and activate the Hierarchy


tab in Modify CAD Model.

2 To add a new group, select Add Group in the context menu of the
supper hierarchy level.
When grouping, individual CAD entities or entire groups are shifted
hierarchically.
3 To shift CAD entities, select the CAD entities to be shifted and drag
them to the target group.

Transforming coordinate systems and


CAD entities
Overview of transformations
Use local alignments to position work area elements and workpieces in
the CAD window. All positioning and location processes take place in
these coordinate systems.
It is possible to transform CAD entities and coordinate systems. To transform an object, assign a coordinate system to the object in the CAD
model. The object is transformed along the coordinate axes of this coordinate system.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-49

Working with the data of the CAD model

The following transformations are possible:

Moving a coordinate system along the axes of the active coordinate


system

Rotating a coordinate system around its own axes

Moving a CAD entity along the axes of the active coordinate system

Rotating a CAD entity around its own axes

Rotating a CAD entity around the axes of a coordinate system

Adding a new coordinate system


Conditions:
A CAD model is loaded.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities Modify CAD Model and
activate the Transformation tab.
2 Click the Create button in the Alignment group.

2-50

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the data of the CAD model

3 Click the desired position or the CAD entity in the CAD window.
A local alignment is inserted at the corresponding place parallel to the
coordinate system defined in the CAD entity.
Note: By ticking the Center check box before adding the alignment,
the coordinate system with its origin is automatically positioned in the
center of the surface or feature you clicked.
4 Repeat step 3 for the desired number of coordinate systems.
5 Then click again Create to deactivate the button.
6 Close the dialog box.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-51

Working with the data of the CAD model

Transforming the coordinate system


It is possible to shift and rotate a local alignment.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities Modify CAD Model and
activate the Transformation tab.
2 Select the coordinate system to be transformed in the selection list
displayed next to Alignment.
The CAD window displays the coordinate system purple-colored.
3 Set the fields at the axis ends to the desired values.

2-52

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the data of the CAD model

The changes made are immediately shown in the CAD window.


Note: The following order applies when several rotations are carried
out: Rotation in Z, rotation in Y, rotation in X. Another order would
cause a different total rotation.
4 If the Activate temporarily check box is activated, the last coordinate system created becomes the active coordinate system.
5 Close the dialog box.

Transforming a CAD entity


It is possible to transform, i.e. shift and rotate, a CAD entity in the CAD
window. To do so, you must assign a coordinate system in the CAD window to the CAD entity and define the transformation of the CAD model.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities Modify CAD Model and
activate the Transformation tab.
2 Select the desired CAD entity in the CAD window.
The CAD entity is shown purple-colored.
3 Select the coordinate system in which you wish to transform the CAD
entity in the selection list displayed next to Alignment active.
The CAD window displays the coordinate system in boldface.
4 Set the fields at the axis ends to the desired values.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-53

Working with the data of the CAD model

5 Activate the Center check box if the rotation should refer to a coordinate system parallel to the axis in the center of gravity of the CAD
entity.
Otherwise, the rotation refers to the origin of the selected coordinate
system.
6 Select Apply to move the CAD entity to the defined position and to
rotate it.

2-54

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with the data of the CAD model

7 Select Copy to move a copy of the currently selected CAD entity to


the defined position and to rotate it. The original CAD entity remains
unchanged.
8 If you activate the Drag Base Alignment check box, the base
alignment is also moved and rotated, i.e. it is transferred together with
the CAD entity, during movement and rotation.
9 Close the dialog box.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

2-55

Working with the data of the CAD model

2-56

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Chapter

Preparing the measurement


plan

.................................................................................................................

This chapter contains:


Measurement plan basics ......................................................................... 32
Measurement plan area ......................................................................... 310
Connecting the CMM ............................................................................ 313
Preparing the stylus system .................................................................... 315
Defining the CT properties ..................................................................... 318
Setting the base / start alignment ........................................................... 319
Prerequisites for the rotary table ............................................................ 355
Defining the clearance planes ................................................................ 356
Editing printout settings ......................................................................... 363
Working with measurement plan editors ................................................ 364
Temperature compensation ................................................................... 367

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-1

Measurement plan basics

Measurement plan basics


Components of the measurement plan
The measurement plan contains all the information needed to control the
CMM, to perform the measurements and to evaluate them.
What does a measurement plan comprise?

The measurement plan essentially contains the following components:

the sequence of characteristics that you want to measure on a workpiece,

the features required for measuring,

additional information important for measuring:

the stylus system,


the coordinate systems,
the clearance planes,
the temperature compensation,
user-defined video clips, if applicable.

Creating and executing a measurement plan


Creating a new measurement plan manually

There are eight steps in creating a new measurement plan in CALYPSO:

Basic steps for creating a measurement plan

Refer to this section for details

Step 1: Open the measurement plan.

Creating a new measurement

plan [ 33]
Step 2: Define the naming conventions.

Specifying feature names in the


measurement plan [ 618]

Step 3: Carry out the preparations.

Measurement Plan tab [ 311]

Step 4: Define the part's features that you want to measure. Defining features [ 42]
Step 5: Define the characteristics for which these features
are to be checked for compliance.

Defining characteristics

Step 6: Save the measurement plan and name it.

Saving and naming the measurement plan [ 34]

Step 7: Prepare the execution.

CMM tab [ 311]

Step 8: Run your measurement plan.

Starting a measurement [ 72]

Changing the sequence

You can also change the order: You can lay out the sequence of characteristics first (step 5) and then begin defining features (step 4) and associating them to characteristics.

Creating a new measurement plan automatically

You have several options for creating measurement plans:

3-2

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement plan basics

Import Measurement Plan


If you use the DMIS Input Postprocessor option, you can import runs
programmed in DMIS (see in the operating instructions for the DMIS
Input Postprocessor option under DMIS Import (option)).

Generate Measurement Plan


You can use the Characteristic IN option to generate the essential
components of a measurement plan from CAD data or from manufacturing segments (Agipp) automatically (see in the operating instructions for the Characteristic IN option under Characteristic IN (option)).

Import features from CAD files


You can extract the features for a measurement plan automatically
from a CAD file of a workpiece (see Deriving features from CAD
files [ 415]).

Editing the measurement plan


Measurement plans in
the file system

After creation, you can edit and supplement each measurement plan.

More information about measurement plans


Each measurement plan is saved in a file called inspection in a directory
that bears the name of the measurement plan. The default path for this
directory is <user directory>\workarea\inspections.
To open the Explorer window with the measurement plans, select
View Measurement Plan Directory.
During the measurement plan run, CALYPSO generates several result files
depending on your definitions. To open the Explorer window with the
result files, select View Result Directories Measurement
Plan.

Combined evaluations

CALYPSO creates evaluations for each measurement plan. You can also
combine measurement plans and thereby create combined evaluations
(Combining several measurement plans [ 627]).

Names in the measurement plans

By default, CALYPSO assigns names to the features, characteristics and


utilities that correspond to the language set. Select the name form for
automatically created characteristics in the default settings.
You can change the names afterwards. Should you generally desire to
have other name definitions, you may load these name definitions into
CALYPSO (Loading a file with default names [ 624]).

Creating a new measurement plan


The procedure for creating a measurement plan is as follows:
1 Select File New or click the Begin New Measurement Plan
icon.
An empty measurement plan opens in the main CALYPSO window. It
is possible to load CAD files, define features and characteristics and
edit the measurement plan.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-3

Measurement plan basics

The measurement plan is provided with a provisional unique name


with a serial number. When closing or saving, you can name it as desired.

Opening and displaying a measurement


plan
A measurement plan can be opened at any time and you can edit or run
it. You can have several measurement plans open at the same time.
If the CMM has not yet been initialized, a message to this effect is issued.
Then set up the connection to the CMM.

Opening a measurement plan


1 Select File Open or click the Open Existing Measurement
Plan icon.
2 Go to the directory containing the measurement plan you want to
open.
3 Select the inspection file and confirm with Open.

Opening one of the measurement plans last opened


1 Select File <measurement_plan_name>.

Switching between open measurement plans


1 Select Window <measurement_plan_name>.

Saving and naming the measurement


plan
To ensure that the created or edited measurement plan is retained, you
must save it. To do so, you must have the corresponding rights.

Note: If you have modified measurement plans of other users, it will not
be possible to run them just like that. Thus, results which are not traceable
are avoided.
You can only run the measurement plan once you have reloaded it.

Note: You can only load and run protected ZEISS measurement plans for
which you have a license. You cannot edit them and you cannot copy any
features.

Saving the measurement plan


1 Select File Save or click the Save Current Measurement
Plan icon.
- or -

3-4

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement plan basics

2 Select File Save As ....


3 Select a path in the Save Measurement Plan as ... window and
enter a name.

Note: CALYPSO uses uppercase and lowercase letters when saving.


Bear this in mind, because it means that CALYPSO does not distinguish
between names of measurement plans that differ only in the use of
uppercase and lowercase letters.
Note: Do not use any control characters, umlauts or the letter
(Germany).
4 Press OK to confirm.

Note: In the system settings (Extras Settings Environment, Save tab), you can activate the automatic creation of backup
copies (Auto-Save).

Settings for measurement plans


Defaults for measurement plans
Use the list of prerequisites to prepare the measurement plan.
In addition, you can define other defaults for the measurement plans via
the Resources menu:
Resources

Presettings

Stylus

Preassign stylus system for Measurement Plan


autom.

Stylus Check at CNC Start

Exchange stylus system name / stylus in measurement plan

Measurement Plan

Rack Assignment

Preassignment for New Features

Default alignment and default projection plane


for new features

Save / Load Defaults

Default filtering and outlier elimination for new


characteristics and features

Default strategies for new features

CAD presettings

Space Point Mode

Evaluation and method of stylus data correction during point measurement

Name for output files

Definition of the output files via PCM formulas

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-5

Measurement plan basics

Loading measurement and evaluation settings


You can define defaults for the measurement and evaluation of characteristics and features for the entire measurement plan.
If you have to reuse the same settings, you can save them with a name
and load them into another measurement plan or export and then import
them into another computer. Use Resources Save / Load Defaults... to open the Settings (Measurement Plan) window.
You can save and load as well as export and import files with the following
settings:
Tab

Settings

Filter/Outlier

Defaults for filtering and outlier setting for the following new features
for the entire measurement plan:

Strategy

Characteristics of the type Size

Characteristics of the type Location

Characteristics of the type Form

References in characteristics and alignment features in coordinate


systems

Strategy defaults which are effective throughout the measurement


plan for new features of the following types:

Point

2D line

Plane

Circle

Cylinder

Cone

CAD

Defaults for the entire measurement plan used for visualization in the
CAD window. You can also make these settings under CAD Settings in the Settings (CAD) window.

General

The three settings combined in one file. This file does not refer to
individual files but contains the definitions of the three tabs.

Editing the representation of features


The Features representation defines how actual values, nominal values
and results are presented. The settings are based on the scales and units
of measure of various geometric elements and are always saved together
with the current measurement plan.

3-6

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement plan basics

Checking or modifying the representation of features


1 To open the settings for the entire measurement plan: In the list of
features, select No feature and select Resources Features representation.
2 To open the settings for an individual feature: Mark the entry in the
list of features and select Resources Features representation.
The Features representation window appears on the screen. It shows
the default output settings.

Be sure to check all settings at the Position, Angle and Size global
radio buttons.
3 If you want to change the setting for a feature, open the selection box
of the feature in the Mode column and select Change.
This activates the radio buttons on the right-hand side of the window.
4 Make all the necessary changes.
5 Click OK.
This window is fully described in Features representation in the CALYPSO
dialog reference in the Online Help.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-7

Measurement plan basics

Compatibility of measurement plans


Every new version of CALYPSO contains modifications and improvements
of the algorithms and evaluation methods. However, any new measurement plans created in CALYPSO contain the methods and modes of the
current version.
Any existing measurement plans which you created with an older CALYPSO version can, however, also be run with the current version without
any problems.
If you do not modify the settings, the measurement plan runs in the same
way as with the original version of CALYPSO. This means that new functions or modified behaviors are not used in the old measurement plan.
It may be useful for you to run older measurement plans with a more
recent behavior or new measurement plans with an older behavior.
Compatibility settings

You can define these settings for each individual measurement plan and
(with the appropriate rights) also for several measurement plans.
Filter limit points per wave
Outlier Elimination
Calculate Alignment as Base Alignment
Scanning speed circle referring to surface
Evaluate Features from point recalls
Point Recall via Box with Actual Geometry
Point recall of individual points with path()
Circle path on plane is calculated as for circle
Take into account the offset angle for RT axes measurement with start system
Old positioning for optical measurement fields
DMIS Printout: Unique Feature Names
DMIS Printout: Length of feature name
DMIS Printout: Definition of TOL/WIDTH
DMIS Printout: Source of nominal data for measured features
Take the retract distance for multiple safety data into consideration
Adapt font when printing the custom printout
Staggered end message to FACS
RT navigation: Move to a higher clear position when executing Retract to top.
Optimized travel paths with rotate/swivel position with preset path
Performance as if created with Rev.
Optimized travel performance before stylus system change
Always use Arc Motion mode

3-8

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement plan basics

To edit an individual measurement plan, select Resources Compatibility Settings ...for this Measurement Plan and define the
settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement
Plan window.
To edit several measurement plans, select Resources Compatibility Settings ... for several measurement plans and define the
settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement
Plans window.
The Performance as if created with Rev. list item allows you to set
the entire behavior of the measurement plan or the measurement plans
to a certain version of CALYPSO.
In addition, certain functions and behaviors can be activated separately.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-9

Measurement plan area

Measurement plan area


Tabs and color bars
You can define the most important definitions for the current measurement plan on four tabs in the left part of the workspace in the measurement plan area. The traffic light colors of the boxes on the tabs indicate
the status of the tab.
CMM

CMM settings and the stylus system dialogs


(CMM tab [ 311])

Measurement
plan

All important dialogs for the measurement plan preparation

Characteristics

List of characteristics in the order in which the characteristics are carried out in the CNC run

(Measurement Plan tab [ 311])

(Characteristics tab [ 58])


Features

List of features
(Features tab [ 44])

Status of prerequisites

The indicator boxes on the CMM and Measurement Plan tabs reflect
the combined status of the prerequisites:

Red: One or more buttons are red. You must complete the prerequisites in question before you can run the measurement plan. Manual
measurements, however, can be performed.

Yellow: One or more buttons are yellow. You can still work, however.

Green: All prerequisites are completed.

CMM

Meas. Plan Characteristics

Features

CMM Settings

Stylus system
Star

If you are performing measurements manually (for example, doing a quick


measurement of the diameter of a cylinder), you can proceed if all of the
prerequisites have been satisfied:

3-10

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement plan area

CMM tab

The reference point has been approached.


The stylus system is qualified.

Measurement Plan tab

(Only required if you want to run measurement plans automatically:)


The clearance planes are defined.
Whether or not you include the measurement plan settings and temperature compensation depends on the intended application.

Status of results

On the Characteristics tab, the indicator box reflects the results after
the measurement:

Red: One or more characteristics are red.

Yellow: One or more characteristics are yellow.

Green: All characteristics are within the tolerance.

CMM index card


The measurement plan area of the CMM index card contains buttons for
machine-specific preparations.
The prerequisites are described in the following sections:

CMM Settings: This button indicates the status of the CMM and the
connection between the CMM and CALYPSO. If the CMM has not
been initialized and referenced, the button is red (see Connecting
the CMM [ 313]).

Stylus system: By means of this button, the stylus system installed at


the moment is qualified (see Preparing the stylus system [ 315]).

Measurement Plan tab


The measurement plan area of the Measurement Plan tab and the
CMM tab contain all the settings you should configure before you create
a measurement plan or run a workpiece measurement.

CT Properties: This button allows you to prepare the measurement of


CT datasets. CALYPSO makes it possible to show the measured values
determined by means of the METROTOM as point clouds and to evaluate characteristics (see Defining the CT properties [ 318]).

Base / Start Alignment: By means of this button, the part alignment


allocated to the measurement plan is defined (see Setting the base /
start alignment [ 319]).

Rotary Table (RT): Click this button to activate a rotary table for the
current measurement plan and to define the settings for rotary table
operation (see Prerequisites for the rotary table [ 355]).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-11

Measurement plan area

3-12

Clearance Planes: Click this button to define a clearance zone around


the workpiece for CMM movements. This is required only for CMMs
with CNC capability (see Defining the clearance planes [ 356]).

Multiple Printout: Click this button to check and edit the settings for
the result logs (see Editing printout settings [ 363]).

Measurement Plan Editor Features: Click this button to open the


Measurement Plan Editor Features (see Working with measurement
plan editors [ 364]).

Temperature Compensation: Click this button to have CALYPSO include the temperature of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of
the CMM in the calculations (see Temperature compensation [ 367]).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Connecting the CMM

Connecting the CMM


Validity of the reference point
You have to set up a connection to the controller and the reference point
must be approached before you can work with the CMM.
All measurements and derived calculations are referred to the reference
point. CALYPSO checks whether the CMM has approached the valid reference point. This information can only be transferred if the connection
between CALYPSO and the CMM has been established.
On the CMM index card, a color bar shows the following status:

Green: There is a proper connection between the CMM and CALYPSO. The reference point has been approached.

Red: You must initialize or restart the connection between the CMM
and CALYPSO to home the CMM.

New reference point


The new reference point may slightly differ from the previous reference
point. This has no influence on the validity of the stylus data and the future
measurements because they do not refer to the reference point.
By contrast, the positions of the reference spheres refer to the reference
point. Therefore, they would become invalid by homing the CMM. If you
want to re-qualify styli, you must also re-qualify the positions of the reference spheres.
NOTICE
When using a rotary table, you must redefine the rotary table axis after
the CMM has been homed. This is the prerequisite for using the rotary
table. For more information, see Prerequisites for the rotary table [ 355].

Connecting the CMM


You have to set up a connection to the controller before you can work
with the CMM.

Note: When you install an SP600, SP25 or XXT, you must be careful that
the stylus does not touch the workpiece nor come to rest anywhere. The
dead weight would, in this case, be determined incorrectly.
1 Select Extras Settings CMM.
- or On the CMM index card, click CMM Settings.
2 Click Connect.
The connection will be established.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-13

Connecting the CMM

The CMM moves to home position automatically to which all measurements and derived calculations are referred.
NOTICE
All reference spheres used are no longer valid after a home position travel.
Before you can reuse the reference spheres, you must determine their
position again via the master stylus.

3-14

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Preparing the stylus system

Preparing the stylus system


Validity of the stylus system
When you create a measurement plan, make sure that you have installed
the correct stylus system and that it is suitable for the measurement. To
ensure this, the stylus system must have been qualified and the limit values must be complied with.
Status

Qualifying styli

On the CMM tab, the following status is shown:

Green: The currently active stylus of the displayed stylus system is


qualified.

Red: The currently active stylus of the displayed stylus system is not
qualified or not permitted for the measurement.

Qualification means that the stylus probes the reference sphere and stylus
correction values are determined from the results. The compliance with
the limit values can be checked automatically by CALYPSO.
When qualifying the stylus, observe the following:

Always define and qualify stylus systems and styli within a measurement plan. You can use defined stylus systems with qualified styli in
all other measurement plans.

The stylus system that you use to set up a measurement plan must be
the same one that you use to run the measurement plan.

Note: If the stylus system can no longer be used, but you have a stylus
system with the same configuration, select Resources Stylus
system Define stylus system for current Measurement
Plan to select the suitable stylus system.

Further information

In the list of the prerequisites, the name of the stylus system is displayed that was most recently used for measuring. When opening a
measurement plan, you must use the appropriate stylus system. To
display the stylus system to be used, choose Resources Stylus
system Define stylus system for current Measurement
Plan.

In the following sections you will find the instructions on how to insert or
change a stylus system manually and to quality an already qualified stylus
system.
For more information about stylus systems and styli of different types as
well as stylus system management, please refer to the chapter Styli and
stylus systems [ 111].
For information about the automatic stylus change, please refer to the
chapter Stylus system changer [ 131].

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-15

Preparing the stylus system

Inserting the stylus system


Inserting the stylus system in the CMM
1 Select Resources Stylus system Manual stylus system
change.
The Manual stylus system change [machine name] window is opened.

2 If you want to install an SP600 and change the stylus system (SP600
plate): Remove the stylus system manually from the SP600 and proceed with step 5.
- or If you want to install an SP600 and change the probe (RDS plate), as
well as in all other cases: Click the red arrow in the left half of the
window.
The message Stylus system will be released in 5 seconds appears on
the screen.

3 Click OK.
4 Carefully grip the stylus system that is about to be ejected.
After five seconds, the CMM ejects the stylus system.
If a trigger probe is involved, deviate the stylus system slightly to be
able to remove it from the holder.
Measuring probes are ejected fully automatically, i.e. you must be holding
the stylus system in your hand at this time.

3-16

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Preparing the stylus system

5 Click the red arrow on the right-hand side of the window.


The Insert stylus? prompt appears on the screen.
Do not click OK at this time.
6 Install the new stylus system. Make sure the notch in the adapter plate
is aligned with the pin on the underside of the probe.
7 Click OK.
There is an audible sound when the electromagnet engages.
If you do not hear anything, gently move the stylus system to assure
a proper seat.
A popup menu appears listing available, already defined stylus system
names.
8 If you install a new stylus system, click New and enter a name.
- or If the stylus system has already been defined and qualified, select the
respective name.
- or If you install a master stylus, select MasterStylus.
9 Click OK.
If you install a stylus system that has already been qualified, the name of
the stylus system appears in the list of prerequisites. If not, the stylus
system must be qualified.

Re-qualifying a stylus system


You can program CALYPSO to automatically re-qualify the stylus of a
stylus system already qualified.
1 Click the Stylus system icon in the list of prerequisites.
The Probing system qualification window appears on the screen.
2 Select the name of the stylus system.
3 Select the name of the stylus you want to qualify.
4 Click the CNC Probing system qualification icon.
5 Click OK.
The styli are now qualified and the color of the Stylus system icon is
green. The qualified stylus system can now be used by all CALYPSO users.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-17

Defining the CT properties

Defining the CT properties


If you have the Metrotomography option, you can load, visualize and
measure CT datasets gained by METROTOM in CALYPSO.
Define the settings for the measurement, visualization and analysis of the
CT dataset in the CT Properties window which you open via the button
in the prerequisites.

More detailed information on the measurement of CT datasets can be


found in the operating instructions for the Metrotomography option.

3-18

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Setting the base / start alignment


Working with the base/start alignment
The calculated alignment of a workpiece is completed in CALYPSO by
defining a base alignment (coordinate system). If this base alignment can
only be determined through time-consuming measurements or scanning,
you can manually define a start alignment, which will then be used to
measure the base alignment.
NOTICE
In order to work with base alignments/start alignments, you need to be
familiar with automatic feature recognition (see Defining features using automatic feature recognition [ 414]).
The tasks that can be involved in defining the base/start alignment are as
follows:

Loading an existing base alignment/start alignment [ 323]


If there is an existing base/start alignment, you can use it for your
current measurement plan.

Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324]


You can create a new base / start alignment. There are several ways
of creating a base/start alignment, and you will have to choose one
(see Alternative alignment methods [ 349]).

Adapting a base / start alignment [ 327]


If the position of the workpiece has changed but the part alignment
is still defined, you can recalculate alignment without having to redefine the base/start alignment from scratch.

Editing an existing base/start alignment [ 333]


The settings (e.g. a primary reference) of an open (active) base or start
alignment can be changed at any time.

Moving or rotating the base / start alignment [ 334]


You can offset or rotate a base or start alignment in order to customize it to suit the positions of features on a workpiece.

Deleting a base alignment [ 349]

Setting a base alignment to zero [ 349]

For each of these tasks, you start from the part alignment template. The
part alignment template is described in full detail in Definition template
(Alignment) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-19

Setting the base / start alignment

Part alignment basics


Part alignments
The part alignment is the user-defined reference coordinate system for
your measurement plan. The base alignment (see also Base alignment [ 321]) is a particular part alignment. It localizes the part on the
measuring table for the CMM. Why is that necessary?
In its clamped position on the table, a workpiece can be tilted or out of
line. The CMM still has to perform accurately, so before you start measuring you have to define (compute) the position of the workpiece relative
to the axes of the CMM.
This is precisely what happens when the part alignment is computed: the
part alignment is virtually tilted and turned until certain geometric elements of the workpiece are parallel to the CMM's axes.
The part alignment needs to locate the part within the six constraints
(three rotational and three translational).
The part alignment is based on five references:

The primary reference (Rotate Space) restricts two of the three rotational degrees of freedom; e.g., the rotation around the X and Y axes.

The secondary reference (Rotate Plane) constrains the third rotational


degree of freedom, e.g., rotation around the Z axis.

Three tertiary references control the three translational constraints.


These are the origins of X, Y and Z. With these, the part alignment is
defined.

You can save several part alignments within one measurement plan. You
can define a new part alignment using Resources Utilities Alignment or with the toolbox.
Selecting the coordinate
system

3-20

The known coordinate systems in the measurement plan can be selected


and used at various positions of the measurement plan:

Features and constructions

The start coordinate system for a coordinate system according to the


standard method

True Position, Profile, Simple distance characteristics

Erosion Module utility, Save Alignment

Display position and Move in Part Alignment System in the stop


light window

Additional Features HOLOS and GEAR PRO

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Coordinate system with index


Coordinate systems determined according to the standard method may
contain a loop index and thus represent several specific coordinate systems.
This becomes the case when

you use features with a pattern or a loop index for a coordinate system
determined by the standard method,

you use the loop index in a special function when defining the coordinate system.

The name of the coordinate system is then provided with an index in


brackets. For every valid index value, the coordinate system becomes a
particular coordinate system of its own.
NOTICE
The type of brackets selected in the loop is passed along with the index
as is the number.

n different coordinate systems are calculated for a coordinate system that


has a feature with pattern and n positions. When several references contain patterns with varying number of positions, the resulting coordinate
system contains exactly as many positions as the reference having the
smallest number of positions.
Example: A circle and two planes have one pattern with ten features each.
If you use these features as references for the coordinate system, a coordinate system with index is formed. This coordinate system can take on
from one to ten different positions or alignments depending on the specific index value.
NOTICE
A coordinate system provided with a loop is interpreted as an iterative
alignment. For this reason, coordinate systems that should be calculated
with an index should have no loop.

Base alignment
The base alignment is a part alignment that defines the position of the
workpiece on the CMM. There is only one base alignment in every measurement plan. In order to view, define or change the base alignment, read
Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324].
The base alignment parameters correspond to the machine coordinate
system. The part alignments inside a measurement plan, on the other
hand, correspond either to the base alignment or to other alignments.
They are used for the correct evaluation of the measuring results.
When you set the base alignment, you have to decide which features you
want to use for defining the workpiece position on the CMM. If these

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-21

Setting the base / start alignment

features have already been measured, the current workpiece position will
be calculated and saved.
Otherwise, with machine-remote programming, for example, the workpiece position cannot be calculated until later. This can be accomplished
by loading a saved base alignment (see Loading an existing base alignment/start alignment [ 323]) or by manually adapting a defined base
alignment (see Adapting a base / start alignment [ 327]).
It is important to differentiate between 2 processes:

The assignments of the features to the 5 references of the base alignment are saved in the measurement plan.

The results of the calculation of the base alignment are saved in a file.

Start alignment
A part alignment is referred to as a start alignment when it can be used
as a provisional base alignment. It must be possible to generate it by
manual probing and can be permitted only once in a measurement plan.
What is the purpose of a
start alignment?

A start alignment is used in the following situations:

Generating the base alignment through manual probing would be


relatively complex.
This is the case, for example, when constructions are entered into the
base alignments that, in turn, have been formed from several other
features. Then many features are necessary for generating the base
alignment.
This applies also when features which are difficult to probe are used
for generating the base alignment.

A receptacle is used holding the workpiece.


Then the start alignment is defined on the receptacle and the base
alignment on the workpiece.

Simple structure

A start alignment can be built up relatively simple. Depending on the


individual case it can, for example, be built by a 3-2-1 alignment, by simple
features or also by one point in X, Y and Z each.
For a CNC run with manual alignment, it is then sufficient to probe these
few points or features. Afterward, CALYPSO knows the approximate position of the workpiece and can qualify the base alignment in the CNC
run.
NOTICE
Always define the base alignment first, and then the start alignment.
Otherwise, the offset between the base alignment and the start alignment cannot be correctly calculated.

Defining start alignment

3-22

The start alignment is defined and edited in the same manner and with
the same functions as a base alignment. For this purpose, use the Start

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Alignment index card in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment


window.
It is only the CNC run that cannot be set in the start alignment.
Activating start alignment

To activate the start alignment for the current measurement plan, you
must tick the corresponding check box on the Start Alignment index
card.
For information on how to view, define or change the start alignment,
read Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324].

What to bear in mind when defining references


The features you choose to define a part alignment depend to a very large
extent on the geometry of the workpiece and the measuring job you want
to accomplish. Here are the basic rules:

Choose at least three different physical features. They can all be


planes, but they must not be the same plane.

Do not select parallel planes for different references (e.g. the surface
of a cube and the surface of a cylinder on top of it). In this case, the
second reference tells CALYPSO nothing more about the orientation
of the workpiece than the first reference did.

For each feature, spread out the points as far as possible.

The primary reference must be a three-dimensional object (e.g. plane,


cylinder or cone, or a sphere, if another sphere defines all 3 tertiary
origins).

The secondary reference must be a two-dimensional object (e.g. a


line), but can also be three-dimensional. (Or a circle or ellipse, if other
entities define both tertiary origins which belong to the plane of the
primary axis.)

The tertiary references are typically one-dimensional (a point), but a


two-dimensional or three-dimensional reference can also be selected.

Loading an existing base alignment/start


alignment
If you have or another user has already defined a part alignment, you can
use it as a base or start alignment for your current measurement plan if
it satisfies your requirements.

Selecting a part alignment


1 In the list of prerequisites, click the Base / Start Alignment icon.
2 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-23

Setting the base / start alignment

3 Select the Load a saved base alignment or Load an existing


start alignment option.
4 Select the desired part alignment from the selection list below.
5 Click OK.
Once you have selected an existing part alignment as the new start
alignment, the following query will be displayed:
Do you want to create a start alignment by calculating the
difference to the base alignment (otherwise you will move the
workpiece)?
6 Click Compute if you want to move the loaded start alignment to
the position of the base alignment.
- or Click Move if you want to use the position of the start alignment and
the workpiece and its base alignment are to be moved to the position
of the start alignment.
- or Click Overwrite if you want to use the position of the start alignment
and overwrite the previous start alignment of the measurement plan
with the new start alignment which is loaded.
The start alignment is loaded and adapted accordingly.
Note: In all cases, you must match the part alignment to the position
of the workpiece. See Adapting a base / start alignment [ 327].
The Base / Start Alignment icon will now be green.
When loading the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position is
changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is why
the model in the CAD window does not change.

Creating a new base/start alignment


If you prefer not to use the standard method to define a part alignment,
you have a choice of three other methods: 3D Best Fit and RPS or P6
procedures (see Alternative alignment methods [ 349]).
1 In the list of prerequisites, click the Base / Start Alignment icon.
2 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
3 Select either the Create a new base alignment or Create a
new start alignment option.
4 From the list, select the method you want to use for alignment (see
Alternative alignment methods [ 349]).
5 Click OK.
The Definition template (Alignment) window will open.

3-24

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

This dialog box has five buttons and fields for defining the five references. CALYPSO automatically enters the information in the fields
when you probe the workpiece to define the requisite features.
You do not need to probe the workpiece if you have already measured
the features required for the part alignment.
6 Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control console.
7 Define a feature for the reference. There are a number of possibilities:
The feature already exists:
Click the appropriate button of the reference.

The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.

Select the feature of your choice from the selection list.

Click OK.

CALYPSO transfers the feature to the appropriate field.


The feature does not exist in If you are working on the CMM:
the measurement plan as
You do not have to exit the Alignment dialog box.
yet:
Probe point by point.

The automatic feature recognition engine of CALYPSO automatically registers the geometry of the feature.

Click OK when you have fully defined the feature as a reference.

CALYPSO will automatically transfer the feature to the measurement


plan.
If you are working away from the machine:

Click the appropriate button of the reference in the Alignment dialog box.

The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.

Select the New option.

Click the appropriate button of the feature you want to define.

Click OK.

In the CAD window, either probe the necessary number of points


on the feature with the mouse.
- or -

Click one of the buttons Define a Space Point, Define Circle on a Cylinder, Define 2-D Line or Extract Features
to import the entire feature right away.
CALYPSO updates the feature definition at the left-hand side of
the dialog box.

Click OK.

8 Define the features for the other references in the same way.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-25

Setting the base / start alignment

9 Click OK when you have finished defining all the references.


The part alignment is saved and the dialog box is closed. The Base / Start
Alignment icon will then be green.
Once all of the references have been defined, CALYPSO will enter the
corresponding features in the appropriate fields (see the example in the
illustration below).

The default name for the measurement plan is derived from the name of
the newly calculated base alignment. You can, however, highlight the
name and overwrite it with a name of your choice. Click the Comment button to type in and save a comment containing additional information.

3-26

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Adapting a base / start alignment


If the workpiece was shifted, turned or tilted out of position slightly, you
will have to repeat the computed alignment. CALYPSO will assist you.
1 In the measurement plan area of the list of prerequisites, click the
Base / Start Alignment icon.
2 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
3 Select either the Change current base alignment or Change
current start alignment option.
4 Click OK.
The Definition template (Alignment) window will open. You can see
which features were used to define the part alignment.
5 Click the Execute Manual Run Now icon.
CALYPSO guides you through the procedure for computing alignment. The Manual Alignment dialog box appears on the screen for this
purpose.

The instructions in this dialog box tell you exactly which feature has to
be probed and how often to ensure successful alignment. This dialog
box is fully described in Manual Alignment in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
6 Using the joysticks, take the indicated number of probings on the indicated feature of the part. The information in the dialog box is up61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-27

Setting the base / start alignment

dated after each probing. In this manner, you know how often you
have to probe.
When you take the final probing for a reference, the window displays
the feature needed for the next reference (such as 2D Line1).
After the probing, CALYPSO takes a moment to update the part alignment and display the new image in the CAD window. Then you are
returned to the Alignment window.
7 Click OK.
The Base / Start Alignment icon will then be green.
When adjusting the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position will
be changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is
why the model in the CAD window does not change.

Customizing a base alignment iteratively


You can enhance precision by computing alignment of the part alignment
iteratively. You do this by defining a loop in the Load, Create Or
Change Base Alignment window.
NOTICE
The Automatic Run check box has to be ticked in the definition template of the base alignment.
If you use an abortion condition instead of defining the end of the loop
by specifying a certain number of repetitions, you can predefine the target
precision for the new part alignment.
If a space point measured with the Point Set strategy is used for the definition of the base alignment, you can carry out partial computed iteration, i.e. without remeasuring.
1 In the Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box, activate the radio button for the Change current base alignment
option.

3-28

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

2 Click Loop.
The Loop dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Click Add.
4 Enter in the End field, e.g., 5 as number of the loop cycles.
5 Point to the Break Condition field, open the shortcut menu and
select Formula....
6 In the Formula... window, enter an abortion condition, for example
the following expression:
baseSystem().valueA<0.05

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-29

Setting the base / start alignment

This Boolean expression is checked at the end of each loop and when
it is satisfied (value of the expression = true), the loop is stopped. The
value of the valueA variable is recalculated each time the loop is run.
It stands for the approximation between the measured alignment and
the alignment stored in memory. In the standard protocol, valueA is
designated as Delta.
7 Close the Formula, Loop and Load, Create Or Change Base
Alignment dialog boxes.
If a Space Point feature measured with the Point Set strategy is used
in the base alignment, you can carry out partial computed iteration.
8 To do so, click Iterative alignment and enter the parameters for
computed iteration.
For computed iteration, the point set is not remeasured but the measured point set is evaluated again. For more information, see Alignment by means of computed iteration [ 330].
9 Start the measurement plan.
Alignment terminates immediately if the workpiece has not been moved
since the alignment was last computed.
If a marginal change was made to the position of the workpiece, alignment is computed iteratively until the difference (delta) between two
consecutive alignments is less than the value you specified (0.05).
Refer to the default printout for information on the alignment procedure
and the results, including the value for delta.

Alignment by means of computed


iteration
During iterative alignment of a coordinate system, the features are remeasured until the loop is terminated or an abortion condition is met. In
the case of a loop with n steps, the features can be measured n times.
However, in the case of space points measured with the Point Set strategy
a sufficient number of points with slight shifts is already available so that
repeated physical time-consuming measuring is most probably not necessary. CALYPSO can re-evaluate the already existing measuring points
and use them for the calculation of the coordinate system.
CALYPSO searches the measuring points to be evaluated within a defined
search radius around the target position. If the defined minimum number
of measuring points has been found, these measuring points will be used
for the evaluation of the point. If an insufficient number of measuring
points is found at the current target position, a physical measurement is
actually carried out or the computation is interrupted. When remeasuring,
the new measuring points from the current iteration step will be added
to the old measuring points of the previous iteration steps.

3-30

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Parameters for computed iteration

You can define the parameters for each Space Point feature individually
or for all features used in the coordinate system. CALYPSO checks the
entries and issues warning messages:

Search radius
If the specified search radius is too small, e.g. smaller than the step
width of the scanning strategy, CALYPSO can find a maximum of one
point. If the specified value is too large, e.g. larger than the expansion
of the scanning strategy, the distance between the points and the
target position is too large and the computation is inaccurate (see ill.).
When checking the parameters for all space points used in the coordinate system, CALYPSO uses the largest step width and the smallest
expansion of all scanning strategies as basis.

Search radius

Point set

Target position

Minimum number of calculation points


The minimum number of points must not exceed the number of
measuring points in the point set in any case since otherwise an abortion would already take place in the first step. On the other hand, it
should not be too small for reasons of accuracy.
When checking the parameters for all space points used in the coordinate system, CALYPSO uses the smallest number of measuring
points for the measurement.

Configuring computed alignment


Conditions:
A base alignment or another coordinate system is defined.
For the definition of the base alignment or coordinate system, space
points measured by means of the Point set strategy are used.
1 Click Loop in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
- or 61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-31

Setting the base / start alignment

Select Loop in the context menu of the corresponding coordinate


system.
The Loop dialog box appears on the screen.

2 If necessary, enter the loop parameters with Insert.


3 If necessary, enter an abortion condition in the Break Condition
field.
4 Click Iterative alignment to configure the computed iteration.

5 The Settings for iterative alignment window shows the space


points measured as point set which are used for the coordinate system.
CALYPSO defined default settings for all parameters.
6 Activate for the computer iteration either individual space points of
the list or all features of the list using the Measurement Plan line.
7 Enter the Search radius and the Min. no.\calculation\points
and define what is to happen when this number is not reached.
8 Confirm the open windows with OK.
When starting the measurement plan or measuring the coordinate system
the next time, the settings for the computed iteration are used.

3-32

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Editing a base / start alignment


When a base / start alignment is changed, the nominal values of all of the
features in the current measurement plan will be changed. The position
of the base alignment relative to the workpiece is changed. The position
of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if only measured
features are used.

Note: When making changes on the base alignment of an existing measurement plan, always do so with great care and deliberation especially
when dealing with a complex measurement plan or when the measurement plan contains theoretical features, formulas or parameters. Check
subsequently the nominal values of the features with regard to their correctness.
1 In the list of prerequisites, click the Base / Start Alignment icon.
2 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
3 Select either the Change current base alignment or Change
current start alignment option.
4 Click OK.
The Definition template (Alignment) window appears on the screen.
It shows which features were used to define the part alignment.
5 If you want to replace a feature for a particular reference with another
feature which has already been defined:
Click the button for the reference in question to open the Selection
(Features) window.
In the list, click the feature you want to use.
Confirm twice with OK.
6 If you want to assign a particular reference a feature that has yet to
be defined:
Click the button for the reference in question.
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen.
Select New and choose the type of feature you want to define (e.g.
plane or 2D straight line).
Confirm by clicking OK and use the CMM to probe the necessary
points of the feature.
Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control
console.
As soon as you start probing, CALYPSO updates the feature definition
at the left-hand side of the window.
After probing, confirm twice with OK.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-33

Setting the base / start alignment

After every change in the part alignment, the Base / Start Alignment icon must be green. When a base / start alignment is changed, the
nominal values of all of the features in the current measurement plan will
be changed. The position of the base/start alignment relative to the workpiece will be changed.
The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if only
measured features are used.

Moving or rotating the base / start


alignment
Purpose of movement and rotation
Sometimes, the coordinate values of a workpiece feature needed to define the base/start alignment are not 0, or the features are not parallel
to a part alignment axis, but are rotated. In these situations, the base/
start alignment can be moved (offset) or rotated to the desired position.
In such cases, the base/start alignment is always moved first, and then
rotated.
Offsetting a base/start
alignment

An offset also enables you to move the origin of the part alignment to a
point that cannot be probed. You can define an offset in any and all of
the three coordinate directions.

Rotating the base / start


alignment

Using the rotation function, it is possible to rotate a part alignment


around a coordinate axis. There are two methods for entering the rotation
angle:

Rotate by an angle:
The desired rotation angle is entered directly in degrees.

Rotate by distances:
The rotation angle is entered via vector coordinates.

The rotation of the reference axis by secondary reference is described


separately (see Rotate to Distance [ 338]).

Offsetting a base / start alignment


Offsetting or shifting a part alignment is part of the special Offset function.
1 On the Measurement Plan tab, click the Base / Start Alignment button.
2 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
3 Select the Change current base alignment or Change current
start alignment option and click OK.

3-34

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

4 Click Special in the Base Alignment or Start Alignment window.


The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
5 Click the Offset button.
The Offset entry and input fields for the coordinates are added to the
Special Functions dialog box.

6 Enter the amount by which you want to offset the origin in the X,Y
or Z axis:
7 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.

Rotating a part alignment by an angle


Rotating a part alignment about a selected axis is part of the Rotate
special function. After the alignment has been computed, you can rotate
the part alignment through the desired angle.
1 Click the Base / Start Alignment icon in the measurement plan
area on the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
3 Select the Change current base alignment or Change current
start alignment option and click OK.
4 Click the Special button.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
5 Click Rotate by an angle.
The Rotate Around entry and input fields for the space axis and the
rotation angle will appear in the Special Functions dialog box.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-35

Setting the base / start alignment

6 Enter the space axis around which you want the alignment to be rotated, and the angle (in degrees):
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 if you want to define rotations about other space
axes as well.
8 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.

Rotating a part alignment by distances


When a part alignment is rotated by distance (Cartesian), the rotation
angle is specified using vector coordinates.
1 Click the Base / Start Alignment icon in the measurement plan
area on the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
3 Select the Change current base alignment or Change current
start alignment option and click OK.
4 Click the Special button.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
5 Click Rotate by distances .
The Rotate Around entry, a selection field for the space axis and
input fields for the respective complementary coordinates are added
to the Special Functions window, along with a field for displaying the
resulting rotation angle.

3-36

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

6 Enter the space axis around which you want the system to be rotated,
and the vector for rotation.
Specify the vector with its two coordinates in the coordinate system
of the plane of rotation (the plane of rotation depends on the selected
axis of rotation).
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 if you want to define rotations about other space
axes as well.
8 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.

Rotating reference axis by secondary


reference
Options for rotating the reference axis
In addition to the offset (movement) and rotation of a base / start alignment, there are other, special options for changing a base / start alignment.
To access these, click Special in the Special Functions window in the
definition template for the workpiece coordinate system. Here you will
find three options for using a secondary reference to set the reference
axis.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-37

Setting the base / start alignment

Option

Function

Rotate to Distance (to a given Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a specific
axis)
coordinate of a specified feature reaches a given size.
Rotate to origin line

Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a line passing
through the origin and the nominal coordinate intersects the tertiary
reference (measured point) in the plane. After this rotation, the X
value and Y value of the nominal point and the tertiary reference have
same ratios.

Rotate to same deviation

Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis until a line between
a point in the plane (the nominal coordinate) and the tertiary reference has a slope of 45. After this rotation, the delta-X and delta-Y
of the nominal point and the tertiary reference are equal (delta-X
(delta-Y) is the difference between the two X values (Y values)).
The options only appear in the Special Functions window if they
would be reasonable to use and the base / start alignment satisfies certain
preconditions.

Prerequisites

To be able to use the Rotate reference axis by secondary reference function, the following preconditions must be met:

The secondary reference of the base / start alignment was defined by


either a circle, a slot, a rectangle, an ellipse or a point.

For both coordinates of the plane in which the base alignment is rotated, the tertiary reference must be

defined with the same feature, or


with 2 planes, or
with two 2D lines, or
remain unchanged in both coordinates.

Rotate to Distance
Use the Rotate to Distance function to enter a desired value on the
coordinate axis for a feature. CALYPSO rotates the part alignment until
it is set to this value.
Example

The following example illustrates the function:


The origin of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of
the bore on the right is 50 mm away in the X axis. This distance should
maintain the nominal of 40 mm.

3-38

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

50
CALYPSO rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore
until the nominal distance is achieved.

40

Rotating to origin line


The Rotate to origin line function can only be performed when certain conditions are met (see Rotating reference axis by secondary reference [ 337]).
This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a line going through
the coordinate origin will go through the point that was used as the third
reference when the base alignment was defined.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-39

Setting the base / start alignment

When using the Rotate to origin line function, CALYPSO rotates the
part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point.

Rotate to Origin line


Actual point (measured)

Yact
Y nom

Nominal coordinates
X act
X nom

In the new coordinate system, the relationships between the X values and
the Y values for both points (the one defined by the line and the point
for the tertiary reference) are exactly equal. The Rotate to origin line is
in a sense a Rotate to Equal Relationships.
Example

The following example illustrates the function:


The origin of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of
the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both the X and Y
axes.
With (20,30), a line is defined in the X-Y plane, which passes through the
origin and the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm.
After the Rotate to origin line function has been performed, the line
should also pass through the center of the bore on the right. CALYPSO
rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore until the line
touches the center of the bore on the right.

Rotating to same deviation


The Rotate to same deviation function can only be performed when
certain conditions are met (see Rotating reference axis by secondary
reference [ 337]).
This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a specified line with
the slope 1 (equals 45) will go through the point that was used as the
third reference when the base alignment was defined.
When using the Rotate to same deviation function, CALYPSO rotates
the part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point.

3-40

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Rotate to equal deviation


Actual point (measured)

Nominal coordinates
X

In the new coordinate system, the difference between the X values (between the just defined point and the point of the tertiary reference) equals
the difference between the Y values which is why it is called Rotate to
same deviation.
Example

The following example illustrates the function:


The origin of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of
the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both the X and Y
axes.
A line is defined with (20,30) in the X-Y plane of the coordinate system;
it will pass with the slope 1 through the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm.
After the Rotate to same deviation function has been performed, the
line should also pass through the center of the bore on the right. CALYPSO rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore until
the line touches the center of the bore on the right.

Rotating the reference axis


1 Make sure that the necessary requirements [ 338] for rotating the
reference axis have been met.
2 In the list of prerequisites, click the Base / Start Alignment icon.
3 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
4 Select the Change current base alignment or Change current
start alignment option and click OK.
5 Click the Special button.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen. Once the prerequisites are met, additional options and input fields will appear in
the upper part for Reference axis setting in secondary reference.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-41

Setting the base / start alignment

Enter
distance

6 Select the desired option:


Rotate to Distance
Rotate to origin line
Rotate to same deviation
7 Rotate to Distance: Enter the distance to be achieved by rotating (important: pay attention to sign).
- or In Rotate to origin line or same deviation: Enter the coordinates of the
point through which the line should pass.
8 Click twice OK.
You can observe the rotation of the base alignment directly in the CAD
window.

Loading a secondary alignment for a


base / start alignment
Purpose of loading a secondary alignment
You can take the secondary alignment for a base alignment/start alignment from another base alignment/start alignment.
Example of application

This can be necessary in the following case, for example: During the
alignment of a workpiece, the primary and the tertiary alignment is to be
measured on the workpiece. The secondary alignment, however, is to be
measured on a fixture that is no longer accessible after clamping down
the workpiece.
As a result, the feature for the secondary alignment can no longer be
measured as soon as the workpiece is clamped onto the fixture.
The base / start alignment can nonetheless be created. To do this, measure the secondary alignment in a separate measurement plan before the
CNC run. You then define the base alignment / start alignment of the

3-42

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

workpiece initially without secondary alignment, taking it instead from


the existing base / start alignment of the separate measurement plan.
To do this, apply the Load alignment for secondary reference
function in the Special Functions window for the base alignment /
start alignment.

Particular aspects when loading the secondary


alignment
Prerequisites

You can load the secondary reference for a base alignment/start alignment from another base alignment/start alignment under the following
circumstances:

The current base/start alignment is a standard coordinate system (no


alternative alignment method such as 3D Best Fit, RPS Method, P6
Method).

The primary alignment in the current base/start alignment has already


been defined.

The secondary alignment in the current base/start alignment has not


yet been defined.

NOTICE
Both the Load alignment for secondary reference and the Reference axis setting in secondary reference options thus cancel
one another.
Measurement plan already exists

Also in an already existing measurement plan it is possible to load the


secondary reference of the base/start alignment from another base/start
alignment. This, however, is only practical if the following conditions are
met:

The primary alignments of the current and stored base/start alignment


are approximately the same.

Otherwise, the nominal data is offset so much by the transformation after


the loading of the secondary reference that no normal measurement is
possible any longer.
NOTICE
It is not admissible to enter just any base alignment as secondary alignment and then do the qualifying of the alignment thereafter.
Sequential order during
adjustment

If the workpiece on the machine has been displaced and it thereby becomes necessary to re-qualify the base/start alignment, you must always
qualify the base/start alignment first and load its secondary reference afterward. Not until afterward do you redefine the base/start alignment in
which you want to load the secondary reference.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-43

Setting the base / start alignment

How the new axis is determined when loading


the secondary reference
How does CALYPSO determine the new coordinate axis of the base/start
alignment from the existing base/start alignment?
Determining the space
axis

The first coordinate axis of the new base/start alignment that has already
been determined is compared with the six directions of the axes from the
existing base/start alignment. Among these six axis directions, the axis is
found that forms the smallest angle to the new primary alignment.

Stored
alignment

Z
Y

Spatial
orientation
and origin in
Z

Origin in
X and Y

The determined axis direction of the existing system forms, together with
the primary alignment of the new base/start alignment, an angle smaller
than or equal to 45.
For the secondary alignment, one of the two other axes of the existing
base/start alignment is used:
nearest direction of the existing system

-X

-Y

-Z

axis of existing system used for secondary reference

It is now important for the new coordinate system to know for which axis
direction (in the new coordinate system) the axis of the existing system
determined above is to be used:
primary axis of the new system

the existing axis becomes an axis in the new system

The primary direction (of the new alignment) is found in the first line, the
secondary axis is below it.

3-44

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Loading the alignment for the secondary


reference
For a new base alignment/start alignment that is to be created, you can
take the secondary alignment from another base alignment/start alignment.
Conditions:
A base/start alignment exists whose secondary alignment is the
same as the desired secondary alignment of the new base/start
alignment.
The secondary reference for the new base/start alignment has not
yet been defined.
1 Determine the primary alignment of the new base/start alignment.
2 Determine the tertiary alignment of the new base/start alignment.
3 In the list of prerequisites, click the Base / Start Alignment icon.
4 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
5 Select the Change current base alignment or Change current
start alignment option and click OK.
6 Click the Special button.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen. Once the prerequisites are met, additional input fields will appear in the upper part
under Alignment for secondary reference.

7 Tick the Load alignment for secondary reference check box.


8 Select here the base alignment/start alignment whose secondary reference you want to accept for the current base alignment/start alignment.
9 Click OK.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-45

Setting the base / start alignment

If the base alignment file cannot be loaded, a remark is displayed.


If CALYPSO is in CNC mode, the stop light is switched over to red
instead, and the CNC run is discontinued. A line is displayed in the
status monitor with a corresponding error text.
10Click OK.

Particular aspects when loading the secondary


reference
When you want to use the Load alignment for secondary reference, observe a few special aspects.

Coordination with the rotate special function


In case you have loaded the secondary alignment from another base/start
alignment and, for example, you rotate the system by the primary alignment, the secondary axis of the resulting base/start system will point in a
direction other than the loaded secondary axis.
As soon as the base alignment is calculated a second time, the axis for
the secondary alignment can no longer be determined correctly.
The rotate function is not blocked, however, because, e.g., rotating
around the axis of the secondary alignment may be useful.

Other requirements
The following situation is presented as an example: There are two measurement plans one, to measure the plane rotation on a fixture, and a
second, to measure the workpiece on the fixture.
If the base alignment of the plane rotation was re-qualified (e.g., because
the fixture was moved or turned about) and now it is switched over to
the other measurement plan, a very difficult situation develops.
The plane rotation was changed but the base alignment of the workpiece
is still in the same position. This can be compared to the following: A
workpiece was defined on the machine by probings (with complete base
alignment). Now the workpiece is turned about and a new plane is measured. This plane is now replaced by the feature of the current plane rotation of the base alignment. The consequence is: When the base alignment window is opened and closed again, all nominal geometries are
calculated again (shifting of the CAD model) due to the fact that the
actual features of the primary and tertiary alignments were not likewise
measured again.
To compensate for this, the base alignment is calculated from the nominal
geometries again when the base alignment window opens. If the stored
alignment has not changed, the nominal base alignment has a zero vector
and a universal matrix. If it has changed, however, the difference between
the existing alignment and the new alignment in relation to the current
alignment is added and saved.

3-46

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

The calculation and saving of the base alignment when opening the window is only carried out in the case where the Load alignment for
secondary reference function is activated.

Calculating a base alignment back to the


CAD origin
For certain applications in the automobile industry (especially for horizontal-arm machines), a base alignment is needed whose origin coincides
with the origin of the CAD model. For this purpose, CALYPSO offers the
Keep CAD Origin function that takes a base alignment that has already
been calculated back to the coordinate system of the CAD model.
Additionally, special automatic functions (offset, rotate by an angle and
rotate by coordinates) are calculated that compensate a shift or a wrong
turn.
Conditions:
The base alignment exists already and possesses the correct alignment.
1 Click the Base / Start Alignment icon in the measurement plan
area on the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Select the Change current base alignment option and click
OK.
3 Click the Special button.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Tick the Keep original alignment from CAD model check box.
CALYPSO calculates the special functions (offset, rotate by distances
and rotate by an angle) that are necessary to take the current base
alignment back to the CAD origin and thereby maintain its alignment.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-47

Setting the base / start alignment

The names of the special functions calculated are listed. Besides OK


and Cancel, all buttons and input fields are set to inactive.
Note: If you untick the Keep alignment from CAD model check
box, the calculated special functions remain in the list. The buttons
and input fields are active again.
5 Click twice OK.

Accepting local alignment from the CAD


model
Conditions:
The base alignment exists already and possesses the correct alignment.
1 Click the Base / Start Alignment icon in the measurement plan
area on the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Select the Change current base alignment option and click
OK.
3 Click the Special button.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.

4 Tick the Accept local alignment from the CAD model check
box.
5 Move the mouse over the CAD model in the CAD window.
Every time you move over a local alignment in the CAD model, the
name, the offset and the rotation are displayed at the position in the
CAD window.
6 Click with the mouse to transfer the desired alignment to the window.
7 Click twice OK.

3-48

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Deleting a base alignment


You can delete a part alignment when you no longer need it.
1 Select File Delete Base Alignment.
2 Select the names of the base alignments you would like to delete in
the list.
3 Click OK.
Only the base alignments as such are deleted, not the references and
features on which they are based.
NOTICE
If you delete a base alignment, you must define new part alignments. See
Adapting a base / start alignment [ 327].

Setting a base alignment to zero


If you want to undo the settings made in defining a base alignment to
set it up again, set it to zero.
1 Select Resources Utilities Set Base Alignment to
zero.

Alternative alignment methods


Overview of alternative alignment methods
Apart from the standard method (see Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324]), you have a choice of four other alignment methods:

3D Best Fit

RPS Alignment (RPS 321 or RPS Freeform)

Six Points

3D Best Fit
The 3D Best Fit can be used to calculate the alignment for workpieces for
which no clear references have been defined. This is a situation frequently
encountered in free form measurements.
The 3D best fit is a method that delivers the best possible fit between any
number of points or geometric elements and their specified geometry.
Number of points

Description

at least 1,

The errors between specified and actual points are squared and added up. The base alignment is changed until this value is minimized.

no upper limit

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-49

Setting the base / start alignment

If you select the Best fit on CAD model option, the actual points are
first aligned with the nominal points (according to Gauss) and the perpendicular base points of the actual points aligned in this way are then
calculated on the CAD model. Finally, the actual points are aligned with
the perpendicular base points (according to Gauss).

RPS Method
CALYPSO supports two RPS methods: RPS 321 and RPS Freeform.

RPS 321
The RPS 321 method is not suitable for free form measurements. RPS is
short for Reference Point System. RPS alignment is based on the 3-2-1
rule.
Number of points

Description

at least 3,

A coordinate (e.g. Z) is fixed 3 times

maximum 6

A coordinate (e.g. Y) is fixed 2 times

A coordinate (e.g. X) is fixed 1 time

RPS alignment is usually an iterative process performed with the aid


of a loop.
Unlike other methods, RPS alignment is based on the points that are
specified in the drawing of the workpiece.
Alignment is therefore subject to rules and is not wholly user-definable.
One of the advantages is therefore that different results obtained with a
given workpiece are comparable because they are all based on the same
system of coordinates.

RPS Freeform
Contrary to the RPS 321 method, the RPS Freeform method is suitable for
free form measurements. It uses the same algorithms as the HOLOS program and is primarily used for measuring body panels for motor vehicles.
Number of points

Description

at least 1,

The errors between specified and actual points are squared and added up. The base alignment is changed until this value is minimized.

no upper limit

The RPS Freeform method has the same function as the 3D best fit according to nominal planes. The main planes of the coordinate system
which was selected in the RPS alignment represent the nominal planes.
If more than one direction is defined for a feature, the same feature is
called several times in each direction.
Best fit according to
nominal plane

The normal 3D best fit is a method that delivers the best possible iterative
fit between the actual points and the nominal points.

3-50

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

For the Best fit according to nominal plane, the actual points are first
projected onto the nominal plane. The nominal plane is defined via the
nominal point and the normal. Then the best possible fit between the
actual points and the nominal points takes place. The perpendicular base
points are recalculated with each iteration step.

P6 Method
The P6 Method is particularly suitable for the alignment of tubes.
Number of points

Description

exactly 3

The first point defines the origin in X, Y and Z.


The first and the second point define the main axis.
The third point defines rotation about this primary axis.

Using an alternative alignment method


Performing a 3D best fit or an alignment according to
RPS or P6

1 To add a new coordinate system to the measurement plan, select the


alignment method from the Resources Utilities submenus and
double-click the icon added to the list of characteristics.
- or To create a new part alignment, click the Base / Start Alignment
icon in the list of the prerequisites and then select the desired procedure from the list.
The definition templates for all these methods are very similar in appearance. The illustration shows the 3D best fit, called from the prerequisites (base alignment).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-51

Setting the base / start alignment

Select also the type of alignment for the RPS alignment: RPS 321 or
RPS Freeform.
The dialog box for RPS alignment has X, Y and Z check boxes that you
must use to define which feature constrains which degrees of freedom.
2 Click Select Features to define the features you want to use for
alignment.
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen.

3-52

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Setting the base / start alignment

Here all of the features that have been defined will be displayed.
3 Select the features you need for alignment (multiple selection with the
Ctrl key).
The features you select in this way are listed in the definition template
for alignment.
4 If you have to define reference features in addition to those already
listed:
Click the line of the feature for which you want to define a reference.
An arrow appears, indicating the active line.
Click Select References.
In the selection window, click the feature you want to define as a
reference.
Click OK.
5 If you want to fit actual values to nominal positions as part of alignment, define the nominal position in the columns headed Nominal
X, Nominal Y and Nominal Z.
6 The next step in RPS alignment is to define the fixation direction indicated in the drawing for each feature you selected (X, Y or Z check
box).
7 If (during alignment with 3D best fit) you want to perform the best fit
on the CAD model, tick the Best fit on CAD model check box.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-53

Setting the base / start alignment

Best fit is then a three-step procedure:


The actual points are fitted in the conjugated nominal points according to Gauss.
The perpendicular base points of the fitted actual points on the
CAD model are calculated.
The actual points are fitted in the conjugated perpendicular base
points according to Gauss.
8 Select the alignment method to be used in the CNC run. For more
information, see Definition template (Alignment) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
9 If you are ready to execute the alignment you just defined, click the
Execute Manual Run Now button.
CALYPSO will step you through the alignment procedure and prompt
you to take probings (see Controlling the manual run [ 78]).
10Click OK.
See Example: Loop for alignment to RPS [ 646].

3-54

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Prerequisites for the rotary table

Prerequisites for the rotary table


CALYPSO makes it possible to use an installed or mobile rotary table actively or passively.
If a rotary table is logged in and activated for the measurement plan in
the default settings, the icon for the rotary table appears in the list of
prerequisites. The bar next to the icon is red as long as no valid rotary
table axis has been determined.
Click the button to open the Rotary Table window.
Rotary Table
RT activated for this meas. plan

Rotate Now

Passive RT

Activation for CNC run

RT prealignment at start of run


RT home position

0.00

RT axis definition for this Measurement Plan


Load existing RT axis
Measure RT axis

Align part mechanically to


Set To

By Eye / Manually
Help Position

0.00

Normal from Feature


Manual
RT clearance paths
Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center
Auto

Rotate to CMM side

0.00

*
Base Alignment Axis

Auto

Rotate to CMM side

+X

and set RT position to


OK

Retract to current side


Retract to top
Mass Moment of Inertia (MMI)
Redefine at every CNC start

0.00

*
*

Move clear during RT rotation

Define MMI now


Lower RT at end of CNC

Reset

The position and the use of the rotary table for the measurement plan
can be determined in this and in other windows. The necessary prerequisites are described in the following sections of the chapter Rotary table:

Logging in the rotary table [ 127]

Positioning the rotary table manually [ 1235]

Qualifying the rotary table axis [ 1215]

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-55

Defining the clearance planes

Defining the clearance planes


Use of the clearance planes
Clearance planes enable CMMs with CNC capability to move styli around
the workpiece without risk of collision. These clearance planes form together a safety cube that acts as a kind of imaginary box around the
workpiece and clamping device, protecting the stylus against collision.
Additionally, to avoid collisions with other workpieces or objects on the
CMM table, you can define an outer clearance plane (Defining the
outer clearance planes [ 671]).

Components of the clearance planes


The safety cube is composed of the clearance planes. It acts as a kind of
imaginary box around the workpiece and clamping device, protecting
the stylus against collision.
Names of the clearance
planes

The names of the clearance planes, of which the safety cube is composed,
begin with the abbreviation CP, followed by the direction to be protected.
For example, CP +X. The names of clearance planes that are additionally
defined when a rotary table is used consist of the abbreviation RTCP and
the direction to be protected. For example, RTCP +X.
Do not make the clearance planes unnecessarily large, because in some
cases this could lead to unfavorable routing or even collisions.
Any time the part alignment is changed such that a new origin or axis
alignment is defined, you must redefine the clearance planes. Failure to do
so may result in collisions with the part.

Prerequisites

The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can define the
clearance planes are as follows:

All styli of the current stylus system must be qualified. See Qualify-

ing styli manually [ 1134]

Method

3-56

The size of the probe must be defined in the default settings under
Extras Settings CMM (on the Probe index card).

There are various methods for defining the clearance planes:

You can define the corners of the cube with the CMM [ 357].

You can type in the X, Y and Z locations of the corners manually [ 358].

If you do not have a CMM position (or I-POS) button on your CMM
control console (which allows you to record the current position of

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining the clearance planes

the stylus), then you can use the CMM to probe the outside edges
of the part itself as its clearance planes [ 359].

If you use a CAD model, you can generate the clearance planes
automatically [ 360]. All you have to do is tell CALYPSO how far
you want the clearance planes to be from the workpiece.

These methods are described in the following sections.


Block Edges

Blocking edges is a way of further restricting stylus travel without the need
to change the size of the clearance planes. This can be useful, for example,
if you have two or more workpieces positioned on the table or the design
of the clamping device is such that it could cause a collision at an edge.
The new route is calculated automatically. See Blocking individual
edges of the clearance planes [ 361].

Defining the clearance planes with the


CMM
Defining the corner points of the clearance planes with
the CMM
Conditions:
Your CMM control console has a button that can be used to confirm the current position of the stylus.
1 Click the Clearance Planes icon in the measurement plan area on
the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Under Alignment, select the reference alignment for the coordinates.
The side areas of the safety cube are aligned according to this reference alignment.
3 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside the
top rear right corner of the workpiece (position 1):

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-57

Defining the clearance planes

(1)

(2)

4 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save
the current position.
5 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside the
opposing diagonal (bottom front left corner) of the workpiece (position 2).
6 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save
the current position.
7 Click OK.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features? message is displayed.
8 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.

Defining the clearance planes manually


If you want to define the corners of the clearance planes manually, you
must enter the x, y and z coordinates for two corners.
1 Click the Clearance Planes icon in the measurement plan area on
the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Under Alignment, select the reference alignment for the coordinates.
The side areas of the safety cube are aligned according to this reference alignment.

3-58

3 Type the coordinate values into the X, Y and Z boxes.


61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining the clearance planes

4 Click OK.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features? message is displayed.
5 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.

Defining the clearance planes by probing


If you want to define the two corners of the clearance planes by probing,
you have to define the X, Y and Z coordinates by probing.
The clearance planes generated by this strategy are very close to the workpiece.
In order to avoid the risk of damaging a stylus, you should set a clearance
distance of at least 10 mm (see Moving the approach position closer to
the feature [ 672]).
(1)

z y
x

(2)

Defining the corners of the clearance planes


1 Click the Clearance Planes icon in the measurement plan area on
the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Under Alignment, select the reference alignment for the coordinates.
The side areas of the safety cube are aligned according to this reference alignment.
3 Define the first corner (1).
You do this by probing the workpiece in Z, X and Y, consecutively.
CALYPSO automatically enters the values in each field in turn and
highlights the next field so that you can determine the value by probing.
Note: If a corner is inaccessible, you can move to the corresponding
position on the clearance plane, select the stylus, highlight the appropriate input field and use the intermediate position.
4 Define the second corner (3).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-59

Defining the clearance planes

The procedure is the same as in step 3, but you probe in the opposite
direction.
5 Click OK.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features? message is displayed.
6 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.

Generating the clearance planes


automatically
All you have to do is specify the clearance distance (offset) in millimeters.
Conditions:
The CAD file of the workpiece is open in the CAD window.
1 Click the Clearance Planes icon in the measurement plan area on
the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Under Alignment, select the reference alignment for the coordinates.
The side areas of the safety cube are aligned according to this reference alignment.
3 Click Clearance Plane from CAD model.
4 Type in the offset in millimeters (e.g. 10) and click OK.
The computed values appear in the input fields. The clearance planes
appear around the CAD model.
5 Click OK.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features? message is displayed.
6 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The Clearance Plane icon is now green.

Testing the clearance planes


CALYPSO allows you to validate the clearance planes.

3-60

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining the clearance planes

NOTICE
Check that you have defined all the clearance planes (depending on the
geometry of the workpiece, the CMM might not be able to reach each
plane directly).

Testing drive to a clearance plane


1 Click the Clearance Planes icon in the measurement plan area on
the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Highlight the clearance plane of your choice (e.g. +Z) in the Clearance
Plane window.
3 Click Test Drive To The Selected Clearance Plane.
The CMM moves to the clearance plane.
Note: The stylus will always first travel out in the direction of the +Z
axis, before the CMM moves in the selected direction (e.g. +X).
4 If necessary redefine the value.
5 Select, if necessary, the Coordinate system again.
6 Click OK.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features? message is displayed.
7 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.

Blocking individual edges of the


clearance planes
When you block an edge of the clearance planes in this way you prohibit the CMM from moving along the edge. It is advisable to block
edges in the following cases:

You have positioned more than one workpiece on the measuring table.

The clamping device could cause a collision at an edge.

Under these circumstances, blocking the edges can prevent collisions


without the need to change the size of the clearance planes.

Blocking edges of the clearance planes


1 Select Plan Navigation Block edges.
The Block Edges dialog box is opened.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-61

Defining the clearance planes

Check box for


blocking an edge

Note: The bottom edges (the edges of the face on the table) are always blocked. The -Y or +Y edge is also blocked if the measuring machine is of the horizontal-arm type. You cannot revoke these settings.
2 Tick the check boxes for the edges you want to block.
3 Click OK.
The edges you selected are blocked with immediate effect.

3-62

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing printout settings

Editing printout settings


On the Measurement Plan tab, you can define the use of multiple
printouts under Multiple Printouts. In addition, you can define the
contents and representation of multiple printouts, i.e. you define the basic printouts and Basic Reports to be included in the multiple printout and
the desired output sequence.
The settings are defined in the Definition of Multiple Printouts
dialog box:

You can find more details under Creating multiple printouts [ 810].

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-63

Working with measurement plan editors

Working with measurement plan editors


Overview of the measurement plan
editors
The measurement plan editor provides you with a quick and easy way of
checking and, if necessary, changing important measurement plan settings and values. You can choose whether to apply your changes to the
entire measurement plan (global) or to selected features only.
There are two separate editors, one for features and one for characteristics:

Measurement plan editor for features [ 364]

Measurement plan editor for characteristics [ 365]

Measurement plan editor for features


This editor is used to edit the features of the measurement plan.

This is where you can check and, if necessary, change general settings
for features. The settings in question are feature-related definitions
and settings applicable to the entire measurement plan, e.g. those
relating to measurement strategies, styli and clearances in a CNC run.
Here you can overwrite the definitions made in the default settings
for the current measurement plan.

Additionally, you can have the nominal data (values or formulas) of


the features displayed and edit them for individual or several features.
You thus overwrite the definitions made in the definition templates
of the features.

Open the measurement plan editor for features by using the icon in the
list of prerequisites or via Resources Features Settings Editor.

3-64

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Working with measurement plan editors

Measurement Plan Editor Features


from higher setting (Measurement Plan/Group)

MAN-CNC-Modus

Not Available On System


Travel

Accept for:
Measurement Plan

Probing

selected features

Stylus System
Units

Set To

Manual Point Masking

Activate point masking after time interval

MAN CNC Mode

Time interval after scanning start [sec]

Setup Mode

Time interval before scanning end [sec]


Activate point masking according to the number

Printer

Number after scanning start

CMM Parameters

Number before scanning end

Geometry (Evaluation Settings)


Geometry (Nominal Data)

Plane

Warning Limits

Plane

Optical Settings

Circle
Circle
Circle
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Circle
Circle
2D Line
Plane
Cone
Circle

OK

Tabular editor

Cancel

Help

For some attributes, the editor is in table format which enables you to
edit the settings quickly and easily.
For more information, see Working with the tabular editor [ 611]
and Measurement plan editor features in the CALYPSO dialog reference
in the Online Help.

Measurement plan editor for


characteristics
This editor is used to edit the characteristics of the measurement plan.

This is where you can check and, if necessary, change general settings
for characteristics.
Here you can overwrite the definitions made in the default settings
for the current measurement plan.

Additionally, you can have the nominal data (values and formulas,
geometrical features and datums) of the characteristics displayed and
edit them for individual or several characteristics.
You thus overwrite the definitions made in the definition templates
of the characteristics.

Select Resources Characteristics Settings Editor to open the


measurement plan editor for characteristics.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-65

Working with measurement plan editors

Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics


** = from higher setting (Measurement Plan/Group)

Warning Limit in %

!! = Not Available On System


Printout

Accept for:

Form Plot

Measurement Plan

selected features

Characteristic to Statistic
Mode for nominal values
Tolerance Mode

Show formulas

Units

Set To

Type

Characteristics (Evaluation Settings)

Characteristics (Nominal Data)

Z-value1

Angle One 1

W1

Angle Two 1

W2

Angle of lnclination1

TiltAng

Angle of Rotation1

RotAng

Diameter1

Diameter Two1

D2

Radius1

Radius Two1

R2

Width1

Width

Length1

Length

Value

OK

Tabular editor

Cancel

Help

For some attributes, the editor is in table format which enables you to
edit the settings quickly and easily.
For more information, see Working with the tabular editor [ 611]
and Measurement plan editor characteristics in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.

3-66

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Temperature compensation

Temperature compensation
Purpose of temperature compensation
You can configure CALYPSO to consider the temperature-related expansion/contraction of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of the CMM
when taking the measurements. Additionally, you may establish temperature limits that trigger a warning when going above or below the limits
at the start of the CNC run.

Temperature compensation is of great significance for precision of the


measurements, since the nominal values are generally based on a workpiece and ambient temperature of 20C, and the different materials expand/contract to different degrees as the temperature varies.
Therefore, the expansion/contraction must be compensated in accordance with the respective material, if the workpiece cannot be brought to
the reference temperature.

CALYPSO receives the information about the temperature, depending


on your CMM's equipment, from sensors on the scales or temperature
sensors on the workpiece, through probing with a temperature probe,
from a file or by simply manually entering the temperature value.

In any case, you must enter the coefficients of expansion for the
workpiece materials directly.
Most manuals on materials science give the coefficients of expansion.
The following table shows the coefficients of expansion of certain
common materials:

Material

Coefficient (micrometers/C)

Aluminum (2024-T3)

22.7

Aluminum (6061-T6)

24.3

Aluminum (7079-T6)

24.7

Cast iron

11.7

Copper

16.6

Magnesium (HK31A-H24)

25.2

Nickel

13.0

Steel (AISI C1020)

15.1

Steel (AISI 304)

17.8

Carbon steel

11.3

Titanium (B 120VCA)

9.4

NOTICE
Since the coefficient of expansion depends on the alloy, the values may
vary slightly from one table to another.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-67

Temperature compensation

Thermal plate bending

Differences in temperature above and below the granite plate of a CMM


can cause a slight curvature of the plate. In high-precision CMMs, the
thermal plate bending effect is also compensated.
The compensation for thermal plate bending of the measuring table is
automatically activated as soon as CALYPSO calculates the temperature
compensation for the CMM scales. In this case, the plate will be simulated
by a beam model.

How does CALYPSO learn the coefficients of expansion?


The coefficients of expansion must be entered manually. If the workpiece
material does not change, just once per measurement plan (Entering
temperatures manually [ 376]).
Same workpieces from
different materials

Workpieces from different materials

If you use multiple materials to manufacture the same part, for example
a cast-iron version and an aluminum version, you have two options:

Create two measurement plans that are identical except for the coefficients of expansion for temperature compensation.

Use the same measurement plan for both versions, but always remember to enter the coefficient of expansion for the respective material before starting a new series.

If various parts of a workpiece consist of different materials, you must


enter the different coefficients of expansion for the corresponding features in the Measurement Plan Editor Features [ 68].
CALYPSO calculates the correct results for each individual feature. However, results for the calculation of which values of features with different
coefficients of expansion are used may be inaccurate.

How does CALYPSO learn the temperatures?


There are several ways for CALYPSO to learn the actual temperatures:

The CMM has temperature sensors on the scales in the X, Y and Z


directions or on the workpiece. In this case, you need only start the
temperature compensation (Activating the temperature compensation [ 369]).
Usually, the temperature is measured directly before the probing of
the first feature takes place. If you use the readWPTemperature PCM
command in the input parameters of the measurement plan, you can
bring this measurement forward.

3-68

Have the CMM do a temperature probing of the workpiece (only on


CMMs with a VAST probe). To do so, you must configure the temperature probing (Configuring automatic temperature probing
(CNC) [ 371]).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Temperature compensation

Prior to running the measurement plan, you read the temperature


from a file or via a dialog and overwrite any existing values (Determining the workpiece temperature externally [ 375]).

The CMM has neither a temperature sensor nor temperature stylus.


In this case, enter the temperature(s) of the workpiece or scales that
you measured or determined yourself (Entering temperatures manually [ 376]).

Activating the temperature


compensation
If the temperature of the workpiece to be measured or the room temperature is not 20C (68F),you can only measure accurately with temperature compensation activated.
1 Click the Temperature Compensation icon on the Measurement Plan tab.
The Temperature Compensation window appears on the screen.

2 Tick the Temperature Compensation on/off check box.


3 Set under Part temperature of sensor which temperature
sensor should determine the workpiece temperature.
Combine several numbers using a plus sign +. Specify ranges
using a hyphen -, e.g. 2-5.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-69

Temperature compensation

Here you can also enter a formula.


4 Click the icon to display the current sensor values for the workpiece
temperature in a window.
5 Enter the correct coefficient of expansion under Workpiece.

Note: If the workpiece consists partly of other materials, enter the coefficients of expansion for the corresponding features in the Measurement plan editor features.
6 Tick the Warning if workpiece temperature over ... or under ... check box if such a warning should be displayed at CNC start,
and enter the upper and lower limits for the temperature.
7 Tick the Warning, if the difference between workpiece
temperature and qualification temperature of the stylus
used is greater than ... check box if such a warning should be
displayed at CNC start, and enter the maximum admissible difference.
8 Press OK to confirm.
Once you have activated temperature compensation, this means the following:

If your CMM has automatic temperature sensors, the measured temperatures will be used automatically to correct the measurements.

If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors, CALYPSO


will automatically display the Temperature Compensation window before you run a measurement plan. You can then perform or
configure a temperature probing or enter the measured temperatures
yourself.

Determining the temperatures by


manual probing
If your CMM is equipped with the VAST probe and a stylus with temperature sensor (temperature stylus), you can use CALYPSO to determine the
precise workpiece temperature by probing.
1 Click the Temperature Compensation icon on the Measurement Plan tab.
The Temperature Compensation window appears on the screen.
2 Tick Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the Temperature probing on/off check box as well (if the temperature
stylus has already been selected, both check boxes are ticked automatically).
The Probe with temperature stylus at one or several points on the
part! prompt will appear.
3 If the temperature stylus has not yet been selected: select it now.

3-70

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Temperature compensation

4 If the temperature stylus has not yet been qualified: qualify it now by
probing the reference sphere once in line with the shaft.
For the temperature probing, you only need a rough, not a highly precise qualification of the stylus (Qualifying the styli [ 1125]). To
do this, select the Manual mode and, under Geometry, the Temperature stylus option.
5 Probe the workpiece with the temperature stylus.
In a temperature measurement, the probe travels until it detects contact with the workpiece and then another 3 mm against the measuring
force.
After the first probing, an entry called Temperature probing will
appear in the list of features.
6 Probe other points on the workpiece.
After each probing, the temperature and the location of the point will
be determined and displayed.
The data regarding the location of the points will be stored in the
technology list for the Temperature probing feature. You can edit
the data (Configuring automatic temperature probing
(CNC) [ 371]).
The measured temperatures will be determined and displayed in the
Temperature Compensation window.
7 Press OK to confirm.
CALYPSO calculates the average of all of the measured temperatures
and enters this value in the Temperature Compensation window. This value will then be used (instead of the temperature from
any possibly present temperature sensor) for the temperature compensation for the workpiece.
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be
included in the default printout.

Configuring automatic temperature


probing (CNC)
If your CMM is equipped with the VAST probe and a stylus with a temperature sensor (temperature stylus), you can let the system perform a
Temperature probing automatically in the CNC run.
Temperature probing at
the beginning of a run

If automatic temperature probing is enabled (Activating the temperature compensation [ 369]), CALYPSO will begin probing the appropriate points on the workpiece with the temperature stylus at the start of
the CNC run (in other words before the CNC alignment) and will thus
determine the temperature of the workpiece to a high degree of precision.

Adding a temperature
probing feature

The simplest way to add a Temperature probing feature to the measurement plan is to perform a manual temperature probing (Determin61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-71

Temperature compensation

ing the temperatures by manual probing [ 370]). A Temperature probing entry with the probed points will be automatically added to the list
of features.
The Temperature probing feature added to the measurement plan can
be edited like any other feature; for example, you can change the point
probed if necessary. You can also copy or delete it. In this manner, you
can add several temperature probed points to a measurement plan.
NOTICE
At the beginning of a CNC run, the system will only perform the Temperature probing feature that is entered under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.

Configuring the temperature probing in a measurement plan


1 Click the Temperature Compensation icon on the Measurement Plan tab.
The Temperature Compensation window appears on the screen.
2 Tick Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the Temperature probing on/off check box as well (if the temperature
stylus has already been selected, both check boxes are ticked automatically).
The Probe with temperature stylus at one or several points on the
part! prompt will appear.
3 Cancel and click the Switch to Feature Menu button next to
Feature.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. In contrast to the
usual window for selecting features, this one only lists the Temperature probing features for selection.
(If the measurement plan does not yet contain any Temperature
probing features, the New option will be preset and the Edit check
box will be ticked.)

3-72

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Temperature compensation

4 To activate the desired Temperature probing feature, select it and


confirm with OK.
The selected feature will now be shown under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.
5 To edit a specific Temperature probing feature, select it, tick the
Edit check box and confirm with OK.
This opens the Temperature probing definition template of the
feature.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-73

Temperature compensation

To define the probing strategy, click Strategy and specify the


probing method in the Strategy window.
Here you can define a list of points, preset probing and intermediate
points, define CMM steps with and without probing and insert programmed stops. .
Furthermore, you can edit the Clearance data.
With OK, you will be returned to the definition template.
6 Press OK to confirm.
The selected and edited Temperature probing feature appears under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.

3-74

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Temperature compensation

Temperature probing
during a CNC start

At the start of the CNC run, the temperature probing is conducted automatically in accordance with the selected feature. CALYPSO calculates
the average of all of the measured temperatures and enters this value in
the Temperature Compensation window. This value will then be
used (instead of the temperature from any possibly present temperature
sensor) for the temperature compensation for the workpiece.

Warnings when temperature limits are exceeded

If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the workpiece temperature limits have been exceeded, a warning will be issued accordingly
before the run begins. You may decide either to cancel or to continue the
run.
If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the difference between
the qualification temperature and the current stylus temperature is exceeded, a warning will be issued accordingly before the run begins. You
may decide either to cancel or to continue the run.

Printout

All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be included in the default printout.

Determining the workpiece temperature


externally
You can determine yourself the workpiece temperature for temperature
compensation outside CALYPSO and transfer it to CALYPSO by means of
a PCM function.
As required (e.g. for testing), you can read the value to be used from a
file or enter it via a dialog:

Reading the workpiece temperature from a file or a dialog


1 Activate temperature compensation in the Temperature Compensation window.
2 Use the setWPTemperature(temperatur) command in the measurement plan defaults. Enter the desired temperature in C for temperatur.
The following program code of the measurement plan defaults shows,
by way of example, the use of the PCM function:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-75

Temperature compensation

// DEFAULT DIALOG
//TEMP_VALUE=inquireNumber("Workpiece Temp. =")
// or
// LOAD FILE
ALIST=readListFile("wp_temp_value.txt")
// Access to the 1st value of the list parameter
TEMP_STRING=getParameterNamed(ALIST,1)
// Conversion of string to number
TEMP_VALUE=val(TEMP_STRING)
//
// DEFAULT OF TEMP. VALUE
setWPTemperature(TEMP_VALUE)

Entering temperatures manually


If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors, you must
enter the actual temperatures. This is done in the following two situations:

If you have activated temperature compensation and your CMM does


not have automatic temperature sensors, CALYPSO will display the
Temperature Compensation window before you run a measurement plan.
If the coefficients of expansion and temperatures displayed are correct, simply click OK. If not, enter the actual temperatures and start
the measurement plan.

Note: While the measurement plan is running, you cannot change the
temperature values.

If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors and you
do not conduct a temperature probing, you must activate the temperature compensation before starting the measurement plan. At this
point, it would be convenient to go ahead an enter the actual temperatures manually.

1 Click the Temperature Compensation icon in the measurement


plan area on the Measurement Plan tab.
The Temperature Compensation window appears on the screen.

3-76

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Temperature compensation

2 Tick the Temperature Compensation on/off check box.


3 If the workpiece temperature is not exactly 20C, click in the Temperature input field under Part and enter the actual temperature
(e.g. the temperature of the room in which the workpiece was stored).
4 If the workpiece is made of a material with an expansion coefficient
different from the one specified, click in the Coefficient input field
under Part and enter the correct coefficient of expansion for the
workpiece.

Note: If the workpiece consists partly of other materials, enter the coefficients of expansion for the corresponding features in the Measurement plan editor features.
5 If the temperature in the room which contains the CMM is not exactly
20C (68F), click the Scales fields and enter the temperatures from
the X, Y and Z scales. (The coefficients of expansion for the scales are
already known to CALYPSO.)
The compensation values are calculated automatically and displayed.
6 Press OK to confirm.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-77

Temperature compensation

Temperature compensation of the base


alignment
Basics about temperature compensation of the
base alignment
CALYPSO compensates the different temperature- and material-related
expansions of the clamping and workpiece. The offset of the base alignment with respect to the clamping is taken into account.
Application

This two-step temperature compensation may be useful in the following


case: Aluminum motor parts remain firmly clamped in the clamping during the entire processing and measurement. The steel clamping has the
ambient temperature (approx. 15 - 37C), but the workpieces may be
heated up to 40C during production. Clamping and workpieces therefore expand to different degrees.

Principle of the two-step


compensation

To compute the different expansions, the base alignment is connected to


the clamping and its offset with respect to the machine alignment is
computed from the expansion of the clamping. The expansion of the
workpiece with regard to the clamping is added and both together form
the total expansion.
The prerequisite is that the workpiece is firmly connected to the clamping
at a certain point. This fixed point, the part reference point, is used to
compute the offset of the base alignment zero point.
If the workpiece and the clamping are tightly screwed together at more
than one point, tensions and deformations may be caused in the workpiece
in the event of larger temperature differences. Measuring errors resulting
from these deformations cannot be compensated by CALYPSO.
The two-step temperature compensation corrects positions of elements on
the workpiece, based on the zero point of the base alignment. Distances
between elements consisting of different materials cannot be corrected by
CALYPSO.

Chronological order

CALYPSO performs the measurements and computations for the temperature compensation at the beginning of the CNC run. Any temperature variations of the workpiece and clamping occurring during the CNC
run will not be considered. This is particularly important if you wish to
measure additional elements manually after the CNC run.

Redefining the base


alignment

When redefining the base alignment, the position of the part reference
point will not be recomputed automatically. You must change the part
reference point yourself after you have redefined the zero point of the
base alignment.

Printouts

Temperature compensation switching is indicated in the default printout.


The temperature compensation of the workpiece or base alignment is
highlighted by means of the comment workpiece or base alignment
in the temperature and correction value specifications.

3-78

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Temperature compensation

If the base alignment temperature is to be shown in the custom printout,


you must edit the printout header. Use the Temp. Base Alignment list
entry in the SYS column.
The base alignment temperature is output in the "temperaturebasesystem" column in the table result file (*_hdr.txt).

Using the temperature compensation of the


base alignment
CALYPSO makes it possible to compensate the different temperatureand material-related expansions of the clamping and workpiece. To do
this, the offset of the base alignment with regard to the clamping is taken
into account.
1 Select Resources Measurement Plan Temperature
Compensation or click the Temperature Compensation icon
in the measurement plan area on the Measurement Plan tab.
The Temperature Compensation window appears on the screen.
2 Activate the temperature compensation of the workpiece, enter the
required specifications and confirm with OK.
3 Select Resources Measurement Plan Base Alignment
or click the Base /Start Alignment icon in the measurement plan
area on the Measurement Plan tab.
4 Activate the Temp. comp. for base alignment tab.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

3-79

Temperature compensation

5 Activate Temperature compensation for different materials and enter the specifications for the temperature compensation of
the clamping.
6 If the part reference point is not the origin of the base alignment, you
must enter the coordinates of the part reference point based on the
base alignment.
7 Press OK to confirm.
The temperature compensation of the base alignment is thus prepared.

CNC run with temperature compensation of the base


alignment
CALYPSO computes the offset of the base alignment during the CNC run
directly after the measurement of the CNC base alignment on the clamping elements.
If necessary, CALYPSO begins by measuring the start or base alignment
manually. If defined, the temperature sensors are then read out and temperature probing is performed. Then CALYPSO switches to the temperature compensation of the clamping. The base alignment is measured
during the CNC run (if Automatic Run is activated). It is only then that
the temperature compensation is switched back to the workpiece and
the base alignment is offset. During the further procedure, CALYPSO uses
the expansion coefficient of the workpiece for temperature compensation.
Rules for measurement

To obtain correct measuring results, all elements of the base alignment


must only be measured on the clamping. During the CNC run, only features may be measured on the workpiece. Otherwise, incorrect measuring
results may be caused as the measuring points are corrected with an incorrect expansion coefficient and an incorrect temperature.

Expansion coefficients for individual features


You can define different coefficients for individual features under
Units Part expansion coefficient in the Measurement Plan
Editor Features. Thus you can take this into account for form characteristics if individual parts of the workpiece consist of another material
(ceramics).
However, this setting is not suitable for the consideration of different
material of the clamping as, in this case, it is not possible to consider the
position of all features and alignments.

3-80

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Chapter

Defining features

.................................................................................................................

This chapter contains:


Defining features ..................................................................................... 42
Details on definition of the features ....................................................... 438
Linking features in constructions ............................................................ 495
Measurement strategies for features .................................................... 4160
Path generation measuring features automatically ............................. 4178

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-1

Defining features

Defining features
Options for defining features
What is a feature?

A feature is an element that is to be measured by the CMM. Features


contain the nominal geometry, which is used for the purpose of evaluating the size, shape and position. The features are assigned to the associated characteristics.
NOTICE
The various methods for defining features in general are listed below.
Details on the individual features (e.g. how many probing points does a
cone need?) can be found in Details on definition of the features [ 438].

Defining features

There are the following ways of defining a feature:

Defining features using automatic feature recognition [ 414]


Probe the feature with the CMM. The automatic feature recognition
will recognize the geometry of the probed feature and will fill the
appropriate definition template.
This procedure is recommended in most cases.
If necessary, you can deactivate the automatic feature recognition for
each feature type (Defining the automatic feature recognition [ 413]).

Defining features using definition templates [ 47]


Enter a feature into the measurement plan and fill the definition template.
This possibility is also quite useful if you have already devised a measurement plan or if programming is to be effected away from the machine.
You only need to define frequently occurring similar features once
when using the Keep Position function.

Deriving features from CAD files [ 415]


Load an existing CAD model and extract its features into your measurement plan.
This possibility is useful if you want to program away from the machine.

You have the option of defining a constructed or theoretical feature


that cannot be probed by the CMM.
A feature of this kind consists of features that have already been defined, e.g. an intersection of two features (see Linking features in
constructions [ 495]).

Importing features

4-2

The additional options of CALYPSO offer further options of importing


features:
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

The DMIS Input Postprocessor option makes it possible to import runs


programmed in DMIS and thereby create a new regular CALYPSO
measurement plan with features (see DMIS Import (option)).

You can use the Characteristic IN option to import features together


with the characteristics from the ProE and UG CAD systems into CALYPSO if they are available in a given format (STEP file in the AP 203
or AP 214 format and ASCII data in the Q-DAS format, specification
of WEPROM) (see Characteristic IN (option)).

Import of Agipp data for manufacturing segments (by means of the


Characteristic IN option) (see Characteristic IN (option)).

NOTICE
Details on the individual features (e.g. how many probing points does a
cone need?) can be found in Details on definition of the features [ 438].
Special measurement
plan features

In addition to the actual features, you can include special measurement


plan features in the list of features:

Branch to GEAR PRO (Holos and Gear additional features [ 479])

HOLOS macros (Holos and Gear additional features [ 479])

XML files for Blade (Turbine Blade additional feature [ 481])

Measurement plan macros (Using macros in the measurement


plan [ 650])

Preassignments for features


You can define various presettings for the features of your measurement
plan.

Strategy defaults
Select Resources Save / Load Defaults to preset strategy details
on the Strategy index card.

Alignment and projection plane


Select Resources Preassignment for New Features to preset
the coordinate system to be used and a projection plane for the relative
measurement, if necessary (Relative measurement [ 425]).

Default settings for the measurement


Proceed with further presettings for features under Extras Settings Measurement:

Definitions of the travel paths

Feature recognition and automatic feature end

Automatic feature default

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-3

Defining features

Measuring method

Point density

Point masking

SCAN limits

Definitions of the nominals and tolerances

Start angle

Form datum

MMC/LMC mode

VAST Navigator

Manual run

For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under System
Set Up (Measurement Methods).

Features index card


Context menu of the Features index card
The features of the measurement plan are displayed in the measurement
plan area on the Features index card. Use this list to manage the features: You can rename, edit, assign parameters and group them.
Context menu

The context menu of the list of features offers the following options:

Menu command

Function

Rename

Another name is assigned to the feature.

Check use of feature se- Shows in which characteristics, constructions or coordinate systems
the feature is used.
lected
References for selected Opens an overview of all defined features, references, parameters
and PCM commands for this feature in the References window.
Features
Edit functions

Cut, Copy, Copy with References, Paste, Paste Contents, Paste with
References

Parameter

Opens the Settings for the input and output parameters of the
feature.

Open

Opens the definition template of the feature.

Details

Displays clearance data, evaluation and references.

Delete

Deletes the feature from the list.

Delete Actuals

Deletes only the actuals of the feature. When using a pattern, you
can restrict the deletion to selected pattern features.

4-4

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

Menu command

Function

Export Points

Opens the Export Points dialog box where you can immediately
export the nominal values, actual values and deviations to a file.

Execute Now!

Starts the measurement of the selected feature.


The CNC-Start button in the action bar of the index card makes it possible to open the Start Measurement window and to start the CNC
run.

About the color-coding of features


On the Features index card, the feature buttons and the color bars next
to them show the type and status of the feature:
Icon

Meaning
Light gray: The feature has not yet been defined fully.

Dark gray: The feature has been defined fully but has not yet been
measured.
Green: The feature has been defined and measured results have been
gathered.
Letter T: The feature is a theoretical element.

Groove symbol: The feature is probed using self-centering probing.

Definition template for features


Contents of the definition template for
features
The definition template includes the following information:

Comment

Measurement strategies

Degrees of freedom for the calculation

Clearance groups

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-5

Defining features

Type of projection (only for the Circle feature)

Mode for nominal value definition

Evaluation of the position data / part alignment

Characteristics and their tolerances

You will find more information under Definition template (Feature) in the
CALYPSO Online Help.
The definition template is shown in the Features window. This illustration shows the definition template for the Circle feature.
Features
Circle 1
Comment

Projection

Strategy

Circle

Projection to nominal

Evaluation...

Clearance Group

Nominal Data

Tolerance For:

Alignment

Options

(Base alignment)

Nominal

Actual

X
Y
Z
D
A1 Y/Z
A2 Y/Z
Space Axis

Length
Start angle
Angle Segment
Sigma

Form

Min

Point no.

OK

4-6

61212-2011002

Points

Point no. Max

Reset

CALYPSO

Defining features

Defining features using definition templates


You can define the feature by entering the suitable values in an empty or
already completed definition template.
This definition methods makes it possible to variably define the feature
by parameterizing, for example, its coordinates and clearance planes/
groups.
1 Click the Features tab.
2 Select the desired feature in the Measure menu.
The feature appears in the measurement plan.
3 Double-click the feature to open its definition template.
4 Enter the nominal values in the input fields.
5 To variably define a nominal value, click the input field and select
Formula in the context menu.
6 Select the Formula entry in the menu of the input field to variably
define the clearance planes/groups.

Defining a feature by probing


You can define the feature by probing.
1 Click the Features tab.
2 Select the desired feature in the Measure menu.
The feature appears in the measurement plan.
3 Double-click the feature to open its definition template.
CALYPSO is ready to record measured values.
4 Probe the feature.
The values that are determined are entered in the definition template.
If you do not wish to probe a feature manually, CALYPSO can take care
of this for you. For more details, please refer to Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178].

Variably defining features


Variable definition of features is possible by means of formulas. To do so,
parameterize the nominal values, the clearance cuboid, the travel paths
and the clearance planes/groups. A variable assignment is useful especially for the application of macros.

Parameters for clearance planes/clearance groups


You can use formulas to define the assignment of clearance planes and
groups in the clearance data and travel paths of a feature. In the formulas,
you must assign a language-neutral designation to the clearance planes
and groups.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-7

Defining features

Element

Name *

Internal
name

Clearance plane

CP +X

SP +X

Clearance group

CG +X

GRP +X

RT clearance plane

RTCP +x

RTSP +X

RT clearance group

RTG +X

RTG +X

Example: If you define param=SP +Z and enter param - then CP +Z


will be displayed.
You do not open the window for formula input in the usual way via the
context menu, but instead by selecting the "Formula" entry in the menu
of the input field. After input of the formula, the background of the input
field will be highlighted in yellow. The value of the parameter will be
computed and displayed if possible. To cancel the entered formula, select
the Input field entry.
NOTICE
The current value of the formula is displayed in the Measurement Plan
Editor Features, but cannot be modified there.

Duplicating features
If features and groups of features of the same form and configuration
exist several times on your workpiece, you do not need to define each
individual feature.
When using the Keep Position function, you define a feature occurring
several times only once, duplicate it and reposition it.
Playing a video

To play a video about duplication of features using Keep position


function, click 4_8Update_Movie27_e/4_8Update_Movie18.htm.
If you assign a new alignment to a feature, the nominal values change as
the feature has different coordinates in the new alignment.

4-8

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

Keep Position

By assigning a new alignment to a feature and ticking the Keep Position box, the nominal values do not change, i.e. the feature is transferred
to the new alignment.

Defining several features at a time


Coordinate systems

To make the preparations:


1 Define an own alignment for each similar configuration of features.
The position of the alignments must be completely identical for each
configuration relative to the features.
2 Assign a useful name to the alignments.

Keeping the nominal values

To define several features only once:


1 Define the corresponding feature via the definition template.
2 Copy it and add it to the list of features as often as it exists on your
workpiece.
3 Switch to the corresponding alignment in each copy of the feature and
activate the Keep Position check box.
4 Save the changes with OK.
The feature always keeps its entered nominal values which now refer
to the new alignment. Thus this copy of the feature has a new position
with reference to the previous alignment.
In this way, you have positioned two similar features at two different
positions.

Preassignments for new features


You can preassign the coordinate system and the projection plane for
new features.
Purpose of the function

By default, the Base alignment is preassigned to the coordinate system.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-9

Defining features

In the case of manually probed features, this means that for each probed
feature you have to go back and forth between the CMM and the CALYPSO PC, in order to change the coordinate system.
The preassignments for new features allow you to determine the coordinate system on the CALYPSO PC and probe the features one after the
other. Use the RETURN key of the control console to close the automatically
detected features. The desired coordinate system is already entered in the
feature.

Defining preassignments
1 Select Resources Preassignment for New Features.
- or Select CAD Preassignment for New Features.

2 Select the desired coordinate system.


3 Select the desired projection plane or work plane which is to be used
for all new features subsequently created.
NOTICE
The preassignments are only effective as long as the Preassignment
for New Features window is open.
As soon as you close the window, the Base Alignment and No Working Plane default settings will apply again.

Validity of the preassignment


Preassignment of coordinate systems

4-10

The preassignment of a coordinate system applies to all features which


were created in the following way:

Probing and automatic feature recognition on the CMM or CAD


model

Pasting via the Features menu or the toolbox (except for GEAR PRO,
HOLOS and turbine blade)

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

Selection window of geometrical features, constructions, coordinate


systems, etc.

Extraction from the CAD model

The coordinate system is also preassigned to the Simple distance characteristic.


NOTICE
New coordinate systems which are inserted into the measurement plan
always refer to the base alignment even if the preassignment window is
open.
Preassignment of projection planes

The preassignment of the projection plane applies to the following features: point, circle, 2D line, ellipse, slot and rectangle. The preassignment
will only be made if it is possible and useful.
NOTICE
The type of projection Projection to nominal is only valid for the Circle feature. If Projection to nominal is set in the preassignment, then
no projection plane will be entered for newly created features that are
not a circle.

Automatic feature recognition and


automatic feature end
Automatic feature recognition
CALYPSO is able to recognize the feature after just a few probings. This
applies to the following features:
Element

Min. probings:

Point

2D line

Plane

Symmetry point

Circle

Cylinder

Cone

Sphere

Torus

Symmetry plane

Ellipse

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-11

Defining features

Settings

Element

Min. probings:

Rectangle

Slot

In the default settings, you can define the features for which automatic
feature recognition is to be used (Defining the automatic feature recognition [ 413]).
You can exclude error codes or define only certain features, for example,
in optical measurements of bores where bores are just to be identified as
circles.

Procedure

If you use the automatic feature recognition, probe the geometric element on your workpiece. CALYPSO enters the recognized feature in the
list of features and opens the definition template (see Defining features
using automatic feature recognition [ 414]).
The definition template offers you several options for working with the
feature (see Definition template for features [ 45]).

Automatic feature end


Use the Automatic Feature End function to define how many times
CALYPSO should probe the feature to determine it if the feature type is
known.
Settings

Procedure

4-12

In the default settings, you can specify the number of probings. The default setting is as follows:
Element

Max. probings

Point

2D line

Plane

Sphere

Torus

Symmetry plane

Circle

Cylinder

Cone

12

Ellipse

Rectangle

Slot

During probing, CALYPSO must know the feature you want to measure.
Begin by adding the feature to the measurement plan, then open the
definition template and take probings.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

The CMM will stop the measurements automatically when the specified
number of measuring points for a particular feature have been taken.

Defining the automatic feature recognition


In the default settings, you can define the features for which automatic
feature recognition is to be used. You can exclude error codes or define
only certain features, for example, in optical measurements of bores
where bores are just to be identified as circles.
1 To do so, select Extras Settings Measurement and open
the Features notebook page.
2 Activate the Feature Recognition tab.

3 Untick the check box for each feature that you want to exclude from
the automatic feature recognition.
4 Press OK to confirm.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-13

Defining features

Defining features using automatic feature


recognition
The automatic feature recognition only functions if Surface measurement with single points is not activated. Close, if necessary, the
Surface measurement with single points dialog box.
If you use the automatic feature recognition, probe the geometric element on your workpiece. CALYPSO enters the recognized feature in the
list of features and opens the definition template (see Definition template for features [ 45]).
1 Click the Features tab.
(The features used for the definition of the base alignment should already be displayed.)
2 Select the correct stylus.
3 Probe the first point.

Example: If the feature is a sloping plane on the side of a workpiece,


move with the X/Y joystick over one corner of this plane and then
probe in the Z axis.
The Point1 feature is shown in the template for the feature definition. (For more information on the features template, see Defining
features using definition templates [ 47].)
4 Probe the next point.

Example: On a sloping plane, move over another corner of the plane


and probe again in the Z axis.
The feature is updated to a 2D line.
5 Probe additional points if required (at least 3 points for a plane, for
example; 5 points for a cylinder, and so on).

Example: On a sloping plane, move to the remaining two corner points


and probe each in the Z axis. Make sure that the points are not on the
same line. (You should therefore move the stylus a little in the X and
Y axes). CALYPSO recognizes the plane this way and displays it in the
evaluation field.
6 If the right feature has not been recognized, you can choose it manually from the CAD Entities selection list.

Note: You cannot change the type of geometric element subsequently.


7 Press OK to confirm.

4-14

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

Deriving features from CAD files


Suitable files for deriving features
CALYPSO makes it possible to extract features for a measurement plan
from CAD files (see also Creating a new measurement plan from a CAD
file [ 244] in the Online Help).
NOTICE
By default, this possibility only exists for ACIS files with the .sat file
name extension. You must purchase the corresponding options for all
other file types.
Prerequisite

The CAD file must have one of the following file name extensions:
Creating program

Extension

ACIS

.sat

CAD systems such as AutoCAD and Caddy, etc.

.dxf

CATIA

.exp

CATIA

.model

CATIA V

.CATPart

IGES

.igs

Inventor

.ipt

JT Open (exclusively versions 8.0 and 8.1)

.jt

Parasolid

.x_t

Pro-E / Unigraphics

.prtxx, .prt

Pro-E

.asm

Solid-Works

.sldprt

STEP

.stp

VDAFS

.vda

NOTICE
When you load an .asm file, the individual parts must also be in the
same directory. CALYPSO assembles the individual parts automatically to
form a CAD model.
With CAD files of the following programs, CALYPSO allows you to transfer also the dimension, form and position data together with the features
to the measurement plan:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-15

Defining features

Creating program

Extension

CATIA V

.CATPart

Pro-E / Unigraphics

.prtxx, .prt

Pro-E

.asm

NOTICE
The structure of the CAD data determines whether CALYPSO can transfer
the dimension, form and position data to the measurement plan. Manual
changes may especially be required for constructions.
Procedure

Perform the following steps:

Convert CAD files in the background [ 416] (optional)

Load CAD files [ 417]

Define the parameters of the global measurement strategy [ 417] (optional)

Extract features [ 418]


Or

Extract features and characteristics [ 59]

NOTICE
If you have loaded 2D data (e.g. in IGES, VDA or DXF format), you will
have to define the third coordinate manually either by entering an offset
in the Modify CAD Model dialog box or subsequently by changing
the nominal geometry.
NOTICE
(Only for CALYPSO older than version 3.8:) If you have a ProE or Unigraphics license, you are not permitted to change the host name and server
code of the computer, as otherwise your license becomes invalid. If the
license is lost, the interface no longer functions.

Converting CAD files in the background


CALYPSO can extract features for a measurement plan from CAD files.
As this process takes a longer time in the case of complex CAD models,
it is possible to convert CAD files in the background in advance. Converted files can be loaded more quickly.
1 Select CAD File Convert CAD files in background.
2 Highlight the desired CAD files and click Open.
The selected files are converted in the background. As the result of
this, files with the same name and with the .sab file name extension
are stored in the same directory.
This operation is logged in a log file.

4-16

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

NOTICE
The background conversion may impair the performance of other applications.

Loading CAD files


Before you can load CAD files, a measurement plan must be open. The
measurement plan is expanded when CAD files are loaded and the features are extracted.
1 Open a new measurement plan. (See Creating a new measurement
plan [ 33] or Opening and displaying a measurement
plan [ 34].)
2 Select CAD CAD File Load.
3 Select the CAD files of your choice and click Open.
The files will be loaded.
If this is an .asm file of Pro-E, CALYPSO searches for the respective
individual parts in the same file directory and combines these automatically to form a CAD model.
If you are loading an IGES file, the progress of the data conversion will
be shown in a window.
Note: When converting an IGES file, a log file with information on the
converted features that are contained in the file will be created. Select
CAD Logfile IGES to display this file.
Once the model has appeared in the CAD window, you will be able to
include the features in the measurement plan.
For more information, please see Working with the data of the CAD
model [ 244] in the Online Help.
You can now proceed to specify metrology parameters (see Specifying
metrology parameters for the CAD features to be loaded [ 417]).

Specifying metrology parameters for the CAD


features to be loaded
Before extracting features from a CAD file, you can specify the measurement strategy for the features in question.

Specifying the measurement strategy for CAD features


to be loaded
1 Select CAD Filter Save / Load Defaults.
2 Click the Strategy tab.
The Settings - Strategy window appears on the screen.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-17

Defining features

3 Tick the check box of the desired feature and click Settings.
The strategy dialog box opens:
4 Double-click the list entry for which you want to make strategy settings.
The definition dialog box opens.
5 When you have finished defining the strategy, click OK.
As soon as you extract a solid geometry from the CAD model or extract
a feature via the filter (using CAD Filter ...), CALYPSO assigns the
predefined strategies to these features.

Deriving features from CAD files


During the extraction, the regular geometric elements in the CAD model,
as well as the elements defined in a different manner, are detected and
added to the list of features.
Conditions:
A CAD file is loaded and, if necessary, the measurement strategy is
defined (see General settings for the path generation method [ 4180]).
1 Select CAD Filter All Features (or alternatively, planes, circles, cylinders, cones or points only, as applicable).

4-18

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

The features are displayed in a separate window (example: test cube):

2 Select Edit Select All or highlight the individual features you want
to insert into your measurement plan.

Note: CALYPSO assigns the stylus currently activated on the control


console or via the CAD window to all features.
3 Click Apply.
The features are extracted and transferred to the measurement plan.
This can take a few seconds to complete.
4 When transfer is completed, confirm by clicking OK.
You can edit the individual features in the usual way.
Keep in mind:
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-19

Defining features

You must define the probing points with the CMM or the CAD window
if there are none defined in the strategy list of the feature. You will find
more information in the Online Help under Defining probing points in
the CAD window [ 211].
CALYPSO assigns all features the same stylus. You will have to assign a
more suitable stylus for some features, i.e. one with which the CMM can
probe the features in question (see Editing a measurement
plan [ 68]).

Importing features from the CAD model


to the measurement plan
You can import individual features from the CAD model into the measurement plan. To do so, use the Selection list on the CAD toolbar.
1 To define a probing point:
Open the feature in question.
Click Strategy and select the appropriate stylus.
Select the Define points icon.
Click the probing point of your choice on the surface of the CAD
model.
2 To define a single point:
Select the Define a Space Point icon.
Click the point of your choice on the surface of the CAD model.
3 To define an edge point:
Select the Define Edge Point icon.
Click a point on the CAD model.
The point closest to the selected point on the edge of the plane is
inserted as an edge point in the list of features. Any additional parameters must be entered in the definition template of the feature.
Note: If the Preassignment for New Features window is open
and the projection plane is set to edge point, the d1, d2 and d3
distances of the preassignment will be transferred into the new feature.
4 To define a circle on a cylinder:
Select the Define Circle on a Cylinder icon.
Click a point on the cylinder.
The circle is shown at the corresponding level.
5 To define a line on a plane:
Select the Define Line on a Plane icon.

4-20

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

Click a point on the line you want to define and use the mouse to
drag the line.
6 To define a rectangle:
Select the Define Rectangle icon.
Click a point of the rectangle you want to define.
7 To define two mutually opposite space points:
Select the Distance check icon.
Click a point on the model.
The two space points and the connection between them are shown
at the selected position. With the aid of these two points, you can
check the wall thickness or the material deviation at the place in question.
8 To import a plane, cylinder or cone into the measurement plan:
Select the Extract Features icon.
Click the desired feature in the CAD model.

Multiplying features by patterns


Pattern types
If a feature exists on a workpiece more than once in a regular pattern,
the feature can be defined once and multiplied by means of a pattern.
NOTICE
Patterns are not permitted for the following features:
General curve, general surface, free form surface, curve, 3D curve, all
constructions
Pattern procedure

CALYPSO supports regular and free pattern types. The available regular
pattern types are linear and circular patterns:

Linear patterns

Circular patterns

Free patterns

1D Linear Pattern

Polar Pattern Offset

Pattern with position list

2D Linear Pattern

Rotational Pattern (use for scallop)


In the case of linear patterns, the feature is repeated at regular intervals
along one or more axes.
In the case of circular patterns, the feature is arranged with a certain angle
offset around a center.

In the case of polar pattern offset, the local feature alignment keeps
its orientation with respect to the workpiece coordinate system.

In the case of a rotational pattern, the local feature alignment keeps


its orientation with respect to the center of rotation.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-21

Defining features

With free patterns, the additional positions of the feature can be freely
defined. To do so, complete a position list in CALYPSO.
Pattern types

If you require a certain pattern type not only on one individual feature,
define this pattern type with its parameters and save it.
You can use this pattern type for other features.
NOTICE
If you edit a pattern type, all patterns that are based on this type will also
be changed.

Switching a pattern on
and off

If a pattern is defined, switch it on and off again via the Measurement


Plan Editor Features.

Coordinate system for pattern


You can enter a reference coordinate system for the definition of the
center, projection plane and rotation direction of a pattern. This coordinate system is exclusively used for calculating the nominal positions.
NOTICE
If you select a pattern for a coordinate system which depends on the
pattern, a warning message appears.
Keeping position

Similar to the definition of features, you can use the Keep Position
function. When you change the alignment while the Keep Position
check box is active, the pattern including the center, projection plane and
direction of rotation will be moved to the same position, relative to the
new alignment, as that in the old alignment.

Pattern for group of features


You can also define a pattern for a group of features.
The pattern is used for all features and sub-groups of the group unless
a pattern has already been defined and activated for them.
If a feature or a group is removed from a group with pattern, it loses its
pattern.
If a feature or a group is placed into a group with a pattern, it adopts the
pattern unless another pattern has been defined and activated beforehand.
Switching a pattern on
and off

The pattern for a group can be defined and activated via the context menu
or via the Measurement Plan Editor Features.

Deleting actual values

If the results of only certain pattern features are unusable, it is not necessary to repeat the entire measurement. In the context menu of the features, you can call the Delete Actuals window and delete the actual
values of the features in question.

4-22

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

Formulas in patterns
You can also use formulas in features that are multiplied by means of a
pattern: for example in the case of a circle for the determination of the
center. When using formulas in a pattern, different procedures for the
determination of the pattern features are possible:
Algorithm

Meaning

First formula then pattern

When processing the measurement plan, CALYPSO calculates the


value of the formula, uses this value to determine the definition of
the feature and uses then the entered pattern for this feature.

(general default)
First pattern then formula
(default for getActual and
LOOP in formulas)
Default setting

When processing the measurement plan, CALYPSO calculates for


each individual pattern feature the formulas and enters them in the
pattern features.
CALYPSO automatically sets one of the two algorithms when defining
the pattern in the Selection (Pattern) window:

Default setting

For

First formula then pattern

All other cases

First pattern then formula

For features for which getActual or LOOP is used in formulas.


You can apply this presetting or change it. CALYPSO recognizes if you
make entries which are relevant for the calculation method, e.g. when
inserting a formula. CALYPSO then generates the current setting and
permits a modification.

Why first pattern then formula?


In some cases, the procedure for the First formula then pattern algorithm may cause undesirable results.
A series of stepped bores is an example. The larger circle and the smaller
circle are provided with a pattern. The center of the smaller bore is defined
as a result of a getActual formula resulting from the measured center of
the larger bore.
In the case of the standard algorithm, the first feature of the pattern
would be defined by means of the getActual formula and the pattern
would be applied. The calculation, however, would be more exact if the
getActual formula relative to the corresponding feature is used again for
each individual feature of the pattern.
Therefore, CALYPSO always sets the First pattern then formula algorithm if getActual or LOOP is used in the formulas of a feature. First the
pattern is used and then the corresponding indexed formula (with LOOP
= 1, ..., n) in each pattern feature.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-23

Defining features

Defining a pattern
1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Pattern entry.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.

3 To use a new pattern, click New, select the desired pattern type and
click OK. Enter the parameters in the corresponding window.
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under Polar
Pattern Offset, 1D Linear Pattern, 2D Linear Pattern, Rotational Patterns and Pattern with position list.
By using a pattern, this will be entered automatically in the list of patterns with the name Patternx (x = 1, 2, ...). You can rename the
feature via the context menu.
4 To use an existing pattern type, click Selection of Pattern, select
the desired pattern type and click OK.
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under Polar
Pattern Offset, 1D Linear Pattern, 2D Linear Pattern, Rotational Patterns and Pattern with position list.
5 Click Edit to change the pattern type settings.
You will be informed if formulas were used in the feature and the
selection does not comply with your default setting.

4-24

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

6 Select the mode depending on the need.


The feature is created with a pattern.

Relative measurement
Applications for relative measurement
During relative measurement, the determined measured points are not
evaluated where they were recorded. That could be for various reasons.
Relative measurement is useful in the following cases:

Deformations
Larger components made of sheet metal with a thickness of a few
millimeters may slightly bend when they are clamped on the CMM.
This deformation must be taken into account when measuring with
the CMM. In this case, it may not be possible to directly approach the
actual positions of circles in the surface.

Immersion depth
In drawings for workpieces made of thin sheet metal, the thickness
of the workpiece is specified as a number and not as a third dimension. Bores are shown as circles. If a bore is measured with a certain
immersion depth, the measuring location deviates from the nominal
position of the circle.

Bent surface
Measuring lines or circles on bent surfaces (cylinder, cone, torus) normally generates contours deviating from the regular form. To enhance
the form results, you can project the points rotationally on a plane.

Positions of flat bore holes in different directions


The positions on the surface should be determined for cylindrical holes
with low depth which are generally not parallel to the coordinate axes.
To do so, circles are measured with offset. Due to the coordinate axes
which are not parallel, the coordinates of the center point calculated
from the measuring points do not represent the position on the surface. The measurement of a projection plane would take a long time.
The Projection to nominal function makes it possible to rationally
determine the position of these holes without any difficulties.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-25

Defining features

Edge measurement
A point of an edge or the run of a circular bore in a surface is to be
determined. However, an edge cannot be probed correctly with a
stylus. Instead, CALYPSO measures, for example, auxiliary points on
a working plane and calculates the edge location.

Offset
The features to be measured are all equally offset from the nominal
position. The actual position of a feature can be determined. Enter
the determined deviation, as a result of which the features will be
measured offset by this vector.

Missing bore
Sometimes, bores provided in the drawing are missing in the workpiece. By setting CALYPSO accordingly, you can avoid faulty probings
and collisions.

Defining relative measurements in the definition template of the feature


1 Click the button located below Projection.
The Relative Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Set the parameters as necessary on the Working Plane, Meas.
Ref. or Bore Missing tab.

Measurement with working planes


Purpose of the working
plane

You must define a Working Plane if you want to measure the feature not
at the nominal location but with a vertical offset. Use the working plane
to indicate in CALYPSO the location of measurement.

In general:

4-26

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

To measure a circle with a working plane, the normal vector of the


plane is used as the normal vector of the circle to be measured.

To measure a point with a working plane, the standardized projection


of the point to be measured into the plane is used as the normal
vector.

Definition via measured plane


Define the working plane in the Relative Measurement window:

Select the Measured Planes option on the Working Plane index


card.

Select for the measured plane the plane on which the feature lies. During
the CNC run this plane is measured in order to obtain actual values. Under
Measurement you have two options for determining the measuring
location:

Calculate d1: The distance between the actual plane and the nominal position of the working plane determined during the CNC run is
used as an offset in order to determine the actual probing location on
the feature.

Distance d1: The distance entered is used as the offset from the
working plane. Positive values mean an offset counter to the normal
vector into the material, negative values mean an offset in the direction of the normal vector out of the material.

Under Evaluation you determine the treatment of actual values:

Calculate d3: There is a fixed distance (offset) between the feature


to be projected and the selected plane (e.g. circle and plane). This
offset is used for the selected plane in the direction of the actual normal vector of the plane.

Distance d3: By selecting this option and entering 0 for the distance,
the measured actual values are projected onto the actual working
plane.
You can enter a separate immersion depth for the evaluation. A positive entry means an offset counter to the normal vector into the material. A negative value means an offset in the direction of the normal
vector out of the material.

Actual position: The measured actual values are evaluated as such.

Definition via the base alignment


You can determine the working plane by means of the base alignment.
NOTICE
Usually, the working plane is determined by means of a measured plane.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-27

Defining features

In this case, the working plane of the feature is determined by means of


the selected coordinate plane and, if necessary, an offset d1 counter to
the normal vector of the plane.
The evaluation height of the feature (the actual values used for the evaluation) is determined by means of the working plane and, if necessary,
an offset d3 counter to the normal vector of the plane.

Measuring edge points and circle edges


To measure the actual values of edge points, CALYPSO offers two additional relative measurement methods in addition to the working plane
method:

the Edge Measurement method for the measurement of an individual


edge point

the Three Points method for the measurement of a circle edge

NOTICE
You do not require an additional working plane feature for these
methods and you will have the result faster. Disadvantage: These methods are not as accurate as the working plane method.
Edge measurement

The Edge Measurement method enables the measurement of an individual edge point via auxiliary points. Define the distances between the auxiliary points and the edge point to be measured. It is possible to easily
move the edge point to be measured by means of a formula or a loop;
the auxiliary points are always at the correct position.

d2

d1
d3

The first auxiliary probing is carried out by means of the Offset d2


counter to the normal direction of the point. If you have activated the
measurement of normal function, the actual normal of the auxiliary point
d2 will be determined within the predefined radius using three probing
points. The last, actual probing is carried out by means of the offset d1
counter to the direction of the entered vector of the working plane which
is located in the coordinate system of the feature. The actual value of the
edge point is determined by means of the d3 distance.
Three Points

4-28

The Three Points method enables the measurement of a circle. The working plane is determined by the circle.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

Probing points

d2

Here you must also enter the location parameters for the auxiliary points.
The actual value of the plane is determined by means of three or more
auxiliary points which lie at regular angle distances on an arc around the
circle to be measured.
The radius offset defines the difference between the radius of the points
and the radius of the circle to be measured. The distance d1 is the measuring depth of the circle to be measured counter to the normal vector of
the working plane. The height in which the actual value for the evaluation
is used is determined by the distance d3.
d2

d1
d3

CAD support
You can define an edge point via the CAD window:
Select the Define Edge Point icon in the Switch to Feature
Menu selection list. Each time you click the CAD model, CALYPSO creates an edge point on the edge located closest to the selected point.
Any additional parameters must be entered in the definition template of
the new feature.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-29

Defining features

Projection on nominal plane


With Projection to nominal, the measured points are projected onto
the nominal plane of the circle. The nominal normal of the circle is used
as projection plane.
You can thus also determine the position of flat holes with any axis direction. You can, for example, use this function if the circle is measured
with a starting height as the edge cannot be probed directly. Due to the
non-parallel position in the coordinate system, the calculated coordinates
do not represent the position on the surface. However, the Projection
to nominal function provides you with easy-to-evaluate coordinates for
the position.
The following magnified representation shows how the measured points
are projected on the nominal position of the circle:
Nominal
position of
the circle
Offset
(Start height)

Projection
to nominal

Measured
points

NOTICE
The Projection to nominal function is only available for the Circle
feature.

Defining projection on nominal plane


1 Click in the definition template of the feature the button under Projection.
The Relative Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Select the Projection to nominal option on the Working
Plane tab.
3 Press OK to confirm.
The measured points are projected onto the nominal plane of the circle.

Rotational projection
For certain measuring jobs, the projection of the measured actual points
along a cylinder surface is useful. This projection method requires the
definition of a projection plane and a rotation axis.
The rotational projection produces enhanced form results for circles
measured on a torus or sphere and for 2d lines measured on the surface

4-30

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

of a cylinder or cone: If the scanned 2d line is not measured exactly parallel


to the axis, then its form corresponds to a hyperbola.
The following illustration shows the principle of the rotational projection.

Point 1
Rotation axis

Projection plane

CALYPSO allows rotational projection for the measurement of 2d lines,


circles and ellipses. To do so, you must determine the axis of a suitable
feature as rotation axis. The projection plane is defined via the rotation
axis and the first measured point.
You must define the rotational projection in the Relative Measurement window.

Defining rotational projection


1 Click in the definition template of the feature the button under Projection.
The Relative Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Select the Rotational Projection option on the Working
Plane tab.
3 Select the feature whose axis is to be used as rotation axis.
4 Press OK to confirm.
The measured points are projected along the cylinder surface in the projection plane.
NOTICE
The rotational projection cannot be preassigned for new features under
Resources Preassignment for New Features.

Measuring with measuring reference


The measuring reference allows you to move the measurement position,
relative to that of another feature.
Purpose of the function

This can be useful if the features to be measured are all equally offset
from the nominal position (e.g. small punched circles around a larger circle).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-31

Defining features

You can easily determine the actual position of the larger circle but not
the actual positions of the smaller circles (risk of collision!). In this case,
you measure with measuring reference and specify the larger circle as
reference feature. CALYPSO probes the features offset by the deviation
determined on the larger circle.
Two methods

The following methods can be selected:

Element
CALYPSO determines the actual position of the selected feature. The
difference vector between the actual and nominal value represents
the offset.

Main orientation
You enter the offset in the coordinate axes of the base alignment.
Select a reference feature as offset for each coordinate axis.

Own Geometry
CALYPSO determines the offset during a separate search run for
which you indicate a search distance and a measuring height.

Measuring with the Own Geometry


reference
If the actual position of a feature deviates considerably from the nominal
position, the relative measurement method has to be used to avoid collisions.
If it is not possible to derive the required translation from other features,
you must define them explicitly as Own Geometry reference. You can
use this method for the following features: circle, rectangle, slot, ellipse.
Then CALYPSO starts a search run prior to each measurement to locate
the feature. Once the actual position of the feature has been found, CALYPSO internally moves the nominal data temporarily for the measuring
run.

4-32

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

Two dimensions are required for the search run:

The measuring height indicates the search height.

The search distance indicates for outside features the distance around
the feature at which the actual position is searched for. The stylus
moves around the feature by observing the distance defined by you
to the predefined nominal contour.
Travel path
Actual position
Nominal position
Search path

The search distance is not important for inside features. The search
run starts in the center of the nominal position and is carried out in
all four directions.
Travel path
Actual position
Nominal position

NOTICE
After the search run, CALYPSO knows the actual position of the feature
and carries out the actual measurement on the shifted position with correspondingly large deviations of the position. The nominal data of the
feature are not affected.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-33

Defining features

Recognizing a missing bore


Sometimes, bores provided in the drawing are missing in the workpiece.
By setting CALYPSO accordingly, you can avoid faulty probings and collisions. The movement and the speed are adjusted so that damage is
avoided.
Activating the function

The Bore Missing function is set for each individual feature. You have
two options:

Activate the Bore Missing tab in the Relative Measurement


window.

Select Probing Missing Hole (Search Distance) in the Features Settings Editor.

Activate the function and set the Search Distance. The search distance
specifies the depth of the first probing position in the material.

1st CMM POS


Required search distance
Clearance distance
1st probing
Material if bore is
missing, hollow space if
bore exists

Movement if a bore is missing


If the Bore Missing function is activated, the CMM carries out a search
run as of the first position of the feature, i.e. it moves at reduced speed.
NOTICE
To ensure that the function provides the required protection against collisions, the first intermediate position of the feature must lie outside the
material.

4-34

If the CMM does not reach any material during the search process,
the measurement of the bore is continued in the usual way.

If the CMM reaches material during the search process, the current
feature is omitted. The CMM moves back to the 1st CMM POS of the
feature and from there to the next feature.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

NOTICE
This is only possible as long as no intermediate position is programmed
for reaching the next feature.
CALYPSO can only compensate missing bores correctly if the travel paths
between the features and within the features are independent of each
other.

CALYPSO recognizes whether the feature to be measured is required


for the measurement plan.

If the required measurement plan information is missing because


the measurement has not been executed, CALYPSO stops the
measuring run. The stylus system is removed from the clearance
planes and the user may remove the workpiece from the clamping
device.
In all other cases, the measurement is resumed. Information about
the features which have not been measured is shown on the
screen and in the printout.

NOTICE
Observe that missing measured values may cause the output of incomplete plot images. Position deviations may be caused.

PCM commands
The Bore Missing function can also be activated via the setMissingBore PCM command. Thus, the function and the search distance are parameterized. The PCM function overwrites the corresponding setting for
the feature.
The getActual("feature_name").boreIsMissing command supplies a
Boolean value.

true: the bore is missing

false: the bore is not missing.

Copying properties of features


Properties which can be copied
You can copy properties of a feature and assign them to other features.
You can copy the following properties to all features:

Coordinate system

Keep position

Clearance group

Stylus system

Stylus (only if different styli were not used for the points of the feature)

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-35

Defining features

Clearance distance

Retract distance

Pattern

RT position

Parameter: Presettings

Parameter: Postsettings

You can copy the following properties exclusively to similar features:

Projection plane (if defined)

Evaluation settings

Measurement strategy (measured features only)

Characteristics

Features are referred to as similar features if they are of the same type
(e.g. circle, cylinder) and their nominal values have been defined in the
same way (e.g. via recall).

Copying properties of a feature to other


features
You can copy properties of a feature and assign them to other features.
1 Click the feature from which you want to copy properties.
2 Click the Transfer format icon in the upper toolbar.
3 Select the properties that you want to copy to other features.

Note: When copying properties into a construction, the Keep Position check box is not taken into account.
4 Select the features to which you want to copy the properties (multiple
selection with the Ctrl key).
5 Click OK.

Tips and tricks for defining features

4-36

You can cancel the definition of a feature at any time while probing
is in progress: Click Reset and then click OK.

You can restart the definition of a feature at any time while probing
is in progress: Click Reset and then repeat probing.

If the CAD model of the part's features is not fully on the screen or is
not displayed at all, the image may have been zoomed or shifted in
the CAD window. Click Fit to resize the model to fit into the CAD
window.

If the feature does not seem to be properly defined but you have
clicked OK to save it, you can delete it from the measurement plan

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining features

and then define it again. See Deleting features or characteristics [ 632].

If you want to change the order of the details, drag the feature to the
new location.

If the probing point you used is unsuitable, you can delete it by clicking
the Undo icon (or pressing F3 on the standard control console).

If you want to delete a probing point defined some time in the past,
proceed as described in the section entitled Using the context menu
of the strategy list [ 4163].

Probing or position points can be added to a feature at any time. Open


the definition template of the feature.

To add a probing point, probe the point with the CMM. The point
is added automatically.
If you want to add an intermediate position, you must check that
the original stylus is activated.
Move the stylus to the appropriate position, then press the button
on the right-hand joystick to accept the position or click the Position CMM without probing icon in the strategy dialog box.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-37

Details on definition of the features

Details on definition of the features


Further information on the definition of
the features
In this section, you will find, among other things, the list of all features
that can be measured with CALYPSO. You can find more detailed information on each feature in separate topics.
Basics of probing

Inside or outside feature?

When you probe features, the following basic rules apply:

Produce as large a measurement basis as possible. If, for example, you


define the face of a cube as a plane, probe close to the corners of the
workpiece.

Probe as many points as possible (taking into account the time within
which you want the CNC run to complete). This is particularly important when you record and evaluate shapes on a workpiece.

In most instances, CALYPSO can identify the feature as an inside or outside feature from the probing direction.
You also have the option of defining a feature as an inside or outside
feature. However, bear in mind that this affects the combination of the
travel paths and the calculation of the tangential features.

You define a feature as an inside or outside feature in its definition template by clicking on the Inside/Outside Feature icon.
Correction of stylus radius

The measured value sent to the CMM is always the center coordinates of
the stylus. The measured value, therefore, differs from the contact point
- the measured value you want - by the radius of the stylus.
probing
direction

probing
radius
desired
measured value

4-38

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

measured
value

Details on definition of the features

CALYPSO corrects the measured values, so you always receive the coordinates of the contact point. However, there may be a residual error, but
you can usually prevent this.
Tolerance For ...

In the Tolerance For: group, you enter a tolerance for the corresponding nominal value. CALYPSO adds a characteristic to the measurement
plan that checks the tolerance.

Selecting the references


of the angles

If you tick the A (for angle) check box, you can freely select the reference
axis and the orientation for specification of the angle.
With the Reference to Projection angle icon, you select one of the
six axes of the coordinate system as reference axis for the projected angles. The space axis of the feature is changed automatically.
NOTICE
The direction and orientation of the feature does not change.

Selecting a space axis

By selecting another axis in the Space Axis field, the reference of the
projected angles is changed but not their values. Therefore, the reference
axis of the feature and thus its direction and orientation are changed.

Reversing a space axis

By reversing the space axis, the direction and orientation of the feature
are also changed.
Click the Mirrors geometry and strategy icon. The whole feature
including the strategies at the coordinate plane that is perpendicular to
the set space axis is mirrored.

Selecting the angle format

The angle symbols indicate the axis and orientation of the start angle and
other angles.

To change the type of representation of the angle, click the angle symbol
and select the desired orientation.

Overview of the features


The Features menu contains the CALYPSO features.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-39

Details on definition of the features

The Special Geometries submenu contains the features for complex geometries such as torus and stepped cylinder.

The Additional Features submenu offers a selection of features


for special applications such as gears.

Default features
Menu: Features
Feature

Description

Point

Point feature [ 442]

Circle

Circle feature [ 445]

Plane

Plane feature [ 446]

2D Line

2D Line feature [ 448]

3D Line

3D Line feature [ 450]

Cylinder

Cylinder feature [ 450]

Cone

Cone feature [ 452]

Sphere

Sphere feature [ 455]

Curve

Curve feature [ 455]

3D Curve

3D Curve feature [ 455]

Special Geometries
Menu: Features Special Geometries

4-40

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Feature

Description

Ellipse

Ellipse special geometry [ 456]

Slot

Slot special geometry [ 457]

Rectangle

Rectangle special geometry [ 458]

Torus

Torus special geometry [ 458]

Offset Plane

Offset Plane special geometry [ 462]

Symmetry Point

Symmetry Point special geometry [ 463]

Symmetry Plane

Symmetry Plane special geometry [ 463]

Step Cylinder

Step Cylinder special geometry [ 464]

Radius Point

Radius Point special geometry [ 467]

Sphere Point

Sphere Point special geometry [ 468]

Angle Point

Angle Point special geometry [ 469]

Circle on Cone

Circle on Cone special geometry [ 470]

General Surface

General Surface special geometry [ 472]

General Curve

General Curve special geometry [ 472]

Free Form Surface

Free Form Surface special geometry [ 473]

Additional Features
Menu: Features Additional Features

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-41

Details on definition of the features

Feature

Description

HOLOS

Holos and Gear additional features [ 479]

Gear

Holos and Gear additional features [ 479]

Turbine Blade

Turbine Blade additional feature [ 481]

Profile Elements

Profile Elements additional feature [ 483]

Point Set

Point Set additional feature [ 484]

Station Point

Station Point additional feature [ 489]

Point feature
Basics of the Point feature
Menu: Features Point
Use the Point feature to determine the coordinates of individual points
on the workpiece, in order to size the workpiece, for example.
Probing strategy

You can measure a point anywhere on a surface.

probing direction

measured
value
correction

4-42

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

To obtain the right correction for the stylus radius for normal vector directions which are non-parallel to the coordinate system, it is possible to
switch to the space point procedure by clicking Evaluation in the definition template. In case of an unknown normal vector direction, the correction will be automatically defined.
Evaluation

Use the Evaluation button to enter details relating to the conversion


and correction of the measured values. Under Space Point Mode, you
can now select the manner in which the point is to be calculated:

Mode

Type of correction/conversion

Touch Point

Radius correction in the direction of a coordinate system axis corresponding to the probing direction. Here, probing is effected in a coordinate axis direction; otherwise the radius correction will be effected in the direction of the coordinate axis which is closest to the probing direction.
(Default setting)

Plane Point

Radius correction in normal vector direction.

Space Point

Radius correction in normal vector direction, followed by projection


onto the normal of the nominal point.
The radius (length of the tripod) used to measure the normal can be
set using the Radius for space point normal measurement
entry in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.

Net Point

Radius correction in normal vector direction, followed by projection


onto the coordinate system axis which corresponds to the reference
axis of the nominal plane.

Midpoint

No radius correction. This can be useful, for example, in the case of


self-centering probing (see Alternative probing methods (self-centering probing) [ 4170]) between two teeth of a gear wheel in
order to use this point for alignment (plane rotation).

CAD Face Point

(only with the Free Form Surface option) Several probings are possible! The stylus radius correction is performed for all measured points
in direction of the (corresponding) perpendicular on the CAD surface.
The actual coordinates of the point are determined from the center
of gravity of all measured points corrected by the stylus radius.
The corrections that are made for the respective point type are shown in
the diagram.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-43

Details on definition of the features

Probe direction

z
Nominal contour

Nominal
normal

Actual
normal

4
3

Actual contour

5
1

Nominal point

2
6

1
2
3
4
5
6

Touch Point
Plane-Point
Space Point
Net Point
Midpoint
CAD Face Point

NOTICE
The contact point on the surface must always be entered as the nominal
position for a point, regardless of the desired Space Point Mode.
Working Plane

By selecting a working plane under Projection and entering a value for


the d3 distance, Space Point is automatically set for the Space Point
Mode.

Measurement of Normal

Normal measurement (CNC and Manual) is not possible for the CAD surface point. As for the touch point and the center point, the button is not
visible in the definition template.

Details on the CAD surface point


Calculation run for the
CAD surface point

CALYPSO calculates the center of gravity of all probing points corrected


by the stylus radius for the CAD surface point. This center of gravity determines the actual value of the point feature.
CALYPSO calculates the perpendicular from the center of gravity on the
CAD model and thus receives the perpendicular base point and the normal for the actual geometry.

Space Point Distance


characteristic

With the Space Point Distance characteristic, the distance between the
actual point corrected by the stylus radius and the nominal point is determined for the space point and net point evaluations.
However, with the CAD surface point, the distance between the center
of gravity and the perpendicular base point of the center of gravity is
checked with the Space Point Distance characteristic.

Form error

4-44

The form deviation represents the minimum and maximum deviation of


each point referenced to its actual perpendicular base point. The point
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

numbers for the maximum and minimum deviation are output accordingly. If only one probing point is used for the calculation, no form is
possible.

Alternative alignment methods


When using a CAD surface point for an alternative alignment method
such as 3D Best Fit, RPS or P6 the nominal value for the best fit is calculated from the perpendicular base point at the current position of the
actual geometry (in relation to the base alignment).
The keyword CAD will then be shown in parenthesis in the column for
the reference. This means that this nominal value cannot be changed
because it is calculated automatically.
When using a reference, the nominal value of the actual geometry is used;
regardless of whether the feature is a CAD surface point or not.
NOTICE
Note that the coordinates corrected by the stylus radius are used for the
calculation.
Special aspects of 3D
best fit

If only point features are used for the 3D best fit, the features are fitted
according to the nominal plane. Usually, the plane normal according to
which the fit is to be carried out is taken from the nominal geometry. The
plane normal of a CAD surface point is determined via the perpendicular
of the actual coordinate on the CAD model. The nominal point for the
best fit represents the perpendicular base point of the actual point on the
CAD model in the base alignment.

Best fit on CAD model

By activating Best fit on CAD model, an iterative method is used to


fit all features in a CAD model. The feature reference points of the actual
geometries are fitted. In the case of the CAD surface point, the probing
center points of all valid and determined points and their stylus radii are
made available for the calculation. If only CAD surface points are used for
the 3D best fit (and best fit on CAD model is selected), the result is identical to the result of a free form surface. However, you cannot select a
coordinate system for the 3D best fit.

Circle feature
Menu: Features Circle
Using the Circle feature, you can probe bores, plugs and shafts with a
circular cross section or workpiece parts with arcs. You can project the
circle or arc onto any measured plane. CALYPSO uses the probed points
to compute the circle or arc which best fits the probing points.
The start angle A and the partial angle PA (for an arc) are specified in the
definition template.
Probing strategy

Probe at least 3 points. The probing points should be on a section perpendicular to the axis of the circle you want to measure. It is advisable to
probe at least 4 points.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-45

Details on definition of the features

Automatic feature recognition

Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same
height. If the height differences between the individual points are excessive, CALYPSO will compute a cylinder. You can reconstruct a circle manually in the Geometry menu.

Local feature alignment

The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the measured
circle (not in a projection plane of the coordinate system).

Gage Correction Qualification

Gage correction qualification is a method by which you determine the


dynamic bend parameters for circles and cylinders occurring during measurement and correct them mathematically during further measurements.
NOTICE
Gage correction qualification is only useful for scanning with a measuring
probe.

Plane feature
Menu: Features Plane
Use the Plane feature to probe plane surfaces of the workpiece the position or inclination of which you want to determine.
CALYPSO computes the plane from the points which you probe. In the
definition template, the computed length and width of the plane are displayed along with the coordinates of the probing points.
Probing strategy

Probe at least 3 points. Take care to spread the points as evenly as possible
over the plane.

Automatic feature recognition

If the points are all in a line (an arc of minimal curvature), CALYPSO will
compute a line. You can reconstruct a plane manually in the Geometry menu.

Result output

This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles A1 and A2.

4-46

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Local feature alignment

The origin of the local feature alignment depends on the position of the
plane relative to the axes of the coordinate system:

Bottom left for a viewing position in +X, -Y, and +Z.

Bottom right for a viewing position in -X, +Y, and -Z.

The illustration below is an example showing how this applies to 5 planes


of a cube.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-47

Details on definition of the features

2D Line feature
Menu: Features 2D Line
The 2D Line feature is for probing lines and straight lines on any plane on
the surface of the workpiece. CALYPSO computes a mean-value line
through the points you probe.
You can restrict the degrees of freedom in X, Y and Z as well as with
regard to the normal direction for the determination of the mean-value
line.
Types of display

The 2D line can be defined and represented in two different ways:

with X, Y and Z values for the start and end points of the line,

with one point (X, Y, Z) of the line, the specified length and the projected angles A1 and A2.

You can toggle between the two types of display by selecting Resources Features representation.
Probing strategy

Probe at least two points (three are recommended, however).

Automatic feature recognition

Make sure that all the probing points are roughly in line. Otherwise, CALYPSO will compute a plane. You can open the Geometry menu and
regenerate the feature as a line.

Local feature alignment

The origin of the feature's local coordinate system is at the first point on
the line which defines the line fully when first registered in these examples points 1, 4 and point 3.

4-48

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

or
6

1
or

3
Result output

After measurement, the following results are output in the definition


template and in the printout.
Result

Meaning

X, Y, Z

Coordinates of the origin of the local feature


alignment

A1 (Z/X)

Projected angle 1. Projection in this case is in the


X/Z plane; the reference axis is X.

A2 (Y/X)

In the printout, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature.

In the definition template, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature's plane normal (the 2D line corresponds
to a reduced plane).

Projected angle 2. Projection in this case is in the


X/Y plane; the reference axis is X.

In the printout, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature.

In the definition template, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature's plane normal.

Sigma

Scatter referenced to the best-fit computed feature

Min/Max

Minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to


the best-fit computed feature

Form

Difference between minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to the best-fit feature.

The illustration below shows the positions of projected angles A1 and A2


for a straight line on a cube. The reference axis is always the coordinate

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-49

Details on definition of the features

axis with which the projected angles are both less than 45 in this case
the X axis.
Y

projection into the X/Yplane

spatial view
Z

A1

projection into the X/Z plane

example line

A2=0
X

3D Line feature
Menu: Features 3D Line
A 3D line cannot be measured: it is computed from a recall of at least two
features. You can, for example, employ a 3D line to represent the axis of
a shaft by using several circles for the purpose of definition.
Open the Nominal Definition selection list and select Recall and the
desired features.
The resulting 3D line is placed through the center point of the selected
features.

Cylinder feature
Menu: Features Cylinder
You can use the Cylinder feature to probe bores, plugs, and shafts.
Probing strategy

Probe at least 5 points:

4-50

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

1 Probe a circle first, i.e. at least the first three points on a section perpendicular to the cylinder axis.
The axis of this section will be the provisional cylinder axis.
2 Probe at least two more points on another section perpendicular to
the axis of the first section.
CALYPSO computes the data of the cylinder from the circular sections
at the different levels. The axis of the cylinder is computed perpendicularly through the centers of the two circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing strategy.
Automatic feature recognition

If the geometrical error is excessive for a cylinder or if the circular sections


are too close together, CALYPSO computes a cone instead of a cylinder.
You can reconstruct a cylinder manually in the Geometry menu.

Result output

This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles A1 and A2.
Z

projection into the Z/X plane

spatial view
Z
X
Y

A1

example cylinder
Z
projection into the Z/Yplane
X

Y
A2

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-51

Details on definition of the features

Local feature alignment

The origin of the local feature alignment is on the plane with the lowest
probing point (not on a projection plane of the coordinate system).

Gage Correction Qualification

Gage correction qualification is a method by which you determine the


dynamic bend parameters for circles and cylinders occurring during measurement and correct them mathematically during further measurements.
NOTICE
Gage correction qualification is only useful for scanning with a measuring
probe.

Cone feature
Menu: Features Cone
Use the Cone feature to probe the location and position of inside and
outside cones, the direction of the cone axis and the cone's taper angle.
The cone has the following defining aspects:

Probing strategy

Position of the X, Y, Z circle center points

Diameter of the D circle

Position and orientation of the A1, A2 cone axes

Cone's taper angle AC

Probe at least 6 points:


1 Measure three points on a circular section parallel to the axis of the
cone.
2 Move the CMM to another height.
3 Measure three points at this height.
4 Measure other sections, as in steps 2 and 3.

4-52

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

CALYPSO computes the data of the cone from the circular sections at
the different heights. The axis of the cylinder is computed perpendicularly through the centers of the circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing strategy.
Automatic feature recognition

If cone angle AC is very small, CALYPSO computes a cylinder instead of a


cone. The measuring uncertainty for the cone axis will be too high if the
height difference between the circular sections is very small, and CALYPSO computes a circle instead of a cone.
You can reconstruct a circle manually in the Geometry menu.

Result output

This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles A1 and A2.
In this example, the reference axis is -Z.
Z

projection into the Z/X plane

spatial view

A1

Y
Z
projection into the Z/Yplane
example cone

Y
A2

Local feature alignment

The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the circle of
smaller diameter. The direction of the axis is from the smaller toward the
larger circle.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-53

Details on definition of the features

Moving the intersection height along the axis


By changing one or more coordinates of the circle center, the geometrically unchanged cone in the measuring room is also moved.
However, the coordinate change also makes it possible to move the circle
center along the cone axis and thus to change the diameter. The cone
keeps its original geometric form. However, the base circle has now a
different position.

To do so, click Move nominal position along the axis in the definition template of the cone and enter the new coordinates in the Move
nominal position along the axis window. It is sufficient to enter a
new coordinate; the other coordinates result from the unchanged cone
axis. CALYPSO immediately recomputes the defining aspects of the cone.
Measuring speed

4-54

For the helix strategy, you can select between the Standard (scanning according to nominal data) and Fast measuring methods. Select
the Fast method only if measuring times have been predefined and you
are sure that the stylus does not loose contact with the material.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Sphere feature
Menu: Features Sphere
Use the Sphere feature to compute the diameter and the center coordinates of a sphere, spherical cap or spherical zone.
Probing strategy

Probe at least 4 points distributed as evenly as possible over the surface


of the sphere. If the stylus system and sphere position allow this, it is best
to probe from different directions. The first two points should be probed
near the sphere's pole and the remaining points along the equator of the
sphere.

Automatic feature recognition

If you fail to probe the points in the recommended manner, CALYPSO


will not automatically recognize a sphere. In this case, you can reconstruct
a sphere manually in the Geometry menu.

Result output

There are no projected angles for a sphere. D represents the diameter of


the sphere.

Curve feature
Menu: Features Curve
Use the Curve feature to measure planar sections of bodies and lift curves
(planar curves on the surface of a cylinder). This feature is extremely versatile and, consequently, it is described in a separate section (see in the
operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring Software option under Curve Measurement (option)).
Bear in mind that this feature must be obtained as an option.

3D Curve feature
Menu: Features 3D Curve
Use the 3D Curve feature to measure free form surfaces. This feature is
extremely versatile and, consequently, it is described in a separate section
(see in the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring Software
option under Curve Measurement (option)).
Bear in mind that this feature must be obtained as an option.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-55

Details on definition of the features

Ellipse special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Ellipse
Use the Ellipse feature to probe bores, plugs, and shafts having axes not
parallel with an axis of the base alignment, as well as true ellipses. Bear
in mind that automatic feature recognition is not available for ellipses.
The ellipse can be defined in two different ways:

by specifying the center (with X, Y and Z) and the two diameters D


(major diameter) and D2 (minor diameter),

by specifying the two focal points (with X1, Y1, Z1 and X2, Y2, Z2)
and one of the two diameters (diameter D and note indicating whether this is the larger diameter).

You can toggle between the two types of display by selecting Resources Features representation.
In the definition template, the angles A1 and A2 indicate the position of
the ellipse in relation to the respective plane (X in XY plane, Y in YZ plane
and Z in ZX plane).
If the defining specifications (second type of representation) do not produce an actual ellipse, the second diameter is set to 0 and the ellipse
is no longer shown.
Probing strategy

Probe at least 5 points in a planar section. Distribute the points as evenly


as possible around the circumference of the section.

Result output

The following illustrations show the definition of the minor diameter D2


and the major diameter D, as well as the location of the focal points.
Dlarge

D2

Local feature alignment

4-56

M (X, Y, Z)

Dsmall

(X1, Y1, Z1)

(X2, Y2, Z2)

The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the ellipse. It
is not projected onto a plane of the coordinate system.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Slot special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Slot
Use the Slot feature to measure the length, width, depth, and position of
a slot. Projected onto a plane, a slot consists of two opposite semicircles
and two opposite straight lines.
Probing strategies

You can use two different probing strategies to measure the slot. In both
cases, you must probe at least five points (in any order).
NOTICE
If there are several points on a segment, make sure that they are distributed as evenly as possible.
How to distribute the probing points according to the first strategy:
2

5
4

at least two points on one side of the slot,

at least one point on the other side of the slot,

at least one point on each of the semicircles.

How to distribute the probing points according to the second strategy:


1

at least three points on one semicircle,

at least two points on the other semicircle.

You can distribute other probing points as you wish.


Local feature alignment

The origin of the local feature alignment is in the slots center of gravity,
i.e. its center point.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-57

Details on definition of the features

Rectangle special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Rectangle
Use the Rectangle feature to measure the position, length, and width of
a cube or a cuboidal hollow. The Rectangular Path path generation method is available for this purpose.
Manual probing

Probe at least 5 points. Distribute all points as evenly as possible over the
sides. Probe at least two points for each side of the rectangle. You must
enter the value for the depth of the rectangular hollow or the height of
the cube manually in the Depth field.

Rectangular path
The Rectangular Path path generation method allows you to probe the
sides of the cube and evade the corners. You can enter different distances
to the corners for each individual side and for each individual corner.
In the Strategy defaults, you can enter absolute distances, distances
in percent or as a multitude of the stylus radius. In the Rectangular
Path technology window, these specifications are converted into absolute values (mm or inch) depending on the current stylus or the nominal
values of the rectangle.

Torus special geometry


Basics of the Torus special geometry
Menu: Features Special Geometries Torus
Use the Torus feature to measure circular workpiece parts. CALYPSO can
measure single points and the two possible circle paths on the torus surface. Bear in mind that automatic feature recognition is not available for
the torus.
Geometry

4-58

The torus has the following identifying characteristics:


Center

(x0, y0, z0)

Normal vector

(nx, ny, nz)

Main radius or main diameter

R1, D1

Subsidiary radius or subsidiary diameter

R2, D2

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

D1
N (nx, ny, nz)
D2

R2

Z (x0, y0, z0)

R1

Dimensions and radius


ratios

CALYPSO can measure a torus only with certain dimensions and radius
ratios. The following radius ratios are possible:

0 R2 R1
If the main radius is larger than the subsidiary radius, the subsidiary
radius may be as small as necessary. There are no restrictions for the
location of the measuring points.

0 < R1 R2
If the main radius is smaller than or equal to the subsidiary radius, the
main radius may be larger than zero.

Probing strategy

At R1 < R2, the cross section surfaces overlap. No measuring


points may be on the surface of the overlapping zone (lemon).
At R1 = R2, the cross section surfaces are touching. There are no
restrictions for the location of the measuring points.

To define the nominal geometry:


NOTICE
Make sure that the probing points are distributed as far apart as possible.
1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Probe the P1, P2, and P3 points at any radial angle, but maintain constant poloidal angles.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-59

Details on definition of the features

n
P1

P3

P2

P5

P4

R
X0

3 Check the P4 and P5 points at any radial, but maintain unequal axial
angles relative to the P1, P2 and P3 points.
4 Probe two additional points.
Best-fit method

For the torus, the best-fit method according to Gauss can only be used.

Size Characteristics

The following size characteristics can be used for the torus:

X, Y, Z value

Projected rotation and inclination angle

Diameter and radius (R1, R2, D1, D2)

Polar position Radius, Angle, Height

2D, 3D Polar Distance, Simple distance (measured from the center of


the torus)

The following form and location characteristics can be used for the torus
(MMC/LMC not possible):

Constructions

4-60

Form

True Position

Coaxiality

Concentricity

The Intersection construction is not possible for the torus. The other constructions are possible, with the exception of defined constructions.
When defining the position of the Cone Addition, a torus can be used as
reference. However, the main diameter of the torus must be used for the
diameter definition.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Measurement strategy for the torus


You can measure the torus by using single points or by scanning. There
are two special scanning technologies for the torus: the large and the
small circle path.

Special features

You cannot define any strategy default for the torus as the automatic
feature recognition does not function.
Both, the large and the small circle paths cannot be scanned by self-centering probing.
The torus must also be probed perpendicular to the surface like the sphere
and cone features. The navigation paths from one path to the next path
always run on a curved helix path.

Large Circle Path


The Large Circle Path path generation method is used to measure the
circle paths with the center on the primary axis.

Z0

Xp

X0

Yp

Unlike spheres and cones, the measuring height can be entered as length
as the path is not clearly defined. Therefore, the position of the circle path
is defined by an angle.
The center of the secondary circle (xP, yP, zP) serves as the vertex of the
angle. The start axis (angle = 0) is formed from the center to the outside
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-61

Details on definition of the features

by means of a vector (perpendicular to the normal of the torus). The direction of rotation is downward in relation to this axis.

Small Circle Path


The Small Circle Path path generation method is used to measure circle
paths with subsidiary radius. Their centers lie on the base circle, i.e. on
the circle around the center of the torus with the main diameter.

The start angle and the angle range are defined at the smaller radius. The
reference axis and the direction of rotation of the angles are the same as
those used for the measuring height definition of the large circle path
(see above).
The measuring height of the small circle path is also defined by an angle.
The angle is referenced to the uv plane or the surface area of the torus.

Offset Plane special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Offset Plane
Use the Offset Plane feature to define from three reference points a plane
which does not exist on your workpiece. You can offset the datum points
at will along the probing direction.
Probing strategy

Probe no more and no less than three points and then enter the offsets:
1 Click Evaluation.
2 In the Point Modification group, click the Edit button.
The Points offset dialog box appears on the screen.

4-62

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

3 Enter an offset for each point. The points are offset along the probing
direction.
4 Close the dialog box to accept the modified settings.
Automatic feature recognition

An offset plane is not recognized automatically by CALYPSO.

Symmetry Point special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Symmetry Point
Use the Symmetry Point feature to have CALYPSO compute a point which
is symmetrical with two probing points.
Probing strategy

Probe two points:


1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Probe the first point.
3 Probe the second point from the opposite direction.
4 Close the definition template.

Automatic feature recognition

CALYPSO automatically recognizes a symmetry point.

Result output

CALYPSO computes the coordinates and the normal vector of the symmetry point and the distance between the original two probing points.

Symmetry Plane special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Symmetry Plane
Use the Symmetry Plane feature to have CALYPSO compute a plane which
is symmetrical with two planes. The calculation of the symmetry plane
requires at least 4 points.
Probing strategy

You must probe no more and no less than four points in order to compute
a symmetry plane.
1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Probe the first three points on one side.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-63

Details on definition of the features

3 Probe the other points either on this side or the other side.
4 Close the definition template.
Display in CAD window

Only the center plane is displayed in the CAD window for the symmetry
plane. The side planes remain hidden.

Result output

CALYPSO computes the coordinates of the symmetrical plane and displays the distance between the two initial planes.

Characteristics

By activating Distance in the definition template, CALYPSO adds a Distance_Symmetry characteristic to the measurement plan.

Feature recognition

Automatic feature recognition is not available for symmetry planes.

Automatic Feature End

This is where you define the number of probings after which the definition
template is closed automatically. Enter the number in the default settings
under Extras Settings Measurement on the Features notebook page.

Restrictions

The restrictions X, Y, Z, normal vector and distance are allowed.

Particularities for the intersection

For the intersection of a symmetry plane with another feature, you can
select whether the symmetry plane or one of the side planes should be
intersected. Activate Wall for the intersection with the side planes.

Table file

The idSymbol column in the table file shows the keyname MidPlane.
The actual distance between the side faces of the symmetry plane is
shown in the distance column. The distance from the nominal geometry is shown in the nom_distance column.

Step Cylinder special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Step Cylinder
The Stepped Cylinder feature allows CALYPSO to compute a feature
composed of one or more cylinders.
Geometry

A stepped cylinder consists of several individual cylinders with a common


axis and different diameters. Each individual cylinder (step) can be defined
as an inside or outside feature.

Use

The stepped cylinder can be used, for example, to check the dimensional
accuracy of a bearing block. The bearings for the shaft must meet certain
tolerances regarding the position of the axes and their diameters to ensure that the shaft diameter fits the bearings.
Similarly to a mechanical gage, it is possible to check the dimensional
accuracy and the eccentricity of each step.

Measurement strategy /
nominal definition

A stepped cylinder cannot be measured directly. The individual steps must


be available in the form of features (or files) and interlinked using the
point recall function. The point recall function can also be opened by
clicking Strategy.
Select a cylinder for each step or load its data from a file. The cylinders
must be on the same axis but they do not need to touch each other.

4-64

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

NOTICE
As of the second step, it is possible to recall other features instead of
cylinders. CALYPSO evaluates the points of these features as points of
cylinders.
Pattern

The stepped cylinder can be defined with pattern. If you select Add loop
to all marked Features for a feature with pattern in the context menu
in the Recall Feature Points dialog box, CALYPSO recalls all points of
the feature with pattern in one individual step of the stepped cylinder and
handles them in the same way as points of one individual cylinder.
If you select Delete loop from all selected Features for a feature
with pattern in the context menu in the Recall Feature Points dialog
box, CALYPSO recalls the individual pattern features of the feature as
individual steps of a stepped cylinder with pattern. This is only useful if
the same pattern is used for all steps and you select this option for all
steps. CALYPSO creates as many pattern features as possible in the stepped cylinder with pattern: The number of pattern features represents the
minimum number of features of individual pattern for all steps.

Feature reference point


and axis

Each step has its own feature reference point the nominal position of
which must lie on the axis of the stepped cylinder. The position of the
first step becomes the feature reference point of the stepped cylinder.
The axis of the stepped cylinder is determined by best-fit alignment. The
total length of the stepped cylinder results from the difference between
the highest end point and the lowest start point of the individual steps
on the common axis.
NOTICE
In case of subsequent changes of the individual steps, the total length of
the stepped cylinder is not changed any more.
Total length

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-65

Details on definition of the features

The nominal positions of the feature reference points of the individual


steps are projected onto the axis of the computed feature and produce
thus the actual positions of the feature reference points. The same procedure applies to the end points of the individual steps to determine in
this way the actual lengths of the individual steps.

Result output

Depending on your specifications, CALYPSO determines on the basis of


the measured values the position of the axis, the position and the total
length of the stepped cylinder as well as the diameter or the radius of the
individual step.

Characteristics

If the corresponding check boxes are activated, CALYPSO can automatically add the corresponding characteristics to the measurement plan.
CALYPSO adds an individual characteristic to the measurement plan for
the diameter (or the radius).
You must define in the definition template for the stepped cylinder which
steps are to be checked and whether the step is to be handled as an inside
or an outside feature. This does not depend on the corresponding original
cylinder.

Use of the stepped cylinder

Special features

4-66

Certain particular aspects must be taken into account when using the
stepped cylinder in characteristics:

If the stepped cylinder is selected as feature, the total length will be


used by characteristics requiring a reference length for evaluation (e.g.
True Position).

Characteristics which apply the most-material condition (MMC) or the


least-material condition (LMC) for the determination of tolerances of
form and position of a stepped cylinder calculate with special tolerance additions (Specifying tolerance additions for MMC/LMC evaluation [ 536]).

The Minimum, Maximum and Average characteristics always only


evaluate the diameters or the radii of those steps that have been activated on the Steps - Radii tab.

For output to file, the chr.txt and fet.txt table files are written in a separate
result line for each step.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

The values of user-defined attributes are output in additional columns in


the table file for characteristics (*chr.txt) during each run.

Radius point special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Radius Point
Use the radius, sphere and angle points features to select the applicable
radius correction with discrete-point measurements in order to define the
point of contact correctly.
The Radius Point feature is intended for probing cylindrical elements. The
measured value is corrected in the measuring plane towards the connecting line between the stylus center and the specified center point.

Measuring plane

Cylinder axis

Probing strategy

Perform the following steps to measure a radius point:


1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Specify a point on the cylinder axis and the vector of the cylinder axis.
3 Probe a point.

Result output

The actual radius and the coordinates of the probing point are read out
in the definition template.

Automatic feature recognition

A radius point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and then
perform probing.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-67

Details on definition of the features

Sphere Point special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Sphere Point
Use the radius, sphere and angle points features to select the applicable
radius correction with discrete-point measurements in order to define the
point of contact correctly.
With the sphere point, the measured value is corrected towards the connecting line between the stylus center and the specified center. The
sphere point is intended for probing sphere surfaces. Use the radius point
for cylindrical features.
Probing strategy

Perform the following steps to measure a sphere point:


1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Enter the coordinates for the sphere center point and the desired radius in the Center Point column.
3 Probe a point.

Result output

The actual radius of the sphere, the vector from the sphere center point
to the probing point and the coordinates of the probing point are read
out in the definition template.

Example of application

Using the Sphere Point feature, you can define the radius of a sphere with
a single probing and specification of the sphere center point.

Automatic feature recognition

A sphere point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and then
perform probing.

4-68

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Angle Point special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Angle Point
Use the radius, sphere and angle points features to select the applicable
radius correction with discrete-point measurements in order to define the
point of contact correctly.
With the angle point, the measured value is corrected towards the normal
for the probed plane.
Probing strategy

To measure an angle point, you must specify a reference plane through


the plane origin, a space axis and an angle and then probe exactly one
point.
Perform the following steps to measure an angle point:
1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Enter the values for the location of the plane origin in the left column.
3 Select how you want the reference plane to lie by specifying a space
axis and an angle.
4 Probe a point on the plane that has to be measured.

Result output

The actual angle of the probed plane and the coordinates of the probing
point are read out in the definition template.

Example of application

Using the Angle Point feature, you can compute the angle between two
planes, for example, by probing. Specify one plane first. CALYPSO computes the second plane from a probing and the origin of the specified
plane.

Automatic feature recognition

An angle point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the plane origin and then perform
the probing.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-69

Details on definition of the features

Circle on Cone special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries Circle on Cone
Using the Circle on Cone feature, you can probe arcs on conical workpiece parts.
You can project the circle or arc onto any measured plane. CALYPSO uses
the probed points to compute the circle or arc which best fits the probing
points.
The center point (X, Y, Z) and thus indirectly the height as well as the
diameter D and the cone angle CA must be entered in the definition
template.
Probing strategy

The minimum number of points is 3. The probing points should be on a


section perpendicular to the axis of the circle you want to measure. It is
advisable to probe at least 4 points.

Automatic feature recognition

Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same
height. If the height differences between the individual points are excessive, CALYPSO will compute a cone instead of a circle on cone. If this
happens, you can reconstruct a circle on cone manually in the Geometry menu.

Local feature alignment

The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the measured
circular section (not in a projection plane of the coordinate system).

Gage Correction Qualification

Gage correction qualification is a method by which you determine the


dynamic bend parameters for circles and cylinders occurring during measurement and correct them mathematically during further measurements.
NOTICE
Gage correction qualification is only useful for scanning with a measuring
probe.

Defined Height

4-70

CALYPSO performs the probings on a circle on cone perpendicular to the


cone surface. If the X/Y position of the actual cone is offset from the
nominal cone, the height of the probing points is no longer equal. An
ellipse is produced. This change increases with the cone's taper angle.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

To reach a circle at the defined height, activate the Defined Height


check box in the Evaluation window.
This option is used to convert the measured points internally with reference to the desired height via a projection along the wall of the cone.
NOTICE
For a new circle on cone, the Defined Height function is deactivated
by default. Otherwise, qualification with automatic feature recognition
would not be possible because CALYPSO takes the height as the value 0
for the automatic feature recognition.

Moving the intersection height along the axis


By changing one or more coordinates of the base circle center, the geometrically unchanged cone in the measuring room is also moved.
However, the coordinate change also makes it possible to move the circle
center along the cone axis and thus to change the diameter. The cone
keeps its original geometric form. However, the base circle has now a
different position.

To do so, click Move nominal position along the axis in the definition template of the cone and enter the new coordinates in the Move
nominal position along the axis window. It is sufficient to enter a
new coordinate; the other coordinates result from the unchanged cone
axis. CALYPSO immediately recomputes the defining aspects of the cone.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-71

Details on definition of the features

General Surface special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries General surface
Tool Box: Measurement General surface
The General surface feature corresponds to the FEAT/GSURF DMIS
feature. For the evaluation of a general surface, no mathematically defined free form surface is computed to obtain the result of a nominalactual comparison of two surfaces. The General Surface feature is merely
a container for a set of points belonging to a surface.
Special features

Each point of a general surface is probed, measured and processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and strategy information
can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or strategy is
selected, clicking the probing point icon will produce a new point here.
NOTICE
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the definition
template nor in the point list; they appear only in the printouts and protocols (default printout, compact printout and custom printout).

Nominal Definition

Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for
the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all
associated points of the general surface.

Point from the CAD model

You can add a nominal point to the general surface by clicking the desired
position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template
must be open when you do this).

Point by probing

You can add a point to the general surface by probing with the CMM.

Automatic feature recognition

A general surface is not detected automatically by CALYPSO.

General Curve special geometry


Menu: Features Special Geometries General curve
Tool Box: Measurement General curve
Special features

The General curve feature corresponds to the FEAT/GCURVE DMIS


feature. No mathematically defined curve shape is computed from splines
in the evaluation of a general curve to obtain the result of the nominalactual comparison of two curved lines. The General Curve feature is
merely a container for a set of points belonging to a curve.

Strategy

Each point of a general curve is probed, measured and processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and strategy information

4-72

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or strategy is


selected, clicking the probing point icon will produce a new point here.
The points may be in any spatial location. The actual values result after
projection of the data onto a plane specified in the definition template of
the general curve (with X, Y, Z, NX, NY, NZ).
NOTICE
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the definition
template nor in the point list; they appear only in the printouts and protocols (default printout, compact printout and custom printout).
Nominal Definition

Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for
the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all
associated points of the general curve.

Point from the CAD model

You can add a nominal point to the general curve by clicking the desired
position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template
must be open when you do this).

Point by probing

You can add a point to the general curve by probing.

Automatic feature recognition

A general curve is not detected automatically by CALYPSO.

Free Form Surface special geometry


Basics of the Free Form Surface special
geometry
Menu: Features Special Geometries Free Form Surface
Tool Box: Measurement Free Form Surface
Alternatively, add the feature via CAD Creating features. Here,
you can also define additional free form features such as space points and
curves.
You can use the Free Form Surface feature only if a CAD model is
loaded and the assignment to the surface is valid. Otherwise, no free form
surface can be computed.
Special features

A free form surface is connected with a surface in the appropriate


CAD model.

The Free Form Surface feature is limited by the CAD model and has
no infinite expansion.

The free form surface can be interrupted by bores.

A coordinate system can be created with the best fit of the free form
surface.

The accuracy of the best fit of the free form surface can be controlled.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-73

Details on definition of the features

Defining the path on a free form surface in the


strategy window
You can define the points for measuring a free form surface in the
Strategy window.
1 Click Strategy in the definition template.
2 Click the Define points icon.
The Create Point Set dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Define the path generation type.


If you have selected Intersection or Two Points, you can create
additional parallel lines on the left and right of the main line in
addition to the intersection line.
If you want to apply the point set from a file, you must specify a
file in the VDA or TXT format. CALYPSO applies from the file only
the points which are located close enough to the surface of the
CAD model.
4 Define the distribution of the points of the path to be generated in the
Settings group.
5 Define the curvature function and the corresponding parameters in
the Point Distribution group.
The curvature function cannot be activated for single points.
6 Click as many points or features in the CAD model as you have defined.
7 Click Create and check the result by means of the CAD model.

4-74

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

8 Transfer the displayed space point distribution to the strategy by


means of Create Point Set or click Delete and repeat the process
by starting with step 6.
9 Close the window.

Format of the text file for the point set


(reference)
You can define the points for measuring a free form surface in the
Strategy window. The coordinates of the point set can be loaded from
a text file.
Format of the file

Examples

In the text file, the points must be represented in Cartesian coordinates


as follows:

A row is provided for each point.

Each row shows the values for the X, Y and Z coordinates and optionally also the components of the corresponding Nx, Ny and Nz normal vectors.

The comma or point can be used as decimal marker. Only one type
of decimal marker can be used in a file.

A blank, semicolon, comma, point and slash can be used as separator


for the individual numerical values. Only one type of separator can be
used in a file.

If you use points and commas in a file, the point is interpreted as


decimal marker.

Some examples of TXT files for the definition of a point set:


Text file for the point set, example 1
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 0.2542 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 1,5234 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 2,3434 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 2,5543 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.2340 3,0204 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
Text file for the point set, example 2
0/0/0/0/0/1
0/0,2542/0/0/0/1
0/1,5234/0/0/0/1
0/2,3434/0/0/0/1
0/2,5543/0/0/0/1
0.2340/3,0204/0/0/0/1

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-75

Details on definition of the features

Defining the path on a free form surface via


the CAD model
You can define the points for measuring free form surfaces in the Modify CAD Model window.
1 Select CAD Creating features.
2 Activate the Points tab.

3 Click the feature in the CAD window which you want to transfer as a
free form surface.
The name of the feature saved in the CAD model is displayed in the
uppermost line in the window.
4 Select Free Form Surface to define a free form surface.
5 Define the path generation type.
6 Define the distribution of the points of the path to be generated under
Settings.
7 Define the curvature function and the corresponding parameters in
the Point Distribution group.
The curvature function cannot be activated for single points.
8 Click as many points or features in the CAD model as you have defined.

4-76

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

9 Under Points, click Create and check the result by means of the CAD
model.
10Transfer the displayed strategy to the feature by means of Create
Feature or click Delete and repeat the process by starting with step
5.
11Close the window.

Best fit of the free form surface with variable


accuracy
You can change the accuracy of the best fit of the free form surface.
Reduced accuracy leads to satisfactory results with short duration.
Evaluation window

The settings are defined in the Evaluation Free Form Surface window.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-77

Details on definition of the features

Enter an A value between 0.01 and 0.000005 or set it by means of the


slider under Best Fit. The A value is used a abortion criterion during best
fit. A smaller A value leads to a faster end of the iteration.
Measurement Plan Editor Features

You can also predefine the A value for the entire measurement plan or
for each free form surface in the Measurement Plan Editor Features under Geometry Best fit accuracy (free form surface).
NOTICE
The A value is composed of the translational and rotational elements of
the transformation matrix.

4-78

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Holos and Gear additional features

Menu: Features Additional Features Holos or Gear


Tool Box: Measurement Holos or Gear
You can integrate any HOLOS or GEAR PRO macro into a measurement
plan and have it executed during the CNC run. The programmed macro
is started by the CMM OS during the CNC run.
You can add the Holos or Gear utility to both the list of characteristics
and the list of features. In this manner, the selected macros can be executed after either a characteristic or feature is run.
NOTICE
Before starting a measurement, either HOLOS or GEAR PRO must have
been started, otherwise the CNC run will be canceled.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-79

Details on definition of the features

Strategy

Comment

Makro Call

Selection

Select coordinate system for macro


Current Base alignment

Coordinate system received from macro

New name in Calypso

OK

Entries for HOLOS or


GEAR PRO

Reset

Enter the following in the definition template:

the macro to be executed


You can either enter the macro directly or by selecting it from a catalog.

the coordinate system for the macro


You can select a coordinate system in CALYPSO, which will be passed
to HOLOS or GEAR PRO. The manner in which the coordinate system
will be used must be specified in HOLOS.

a coordinate system from the macro


You can receive a coordinate system from the macro and use it further
in CALYPSO. To do so, enter the name under which the coordinate
system should be used in CALYPSO.

4-80

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Turbine Blade additional feature


Basics of the Turbine Blade additional feature
Menu: Features Additional Features Turbine Blade
Tool Box: Measurement Turbine Blade
Use of the feature

The Turbine Blade feature is used to transfer nominal data and measured data for turbine blades to the BLADE PRO program for evaluation.
It creates several XML files.
The import of nominal data, the definition of the measurement strategy
as well as the measurement itself are carried out in CALYPSO. Use the
Curve feature for this. The BLADE PRO program is used for evaluation
only.

Printout header variables

Together with the nominal data and the measuring results, all printout
header variables belonging to the measurement plan are also transferred
to BLADE PRO. The variables of the SYS data group are assigned the
type=static in the XML file, all other variables receive the type=dynamic.
Example in an XML file:
<Property operid="Master" type="static" />
<Property creationswi="3.8.00" type="dynamic" />

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-81

Details on definition of the features

Entries

Enter the following in the definition template:

Group

Entries

Specification file

For additional information, please refer to the BLADE PRO document.

Results

Output formats of the results.

Features

Shows all Curve Form characteristics or curves of the measurement


plan. Select those curves or characteristics the curves of which you
want to evaluate with BLADE PRO as turbine blades.

Restriction with respect to


features

Activate Only export features already measured to export


only features with measured values.

4-82

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

CNC run with the Turbine Blade additional


feature
In the case of measurement plans with the Turbine Blade additional
feature, you must observe the following:
Prior to the CNC run

Prior to the CNC run, export the nominal data to BLADE PRO if necessary.
For this purpose, you open the definition template for the Turbine Blade
feature, mark the desired intersections and click Export Nominals.
The nominal data for each of the selected intersections is written in an
XML file named Section_xxx_nominal.xml. The printout header variables
are also transferred.
The files are saved in the directory that is defined as BladeNomPath in the
<user directory>\curveParameter.txt file.

Run after start

After starting the CNC run, the following files are created and transferred
to BLADE PRO:

Startup.xml: File with a referral to the BLADE PRO specification file.


The specification file is used by BLADE PRO but must have been selected beforehand in CALYPSO.

Section_xxx_actual.xml: Measured data files corresponding to Section_xxx_nominal.xml. After each measurement of a curve selected in
the definition template, the corresponding data is written in the
measured value file. The files are saved in the directory that is defined
as BladeActPath in the <user directory>\curveParameter.txt file. The
printout header variables are also transferred.

Finish.xml: End code of the measurement. BLADE PRO will only start
evaluation if this file is available. The data for the result output in
BLADE PRO is transferred to this file. Once the evaluation has been
completed, this will be deleted by BLADE PRO.

Once the Finish.xml file has been created, the BLADE PRO program starts
the calculation and evaluation.
The results are created in the formats specified in the definition template.
Once Blade has deleted the Finish.xml file, CALYPSO continues the CNC
run.

Profile Elements additional feature


Menu: Features Additional Features Profile Elements
Tool Box: Measurement Profile Elements
Use of the additional
feature

The Profile Elements additional feature is used to create sections


through the workpiece and features in these sections for a CT dataset.
This additional feature can also be used for manual measurements on the
CT dataset and the created sections. The additional feature also allows
you to create profile elements for your measurement plan which can then
be measured in the CNC run.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-83

Details on definition of the features

You can find more details in the operating instructions for the Metrotomography option under Measuring in intersection planes.

Point Set additional feature


Basics of the Point Set additional feature
Menu: Features Additional Features Points Cloud
Tool Box: Measurement Points Cloud
Use of the additional
feature

The Point Set additional feature is used to evaluate points.


You have the following options:

Calculating and representing deviations from the CAD model

Modifying the representation of the deviations

Defining features on the point cloud and transferring them to the


measurement plan

You can find more details in the operating instructions for the Metrotomography option under Nominal-actual comparison on a CT dataset.
Origin of the measuring
values

You have several options for the takeover of measuring values:

Measuring points on the workpiece

Recalling measured points via the point recall function

Reading point file with measuring values

Defining a point set


Define the point set in the definition template Point Set on the Select
Points index card.

4-84

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Measuring a point set


1 Select the Measurement option et set the clearance group.
2 Click Strategy.
The Strategy window is opened.
3 Click the Define points icon.
The Create Point Set dialog box appears on the screen.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-85

Details on definition of the features

4 Define the path generation type.


The further procedure is described under Defining the path on a free
form surface in the strategy window [ 474].

Recalling a point set


1 Select the Recall Feature Points option.
2 Click the icon and define in the Recall Points window the points to
be used to form the point set.
The procedure is described Using the point recall [ 4105].

Point set from file


1 Select the File... option.
2 Enter the path and the file name in the input field and define the path
as absolute or relative path.
- or Click the File Selection icon and enter the desired file in the file
selection dialog.
The format of the point file is described under Format of the text
file for the point set [ 475].
The file is loaded.

4-86

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

Evaluating a point set


Use the Evaluation index card of the definition template for the Point
Set additional feature to edit the point set, define its representation in
the CAD window and carry out the evaluation.

1 To add a comment to the feature, click Comment and enter the


memo.
2 To modify the point set, activate Filter, enter the point distance and
click Apply.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-87

Details on definition of the features

3 To eliminate wrongly determined points from the point set, activate


Eliminate points, enter the critical angle and the maximum distance and click Apply.
All measuring points exceeding the maximum distance to the corresponding nominal point or of which the normal has a larger angle than
the specified critical angle with regard to the nominal normal are eliminated from the point set.
4 For triangulation, activate Triangulation and click Apply.
The point set is shown as a triangular grid.
5 To calculate the deviations between the measuring values and the
CAD model, enter the corresponding parameters and click Calculate.
6 To define the view in the CAD window, enter the desired parameters
under View.
Use the icons to determine the point density.
Use Properties to open the Color map window where you can
modify the colored representation in the CAD window.
7 To output a graphic representation of the CAD view, activate Graphic and click Properties.

4-88

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

8 Enter the desired properties of the graphic in the Graphics Settings window:
Plot The view of the CAD window is shown as a plot.
Transparency: The CAD model is shown transparently.
Hide: The CAD model is hidden; only the point set is displayed.
9 Click the Save icon to save the actual values of the point set in a TXT
or STL file.
10Click the Save with nominal values icon to save the point set
with nominal values in a TXT or STL file.
11Click OK to close the window.

Station Point additional feature


Menu: Features Additional Features Station Point
The Station Point additional feature is only required when using CALYPSO with a laser tracker.
The procedure for the measurement with a laser tracker is different to
the procedure for the measurement with a CMM. A measurement plan
is usually not available, but it is created point by point by probing individual points with the laser tracker.
Large workpieces require the position of the laser tracker to be changed
one or more times. A base alignment match is required for the conversion
of the coordinate values measured at the individual stations into a common system.
Use of the additional
feature

The Station Point additional feature enables an extended base alignment match with an alternative best fit algorithm. In this case, the station
point corresponds to a position of the laser tracker device.
Use the definition template to define the station point.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-89

Details on definition of the features

Entries

The nominal values of the station point should specify the expected position of the laser tracker but do not need to be entered.
The actual values of the station point are calculated later and represent
the exact position of the laser tracker.

Selection of the bundle


points

By selecting the Strategy button, the List of Bundle Points window


is opened.

4-90

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

You enter here the points that are measured from several stations and
are thus suitable for the conversion. You define also whether the station
point is a base station or a follow-on station.
NOTICE
A base station is not absolutely necessary. If no station is a base station,
the calculation takes place via a free net adjustment (freier Netzausgleich).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-91

Details on definition of the features

Greater accuracy by gage correction


qualification
Prerequisites for gage correction qualification
Gage correction qualification is a method by which you can measure circles and cylinders to a very high degree of precision and at very high
scanning speed.
For gage correction qualification, CALYPSO must record the bend parameters of the stylus used. When a circle or an arc or a cylinder is subsequently measured, you can correct the result by applying the bend parameters.
Prerequisites

The preconditions for recording and correcting bending parameters are


as follows:

A new measurement plan for the reference workpiece is open and


you have defined the clearance planes.

You know how to start a CNC run.

Creating a new measurement plan [ 33]


Defining the clearance planes [ 356]
Defining the scope of measurement [ 73]

The circle or cylinder is measured on the same primary plane of the


workpiece coordinate system as was used in recording the bend parameters.

Recording the bend parameters


In order to record the bend parameters, you need a workpiece with a
reference bore or a reference plug.
The bore or plug must be of known diameter.
NOTICE
The bend parameters have no effect unless you have installed a measuring probe.
The plug or bore is measured as an overlapping full circle in a separate
measurement plan.
1 Position the base alignment in the center of the reference bore or plug.
2 Select Resources Utilities Gauge Correction Qualification.
CALYPSO adds the icon for gage correction qualification to the list of
features.
3 Open the definition template.
4 Enter the qualified diameter of the bore or the plug in the D field.

4-92

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on definition of the features

5 Select the scanning method for the circle:


The window used to enter the scanning speed is opened.
Click Strategy.
Click the Circle Auto Path Definition icon.
In the list, double-click Circle Path (1 Section).
6 Enter the desired scanning speed.
7 Click OK to close all dialog boxes.
Click Yes at the prompt shown below.

8 Perform a CNC run of the measurement plan so that CALYPSO can


measure the bend parameters.
Now that CALYPSO knows the bend parameters of the stylus, it will be
possible to correct measuring results of full circles and arcs accordingly
(see Applying the bend parameters [ 493]).

Applying the bend parameters


Use the definition template of the circle or cylinder to have the bend
parameters corrected for all future full and partial circles.

Activating correction by the bend parameters


Conditions:
The prerequisite is that for the measurement the values for the diameter, measuring location, orientation and scanning speed are as
close as possible to the values of the bend parameter definition.
However, the height for the cylinder measurement is not decisive.
1 Open the definition template of the circle or cylinder and click Evaluation.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-93

Details on definition of the features

2 Tick the Gage Correction check box.

4-94

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Linking features in constructions


What is a construction?
What is a construction?

Specially constructed elements of a workpiece that cannot be probed directly, e.g. the center of a bore or the intersection of two features. These
features can be calculated using features that can be probed.
With CALYPSO, you can mathematically construct regular geometric elements and, in this way, define the feature you require. You can also
parameterize the features to be constructed, i.e. by using formulas.
You can use either the actual or nominal geometry for the construction.
NOTICE
As constructions cannot be probed, automatic feature recognition is not
available here.
In the measurement plan, constructions are indicated by the letter T
next to the icon because these are theoretical features. Apart from Recall, CALYPSO supports 15 different constructions.

Overview of constructions
Recall is a special construction. It is called from within the definition template of the feature.
Name

Call

Description

Recall

From within the Defining features by recalling [ 497]


definition template of the feature
You an call all other constructions from within the Construct menu.
CALYPSO offers the following constructions:

Construction

Description

Perpendicular

Perpendicular construction [ 4115]

Intersection

Intersection construction [ 4116]

GDT Symmetry

Symmetry construction [ 4132]

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-95

Linking features in constructions

Construction

Description

Edge Point

Edge Point construction [ 4141]

Projection

Projection construction [ 4141]

Tangent

Tangent construction [ 4142]

Minimum Point

Minimum Point construction [ 4144]

Maximum Point

Maximum Point construction [ 4145]

Minimum Feature

Minimum Feature construction [ 4145]

Maximum Feature

Maximum Feature construction [ 4145]

Average-Feature

Average-Feature construction [ 4146]

Cone Addition

Cone Addition construction [ 4146]

Plane with Offset

Plane with Offset construction [ 4148]

Circle in contour
fit

Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148] (available


only if the CNC Curve Measuring Software option is enabled)

Kink Point

Kink Point construction [ 4154]

Step Point

Step Point construction [ 4156]

4-96

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Defining constructions
The procedure for defining a construction is very similar to that for defining a feature.
1 Add the construction of your choice to the measurement plan by selecting it in the Construct menu.
2 Double-click the construction icon.
This opens the definition template of the construction.
3 Select the features required for the construction using one of the following methods:
When selecting a feature, you can specify that the nominal geometry
is to be used for the evaluation.
Click Feature and select the feature of your choice from the selection list.
Enter the name of the feature in the input field and confirm with
.
Select the Formula entry in the context menu of the input field.
Enter a formula for the name of the feature (Result: Text).
The value of the formula is calculated during run time and the construction defined accordingly.
When selecting a feature, you can specify that the nominal geometry
is to be used for the evaluation.
4 Press OK to confirm.
The features you selected are now interlinked in a construction.
Certain special aspects have to be borne in mind with the following constructions:
Cone Addition (Cone Addition construction [ 4146])
Circle in contour best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148])

Defining features by recalling


Recall construction
The recall is a special type of construction. You can use a recall to derive
a new feature from one or more features.
Example of application

Let us suppose you have measured four circles. You would now like to
learn the circle on which the center points of the measured circles are

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-97

Linking features in constructions

located. To this end, define a new circle from the recalled center points
of the four measured circles.

You can realize the following recall types with CALYPSO:

Playing a video

Recall: Returns the reference point(s) (the origin of the local feature
alignment) of one or more features.

Recall One Feature: Returns the entire feature.


To play a video about recalling one element into a new coordinate
system, click 012_e_Rueckruf2/012_e_Rueckruf2.htm.

Playing a video

Recall Feature Points: Returns individual points, individual paths,


specific areas (specified in coordinates) or all points of one or more
features or one file.
To play a video about recalling a 3D line from three circle centers, click
011_e_Rueckruf1/011_Rueckruf1.htm

During recall and recall feature points, you can parameterize the features
to be recalled by means of the formula input. In this case, the features
are only determined during run time.
NOTICE
Proceed very carefully when defining a feature by recalling. Theoretically,
you could recall any number of features but this would not make any
sense.

4-98

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Recall and pattern


You can combine recall and pattern for the nominal value definition: For
each of the three recall types, you can also select features with patterns,
and you can also define a new feature with a pattern via the recall function.
You can define how the patterns are to be evaluated when they are recalled.

Recall One Feature


In the case of Recall One Feature, CALYPSO takes over the pattern of
the selected feature even if you have not yet assigned a pattern to the
new feature.
Once you have assigned a pattern to the new feature, an individual feature or an individual pattern feature will be used as original feature of the
new pattern. However, a feature with pattern keeps its pattern and
overwrites the assigned pattern of the new feature.

Recall and point recall


The behavior for Recall and Recall Feature Points depends on the
fact whether the new feature has already been assigned a pattern and
on the way in which the features to be recalled are shown in the selection
window.
Loop and index transfer

If a potential feature for the points recall has a pattern, this can be shown
in the selection window in two ways:

with loop: with brackets and start and end index,

with index transfer: with brackets and asterisk.

This representation determines the recall.


To change between these representation types, use the context menu:

Add loop to all marked features: the marked features with


pattern are shownwith loop.

Delete loops from all selected Features: the marked features


with pattern are shown with index transfer.

Select loops individually: the window shows all marked features


of the list with pattern and you can individually select each entry:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-99

Linking features in constructions

New feature without


pattern

If the new feature does not yet possess any pattern, the following applies:

If you select a feature with the with loop pattern, the reference
points or the specified points of all pattern features of the feature are
recalled.

If you select a feature with the with index transfer pattern, you are
prompted whether a pattern is to be assigned to the new feature. A
pattern with the minimum actual number of all marked features with
the with index transfer pattern is offered as default.
By confirming this, the reference points or the specified points of the
original feature of the patterns are recalled and the proposed pattern
is assigned.
If you reject this, a pattern with only one pattern feature is created.

New feature with pattern

If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or the
specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern feature
are recalled.

If a pattern has been assigned to the new feature beforehand, the following applies:

If you select a feature with the with index transfer pattern, the reference points or the specified points of the original features are recalled and the pattern of the new feature is assigned.

If you select a feature with the with loop pattern, the reference
points of all pattern features of the feature or the specified points of
all pattern features of the feature are recalled.
If then the assigned pattern of the new feature contains more actual
pattern features than the minimum of all actual numbers of patterns
(of all marked features), you are prompted whether the pattern with
the smallest actual number is to be used for the feature.
By confirming this, the new feature will receive the corresponding
pattern.

4-100

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

By rejecting this, the previous pattern will be maintained.


NOTICE
This leads to a stop of the CNC run. Since the number of pattern features
of the newly defined feature is larger than the number of pattern features
of the individual recalled features, some of the pattern features of the
new feature are not defined.

If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or the
specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern feature
are recalled.

Recalling reference points of features


The Recall function makes it possible to recall the reference points (the
origins of the local feature alignment) of one or more already defined
features and to determine a new feature.
Thus, two circles define a straight line that goes through both center
points of the circles.
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you require to be created by a recall.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall entry.
The Selection dialog box with the features is opened.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-101

Linking features in constructions

3 Open in the tree the features with loop to recall individual pattern
features.
Features with loop are shown with brackets and the specification of
the index range, e.g. Circle1(1-4).
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and asterisk, e.g.
Circle2*.
4 If you want to define the recall by means of the formula input, do not
select anything here and select Formula in the context menu. Enter
a formula which will furnish a list of names. To do this, use the list
PCM function.
Example: list("Plane1","Plane2")
Proceed with step 7.

4-102

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

5 If you do not want to define the recall by means of a formula:


To adapt the features with pattern, mark the corresponding entries
and select the context menu:
Add loop to all marked Features: All marked features with
pattern are shown with loop and with the index range.
Delete loop from all selected Features: The loops of all
marked features with pattern are shown with index transfer
(with asterisk).
Select loops individually: Opens a window with all marked
features with pattern. Here, for each individual feature, you can
select or deselect loop and index transfer.
6 Select the features you need.
7 You can define the evaluation method, filtering and outlier elimination
for the required features.
Filter and outlier elimination are valid equally for all selected features.
8 Press OK to confirm.
The reference point(s) is (are) are accepted.

Recalling a feature in its entirety


You can recall a feature in its entirety. In this way, you recall the whole
selected feature (possibly transformed into a different coordinate system)
and derive from it a new feature of identical geometry.
NOTICE
The result is a theoretical feature that accesses the original feature with
the getActual formula.
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you require to be created by a recall.
2 If the new feature should posses a certain pattern, select under Nominal Definition the Pattern entry.
3 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall One Feature
entry.
The Selection dialog box with the features is opened.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-103

Linking features in constructions

Only those features are displayed that are of the same type as the
feature to be defined.
4 Open in the tree the features in loops to recall individual pattern features.
You can then access individual features of a pattern.
5 Select the corresponding feature and confirm with OK.
The feature is accepted and determines the new feature.
Playing a video

To play a video about recalling one element into a new coordinate system,
click 012_e_Rueckruf2/012_e_Rueckruf2.htm.

Recalling one feature


and pattern

Once you have accepted a feature with a pattern, the new feature will
also receive this pattern, regardless of whether you have assigned a pattern to this new feature beforehand or not.

4-104

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Once you have assigned a pattern to the new feature and you have accepted an individual pattern feature, this becomes the original feature of
the assigned pattern.

Using the point recall


The Recall Feature Points function supports the recall of any measured
points of other already defined features to evaluate them in a different
manner.
You can recall individual points, individual paths, specific areas (specified
in coordinates) or all points of one or more features.

You can recall all points of one or more features [ 4105].

You can parameterize the features to be recalled and its ranges by


means of the formula input [ 4107].

You can determine the points with the mouse [ 4109].

You can recall individual points, individual paths or specific


areas [ 4109] (specified in coordinates) of one or more features.

You can import point coordinates from a file and use the nominal
value definition [ 4112].

NOTICE
Use the Recall Feature Points window to define the point recall. The
feature will be recomputed with the respective current actual values
when closing. If this is not necessary since you only want to check entries,
untick the Re-calculate Nominal Geometry check box.

Recalling individual points and ranges


1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you require to be created by a recall.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall Feature
Points entry.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-105

Linking features in constructions

The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points window.

At the same time, two new icons appear in the top right corner: Show
selection of Actual points and Select Actual-points via
Mouse cursor.
All the potential features for the point recall are listed in the Recall
Feature Points window.
3 Activate Show all Features in Patterns or Loops to recall individual pattern features.
Features with loop are shown with brackets and the specification
of the index range, e.g. Circle1(1-4).
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and asterisk, e.g.
Circle2<*>.
4 To adapt the features with pattern, mark the corresponding entries
and select the context menu:
Add loop to all marked Features: All marked features with
pattern are shown with loop and with the index range.
Delete loop from all selected Features: The loops of all
marked features with pattern are shown with index transfer
(with asterisk).

4-106

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Select loops individually: Opens a window with all marked


features with pattern. Here, for each individual feature, you can
select or deselect loop and index transfer.
5 To add the individual circle paths of a cylinder to the list, click the
cylinder and select Open in the context menu.
You have two options to recall points:
You can recall all points of one or more features.
You can recall certain points of one or more features.
6 To recall all points from one or several features into the new feature,
select these points and confirm with OK.
The new feature is created from the points.
7 To recall certain points from one feature into the new feature, select
Add Range Limits in the context menu of the feature and specify
the desired points. For more details, please refer to Specifying recall
points more accurately [ 4109].

Parameterizing features and recall points


The Recall Feature Points function supports the recall of any measured
points of other already defined features to evaluate them in a different
manner. You can recall individual points, individual paths, specific areas
(specified in coordinates) or all points of one or more features.
During recall feature points, you can parameterize the features to be recalled and its ranges by means of the formula input.
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you require to be created by a recall.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall Feature
Points entry.
The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points window.
3 Do not mark anything and select Formula in the context menu.
4 Enter the list of desired features as the formula. To do this, use the
list PCM function.
Example: list("Circle1","Circle2","Circle3")
5 Press OK to confirm.
Note that the color of the field with the features has changed to yellow.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-107

Linking features in constructions

6 You have two options to recall points:


You can recall all points of one or more features.
You can recall certain points of one or more features.
7 If you want to limit the points to be recalled, select Add Range Limits in the context menu and specify the points and the point ranges
(Specifying recall points more accurately [ 4109]).
8 Press OK to confirm.
The feature has now been defined. The entries are evaluated during run
time.

4-108

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Defining the recall points with the mouse


With the point recall function you have the option to recall all points
from one or several features or certain points from a single feature and
to create a new feature.
Select the Recall Feature Points entry under Nominal Definition in the definition template of the new feature to be created.
1 In the list, select the feature with the points from which the new feature is to be produced.
2 Click the Show selection of Actual points icon in the toolbar to
represent the measured points of the feature with crosses in the CAD
window.
3 Click the Select Actual-points via Mouse cursor icon in the
toolbar and use the mouse to drag a rectangle (a cuboid is internally
generated from the rectangle) around the desired points.
In the list of features, the box (X,Y,Z,+X,+Y,+Z) entry appears
behind the name of the feature in question. The coordinates of two
diagonally opposite corner points of the cuboid are specified in the
brackets.
Note: The sides of the cube are first aligned with the feature alignment.
To change and edit this box, use the Add Range Limits [ 4109]
function. Here you can also change the alignment with which the sides
of the cube are aligned.

Specifying recall points more accurately


With the point recall function you have the option to recall all points
from one or several features or certain points from a single feature and
to create a new feature.
Select the Recall Feature Points entry under Nominal Definition in the definition template of the new feature to be created.
The Feature Point Recall window allows you to specify the points to
be recalled more accurately. For example, it is not necessary that the box
is parallel to the base alignment.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-109

Linking features in constructions

Base alignment
Box with
recalled points

Coordinate system

Recalling certain points from a single feature explicitly


into the new feature
1 In the list, select the feature with the points from which the new feature is to be produced and select Add Range Limits in the context
menu.
The Feature Point Recall window opens.

4-110

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

2 Click one of the icons to copy a point, an area, a box, a circle path, an
angle range or a cylinder into the feature list.
3 Enter the corresponding parameters in the lower part of the window.
4 Click OK.
The defined points are included in the new feature. In the list of features, the ranges appear behind the name of the feature.
Range specification syntax

The following syntax applies to the range specification:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-111

Linking features in constructions

Input

Meaning

point(1)

Point 1

points(1,5)

Point 1 to point 5

point(1) point(4) point(5)

Points 1, 4 and 5 (entries separated by


blanks)

box(x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2),"coord_system", box_distance)

All points within a cuboid parallel to the


axis with the corner coordinates in the
defined coordinate system and with the
defined distance to the sides of the cube

path(2)

The points of the 2nd circle path

angles(10,90)

The points in the angle range from 10 to


90 (only for circle paths)

cylinder(x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2,diameter)

The points within a cylinder with the center of the base area (x1,y1,z1), the center
of the top surface (x2,y2,z2) and the diameter.

Recalling points from files


You can also recall the points from text files for the nominal value
definition. For each point, the x, y and z coordinates are defined and
optionally also the coordinates of the normal vector and the stylus radius.
The path type can also be entered.
Evaluation of the file

When loading, the resulting geometry is calculated from the points. The
stylus radius that may be defined is considered relative to the normal
vector of the geometry.

If no path type is indicated, the loaded points will be treated as single


points.

If a path type is indicated, the loaded points will be evaluated as a


scanning path (filtering, outlier elimination and evaluation range.

The path types mainly differ in the automatic handling of overlappings in


case of measurements beyond 360. The following path types are possible:
Path type

Suitable for ...

Line

Planes and 2D lines

Circle on Plane

Plane with the Circle on Plane strategy


Any possible overlapping is taken into account and
eliminated

Radial circle

4-112

61212-2011002

Circles and cylinders (not usable for surface lines)

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Path type

Suitable for ...

Helix

Cylinder with the Helix strategy


Possible overlappings are not eliminated as they are
useful for the screw line

Universal type

2D and 3D curves as well as for all paths


Any possible overlapping is eliminated depending on
the geometric element

Selected features are


measured

By selecting additional features in the list for Point recall from file, these
features will be measured first before the files will be loaded.
In this way, it is possible to create the file to be loaded for the point recall
only when the selected features are measured. If you use the PCM Technology option, you can have PCM files run in the same way. If you use
the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you can export the files directly (see in the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring
Software option under Output of curve points and tolerances in text files).
If the selected features cannot be measured or if an error occurs during
the measurement, the point recall will not be carried out.
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you require to be created by a recall.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall Feature
Points entry.
The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points window.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-113

Linking features in constructions

3 Tick the From file check box.


4 Select the features to be measured prior to loading the files (multiple
selection with the Ctrl key).
5 Enter the paths of the files to be loaded in the From file input field.
- or Click the File selection for point recall icon and select the desired files.
6 Press OK to confirm.
The feature is now defined by the points from the files.

Reference: Format of the recall files


You can also recall the points from text files for the nominal value
definition. For each point, the x, y and z coordinates are defined and
optionally also the coordinates of the normal vector and the stylus radius.
The decimal separator is the point, numerical values are separated by tabs.
The first line may contain the column headers. The line will be ignored if
it does not start with a number.
If no path type is indicated, the points will be evaluated as single points.
As soon as a line in the form TypeOfScanningPath=<type> occurs, the following lines are evaluated as points of a path with the indicated type until
the next path type assignment takes place. The following values are possible for <type>:

4-114

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Line

Line

Circle On Plane

Circle on Plane

Circle

Circle

Helix

Helix

Any

General path

NOTICE
CALYPSO can only evaluate the points correctly if they are sorted and (in
case of several paths) assigned to the correct path. Otherwise, filtering,
outlier elimination and overlapping may lead to incorrect results.
Format description

Example of a file format:


x
y
TypeOfScanningPath=Circle
1.172944143 0.200792127
2.346667482 0.404625934
3.522572338 0.609053019
4.703111961 0.810897707
5.889935115 1.023098404
6.903111961 0.817923879
7.889935115 1.118267624
8.603111961 0.893874987
9.489935115 1.088267824
9.703111961 0.810895545
9.989935115 1.036485024
7.703111961 0.839084757
TypeOfScanningPath=Any
8.889935115 1.008267624
8.703111961 0.810897707
8.889935115 1.008267624
8.703111961 0.810897707
8.889935115 1.008267624
8.703111961 0.810897707
9.889935115 1.008267624
9.703111961 0.810897707
9.889935115 1.008267624

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

The x, y and z coordinates are the coordinates of the nominal points; u,


v and w are the coordinates of the normal vector and r is the coordinate
of the stylus radius.
The header and the last four columns can be omitted.

Perpendicular construction
Menu: Construct Perpendicular
Using the Perpendicular construction, CALYPSO computes the shortest
distance between two features.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-115

Linking features in constructions

Feature 1

With Feature 1 in the definition template, define the point from which
the perpendicular will be struck. You can select any feature as Feature 1.
The table below shows which coordinates are used:

Feature 1 ...

Returns as perpendicular output:

Point (probing)

Coordinates of probing point

Circle, ellipse, slot, rectangle

Coordinates of center point

Plane, 2D line, 3D line, cylinder, stepped cylin- Coordinates of center of gravity


der, cone
Feature 2

With Feature 2 in the definition template, set the direction of the perpendicular. The perpendicular is vertical on feature 2. Therefore, feature
2 must be a spatially defined element.

Interpretation of results

Result of the calculation:

The straight line on which the perpendicular is located by the specification of two projection angles.

The length (distance) of the perpendicular. The calculated distance of


the perpendicular is the distance of the point in feature 1 to feature
2. CALYPSO automatically adds a Length of Perpendicular characteristic to the measurement plan.

Intersection construction
Basics of the intersection construction
Menu: Construct Intersection
With the Intersection construction, you can intersect straight lines,
planes, symmetry planes, free form surfaces, circles, cylinders, stepped
cylinders, spheres and cones with each other and have tangents computed.
Two features

To do this, you enter the two features and obtain one or more results.
Depending on which feature you entered first, not all options are available
to you for the second one.

Three features

With the Intersection construction, you can also intersect three features,
i.e. planes and symmetry planes. Once two features of the Plane or Symmetry Plane type have been entered, it is possible to enter a third feature.

Intersection with wall or


axis?

If you select an axial element such as a cylinder, stepped cylinder or cone


for the intersection, CALYPSO assumes that you want to intersect the
axis of the element with a different element. If, however, you want to
intersect the section surface of the element, you must select the Wall
check box in the definition template of the intersection.
NOTICE
Stepped cylinders can only be intersected as axes.

4-116

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

NOTICE
Free form surfaces can only be intersected with axes.
Depending on the intersection, one to eight results are shown in the
Result Selection group of the definition template, and you select the
intersection result you want to proceed with.
Automatic correction

With this construction, CALYPSO supplies results even if the objects do


not intersect geometrically but a meaningful, different interpretation (for
example, tangent) is possible.
When a cylinder or cone intersects a plane, CALYPSO performs automatic
corrections under certain circumstances the plane is interpreted as vertical or parallel (refer to Intersection of a plane with a cylinder [ 4124] and Intersection of a plane with a cone [ 4125]).
When rotationally symmetrical, three-dimensional surfaces intersect, CALYPSO performs automatic corrections under certain circumstances the
surfaces are interpreted as concentric or coaxial.

Interpretation of results

Individual topics describe the special features and results of different intersections.

Intersection of a straight line with a straight


line
The straight lines can be located in any part plane. However, they must
not be parallel or antiparallel.

CALYPSO delivers four points as results.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-117

Linking features in constructions

If you select the Spatial option in the definition template, you obtain
as the intersection the center of the perpendicular between the two
straight lines - the point closest to the two straight lines.
If both straight lines are in one plane, this point coincides with the
actual intersection of the two straight lines.

If you select one of the other results in the definition template, you
obtain in each case the intersection of the projections of the two
straight lines to one of the three part coordinate system planes.

Intersection of a plane with a plane


You can intersect two or three planes with each other. The normals of
the planes must not be parallel or antiparallel.

The result of the intersection of two planes computed by CALYPSO is


the spatially defined intersection line. The point of the computed intersection line that is closest to the origin is used as the origin of the
local feature alignment (reference point) of the intersection line.

When intersecting three planes, there is either no result or a point.

Intersection of a circle with a circle


Both circles must lie in one plane. There are two options:

4-118

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

2 intersection points

In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify


the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection 1
and Result 2 for intersection 2.
If exactly one intersection is present because the circles are touching,
two identical points are read out.

No intersection found

CALYPSO cannot compute a result.

Intersection of a straight line with a circle


The straight line and the normal of the circle must not be parallel or antiparallel. This means that the projection of the straight line into the plane
of the circle is again a straight line.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-119

Linking features in constructions

Line

Circle

P2

P1
Projection line

CALYPSO computes as the result the intersections of the projected


straight line with the circle. If the straight line only touches the circle and
does not intersect it, two identical points are determined.
There are two options:

4-120

2 intersection points

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify


the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection 1
and Result 2 for intersection 2.

No intersection found

CALYPSO cannot compute a result.

Intersection of a straight line with a sphere


CALYPSO computes as the result the intersections of the straight line with
the sphere. If the projected straight line only touches the sphere and does
not intersect it, two identical points are determined.

Intersection of a straight line with a plane


The straight line and the normal of the plane must not be perpendicular
to each other.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-121

Linking features in constructions

CALYPSO computes as the result the piercing point of the straight line
through the plane.

Intersection of a straight line with a cylinder


The straight line and the cylinder axis must not be parallel or antiparallel.

CALYPSO computes as the result

the piercing points of the line through the cylinder section if the
Wall check box is activated

Otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the cylinder.

Intersection of a straight line with a cone


CALYPSO computes as the result

4-122

the piercing points of the line through the wall of the cone if the
Wall check box is activated

Otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the cone.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Intersection of a plane with a circle


The normals of the plane and the circle must not be parallel or antiparallel.

CALYPSO computes as the result the intersections of the circular line with
the plane.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-123

Linking features in constructions

Intersection of a plane with a sphere


CALYPSO computes as the result the intersection of the sphere with the
plane.

Intersection of a plane with a cylinder


CALYPSO computes as the result

a circle or an ellipse if the Wall check box is ticked

Otherwise: an intersection point.

z, k

K
E

Geometry type

There are two options when the Wall check box is ticked:

4-124

Circle geometry type: CALYPSO creates as the intersection element


the circle the center point of which represents the intersection point

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

of the cylinder axis with the section plane and which intersects the
cylinder vertically.
The plane is corrected orthogonally to the cylinder axis if the plane
does not deviate too greatly from the vertical position, i.e. if the angle
between the normals of the plane and the cylinder axis is less than
45.

No intersection is measured in all other cases.

Ellipse geometry type: CALYPSO creates the exact mathematical ellipse as the profile element.

Intersection of a plane with a cone


CALYPSO computes as the result

Geometry type

a circle or an ellipse if the Wall check box is ticked

Otherwise: an intersection point.

There are two options when the Wall check box is ticked:

Circle geometry type: CALYPSO creates as the profile element the


circle the center point of which represents the intersection point of

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-125

Linking features in constructions

the axis of the cone with the section plane and which intersects the
cone vertically.
The plane is corrected orthogonally to the cylinder axis if the plane
does not deviate too greatly from the vertical position, i.e. if the angle
between the normals of the plane and the cylinder axis is less than
45.

No intersection is measured in all other cases.

Ellipse geometry type: CALYPSO creates the exact mathematical ellipse - if it exists - as the profile element.
If the angle between the plane and the axis of the cone is not larger
than the cone's taper angle and, therefore, no intersection ellipse exists, no intersection is calculated.

Intersection of a free form surface with an axis


You can intersect a free form surface with an axis.
NOTICE
The ACIS 3D Toolkit program must be open for the intersection calculation of a free form surface with one axis.
When intersecting a free form surface with an axis, CALYPSO supplies a
3D point. If several intersections are possible (since the free form surface
has for example a wavy profile), only the first determined intersection
point will be output.

The axes of the following features can be intersected with the free form
surface:

4-126

Cylinder (wall intersection not activated)

Cone (wall intersection not activated)

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Stepped cylinder

Torus

3D line

When defining the intersection, you can specify the free form surface as
first or second feature.

Intersection of a sphere with a cylinder


The sphere indicated here is not used for the intersection of the sphere
and the cylinder but a sphere of identical size whose center point is the
projection of the original sphere center point onto the cylinder axis.

The distance between the actual center point of the sphere and the cylinder axis must be less than half the cylinder radius.

Intersection of a sphere with a cone


The sphere indicated here is not used for the intersection of the sphere
and the cone but a sphere of identical size whose center point is the
projection of the original cone center point onto the cone axis.

The distance between the actual sphere center point and the cone axis
must be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-127

Linking features in constructions

Intersection of a sphere with a sphere

CALYPSO computes the exact intersection of the two spheres.

Intersection of a cone with a cylinder


CALYPSO computes as the result

the intersection of the cylinder with the projected cone - this is a


cone of the same aperture, the point of which is the projection of the
cone point onto the cylinder axis and the axis of which runs parallel
to the cylinder axis if the Wall check box is ticked.
The angle between the (actual) cone axis and the cylinder axis must
not be greater than 45. The distance between the intersection of the
cone axis and the theoretical resulting circle must be less than half the
radius of the theoretical resulting circle.

Otherwise: the intersection point of the two axes.


The same conditions apply here as for the intersection of two lines.

Intersection of a cone with a cone


The intersection of a cone with another cone is generated in the following
manner: The cone with the blunter opening angle is set coaxially to the
other cone, the tip of the new cone results as the projection of the old
tip onto the cone axis of the cone having the more pointed opening angle.
The circle resulting from this is generated as the intersection of the two
cones.
A condition for this is that the angle between the two cone axes is smaller
than 45. The distance between the axis of the blunter cone and the plane
of the theoretical resulting circle and the center point of the circle must
be less than half the radius of the circle.

4-128

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

The two cones can lie parallel or antiparallel to each other.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-129

Linking features in constructions

Intersections of the symmetry plane


The symmetry plane can be intersected with a 2D line, 3D line, plane,
circle, cylinder, stepped cylinder, cone, sphere and with itself.
By selecting symmetry plane or plane, you can also intersect three elements.
For the symmetry plane, you must select the component for the intersection:

4-130

If Wall is activated, both side planes are used for intersection.

If Wall is not activated, the middle plane is used for intersection.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Intersection with ...

Results

2D line

One 3D point: the piercing point of the straight line through the
symmetry plane

3D line

Two 3D points: the piercing points of the straight line through the
side planes (wall)

Plane

One 3D line: the intersection line of the plane with the symmetry
plane
Two 3D lines: the intersection lines of the plane with the side planes
(wall)

Symmetry Plane

One 3D line: the intersection line of the symmetry plane with the
symmetry plane
Two 3D lines: the intersection lines of the symmetry plane with the
side planes (wall)
Four 3D lines: the intersection lines of the side planes (wall) with the
side planes (wall)

Two planes / symmetry One to eight 3D points, depending on whether the wall is intersected
planes

Circle

One or two 3D points: the Intersection points of the symmetry plane


with the circle

Cylinder

One 3D point: the piercing point of the cylinder axis through the
symmetry plane

(axis)

Two 3D points: the piercing points of the cylinder axis through the
side planes (wall)
Cylinder
(wall)

One circle or one ellipse: the wall intersection at the height of the
intersection point of the cylinder axis with the symmetry plane
Two circles or ellipses: the wall intersections at the height of the intersection points of the cylinder axis with the side planes (wall)

Step Cylinder

One 3D point: the piercing point of the axis of the stepped cylinder
through the symmetry plane
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the axis of the stepped cylinder through the side planes (wall)

Cone
(axis)

One 3D point: the piercing point of the cone axis through the symmetry plane
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the cone axis through the side
planes (wall)

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-131

Linking features in constructions

Intersection with ...

Results

Cone

One circle or one ellipse: the wall intersection at the height of the
intersection point of the cone axis with the symmetry plane

(wall)

Two circles or ellipses: the wall intersections at the height of the intersection points of the cone axis with the side planes (wall)

Sphere

One circle: the intersection circle of the sphere with the symmetry
plane
One or two circles: the intersection circles of the sphere with the side
planes (wall)

Symmetry construction
Basics of the Symmetry construction
Menu: Construct Symmetry
You can use the Symmetry construction to determine a symmetry feature
between Feature 1 and Feature 2. You can use the symmetry feature
in other constructions.
Features

You can select any feature as Feature 1 and Feature 2, except for the
curve, free form surface, general curve and general surface.
If two planes or lines are not parallel, two different symmetry results are
delivered. In this case, you can choose the desired result.
If you wish to know which feature 1 can be combined with which feature
2 to form a symmetry and the result of such a combination, please refer
to the following topics:

Construction symmetry with 2D line as feature 1 [ 4134]

Construction symmetry with 3D line as feature 1 [ 4134]

Construction symmetry with plane as feature 1 [ 4135]

Construction symmetry with circle as feature 1 [ 4135]

Construction symmetry with ellipse as feature 1 [ 4136]

Construction symmetry with cylinder as feature 1 [ 4137]

Construction symmetry with stepped cylinder as feature

1 [ 4137]

Interpretation of results

4-132

Construction symmetry with cone as feature 1 [ 4138]

Construction symmetry with sphere as feature 1 [ 4138]

Construction symmetry with point as feature 1 [ 4139]

Construction symmetry with 3D point as feature 1 [ 4140]

Construction symmetry with torus as feature 1 [ 4140]

The symmetry feature is output in the form of coordinates common to


the two features.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Examples:

Symmetry point of two circles

Result: Coordinates of the symmetry point

Symmetry plane of two planes

Result 1: Position, length and width of the symmetry plane on which


the symmetry point from the two start points of the two planes is
located.
Result 2: Position, length and width of the perpendicular symmetry
plane.

Symmetry axis of two lines

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-133

Linking features in constructions

Line 1

Line 2
Symmetry axis 1

Symmetry axis 2
Result 1: Coordinates of the symmetry axis on which the symmetry
point from the two start points of the two lines is located.
Result 2: Coordinates of the perpendicular symmetry axis.

Construction symmetry with 2D line as feature


1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the 2D line with the following
features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

2D line

2D line

Symmetry line between the two 2D lines

3D line

3D line

Symmetry line between the 2D and the 3D line

Plane

Plane

Symmetry plane between the 2D line (as a plane) and the plane

Cylinder

3D line

Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the 2D line

Cone

3D line

Symmetry line between the cone axis and the 2D line

3D line

Symmetry line between the torus axis and the 2D line

Circle
Ellipse

Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus

Construction symmetry with 3D line as feature


1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the 3D point with the following
features:

4-134

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Feature 2

Result

Description

3D line

Symmetry line

Cylinder

3D line

Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the 3D line

Cone

3D line

Symmetry line between the cone axis and the 3D line

3D line

Symmetry line between the torus axis and the 3D line

2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse

Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus

Construction symmetry with plane as feature


1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the plane with the following
features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

2D line

Plane

Symmetry plane between the 2D line (as a plane) and the plane

Plane

Symmetry planes between the two planes

3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus

Construction symmetry with circle as feature 1


A symmetry can be formed by combining the circle with the following
features:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-135

Linking features in constructions

Feature 2

Result

Description

2D line

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the center of


gravity of the line

3D line

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the center of


gravity of the line

Plane

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the center of


gravity of the plane

Circle

Point

Symmetry point between the two circle center points

Ellipse

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the elliptical


center

Cylinder

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the center of


gravity of the cylinder axis

Cone

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the center of


gravity of the cone axis

Sphere

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the sphere center point

Point

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the point

3D point

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the 3D point

Torus

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and torus center


point

Construction symmetry with ellipse as feature


1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the ellipse with the following
features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

2D line

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the center of


gravity of the line

3D line

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the center of


gravity of the line

Plane

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the center of


gravity of the plane

Circle

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the circle


center

Ellipse

Point

Symmetry point between the two elliptical center points

Cylinder

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the center of


gravity of the cylinder axis

Cone

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the center of


gravity of the cone axis

4-136

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Feature 2

Result

Description

Sphere

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the sphere


center point

Point

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the point

3D point

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the 3D point

Torus

Point

Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the torus


center point

Construction symmetry with cylinder as


feature 1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the cylinder with the following
features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

3D line

Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the 3D line

Cylinder

3D line

Symmetry line between the two cylinder axes

Cone

3D line

Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the cone axis

3D line

Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the torus axis

2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse

Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus

Construction symmetry with stepped cylinder


as feature 1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the stepped cylinder with the
following features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

3D line

Symmetry line between the stepped cylinder and the 3D line

2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-137

Linking features in constructions

Feature 2

Result

Description

Cylinder

3D line

Symmetry line between the stepped cylinder axis and the cylinder axis

Stepped Cylinder

3D line

Symmetry line between the two stepped cylinder axes

Cone

3D line

Symmetry line between the stepped cylinder axis and the cylinder axis

3D line

Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the torus axis

Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus

Construction symmetry with cone as feature 1


A symmetry can be formed by combining the cone with the following
features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

3D line

Symmetry line between the cone axis and the 3D line

Cylinder

3D line

Symmetry line between the cone axis and the cylinder axis

Cone

3D line

Symmetry line between the two cone axes

3D line

Symmetry line between the cone axis and the torus axis

2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse

Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus

Construction symmetry with sphere as feature


1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the sphere with the following
features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

2D line

Point

Symmetry point between the circle center and the center of


gravity of the line

3D line

Point

Symmetry point between the sphere center and the center of


gravity of the line

4-138

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Feature 2

Result

Description

Plane

Point

Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the center of gravity of the plane

Circle

Point

Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the circle
center

Ellipse

Point

Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the elliptical center

Cylinder

Point

Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the center of gravity of the cylinder axis

Cone

Point

Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the center of gravity of the cone axis

Sphere

Point

Symmetry point between the two sphere center points

Point

Point

Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the point

3D point

Point

Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the 3D


point

Torus

Point

Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the torus
center point

Construction symmetry with point as feature 1


A symmetry can be formed by combining the point with the following
features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

2D line

Point

Symmetry point between the point and the center of gravity of


the line

3D line

Point

Symmetry point between the point and the center of gravity of


the line

Plane

Point

Symmetry point between the point and the center of gravity of


the plane

Sphere

Point

Symmetry point between the point and the sphere center point

Point

Point

Symmetry point between the two points

3D point

Point

Symmetry point between the point and the 3D point

Circle
Ellipse
Cylinder
Cone

Torus

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-139

Linking features in constructions

Construction symmetry with 3D point as


feature 1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the 3D point with the following
features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

2D line

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the center of gravity


of the line

3D line

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the center of gravity


of the line

Plane

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the center of gravity


of the plane

Circle

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the circle center

Ellipse

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the elliptical center

Cylinder

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the center of gravity


of the cylinder axis

Cone

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the center of gravity


of the cone axis

Sphere

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the sphere center


point

Point

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the point

3D point

Point

Symmetry point between the two 3D points

Torus

Point

Symmetry point between the 3D point and the torus center


point

Construction symmetry with torus as feature 1


A symmetry can be formed by combining the torus with the following
features:
Feature 2

Result

Description

2D line

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the line

3D line

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the line

Plane

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the plane

Circle

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the circle
center

Ellipse

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the elliptical center

4-140

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Feature 2

Result

Description

Cylinder

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the cylinder axis

Cone

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the cone axis

Sphere

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the sphere
center point

Point

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the point

3D point

Point

Symmetry point between the torus center point and the 3D


point

Torus

Point

Symmetry point between the two torus center points

Edge Point construction


Menu: Construct Edge Point
Use the Edge Point construction to compute a corner between two features. This corner is the intersection of two imaginary extensions.
Features 1 and 2

Point (generally a space point) is the feature you can use as feature 1
and feature 2. Each space axis of the points determines a plane. The
planes must intersect each other. The edge point lies on the intersection
line of the planes.

Feature 3

Use a plane or a point as feature 3. If you specify a point, this also defines
a plane via the normal. The edge point is computed as the intersection of
this plane with the intersection of plane 1 and plane 2.

Interpretation of results

CALYPSO computes the coordinates of the edge point as the result.


Example:
The coordinates of the imaginary corners are computed for two planes.
The third plane is the drawing plane.

element 1

contour point

element 2
If the third plane is not defined, the edge point is defined centered between Feature 1 and Feature 2 (Feature 1 and Feature 2 usually differ at
least slightly in height).

Projection construction
Menu: Construct Projection

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-141

Linking features in constructions

Use the Projection construction to determine the position of a feature


that was projected onto another feature (e.g. the position of a point projected onto a plane).
Features 1 and 2
Interpretation of results

Feature 1: The feature you want to project.

Feature 2: The feature onto which you want Feature 1 projected.

Result output depends on the feature that results from the projection.
Examples:

Projection of a circle onto a plane


The circle is shifted perpendicularly to the plane until it is on the plane.
Result: Coordinates of the circle center point on the plane

Projection of a cylinder onto a plane


A straight line is created on the plane by the end points of the cylinder's axis.
Result: Two projected angles and the coordinates of the origin of the
local feature alignment
Exception: The cylinder is perpendicular to the projection plane.

The projection produces a point on the plane.


Result: Coordinates of the point

Tangent construction
Menu: Construct Tangent
The Tangent construction offers two options:

You interlink two features and obtain as the result one of the tangents connecting the two features. Circle, Circle on Cone, Point and
3D Point are suitable features.

You interlink two features and obtain as the result one of the tangential circles with predefined diameter. Two 2D lines or two features
of the 3D line, cylinder, stepped cylinder or cone type are suitable
characteristics.

Enter the two features in the definition template and select the desired
result.

Tangent (line) as result


Results

4-142

By interlinking two features of the circle, circle on cone, point or 3D point


type, you always obtain a 3D line as the tangent.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

There is a maximum of two results for a point and a circular feature.

There is a maximum of four results for two circular features.

The following table shows the possible number of results depending on


the position and type of feature with the various combinations of features.
Tangent of:

Point

Circle

3D point

Point and ...

One result

Two results

One result

Two or four results

Two results

Circle and ...


3D point and ...

One result
The results are shown in the Result Selection group of the definition
template. Select here the result you want to proceed with.

Automatic corrections

If the features do not lie exactly in one plane, CALYPSO computes the
corresponding tangents in a projection plane.

Point and point


Point and point always lie in one plane.

Circle and circle


The point is projected onto the plane of the circle. If the point does
not lie within the circle, there are always two tangents.

Circle and circle


Two circles serving as features must lie on parallel planes. Then the
tangents lie on the middle plane which is symmetrical with two
planes. In the case of a height difference of both circles, the height
of the tangents results from the average of the two center points.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-143

Linking features in constructions

Tangential circle as result


By specifying two 2D lines or two features of the 3D line, cylinder, stepped
cylinder or cone type for the features, you obtain as the result one of the
possible tangential circles with predefined diameter contacting the lines
or feature axes.

R1

Automatic correction

R2

CALYPSO computes the tangential circles even if both features do not


intersect each other although this is the mathematical prerequisite for the
existence of the tangential circles.
CALYPSO then computes the tangential circles in relation to the projections of both lines onto their common symmetry plane.

Selecting the result

Use the button in the definition template to select the plane sector in
which the tangential circle should lie.

Minimum Point construction


Menu: Construct Minimum Point
Use the Minimum Point construction to compute the coordinates of the
point at which negative deviation from feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation to the feature's actual or nominal
geometry.
Feature 1

Use a regular geometric element, a stepped cylinder or a curve as feature


1.

Interpretation of results

As a result, CALYPSO calculates the coordinates of the point having the


largest negative deviation (or, in the case of the stepped cylinder, the

4-144

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

deviation to the inside). Depending on the selection, the result is a


Point (with normal vector) or a 3D Point.
Nominal

You can enter a nominal value and check the compliance with the tolerance.

Maximum Point construction


Menu: Construct Maximum Point
Use the Maximum Point construction to compute the coordinates of the
point at which positive deviation from feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation to the feature's actual or nominal
geometry.
Feature 1

Use a regular geometric element, a stepped cylinder or a curve as feature


1.

Interpretation of results

As a result, CALYPSO calculates the coordinates of the point having the


largest positive deviation (or, in the case of the stepped cylinder, the deviation to the outside). Depending on the selection, the result is a
Point (with normal vector) or a 3D Point.

Nominal

You can enter a nominal value and check the compliance with the tolerance.

Minimum Feature construction


Menu: Construct Minimum Feature
Use the Minimum Feature construction to determine which is the smallest
in a group of similar features.
Select existing features

Use the Select existing Features button to select the features you
want to compare with each other.

Selection list

From the selection list, select the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for
which you want the minimum computed.

Interpretation of results

CALYPSO computes the minimum for the characteristic you selected and
displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has the
smallest diameter.

Maximum Feature construction


Menu: Construct Maximum Feature
Use the Maximum Feature construction to determine which is the largest
in a group of similar features.
Select existing features

Use the Select existing Features button to select the features you
want to compare with each other.

Selection list

From the selection list, select the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for
which you want the maximum computed.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-145

Linking features in constructions

Interpretation of results

CALYPSO computes the maximum for the characteristic you selected and
displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has the
largest diameter.

Average-Feature construction
Menu: Construct Average-Feature
Using the Average-Feature construction, you calculate a new feature from
certain averages of several features.
Select existing features

Use the Select existing Features button to select the features for
whose measured values you want to compute the average.

Selection list

In the selection list, define the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for which
you want the average computed. Values for characteristics that are not
indicated here will be adopted from the first feature in the list.

Cone Addition construction


Menu: Construct Cone Addition
Use the Cone Addition construction to compute the following data:

Diameter Definition: The diameter of the cone at a defined


height.

Position Definition: The position of the cone axis which corresponds to a defined diameter.

Feature

The only feature you can select is a cone.

Diameter Definition

If you have selected the Diameter Definition option, you can either
enter the height directly or determine this indirectly using another feature.
CALYPSO requires the following specifications:

At L: Height L at which the diameter should be calculated

4-146

Referenced To: Cone Origin

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Height L will be measured from the cone origin (the intersection point
of the cone axis with the surface area closest to the cone center).

Referenced To: Part Alignment

The coordinate axis which lies closest to the cone axis will be computed. The diameter will be output on the point of the cone axis for
which the coordinate on this axis is equal to L.

Position Definition

Or at: Feature that (if necessary, via the intersection point with the
cone axis) defines the height of the required diameter. Only the Point,
2D Line and Plane features are suitable.

If you have selected the Position Definition option, you can either
enter the appropriate diameter or determine the required position indirectly using another feature. CALYPSO requires the following entries:

At D: Diameter for which the height should be calculated.

Or at: Feature at the height of which the position should be determined (the height above the cone origin). Only the Circle, Circle on
Cone, Cylinder, Sphere, Cone, Torus and Ellipse features are suitable.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-147

Linking features in constructions

Interpretation of results

CALYPSO will either calculate a specific diameter or the coordinates of a


specific height on the cone depending on what you have selected.

Plane with Offset construction


Menu: Construct Plane with Offset
Use the Plane with Offset construction to define a plane offset by a certain
amount above a reference plane.
Feature 1

The only feature you can select is a plane. The plane is the reference plane.

Offset

Enter the Offset.

Interpretation of results

CALYPSO computes the coordinates of the plane with offset as the result.
Please note that the offset plane is usually a plane which does not really
exist and, consequently, no probing points can be taken.

Circle in contour best fit construction


Basics about circle in contour best fit
construction
NOTICE
The Circle in contour best fit construction is available only if the CNC
Curve Measuring Software option is enabled.
Menu: Construct Circle in contour fit
With the Circle in contour best fit construction, you receive a circle
or a space point that is determined through the best fit of a circle in a
plane profile of gothic or elliptical shape.
Use this construction to determine how a sphere behaves in a path with
a certain profile, for example.
CALYPSO adds special characteristics to the measurement plan for this
construction (depending on your result selection). These characteristics
cannot be added in another way.
Plot for circle in contour

The graphic element allows you to define a plot for the circle in contour
best fit. (Plot for circle in contour construction [ 858]).

Circle in contour best fit construction


You define the contour, the circle and the desired result in the definition
template.

4-148

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Feature

You select a 2D or a 3D curve as the feature. The curve must be gothic


or elliptical in shape.
Elliptical shape

Gothic shape

Sphere

Sphere

Angle

Angle

Gap
Contact points

NOTICE
You cannot change the filter, outlier and evaluation settings in the selection window for the curve. You can change filters and outliers only in
the feature itself.
Diameter

You enter the diameter of the circle for the best fit process under Diameter. You can also calculate the diameter with a formula.

Offset in Touch Point

The Offset in Touch Point allows you to simulate the pressing of the
circle against the curve. The center point of the circle and the contact
points change. The contact between circle and contour is no longer lim-

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-149

Linking features in constructions

ited to one point; now, they contact along an arc. CALYPSO then computes the contact point from the center of gravity of this arc.

Circle
Circle with
offset

Contour

Contact point
Contact curve

NOTICE
The offset is added to the radius of the fitted circle and not to the diameter.
Wavelength for filter

For a better fit, enter a wave separation length (WTL) for filtering the
profile (no filtering if you enter 0). Filtering can avoid excessive deviations between the determined and actual contact points.
Consideration of the wave separation length differs from the filtering of
measured values otherwise used. It is a special method for the circle in
contour best fit.

Minimum contact angle

You can also specify a Minimum contact angle. This can exclude
ambiguities during the best fit process (in case of real, distorted data records). Contact points that are no further apart than by this angle are
regarded as a single contact point.
If one of the following error messages appears at the bottom of the window, you can attempt to achieve an unambiguous result by increasing
the minimum contact angle.

No two-point contact with contact point greater than minimum


angle

There are several possible positions for the circle with the
contact angle greater than the minimum angle

NOTICE
The minimum contact angle is not taken into consideration if the curve
contains points from measurements performed with different stylus radii.
Result Selection

4-150

You can choose from different result types and receive a circle or a space
point depending on your selection:
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Result

Icon

Output (characteristics highlighted)

Left tangent point

Tangent point X, Y, Z (the left circle-curve contact point


positioned closest to the start point of the curve)

Circle in contour best fit

Center point (X, Y, Z) of the fitted circle


Gap (the radial distance between circle and curve at the
position of the bisecting line of the angle between the two
contact points)
Start angle (angle of the right contact point on the circle)
Angle range (angle between the right and left contact
points)
End angle (angle of the left contact point on the circle)

Right tangent point

Tangent point X, Y, Z (the right circle-curve contact point


positioned closest to the end point of the curve)

Point at maximum gap width

Curve point X, Y, Z with maximum radial distance to the


circle

Gap (the maximum radial distance between circle and curve)


Center point X, Y, Z of the bend circle

Left Bend Circle

Bend circle radius R of the curve in the left contact point.


Center point X, Y, Z of the bend circle

Right Bend Circle

Bend circle radius R of the curve in the right contact point.


Calculation of the bend
circle radius

For the Bend Circle result, a section of the curve is interpolated via
polynomials of the fourth degree. Therefore, CALYPSO requires for the
calculation the points located on the left and right of the contact point.
You also predefine the determination of these points:

explicitly by specifying the point numbers

implicitly by specifying the angle ranges

R2

R1

Even if the best fit has been completed successfully, it is not possible to
calculate the bend circle in the following cases:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-151

Linking features in constructions

Starting best fit

There are not enough points for the section.

The section is a straight line.

Each time a value is changed, CALYPSO performs the best fit and calculates the results.
If the initial data is insufficient for the best fit or is conflicting, an error
message will appear at the bottom edge of the window.
Further information about the circle in contour best fit and about the error
messages is available under Details on circle in contour best
fit [ 4152].

Details on circle in contour best fit


With the Circle in contour best fit construction, you receive a circle
or a space point that is determined through the best fit of a circle in a
path profile of gothic or elliptical shape projected onto the plane.
Results of the plane calculation

Prior to the best fit process, CALYPSO uses the points of the specified
curve to calculate a compensating plane and then projects the curve onto
this plane.
The greater the form deviation, the less precise the result of the best fit
will be. So that you can estimate the accuracy of the best fit, the following
results from the calculation of the compensating plane are displayed on
the right side of the window:

Form deviation (distance between minimum and maximum deviations)

Number of points

Minimum deviation (largest negative deviation)

Number of the point with the largest negative deviation

Maximum deviation (largest positive deviation)

Number of the point with the largest positive deviation

These results are also output in the default printout and compact printout.
Characteristics from the
definition template

You can automatically add characteristics to the measurement plan by


activating the check boxes. It is not possible to add these characteristics
to the measurement plan via the menu.

Added characteristic

Checks (depending on the result selection) ...

X value of the left or right contact point on the


circle center point.

XValue_Circle in contour best fit


Y
YValue_Circle in contour best fit

4-152

61212-2011002

Y value of the left or right contact point on the


circle center point.

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Added characteristic

Checks (depending on the result selection) ...

Z value of the left or right contact point on the


circle center point.

ZValue_Circle in contour best fit


R
Radius_Circle in contour best fit
Gap

Bend circle radius at the left or right contact


point.
Gap width at the angle bisecting line or the
maximum gap width.

Gap_Circle in contour best fit


Start angle
Feature_Angle_Circle in contour best fit
Angle Range
Angle_Range_Circle in contour best fit
End angle
End_angle_Circle in contour best fit

Angle between the first contact point and the


reference axis or between the alignment line
and the first contact point.
Angle between the contact points. Only circles
can be used as the features in this case.
Angle between the second contact point and
the reference axis or between the alignment
line and the second contact point.

You can subsequently edit the definition templates of these characteristics. However, the results will make sense only in combination with the
Circle in contour best fit.
Alignment line

The Select angle format window makes it possible to change the


reference of the start angle and the end angle. By activating the Alignment Line check box, the angles are measured based on the alignment
line. The alignment line is the connecting line from the coordinate origin
projected onto the plane of the fitted circle to the center of the circle.

Contact angle 2

Alignment line

Contact point 2

Contact point 1

Contact angle 1

If the alignment line is too inaccurate due to the geometric conditions,


nothing will be evaluated and the error is logged in the printout.
Error types and error
messages

Two types of error can occur with the circle in contour best fit:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-153

Linking features in constructions

Primary errors are errors that prevent results from being calculated.
Examples of these errors include contours with fewer than three
points or an incompletely defined nominal geometry.

Secondary errors occur if it was not possible to reach a result during


calculation of the best fit due to insufficient input parameters.
Secondary errors are displayed in the error line at the bottom edge of
the window (below the geometry).
This error message is preceded by an indication of whether the error
occurred in the calculation of the nominal geometry or the actual geometry. If both geometries are faulty, only the error text for the actual
geometry is output and printed in the protocol/printout.

If CALYPSO is able to calculate the actual geometry but not the nominal
geometry, 0 will be entered for Vector, Diameter/Radius, Normal Vector, Gap and Start Angle and 360 will be entered for the
angle range for a circle.
Actual to Nominal

In the case of constructions, the nominal values calculated from the nominal values of the linked features may excessively differ from the actual
values.
In this case, you can enter nominal values instead of actual values. The
value is entered as a formula with a constant value; the input field is
highlighted in yellow.
By clicking the Actual -> Nominal button, you enter the corresponding
actual value as a formula for each nominal value (x, y, z, w1, w2...). The
actual value is rounded beforehand using the set rounding factor.

Kink Point construction


Menu: Construct Kink Point
The Kink Point construction is used to define the transition from one feature to the other. This is useful if both features form a matching unit.
Feature and nominal features

Result

4-154

This construction requires a contour with determined points and the


nominal dimensions of the two features.

You use a curve, a 2D line or a circle (circle on cone) as the feature.

You select any combination of 2D lines and circles (or circles on cones)
as nominal features.

The result of the construction is a 3D point which represents the transition


between the two nominal features.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Start point
line

End point
line

End point
circle

Nominal feature 1
Nominal
feature 2
Start point
circle

Features
It must be possible to measure the feature according to the Unknown
Contour method.

If you have the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you must use
a 2D curve.

If you do not have the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you
can also use a 2D line or a circle.

NOTICE
If you use the 2D line or the circle as a nominal feature, you must neither
filter this contour nor eliminate its outliers. Otherwise, certain points in
the kink area may be eliminated and the result might be incorrect.
Outliers
Mean-value line

Measured contour

Nominal features
Select 2D lines or circles (or circle on cone) as a first and second nominal
feature. Make sure that the nominal features are defined exactly:

For a circle, make sure that the start angle and the angle range as well
as the inside/outside are defined in addition to the center point, alignment and radius.

For a 2D line, the normal vector (negative probing direction of the


points) must be defined in addition to the feature reference point,
direction and length.

The sequence of the start and end points of the nominal features must
correspond to the recorded measuring points.

NOTICE
Only the definitions in the definition template of the feature are important; the strategy definitions (paths, technologies) are not evaluated by
CALYPSO.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-155

Linking features in constructions

While selecting a nominal feature, CALYPSO activates by default the Use


nominal feature evaluation setting. Retain this setting.

Result calculation
The result of the Kink Point construction is a 3D point at the transition
from one feature to the other.
Direct input

You can also enter this point directly. The entered coordinates of the
nominal point are interpreted as formulas with the corresponding numerical value.

No result

If feature and both nominal features are defined, but the nominal kink
point cannot be calculated, a zero vector is output as nominal value.

Step Point construction


Menu: Construct Step Point
The Step Point construction is used to measure narrow edge transitions
which cannot be probed due to their small dimensions. This function allows you to determine in particular the reaming depth in a bore hole.

100:1

The difference between a bored and a reamed diameter ranges approx.


from 0.1 to 2 mm. For most styli, this difference is too small to be measured directly.
Procedure and calculation

The Step Point construction is used to calculate a 3D point from a scanned


2D line as feature and a reference feature of the 2D line, 3D line, plane
or cylinder type.
The calculation of the step point is based on the feature which was scanned from above over the step, i.e. in the case of a reamed cylinder,
from the unreamed side.

4-156

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

In this case, however, the searched step point is not probed. CALYPSO
can calculate this point from the probing data, the reference and the
entered step angle.

Definition of the step point


The Step Point construction is defined in the definition template.

Feature and reference

The following features are possible features and references:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-157

Linking features in constructions

Step Point

Feature

Datum

Remark

in a bore

2D Line

Cylinder

Reference axis parallel to the feature

3D Line 2D Line

Reference axis parallel to the feature

Plane

Parallel to the feature

2D Line

Parallel to the feature

on a plane

2D Line

NOTICE
Filtering and outlier elimination are disabled for the feature.
Recalled line as reference

You can also use a line as reference which has been generated via point
recall from the measured points of the lines used as feature.

NOTICE
Make sure that only those points are recalled that lie on the same level.
Otherwise, an inclined computed feature is calculated and the result is
thus falsified.
Step Angle

For the calculation of the step point, you also define the step angle, which
is, for example, the angle at the cutting edge of the reamer. CALYPSO
will then calculate based on the upper step point the lower step point
using a trigonometric function.
The unit of measure of the step angle is predefined in the system settings.
Entries from 10 to 90 are allowed; the entry 90, i.e. a vertical edge, is
preset.
You can also enter a formula in the input field. The result of the formula
is always interpreted in radian measure.

Nominal position of the step point


The nominal position of the step point cannot be calculated automatically, as is the case with most other constructions. Therefore, CALYPSO
approximately accepts the nominal position from the feature's center of
gravity. You can also enter the nominal value manually.

4-158

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Linking features in constructions

Result calculation
The result of the Step Point construction is a 3D point. You can select
between two results: the upper and the lower step point. The lower step
point is output by default.

Measurement strategy
The following prerequisites are important for the precise calculation of
the step point:

Highest possible point density

Sufficient start-up time at the beginning and run-out time at the end
of the path

Scanning direction from the higher to the lower step (side of the
bore towards the reaming side).
When scanning in the opposite direction, the stylus could bounce off
the step and lead to an inaccurate measurement.

Smallest possible stylus

Cylinder reference feature measured on the reamed surface.


This reduces the scattering of the measured points.

Calculation of the reaming depth


The step point makes it also possible to determine the reaming depth.
For this purpose, you can use the Distance characteristic which is determined between the step point and a feature on the face of the bore.
You can also project the perpendicular of the step point onto the face of
the bore and determine the reaming depth from the Length of Perpendicular characteristic.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-159

Measurement strategies for features

Measurement strategies for features


What is a measurement strategy?
The nature of the feature and the location of the measurement must be
known before CALYPSO can perform a measurement with the CMM. In
most cases that is enough because CALYPSO defines default settings.
Not infrequently, however, additional decisions have to be made because
of special considerations relating to measurement or the material or on
account of other, specific requirements.
What is a measurement
strategy?

A measurement strategy describes all the additional definitions you make


to obtain an optimum measuring result when measuring a certain feature. A measurement plan can contain several strategies.

Which measurement
strategy is used?

Depending on the available strategies in the measurement plan, CALYPSO behaves differently at the CNC start.

If no additional strategy exists in the features, there is no input option


for the strategy in the Start Measurement window.

In all other cases, the Start Measurement window shows the


Strategy to be performed selection field with the strategies defined in the measurement plan at the CNC start.
The strategy selected here is used for the measurement. If a feature
does not show the set strategy, the evasion strategy containing default settings will be used.

Managing measurement strategies


One or more measurement strategies may be assigned to a feature. You
create, edit and delete the strategies. One of the measurement strategies
must be defined as the default strategy.
The strategies of a feature are managed in the Strategy window. To do
so, click Strategy in the definition template of the feature.
For each strategy there is an individual index card in the Strategy window.

4-160

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement strategies for features

The context menu of the index cards offers the following options:

Create New Strategy Name: Creates an additional strategy for


the measurement plan. It is possible to define this strategy in the current feature.

Delete Strategy Name: Deletes the current strategy for the entire
measurement plan.

Edit Strategy Name: Opens the window for editing the strategy
name.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-161

Measurement strategies for features

Editing a measurement strategy


Creating a new strategy for the measurement plan
1 Select Create New Strategy Name from the context menu of the
index cards of a feature.
After entering the new name, a new index card opens. All features of
the measurement plan are also assigned an additional (still empty) index card.
New Strategy

2 Select the procedure for adding a new strategy:


Adds a new index card with the entered name.

New Strategy with Pre- Adds a new index card with the entered name and the strategy defined in the Settings - Strategy for this feature.
settings
Copy Existing Strategy

Copies the strategy to be selected by you and adds it to a new index


card with the entered name.

3 Then, define the strategy lists of the new strategy for all features in
question.
If not, the index card with the strategy remains empty.
Performing a strategy

During measurement, the tasks in the current strategy list are executed
one after the other. The tasks to which a condition is assigned will be
skipped if the condition is not fulfilled.
If the current strategy has not yet been defined for a feature, CALYPSO
uses the defined evasion strategy.

Defining the measurement strategy for a


feature
The tasks that defining a measurement strategy involves are as follows:

Selecting Utilities and inserting them in the strategy list (Stop, Position
CMM without probing, Stylus System Change, Clearance Data, etc.)

Using strategy macros (discrete-point mode)

Selecting a path generation method


(see Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178])

Defining the evaluation range


(See Evaluation range [ 4164])

Editing the point list


(see Point list [ 4169])

4-162

Editing the travel paths

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement strategies for features

(see Editing the travel paths [ 664])

Checking and editing clearance data


(see Checking the travel paths [ 667])

These tasks are executed in the Strategy window. To do so, click


Strategy in the definition template of the feature.
For each strategy in the measurement plan there is a tab in the Strategy window. During measurement, the tasks in the activated strategy
list are executed one after the other. The tasks to which a condition is
assigned will be skipped if the condition is not fulfilled.
The diagram shows an example of the Strategy window with a Circle
feature.
Path generation
Point list
Utilities
Single Points / Auto
Path Switch (paths)

Edit strategy
Strategy tab

Strategy macro

Strategy list

You will find more information on this window under Strategy in the
CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.

Using the context menu of the strategy


list
The strategy list contains certain entries (e.g. probing points, tools used
and scanning methods) for all the points and tasks that CALYPSO is to
execute when measuring a feature (in the sense of the travel paths).

Editing a list entry through the context menu


1 Highlight the list entry.
2 Select the desired entry from the context menu:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-163

Measurement strategies for features

Execute Now!: The CMM runs the list entry immediately. First
make sure that the CMM can move freely.
Cut, Copy and Paste are standard Windows functions.
Edit: Opens a window with the input parameters (also with a double click).
Sort Nominal Directions: Corrects all normal vectors matching
the normal direction of the first point.
Single Points => Point Set: Converts the selected single points
into a point set.
Point Set => Single Points: Converts the selected point set into
single points.
Reverse Order: Reverses the order of the marked features in the
strategy list.
Condition: Opens a window in which you can assign a condition
to the current task. The task is not executed unless the condition is
fulfilled.
List: (Only for curves) Opens the point list containing the measured
values (coordinates, normal vector, deviation) of the segment.
Invert: (Only for curves) Reverses the start and end point of the
segment and thus the measuring direction.

Evaluation range
Basics about the evaluation range
If during scanning you notice that certain ranges are not suitable for the
desired evaluation, you can exclude these ranges from the evaluation: To
do so, you define an evaluation range for the corresponding strategy.
The reasons why the ranges are not suitable may be rounded edges or
deviating geometries.

4-164

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement strategies for features

The measured points of the evaluation range are exclusively used for the
calculation of the computed feature. However, the excluded points are
included in the plot.
Paths with evaluation
range

You can set an evaluation range for the following path generation methods:

Path generation method

Features

Circle Path

Circle, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere

Large (radial) circle path

Torus

Small (axial) circle path

Torus

Circle on Plane

Plane

Linear paths

Cylinder

Line Auto Path

2D Line
NOTICE
The definition of an evaluation range does not make any sense if the
angle range of the path exceeds 360.

Definition of the evaluation range

Define the evaluation range using one of the following methods:

by specifying the start and end length or start and end angle referenced to the total length or the total angle of the contour.
All measuring points are evaluated of which the appropriate length
or angle lies within the specified range.

by specifying the start and end points referenced to the coordinate


system to be selected.
The perpendicular is drawn from the start and end point to the nominal contour and all measuring points located within this range are
evaluated.

When making entries, the specifications for the dialog elements of the
other definition method are calculated and displayed automatically.
Specification with formula

You can enter a formula in each input field for the evaluation range.
However, the input fields of the other definition method are disabled. If,
for example, you enter a formula for the start length, you can no longer
enter the coordinates of the start point.
NOTICE
When entering the formula, you must also enter the PCM reference system for the start and end coordinates. This reference system applies to
all positions in the current feature that are specified in formulas.

Defining the evaluation range


If during scanning you notice that certain ranges are not suitable for the
desired evaluation, you can exclude these ranges from the evaluation: To
do so, you define an evaluation range for the corresponding strategy.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-165

Measurement strategies for features

1 Open the corresponding strategy in the strategy list.


2 Activate the Special Settings tab.
3 Under Evaluation Range, tick the Enabled check box and click
the Settings button.
The Evaluation Range window appears on the screen.

4 Enter the evaluation range:


between lengths or angles or
between start and end position
5 Press OK to confirm.

Definition of the evaluation range


Length units

You can define the beginning and end of the evaluation range for lines
and form lines using length units. The feature reference point of the geometry is used as the origin (zero point) of the lengths. By way of confirmation, the total length is indicated.
The start and end points can also be exchanged the range between the
two specified points is always used as the evaluation range.
CALYPSO checks the plausibility of the entered points. If both the start
and end point of the evaluation range are out of the defined path, a
warning message appears: Start and end point of evaluation range are
outside the strategy. \Do you still want to continue?

4-166

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement strategies for features

Under certain circumstances, the correct points are selected: If, for example, you used formulas of which the variables have not yet been specified. In this case, you can confirm the question and accept the values.
Angle units

You can define the beginning and end of the evaluation range for circle
paths, large (radial) circle paths and circles on a plane using angles. These
refer to the surface area of the geometry. In the case of the Sphere feature
with inclined strategy axis, the surface area and the axis are also inclined.
The start and end angles can also be exchanged the range between the
two specified angles is always used as the evaluation range.
You can enter angles between 0 and 360. All other entries are converted to modulo 360.
The intersection of the u axis of the element system of the geometry with
the plane of the geometry represents the origin for the angle units. By
way of confirmation, the total angle of the strategy is indicated.
An exception to this procedure is the small (axial) circle path (scanned on
the small radius) at the torus. With this strategy, the angle specifications
are not applied to the surface area but to the intersecting surface at the
point of the first axial section. If the small (axial) circle path contains several sections, the start and end points around the axis of the torus are
turned in relation to the corresponding sections.
When closing the input page with OK , the program checks whether the
start and the end point of the evaluation range are in the center of the
circle. In this case, it is not possible to determine any angle range for the
evaluation range.

Coordinate system type

The second option of defining the evaluation range is to determine two


points. The start and end points are projected at a right angle onto the
path. The projected points determine the evaluation range.
The following applies to circular paths: The evaluation range is evaluated
according to the direction of the strategy. If the angle range of the strategy is positive, the evaluation range expands from the start point to the
end point in the mathematical positive direction of rotation (normal of
the geometry seen from the top). In the case of a negative angle range,
the evaluation range expands in the opposite direction.
The following applies to straight paths: The start and end points can be
exchanged.
You can switch over the coordinate system for the point definitions. The
following systems are available:

Base alignment (the coordinates are shown in the base alignment)

Coordinate system (the coordinates are shown in the coordinate system of the geometry)

Feature (the coordinates are shown in the feature alignment of the


geometry)

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-167

Measurement strategies for features

NOTICE
The coordinate system is switched over at the same time for all path generations of the feature.
NOTICE
If the strategies are set to Base Alignment or Workpiece Alignment, the points of the evaluation ranges are not offset with the feature
if the nominal position of the geometry is changed.
NOTICE
If the strategies are set to Feature Alignment, the points of the evaluation ranges are offset if the nominal position of the geometry is
changed. This behavior is the same as the strategies of single points, intermediate points, etc.
When closing the definition template for the feature, the program automatically switches back to Feature System. During the CNC run, the
points of the evaluation range are calculated back to the base alignment
and compared with the determined points (these are stored in the base
alignment).

Particularities for the evaluation range


Features with pattern

In the case of features with pattern, the points of the evaluation range
are offset and/or turned with the geometry. Therefore it is not necessary
to define a separate evaluation range for each index of the pattern.
Use the formula and the LOOPx loop index if you require a separate evaluation range for the individual pattern features.

Invalid evaluation ranges

An evaluation range is invalid if one of the limit points is located in the


center of the circle path. Then no angle range can be determined for the
evaluation range as one of the two limits is no longer used.
A message indicating that the evaluation range is invalid appears in the
default printout. As the error has nothing to do with the evaluation of
the feature (but with the measurement), the text does not appear with
the calculated result of the feature. It appears separately. However, the
error is printed even when the feature could not be calculated for another
reason.

Calculation of the geometries

Prior to evaluating a geometry and its determined points, all points which
are outside the evaluation range are removed during the calculation.
In contrast to other evaluation settings (procedure, filter, outliers, restrictions), a feature is always calculated with its defined evaluation range
whether for a characteristic or for a getActual formula.
The number of points included in the printout represents the number of
points which lie within the evaluation range (minus outliers).

4-168

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement strategies for features

Qualifying a feature
with the evaluation
range manually

The evaluation is inactive if you measure the feature manually (e.g. in the
case of manual base or start alignment).

Recall feature points

If you access the determined points via the recall feature points function,
the points which are outside the evaluation range are also recalled. The
recalled points retain their mark.
The evaluation range can also be restricted with regard to features which
are determined by recalling points. This is the only way of evaluating a
feature which was once measured with various evaluation ranges.

Representation of the evaluation range


Display in CAD window

When the feature is open, you can display the determined points in the
CAD window if you select Show Actual Points in the context menu
of the CAD window. Each actual point is shown as a red arrow.
Only the points that are outside the evaluation range are shown in pink
color.
The positions of the start and end points of the evaluation range can be
shown in the CAD window when the feature is open. To do so, you must
tick the Display position of evaluation range check box on the
Strategy index card in the CAD settings (menu: CAD View Settings...). If a feature contains one (or more) paths with evaluation ranges, the positions of the start and end points are drawn as pink squares.
The direction of the square depends on the nominal geometry. The start
and end points are projected perpendicular to the nominal geometry. The
tangent direction at this projection point forms the normal of the square.
If the start and end points are located in the center or on the axis of the
circle, the plane normal of the nominal circle forms the normal of the
square.
The appropriate positions of the evaluation range and the path in the
CAD window are marked.

Representation on the
plot

All measured points are shown in a form plot (roundness, straightness).


The evaluation range is identified.

Point list
Basics about the point list
The point list contains the coordinates for all the points together with the
normal vectors that have been collected for the feature. You can edit
these coordinates and, for example, define optimum probing points.
Additionally, the styli to be used are included in the list of points (under
Stylus).
The illustration below shows an example of the Point List window with
a cylinder measured at 8 points.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-169

Measurement strategies for features

Changing the point list


In the point list, you can change the stylus and change the coordinates
or the normal vectors of the probing points.

Note: Be careful when changing the list, because the CMM goes to each
point in the list as soon as you run the measurement plan.
1 Click Strategy in the definition template.
2 Click the point list icon.
3 To change a coordinate, overwrite the value.
4 Click OK.

Alternative probing methods (selfcentering probing)


Principle of self-centering probing
The probe is usually unlocked only in the probing direction. This means
that the probe can move in one direction only, namely the direction corresponding to the movement of the joystick on the control console.

4-170

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement strategies for features

In this example, self-centering probing of the V-groove necessitates cancelation of the lock in the X axis in order to avoid faulty probing.

Then the stylus can slowly approach with less movement the bottom
of the V-groove in the X axis.

Special features of self-centering probing


Certain particular aspects have to be taken into account during self-centering probing. In addition, notes are shown for self-centering probing
with the XDT and VAST XXT styli.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-171

Measurement strategies for features

Restrictions self-centering probing


The following restrictions and special features apply to the self-centering
probing:
Topic

Special features

Control

Using the C98 / C99 control units, self-centering probing is an option


only for probing a circle path with a rotary table.

Rotary table

If a circle path or curve is to be measured with a rotary table, the circle


path must be in a rotationally symmetrical position with respect to
the rotary table axis. Otherwise, the control unit cannot measure the
circle path.

Scanning / Single Points

Probing points can only be measured as single points.


Lines and circle paths can only be scanned.

Tangential probing

Tangential approaches (with the VAST Navigator) are not possible.

Path form

If possible curves should have one rotation direction similar to a circle


path.
It is not possible to use self-centering probing for grooves with sharp
changes of direction.

Notes on self-centering probing with XDT and VAST


XXT
The following special features apply to self-centering probing with the
XDT and VAST XXT styli:

Self-centering probing with the VAST XXT is not allowed.

For self-centering measurement, the TL3 type shows the most suitable
properties whereas the TL2 type shows the most unfavorable properties. It might not be possible to use the XDT type for self-centering
measurement on certain CMMs, e.g. large machines.

For self-centering measurement, it is useful to to choose largest possible stylus diameter.

The recommended stylus lengths for the TL1, TL3 and XDT types range
between 30 mm and 80 mm. For the TL2 type, 150 mm should not
be exceeded.

Workpiece-specific influences such as the centering angle and material-related influences such as roughness require the stylus to be qualified. This is usually done by means of repeat measurements.

Activating self-centering probing


NOTICE
Self-centering probing is an option only for measuring probes.

4-172

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement strategies for features

Call

To call the Probe Self Centering window, you have three options:

Activation for all features of a measurement plan:


Select Edit Deselect and select Resources Stylus system Probe Self Centering.

Activation for a certain feature


Highlight the feature in the measurement plan and select Resources Stylus system Probe Self Centering.

Activation only for a certain strategy (e.g. probing point) of a feature


Click Strategy in the definition template. Open the corresponding
strategy in the strategy list (e.g. the probing point) and click Probe
Self Centering.

1 Tick the Probe Self Centering check box and set the parameters.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-173

Measurement strategies for features

The corresponding features are identified with an orange frame in the


measurement plan.
The next time it probes, CALYPSO will use the settings you activated.

Self-centering probing of circle paths


The probe is usually unlocked only in the probing direction. This means
that the probe can move in one direction only, namely the direction corresponding to the movement of the joystick on the control console.
Self-centering probing of the V-groove necessitates cancelation of the
lock in transverse direction to the groove in order to avoid faulty probing.
Then the groove guides the stylus in the path. This is called self-centering
probing.
When performing self-centering probing of a circle in a V-groove, you
cannot touch the actual nominal circle with a spherical stylus. With a cylinder that touches a plane, it is also not possible to probe the circle of the
surface area directly. You must decide here which circle is to be defined
as the nominal circle.
Circular V-groove

To probe a V-groove that forms a circle on the plane or at a cylinder, you


define the course of the groove base as the nominal circle even if it cannot
be probed.

Measuring point
Contact points

Nominal point
used

Desired
nominal point

After the stylus radius correction, a minimal difference remains uncalculated. Depending on the characteristic used, this difference has no permanent effect because its results cancel each other out or the difference
is of a negligible amount.
Circle of a surface area

4-174

If you want to define the Circle feature by self-centering probing but


probing at the desired height of the surface area is not possible, you must
use the actual probing points (contact points) as nominal points.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement strategies for features

Contact point

Measuring point

Desired
nominal point

Self-centering probing of circle paths


You can also activate the self-centering measurement for the helix path
measurement strategy for cylinders and cones. This is realized in the Helix strategy window on the Special Settings tab.
Use Settings to open the Probe Self Centering window and set the
parameters for the self-centering measurement.
NOTICE
Self-centering scanning without rotary table is only possible with the C99
control.
Restrictions

Self-centering scanning is intended for circles. Therefore, avoid extreme


slopes.
NOTICE
The slope refers to the section surface and not to the cone axis.

Pitch

Automatic stylus search


Principle of the automatic stylus search
The automatic stylus search is best suited for use with an RDS, but it can
also be used with other sensors.
Purpose

There is a difficulty involved if geometric elements with rotational pattern


are to be measured on a CMM without rotary table and without RDSCAA: The identical features of the pattern cannot be measured with one
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-175

Measurement strategies for features

and the same stylus because the probing direction is different for each
feature.
Example: 8 bores

Eight bores are to be measured on a rotationally symmetrical part; these


bores are defined in CALYPSO as cylinders with rotationally symmetrical
pattern. This pattern cannot be measured at first without a rotary table
and without RDS-CAA, as it is unclear which styli are to be used for the
individual positions.
If you have activated the automatic stylus search and a stylus is available
for each required direction, CALYPSO can measure the cylinder without
difficulty.

Principle of the automatic stylus search

This is how the automatic stylus search works: CALYPSO searches


through all qualified positions of a stylus system and compares the shaft
direction of each stylus with the planned probing direction.

For a cylindrical or circular feature, CALYPSO uses the axis of the feature.

In the case of a planar feature, CALYPSO uses its normal.

CALYPSO uses the stylus with the smallest angle between stylus shaft and
axis or normal to perform the measurement. In order to make the result
unambiguous, you have to specify how this angle is to be measured i.e.
whether the axis or normal is to be oriented nearly in the direction of the
shaft or in the opposite direction of the shaft.

Angle at
shaft against normal

Angle at
shaft along normal

NOTICE
The shaft direction is defined as the direction from the fastening point to
the tip of the stylus.
CALYPSO minimizes either the angle between the stylus shaft and the
axis or normal, or the angle in the opposite direction of the axis or normal.
The direction you have to choose depends on the geometry of your workpiece.

4-176

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Measurement strategies for features

Maximum angle

To reduce the danger of shaft probing (e.g. in the case of cylinder measurements), you can restrict the maximum permitted angle between the
shaft and normal or axis.
If there is no stylus in the permitted angle range, CALYPSO is unable to
probe. The CNC run is halted, and you receive a corresponding message.

Activating automatic stylus search


If you want to measure a feature with rotational pattern on a CMM without rotary table and without RDS-CAA, you must activate the automatic
stylus search. This is done when the stylus is selected in the measurement
strategy of the feature in question.
NOTICE
A requirement for the automatic stylus search is that all the required styli
or stylus positions must be qualified.
The shaft direction must also be specified for qualification. (A query appears asking for the probing angle if probing has not been in the direction
of the main axis of the CMM.)
1 Click Strategy in the definition template.
2 Open the strategy window for the probing, e.g. Probing point.
3 Under Stylus, select one of the two Auto entries:
Auto1: Shaft away from normal: The stylus whose angle between shaft direction and opposite direction to the normal or axis of
the feature is the smallest is set.
Auto2: Shaft along normal: The stylus whose angle between
shaft direction and normal or axis of the feature is the smallest is set.
Note: The shaft direction is defined as the direction from the fastening
point to the tip of the stylus.
4 Press OK to confirm.
In the CNC run, the corresponding styli are dynamically selected and
assigned.
Note: You can also make the Auto1 and Auto2 entries via the Measurement Plan Editor Features.

Restricting the angle range


To reduce the danger of shaft probing (e.g. in the case of cylinder measurements), you can restrict the maximum permitted angle between the
shaft and normal or axis.
To do so, enter the maximum permitted limit angle under Angle range
for stylus search in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
An error message appears if the restriction of the angle range means that
no suitable stylus is found in the CNC run. The CNC run is canceled.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-177

Path generation measuring features automatically

Path generation measuring features


automatically
Purpose and use of the path generation
Unlike the probing of individual points, path generation procedures feature rapid multi-point measurement in a single operation. Path generation
will help you arrive at optimum and highly accurate measuring results.
NOTICE
You must have qualified your stylus with the Tensor setting in order to
use path generation for scanning (see Preparing the stylus system [ 315]).
A measurement strategy depends on a number of parameters, from the
group of the feature (shape, position, size) through tolerance up to the
stylus used. CALYPSO uses these parameters to calculate starting parameters of the CMM that lead to the best possible compliance with the
tolerance you demand. You only have to enter the minimum data.
With path generation you can

continuously record measuring points and generate paths from single


points, if you have a CMM with measuring probe.

or you can just generate a path from single points, if you have a CMM
with trigger probe (pseudo scanning).

Path generation is a macro that automatically measures a feature with set


parameters, for example a certain number of surface lines or screws on
a cylinder or cone. With this you can reach a high point density and thus
adequate information about the workpiece surface. High point densities
are the prerequisite for standardized, extremely accurate evaluation of
your features.
To use a path generation method, follow these steps:

Set the global settings for evaluation of the characteristics groups in


the default settings (see Changing the measurement parameters of
the CMM [ 1014]).

Enter the feature in the measurement plan and probe its geometry.
Alternatively, you can load a feature from a CAD file. See Defining
features [ 42].

Assign a path generation method.

Check and/or change the settings of the path generation method.

Assigning the path generation method is split into three steps:

4-178

Adding the path generation method to the strategy list.

Making general settings.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Path generation measuring features automatically

These settings are common to all path generation methods.

Setting values for the path generation method.


These settings are described separately because they depend on the
selected path generation method.

Adding a path generation method to a


strategy list
The path generation method has to be added to the strategy list of the
feature, so it can be taken into account when generating travel paths.
1 Click Strategy in the definition template.
The Strategy dialog box is opened.
Path
generation
method

Strategy list

2 Choose the path mode.

To change the setting, click the displayed icon. (You have chosen path
generation if the points are displayed connected.)
3 Click the button for the path generation method you want.
The path generation method is entered in the strategy list. At the same
time, CALYPSO immediately generates the path from the single points if
you choose this in step 3.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-179

Path generation measuring features automatically

General settings for the path generation


method
You can now change general settings for the method irrespective of
which path generation method is set for a feature.
CALYPSO supplies default values for the fields in the dialog box of the
chosen path generation method. The data comes from:

the geometric data of the feature,

the default values in the default settings and

the tolerances from

the characteristics and


the feature.

If you have not defined any tolerances yet, you can do it in this section.
CALYPSO calculates the parameters according to the narrowest tolerance
which you entered for testing the feature and the point density for the
characteristics group (see Basics about characteristics [ 52]).
NOTICE
If filtering is active for the feature, make sure that all scanning paths on
the feature have the same step width (step distance).
Otherwise, the results are not in accordance with standards.
A description of the parameters for each path generation method can be
found in:

Path generation methods for circle, cylinder and cone [ 4185]

Path generation methods for planes: the Polyline [ 4190]

Path generation methods for planes: the Grid [ 4192]

Path generation methods for planes: the Circle Path [ 4192]

Path generation of lines [ 4193]

Path generation methods in detail


List of path generation methods
The available path generation methods are automatically offered with
every feature. The following path generation methods are available:

4-180

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Path generation measuring features automatically

Feature
Various features

Icon

Path generation method/discrete-point measurement


Unknown Contour
Measurement takes place from point 1 to point 2 using the shortest
path (see Unknown Contour path generation [ 4184]).

Line

Line Measurement

Plane, Cylinder,
Cone, Sphere

Define Point Set

Plane/Offset
Plane

Grid measuring
The plane is acquired in a grid of user-definable pitch.
Polyline Measurement
A polyline is measured on the plane.
Circle path on plane
A circle path is measured on the plane.
Multi Polyline
Several polylines at a distance from the edge.

Circle, Cylinder,
Cone

Four-Point Circle Macro (also suitable for thread measurement)


This measurement is semiautomatic. To execute this measurement,
move the stylus to the center of the circle (cylinder, cone) that is to
be measured. CALYPSO performs four probing operations and calculates the values for the circle from them.
Group Circle Paths
Combines the selected circle paths in a group and undoes the existing
grouping. A group is evaluated the same way as a circle path scanned
with a stylus.
Support function for special applications, e.g. if a circle is to be measured with several styli.

Circle, Sphere,
Slot, Curve, 3D
Curve

Circle Auto Path Definition (Circle Path Measurement)

Circle

Helix path (screw line measurement)

The start angle and angle range can be set.

Suitable for special applications (threads). Gradient, number of turns,


start angle and rotation direction can be set.
Cylinder

2 Circle Auto Paths


Two circles are measured the first at the top of the cylinder and the
second at the bottom of the cylinder. The measuring heights can be
set individually.
1 Circle Auto Path
This intersection is measured at the center of the cylinder. The measuring height can be set.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-181

Path generation measuring features automatically

Feature

Icon

Path generation method/discrete-point measurement


Surface lines
The number of form lines is editable. The starting height and the
target height can be parameterized.
Helix path (screw line measurement)
Gradient, number of turns, start angle and rotation direction can be
set.
Helix path variable (screw line measurement with VAST Navigator)
Gradient, number of turns, start angle and rotation direction as well
as the number of additional circles can be set.

Sphere

Define Sphere Position


CALYPSO probes the sphere and in so doing defines the position of
the sphere. The probing locations cannot be influenced. In CNC runs,
you will also be requested to take manual probings.
Sphere Macro
You can enter the sphere coverage for the area in which these probings are to be taken.

Cone

2 Circle Auto Paths


Two circles will be measured the first at the top of the cone and the
second at the bottom of the cone. The measuring heights can be set
individually.
1 Circle Auto Path
One or more intersections will be measured between the base surface
and top surface of the cone. The number of intersections and their
measuring heights can be set.
Helix path (screw line measurement)
Suitable for special applications (threads). Gradient, number of turns,
start angle and rotation direction can be set.

Rectangle

Rectangular Path
Measures an inside or outside rectangle by evading the corners.

Torus

Large Circle Path


Measures one or more circles on the torus of which the centers are
on the axis of the torus.
Small Circle Path
Measures one or more circles on the torus of which the centers are
on the primary circle of the torus.

4-182

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Path generation measuring features automatically

Feature
Curve

Icon

Path generation method/discrete-point measurement


Curve segment measurement.
The segment to be measured is defined by three or more points:

If you define three points, they represent start point, end point
and direction of curvature (direction around circumference) of the
curve segment, in that order.

If you define more than three points, they represent a full circle;
the first point defines the start point and the direction around
circumference is clockwise (from the top or outside).

Unknown Cut
3D Curve

3D Curve
Measures 3 paths beside one another to compute the transverse curvature of the curve.
3D Grid
Measures several paths positioned next to each other in a meandering
style.
Stroke curve
Measures a radial or axial lift curve on the cylinder section.
Cam Groove
Measures a cam groove on the cylinder section.

Setting parameters for a path generation


method
Specifying tolerances and making general settings
1 Double-click the corresponding entry in the strategy list to open the
window for the path generation method.
2 To enter the point density, click Basic Settings.
You switch to the corresponding page in the default settings (you will
find more information on this in the Online Help under Changing
the measurement parameters of the CMM [ 1014]).
3 Enter the tolerance for the feature in the Expected Tolerance input
field.
4 Click Calculate.
CALYPSO computes the parameters of the Settings group. The scanning speed proposed by the system depends on the required accuracy.
5 Enter the number of the desired stylus in the Stylus field.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-183

Path generation measuring features automatically

6 Enter the values for the path generation method. For more details,
please refer to Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178].
7 Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
You are returned to the Strategy window.
8 If you do not want to set any more path generation methods for this
feature, click OK. Otherwise repeat the steps from Features you can
measure with path generation [ 4180].
The path generation method has now been fully defined and will be executed once a CNC run is initiated.

Unknown Contour path generation


The Unknown Contour method is available for the following features:

Circle

Ellipse

Slot

Rectangle

Cylinder

Sphere

Cone

Curve

For the curve, the Unknown Contour method is activated in the strategy window:
For all other given features, you can insert a path in the strategy list using
the Unknown Contour icon.

4-184

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Path generation measuring features automatically

Enter the start point and end point of the travel path in the strategy window for the unknown contour.
CALYPSO executes the measurement using the shortest path while,
of course, observing the feature and keeping in contact with the workpiece.
Immersion depth

To avoid unintentional scanning in the air when scanning an unknown


contour, an immersion depth of 0.3 mm is set. This default value may
be too high for very flat objects so that there is a risk of touching the
material. For such cases, you can set the Immersion Depth for Scanning Unknown Contour to Middle or Low in the Measurement
Plan Editor Features.

Path generation methods for circle, cylinder


and cone
The path generation methods for circle, cylinder and cone are identical.
In the following illustration, you see the input field for a circle path.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-185

Path generation measuring features automatically

Generating the path


from the CAD model

You can extract the data for path generation straight from the CAD
model. When you use this method, the system returns a series of either
start and end angles or start and end points.
Open cylinders and cones are taken into account: Each new path is
checked directly against the CAD model in order to identify material
flaws, if any, and eliminate them from the path. The path can thus be
generated with restrictions, or you may be able to generate different
paths. (At this time, the function is implemented only for the circle and
circle path.)
If you make subsequent, manual changes to the path data, CALYPSO
does not recheck the information. This means that you have a great deal
of latitude in defining paths.

Assembling a circle path

If the workpiece does not allow scanning the circle path with a single
stylus (e.g. in the case of a full circle on a camshaft), split the circle path
into circle sections to scan each section with an appropriate stylus.
The individual arcs can be combined in a circle path by means of the
Group Circle Paths function.
After the measurement, the circle path is assembled from the selected
circle sections and evaluated.

Entering formulas for


path parameters

4-186

The entries for path generation can be parameterized. Select the Formula entry in the context menu of the fields. You can use the variables
that are defined in the measurement plan to make formulas and enter
PCM commands if you use the PCM Technology option.
The following entries can be parameterized.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Path generation measuring features automatically

Parameterizing single
points and intermediate
positions

Scanning speed

Step width

Number of points

Start angle (input in radians!)

Angle range (input in radians!)

Stylus

Single probing points and intermediate positions can also be parameterized. Here, it will be necessary to define the reference system. To do so,
click PCM-Ref in the Point List window.

In the Datum Reference Frame for PCM variable window, you


can define which coordinate system should be used as the basis for the
conversion of parameters to numerical values.
This coordinate system will apply to all parameters of the feature that is
currently open. All technological parameters of this feature will always be
calculated on the basis of this coordinate system irrespective of the view
that has been selected.
Measuring range

The term measuring height and the resulting measuring range are explained by the following illustration:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-187

Path generation measuring features automatically

Origin of feature's
local
Coordinate System

min. measuring
height
Measuring range
max. measuring
height

Evaluation range

If certain start and end points are not suitable for the evaluation, you can
define an evaluation range.

Scanning a circle path with several styli


If it is not possible to scan the circle path with one stylus, then you can
probe the circle path using several styli. The arcs determined in this way
can be combined in a circle path by means of the Group Circle Paths
function.
You can use this method for the following features:

Combining circle paths

Cylinder

Cone

Circle

Circle on Cone

To scan a circle path using several styli, you must define which circle path
is to be scanned with which stylus. Bear in mind that no circle path may
contain single points.
To group circle paths, select these in the strategy window and click the
Group Circle Paths icon.
The circle paths are assigned to a group. You can identify this by the
annotation to the name (group n) in the strategy list. The group is
treated and evaluated the same way as a circle path scanned with a stylus.
If one of the selected circle paths is already included in a group, this will
be removed from the group and added to the new group. Under certain
circumstances, the original group might thus be deleted.

4-188

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Path generation measuring features automatically

Resulting circle path

Start, end and direction of rotation of the assembled circle path result
according to the following rules:

The direction of rotation of the assembled circle path corresponds to


the direction of rotation of the first circle section in the strategy list.

The assembled circle path begins after the largest gap between two
adjacent circle sections.

The illustration below shows the relationships.

(3)

(1)

(3)
(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

Removing a group

To remove a group, select one of the appropriate circle paths and choose
Select Group in the context menu.
Click the Group Circle Paths icon. The group is removed.

Removing from group

To remove individual circle paths from a group, highlight the desired circle
paths and select Remove From Group in the context menu.

Measuring thread
Conditions:
To measure cylindrical tapped holes, you must define a feature of
the Circle type for the tapped hole. The circle macro is used for the
thread measurement.
1 Click Strategy in the definition template for the circle.
2 Click the icon for the Circle Macro path generation method.
3 Tick the Thread check box and enter the desired number of probings,
pattern and orientation of the thread.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-189

Path generation measuring features automatically

4 Press OK to confirm.
You are prompted whether the stylus is in the center of the circle.
5 Position the stylus with the shaft parallel to the axis of the circle in the
center of the tapped hole and confirm with Yes.
Starting at the current height, CALYPSO performs 4 probings at a distance of 90 each by considering the pattern and orientation of the
thread. The center of the circle is computed from the 4 points gained.
Then CALYPSO carries out the actual thread measurements. They are
entered as individual points in the strategy list.
The further procedure is the same as for the circle measurement.
Note: You can also use the circle macro for the thread measurement
several times in succession, e.g. at different heights of the thread.

Path generation methods for planes: the


Polyline
Automatic measurement of a polyline allows you to measure a track of
lines, arcs and full circles on planes. This helps you measure planes very
easily that are strongly segmented or ruptured.
You see the input window for the generation of polylines in the following
picture.

4-190

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Path generation measuring features automatically

Coordinates list

Marking frame

Creating a polyline
1 Probe the points on the plane from which you want to create the
polyline. You can do this with the CMM or the CAD window (you will
find more information in the Online Help under Defining probing
points in the CAD window [ 211]).
Each entered measuring point is displayed in the coordinates list (from
bottom to top). CALYPSO connects these points with lines by default.
You can select the coordinate system for the display of the points. The
points are saved in the local feature alignment.
2 You always need the start point, direction point and end point if you
want to create an arc or full circle. The three points have to be displayed in the coordinates list. Use the arrow buttons next to the
Number field to do so.
3 Click the arc or full circle icon.
The green border now encloses the three points from which the arc
or full circle was calculated. You see the new connection in the CAD
window.
4 Continue in this way with all following points.
The order does not matter for this: You can probe new points at any
time and/or choose/edit connection types between any points.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-191

Path generation measuring features automatically

Path generation methods for planes: the Grid


With the grid measurement, you can create a plane right down to very
small sections.
The input window for path generation of planes with a grid can be seen
in the illustration below.

Make sure that you have entered a value for the rounding-off of corners
in the default settings. Check this value by clicking Basic Settings and
then the SCAN Limits tab.

Path generation methods for planes: the Circle


Path
You can have a plane calculated from a circle path using the path generation method for the circle path.
The input window for path generation of a circle path on a plane can be
seen in the illustration below.

4-192

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Path generation measuring features automatically

There are two ways to define the circle path:

Accept the default setting:

Scanning with rotary table

Center of the circle = center of the plane


Diameter = minimum of the length and width of the plane, corrected by 1.5 times the stylus radius.

Enter the circle center and the diameter.

To scan a circle path using the rotary table, tick the Scan circle path
with rotary table check box.
Prerequisite:

The rotary table is activated for the current measurement plan.

The space axis of the plane points in the direction of the rotary table
axis.

Path generation of lines


With the path generation method for lines, a line is scanned whose points
are already defined in the feature. CALYPSO therefore does not need any
more information, and you merely see the parameters of the CMM and
the tolerance in the input window of the path generation method.
The input window for the generation of straight lines can be seen in the
illustration below.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-193

Path generation measuring features automatically

Path generation methods for rectangles: the


Rectangular Path
With the path generation method for rectangles, the stylus does not scan
the entire circumference of the rectangle. The stylus moves on four individual paths along the four sides of the rectangle and evades the corners.

Travel path

Enter the parameters for the rectangular path in the Rectangular


Path window.

4-194

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Path generation measuring features automatically

Any definitions already saved in the strategy defaults for the rectangular
path will be predefined here.
Entries

Enter here the Measuring Height and the distances of the probing
paths to the corners.
With Independent Lines, you can define different edge distances for
each side and each corner.
By means of Move to Safety Position, you initiate the stylus to move
to the safety position after each individual path. If the check box is unticked, the stylus moves around the corners on the measuring height level.

Strategy defaults
The strategy defaults for the rectangular path allow you to predefine the
input fields included in the Rectangular Path strategy.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

4-195

Path generation measuring features automatically

As a special feature you can enter here the edge distances as absolute
values, as a multitude of the stylus radius or as a percentage. In the Rectangular Path technology window, the specifications are converted into
absolute values (mm or inch) depending on the current stylus or the
nominal values of the rectangle.

4-196

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Chapter

Defining characteristics

.................................................................................................................

This chapter contains:


Basics about characteristics ...................................................................... 52
Calculation of geometric elements ........................................................... 53
Defining characteristics ............................................................................ 57
Evaluation parameters for features ......................................................... 542
User-defined characteristic attributes ..................................................... 557
Details on defining characteristics .......................................................... 563
Utilities ................................................................................................ 5112

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-1

Basics about characteristics

Basics about characteristics


The characteristics enable you to check the tolerance limits that your
workpiece should meet. You integrate the characteristics in the measurement plan and link them with the features.
CALYPSO supports any given order in which you define the features or
characteristics of your measurement plan.

For defined features, you can set the characteristics for measuring the
size (dimensions), form, position, and so on. In this way, you ascertain
whether the features are within the limits you specified.

You can also define characteristics in the list of characteristics without


defining the associated feature. You select the associated feature
when entering the settings for the characteristic. If this feature is already defined, will be defined or maybe is to be imported from a CAD
file later on, it makes no difference.

The characteristics are split into three groups (see table below). To evaluate these characteristics, different point densities are required for each
group, depending on which best-fit method is used (see Best-fit methods [ 53]). See the Online Help under Changing the measurement
parameters of the CMM [ 1014] to check the settings.
Group

Point density

Size Characteristics Small

Comment
Normally these characteristics are rated by a small number of measuring points.
Recommendation: Use more points than required to get
a statement about the standard deviation (Sigma).
For a function-oriented evaluation (pairing-dimension
evaluation), a higher number of points is required.

Location Character- Medium


istics

These characteristics require a higher point density, because the position deviation overlaps the form deviation
of the features.

Form Characteristics

The evaluation of the characteristics needs a high point


density on their measurement plane.

High

Recommended for the evaluation of the form: Low-pass


filtering of the measuring points to minimize the influence of the surface roughness.
You can add other special features as characteristics. In this case, they are
not actually characteristics, but they will be processed during the CNC
run. For more information, please refer to Utilities [ 5112].

5-2

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Calculation of geometric elements

Calculation of geometric elements


Computed feature
To understand and correctly interpret measured results, you need to
know how CALYPSO calculates the corresponding standard geometric
element from the CMM's measured points.
Using the measured points, CALYPSO calculates a computed feature.
Mathematically, the computed feature is the feature which best fits the
resulting measured values in terms of the standard geometry. The computed feature is the basis for evaluating the measuring results. Depending
on the best-fit method used, the features determined in this manner can
differ slightly from each other. Thus, there are also different deviations of
the measured feature from the specified nominal feature.
This is why the computed feature and the corresponding best-fit method [ 53] are fundamental to the accuracy of nominal-actual comparisons carried out via the characteristics.
NOTICE
The optimum best-fit methods are the default settings for the respective
characteristic groups.

Best-fit methods
Overview of best-fit methods
This topic shows and explains the advantages and disadvantages of the
mathematical best-fit methods. This means that for each measuring requirement that arises within the framework of a measuring strategy you
can now select the best-fit method which is best suited to your individual
requirements.
CALYPSO uses the following best-fit methods:

Specifying the best-fit


method

Gauss (LSQ feature)

Chebyshov (Minimum Feature)

L1 feature

Calculation as circumscribed or inscribed feature

Calculation as tangential element (outside/inside).

To specify the best-fit method:

Open the definition template of the feature and click Evaluation.


- or Open the definition template of the characteristic and click Evaluation.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-3

Calculation of geometric elements

The selected method will be used to calculate the characteristic when


the data is evaluated. If you select Default, the best-fit method defined in the feature will be used.
Only best-fit methods that are suitable for the feature are available (see
Using the best-fit methods [ 56]).
View and change the parameters for the best-fit method under Extras Settings Measurement on the Point density notebook
page.
Example

The following diagram shows the actual shape of a scanned circle with
the ideal geometric shapes. Those shapes result from the different bestfit methods.

outlier

Gauss element
Minimum element (Chebyshov)
Circumscribed element
Inscribed element
Actual outline

As can be seen from the illustration, depending on the best-fit method


used, results can differ when dimensions (e.g. diameter), form deviations
and position (e.g. center) are checked.

Best fit according to Gauss (LSQ feature)


The Gauss (LSQ feature) best-fit method calculates the average best-fit
element. From the calculated ideal outline and the actual probed outline,

5-4

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Calculation of geometric elements

a sum of square distances is calculated. The minimum of this sum results


in the best-fit element.
This best fit is insensitive against outliers and leads to a clear result with
low computational effort. If there is just a small amount of points, the
Gauss (LSQ feature) method is always the standard evaluation method
for dimension, form and location testing.

Best fit according to Chebyshov (Minimum


Feature)
The best fit according to Chebyshov (Minimum Feature) calculates the
smallest maximum deviation between the calculated ideal outline and the
actual probed outline.
As the extreme values of the probing have an impact on the result of the
best fit, this best-fit method is very susceptible to outliers.
Recommendation: a large number of points and additional outlier elimination and/or low-pass filtering, depending on the measuring requirements (see Eliminating outliers [ 549] and Setting and activating
a filter [ 543]). Used for ISO 1101 shape testing.

Best fit as least absolute value feature (L1


feature)
With the calculation as least absolute value feature (L1 feature), the geometric element is determined in such a way to minimize the sum of the
deviation values.
This best fit is insensitive against outliers and leads to a clear result with
low computational effort.

Calculation as circumscribed/inscribed feature


The circumscribed feature is the smallest possible feature outside which
no probing points are situated. The inscribed feature is the largest possible
feature inside which no probing points are situated.
This method is useful for pairing-dimension evaluation and for evaluating
the references in case of position tolerances.
Prerequisite: Large number of points.
Recommendation: Outlier elimination and/or low-pass filtering, because
the circumscribed or inscribed feature can only be mapped on the basis
of the extreme points.

Calculation as tangential element


The tangential element lies completely outside the material.
It is either the largest possible element outside which all probing points
of the element are situated (inscribed feature), or the smallest possible
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-5

Calculation of geometric elements

element inside which all probing points of the element are situated (circumscribed feature).
Prerequisite: Large number of points.
Recommendation: Outlier elimination and/or low-pass filtering, because
the tangential element can only be mapped on the basis of the extreme
points.

Using the best-fit methods


The table below shows the best-fit methods you can select for each feature.
Feature

Gauss (LSQ
feature)

Minimum

L1 feature

2D Line

3D Line

Plane

Circle

Sphere

Cylinder

Cone

Symmetry Plane

Ellipse

Rectangle

Torus

Slot

Point

5-6

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Circumscribed/inscribed

Tangential
element
X
X

Defining characteristics

Defining characteristics
Options for defining characteristics
To go from merely obtaining measurements to their evaluation, it is necessary to define the characteristics.
Characteristics, features and the links between them are assigned to a
measurement plan.
CALYPSO

CALYPSO offers the following options of adding characteristics to the


measurement plan and linking them to features:

You add a characteristic [ 59] via the menu bar or from the
toolbox to the list of characteristics and specify it in the definition
template.
In the definition template, you assign the features to the characteristic
(Connecting characteristics to features [ 518]).

Options

You add one or several characteristics implicitly to the measurement


plan by defining them in the definition template of a feature. See
Definition template for features [ 45].

You load a CAD file (SAT, ProE or UniGraphics) and extract form and
location data from it. The features are added to the measurement plan
together with the characteristics. For more details, please refer to
Extracting characteristics from CAD files [ 59].

The additional options of CALYPSO offer further options of importing


measurement plan data:

DMIS import (DMIS Input Postprocessor option)


You import runs programmed in DMIS and thereby create a new regular CALYPSO measurement plan (see the operating instructions for
DMIS Import (option)).

Import of CAD files from ProE and UG (by means of the Characteristic
IN option)
You import features together with the characteristics from the ProE
and UG CAD systems into CALYPSO if they are available in a given
format (STEP file in the AP 203 or AP 214 format and ASCII data in
the Q-DAS format, specification of WEPROM) (see the operating instructions for Characteristic IN (option)).

Import of Agipp data for manufacturing segments (by means of the


Characteristic IN option) (see the operating instructions for Characteristic IN (option)).

You can find more detailed information regarding the different characteristics in Overview of characteristics [ 563].

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-7

Defining characteristics

Characteristics index card


Context menu of the Characteristics index card
The characteristics of the measurement plan are displayed on the Characteristics index card. Use this list to manage the characteristics: You
can rename, edit, assign parameters and group them.
Context menu

The context menu of the list of characteristics offers the following options:

Menu command

Function

Rename

Another name is assigned to the characteristic.

Check use of feature se- Displays the characteristics and utilities in which the characteristic is
used.
lected
References for selected Opens an overview of all defined features, references, parameters
and PCM commands for this characteristic in the References winFeatures
dow.
Characteristic attributes

Opens the Characteristic attributes window.

Edit functions

Cut, Copy, Copy with References, Paste, Paste with References

Loop

Inserts a loop around the characteristic.

Condition

Adds a condition to the characteristic.

Parameter

Opens the Settings for the input and output parameters of the
feature.

Open

Opens the definition template of the characteristic.

Delete

Deletes the characteristic from the list.

Delete Characteristic
and Feature actuals

Deletes the actual values in the characteristic and feature.

Delete Characteristic
actuals

Deletes only the actuals of the characteristic.

Masked

Masks the characteristic and adds a small mask to the icon. Masked
characteristics are not measured or calculated during the CNC run.

Execute Now!

Starts the measurement of the selected characteristic.

About the color-coding of characteristics


On the Characteristics index card, the characteristic buttons and the
color bars next to them show the type and status of the characteristic:

5-8

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Color

Meaning

Light gray The characteristic has not yet been defined fully.
With
The characteristic has been masked in the Measurement Plan Edimask icon tor Characteristics. It is not checked during the CNC run and it is not
evaluated in printouts.
Dark gray

The characteristic has been defined fully.


Measuring results are not yet available.

Green

The characteristic has been defined.


The measured results are within the tolerance.

Yellow

The characteristic has been defined.


The measured results exceed the warning limit but are still within the
tolerance.

Red

The characteristic has been defined.


The measured results are outside the tolerance.

Inserting characteristics into the


measurement plan
1 Click the Characteristics tab.
2 Choose the characteristic you want:
Select the characteristic from the submenus in the Size or Form
and Location menu. You can add other features using Resources Utilities.
- or Open a toolbox (Working with the toolbox [ 658]) and drag
the characteristic to the measurement plan area.

Extracting characteristics from CAD files


Options for extracting characteristics
CALYPSO allows you to extract characteristics relating to the size, form
and location from the CAD file and to insert them in the measurement
plan.
NOTICE
This function is currently only available for the CAD files in the CATIA V,
ProE (with limitations), and UG formats.

For better understanding, the characteristic information included in


the CAD data can be displayed or hidden according to different cri-

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-9

Defining characteristics

teria and arranged as desired (Displaying the dimension, form and


position from a CAD file [ 510]).

You can also use the desk structure contained in the CAD data and
edit it in CALYPSO (Dimension, form and position from a CAD file
with desks [ 512]).

All characteristics of a certain type or individual or several selected


characteristics can be extracted in one process. The features assigned
to the characteristics in the CAD data can be applied automatically
(except for the ProE format). You can also extract individual or all reference features separately.
It is also possible de define naming conventions according to which
the new characteristics in your measurement plan are named (Ex-

tracting the dimension, form and position from a CAD


file [ 514]).

Once the transfer in the measurement plan has been completed, the
characteristics can be edited, e.g. a feature can be assigned to an
empty characteristic or a characteristic can be replaced by another
characteristic (Editing the dimension, form and position [ 515]).

Displaying the dimension, form and position


from a CAD file
Characteristics can be extracted from CAD files in the Dimension,
Form, Position from CAD dialog box.
Opening the dialog box

If you load a suitable CAD file into an empty measurement plan, CALYPSO proposes automatically to open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box.

To open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box


manually, load a suitable CAD file and select CAD Display Form
and Location.

The settings on the Filter / Layer tab serve to visualize the features
for form and location. You can switch between both views of the tab
by means of the Layer or Filter button. The Filter view is enabled
by default.

Displaying characteristics in the CAD window


1 If necessary, restrict the selection to characteristics with information
on a certain direction of view or a certain number range on the
Filter tab.

5-10

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

2 Restrict the characteristics to those characteristic types that interest you, e.g. to all characteristics of the Dimension and Location type.
Characteristics that have not yet been extracted are identified by
white banners in the CAD window.
If the Display option under Accepted Characteristics on the
Creation tab is activated, characteristics that have already been
extracted are identified by blue banners.
3 To get more information on the characteristics in the CAD window:
Click the banner of a characteristic. The characteristic and all associated reference features are highlighted in color in the CAD model.
Click the banner of a reference feature. The reference feature is
highlighted in color.
4 If necessary, change the scope of the displayed information (Display group) and the representation of the banners in the CAD window (Presentation and Scale Factor groups) on the View tab.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-11

Defining characteristics

5 If required, you can move the banners in the CAD window with the
mouse.

Dimension, form and position from a CAD file


with desks
Characteristics can be extracted from CAD files in the Dimension,
Form, Position from CAD dialog box.
Opening the dialog box

If you load a suitable CAD file into an empty measurement plan, CALYPSO proposes automatically to open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box.

To open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box


manually, load a suitable CAD file and select CAD Display Form
and Location.

The settings on the Filter / Layer index card serve to visualize the
features for form and location. You can switch between both views
of the tab by means of the Layer or Filter button.

Displaying and editing desks in the CAD model

5-12

1 Activate the Filter / Layer tab.


61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

2 Click, if necessary, Layer to call the desk view.


The desk view shows the existing structure in the CAD model in a tree
structure. The structure was read from the CATIA file.

If the CATIA file does not contain any structure, CALYPSO creates a
structure using the TOLERANCES, DATUMS and TEXT desks.
3 Use the commands of the context menu in the structure tree:
Select Delete to delete an entire desk.
Select Edit to rename a desk.
Select Clipping Plane to display a section plane contained in the
CAD data.
Select Remove From Group to remove the marked feature from
the desk.
4 To create a new desk, highlight the desired features in the CAD window and click New layer from screen.
The features marked by a flag in the CAD window are summarized in
a new desk and the current view of the CAD window is saved at the
same time.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-13

Defining characteristics

5 To add additional features to a desk, highlight the features in the CAD


window and click Add selection to layer.
A window showing a list of all desks is opened. Select OK to add the
features marked by flags in the CAD window to the desk selected in
the window.
Use Filter to switch to the filter view of the index card.

Extracting the dimension, form and position


from a CAD file
Characteristics can be extracted from CAD files in the Dimension,
Form, Position from CAD dialog box.
Scope of extraction

The Dimension, Form & Position from CAD dialog box makes it
possible to extract characteristics from a CAD file in different ways:

Extraction of an individual characteristic

Extraction of the selected characteristics

Extraction of all characteristics of a certain type

Extraction of reference features

Extracting characteristics from a CAD file


1 If necessary, select the representation of those characteristics that interest you on the Filter tab (Displaying the dimension, form and
position from a CAD file [ 510]).
2 Activate the Creation tab.

3 Define under Settings the properties to be assigned to the extracted


characteristics.

5-14

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Create Geometry: CALYPSO extracts the features automatically


together with the characteristics (except for the ProE format). A
message is displayed if no feature is assigned to a characteristic.
CALYPSO enters this also in the default printout
(View Default printout).
Create characteristic identifier from: Define whether the
characteristic name in the measurement plan is to be created from
the characteristic name and/or the characteristic number assigned internally CALYPSO.
Characteristic name from CAD model: If you have activated
the Name of Characteristic under Create characteristic
identifier from, CALYPSO accepts the name defined in the CAD
file as characteristic name.
4 To extract all characteristics of a certain characteristic type (dimension,
form or position): Click the Create <characteristic_type> button
of the desired characteristic type in the Selected Characteristics
group.
CALYPSO extracts all characteristics of the selected characteristic type.
5 To extract all reference features: Under Settings, tick the Create
Geometry check box and click the Create Reference Features
button in the Selected Characteristics group.
CALYPSO extracts all reference features from the CAD file.
6 To extract an individual characteristic or reference feature from the
CAD file, double-click the characteristic or the reference feature.
7 To extract several characteristics or reference features: Select the desired characteristics or reference features in the CAD window by pressing CTRL and clicking with the mouse.
For better understanding, the characteristics can be hidden and displayed again.
8 Click the Create button in the Selected Characteristics group.
CALYPSO extracts all characteristics or reference features that are
marked by a banner in the selected color in the CAD window.
The extracted characteristics are added to the list of characteristics.

Editing the dimension, form and position


Characteristics can be extracted from CAD files in the Dimension,
Form, Position from CAD dialog box.
Opening the dialog box

If you load a suitable CAD file into an empty measurement plan, CALYPSO
proposes automatically to open the Dimension, Form, Position
from CAD dialog box.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-15

Defining characteristics

To open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box


manually, load a suitable CAD file and select CAD Display Form
and Location.
On the Filter and View index cards you define the representation of
the characteristics [ 510].
On the Creation index card you extract the desired characteristics [ 514].
On the Creation index card you define the properties of the characteristics to be added to the measurement plan and start the extraction [ 514].
Editing extracted characteristics

You can edit the extracted characteristics:

You can subsequently assign features to a characteristic that has been


extracted without features.

If desired, you can convert an extracted characteristic to another characteristic.

Subsequently assigning a feature to a characteristic


1 Select the characteristic in the measurement plan and select Create
Feature in the context menu.
If the CAD data contains the associated feature, the feature will be
extracted by CALYPSO, added to the list of features and assigned as
feature to the characteristic.

Subsequently converting a characteristic to another


characteristic
1 Select the characteristic in the measurement plan and select Convert
to in the context menu.

5-16

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

2 Click the desired characteristic in the Convert FDT Feature dialog


box and confirm with Apply.
3 If necessary, rename the characteristic in the measurement plan.
NOTICE
The converted characteristic will not be renamed automatically.

Characteristic definition templates


To assign features to a characteristic and select their desired tolerances,
the definition template must be open.
NOTICE
The content of the characteristic definition template varies with the selected characteristic.
There are three ways of opening a definition template:

Highlight the characteristic and click the Open selected object


icon.

Select the Open entry in the context menu of the characteristic.

Double-click the characteristic.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-17

Defining characteristics

The definition template contains fields for tolerance and actual value. The
buttons for the required references of this characteristic will still be shown
as empty.

Example: Definition template of the True Position characteristic:

Playing a video

To play a video about the definition of the True Position characteristic,


click 015_e_DINPos1/015_e_DinPos1_CZLogo.htm.

Connecting characteristics to features


Overview for connecting characteristics to
features
A characteristic must receive information relating to the feature which
will be used as a basis for the check. You have the following options of
connecting the characteristic to the feature:

5-18

Direct input in the definition template

Input via selection window

Input via formula

Transfer from the CAD window

Automatic feature predefinition

Connecting one or more characteristics to certain features in a single


step.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Direct input
Enter the name of an existing feature in the input field.
After the entry, two icons are displayed on the right-hand side. The name
is accepted by clicking the checkmark. The name is not accepted by clicking the cross, pressing Esc or by changing to another dialog box.
If the entered name does not exist, the first name in the list of features
that contains the entered character string is shown.

Input via selection window


Use the button in the template window. You can connect new features
or features that have already been defined to the characteristic.
You establish the connection to the characteristic in the Selection dialog box.

Input field

List of features

Input via formula


You can enter a formula for the name of the feature. Thus you can use
different features and reference features for a characteristic depending
on the situation.
Select Formula in the context menu of the input field. The Formula
dialog box appears on the screen.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-19

Defining characteristics

You enter the formula for the feature or reference feature and transfer it
to the input field by selecting OK. The input field will be highlighted in
yellow.
NOTICE
The result of the formula input must be a text. CALYPSO transfers only
the entries to the input field which can be selected in the list of features.
CALYPSO checks whether the defined feature exists and whether is may
be used as a feature or reference feature. This means that it is also not
possible to specify a plane as feature for a roundness by means of a formula.
If a feature does not exist or may not be used, the evaluation of the tolerance does not produce any result. This applies to both the parameterized features and the parameterized reference features.

Transfer from the CAD window


Use the CAD window to assign an already defined feature.
Click the feature of your choice in the CAD window. Don't forget to make
sure, however, that Select Already Extracted Features is set in the
CAD window (you will find more information in the Online Help under
Selecting features in the CAD model [ 210]).
The first feature you click will be adopted as Feature, the second as
Primary Datum, the third as Secondary Datum etc. corresponding
to the sequence of the buttons.

Automatic feature predefinition


You use the Automatic Feature predefinition function. To do so, select
Extras Settings Measurement and open the Features notebook page. Activate the Automatic Feature predefinition check
box. When a new characteristic is opened, the last feature that was open
will be entered automatically as the first feature.
Example: You create a Circle1 and close the window. You then add diameter, roundness, X value and Y value, etc., to the measurement plan
in the list of characteristics. When you open these characteristics one after

5-20

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

the other, Circle1 has already been entered for the first feature of each
characteristic.
Checking use

You can check for which characteristics a feature is used. Use the Check
use of selected Features command which you can find in the context
menu in the list of features.

Characteristics with indexes

You can assign indexes to characteristics. Thus, you define with one definition template several characteristics of the same type. For details, please
refer to Characteristics with indexes [ 528].

Assigning a defined feature via selection


Assigning a feature to a characteristic using the definition template
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
2 Click Feature (or Feature1).
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen. The All Features icon is generally activated.
3 Select the feature you wish to assign.

Note: You can limit the scope of the model of the features by, for
example, clicking the appropriate icon.
4 Set the desired filter, outlier elimination and best-fit method.
You will find more information on filters and filtering in the section
entitled Setting and activating a filter [ 547].
You will find more information on outlier elimination in the section
entitled Eliminating outliers [ 549].
5 Click OK.
You will find more information on the Selection window under Selection (Features) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.

Assigning a feature that has not yet been


defined via selection
When you entered the characteristic in the measurement plan, maybe
you did not define the feature. You can create a new feature within the
definition template of the characteristic and directly assign it.
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
2 Click Feature (or Feature1).
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen.
3 Click New.
All the types of feature possible for the characteristic in question are
displayed.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-21

Defining characteristics

4 Select the feature type and click OK to confirm your choice.


This opens the definition template of the feature.
5 Define the feature.
See Defining features using definition templates [ 47].
6 When you have probed all the points, click OK.
You will find more information on the Selection window under Selection (Features) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.

Assigning and editing a defined feature


If you are about to assign a feature to a characteristic and notice that the
definition of the feature has to be changed (measuring strategy, additional probing points, etc.), you can do so in the course of defining the
characteristic.
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
2 Click Feature (or Feature1).
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen.
3 Click Select existing Features.
4 Select the desired feature.

Note: You can limit the scope of the model of the features by, for
example, clicking the appropriate icon.
5 Click Edit.
This opens the definition template of the assigned feature.
6 Make the necessary alterations to the feature (see Definition template for features [ 45]).
7 Press OK to confirm.
You will find more information on the Selection window under Selection (Features) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.

Assigning characteristics to certain features


You can assign one or more characteristics to certain features in a single
step.
This means that the information in question has to be defined only once,
while at the same time you can be sure that the common properties are
exactly the same for all the features concerned.
1 Open the list of characteristics.
2 Select the characteristics you want to assign (multiple selection with
the Ctrl key).
3 Click the Transfer format icon in the upper toolbar.

5-22

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

The Assign Characteristics to Features dialog box appears on


the screen.

At the same time, the list of features is opened in the background.


Note: The window contains a second page on which you can copy the
properties of characteristics. To open the second page, click the symbol for the characteristics at the bottom left of the dialog box or on
the work area.
4 Set a radio button in the Name Default block to specify whether
the characteristics will be entered with standard names or whether you
will define the names in a dialog.
If you do not want to be prompted to enter names, CALYPSO will
assign each new characteristic a standard name.
5 Set a radio button in the existing Characteristics block to specify
whether or not existing characteristics will be overwritten.
6 Select the features to which you want to copy the selected characteristics in the list of features (multiple selection with the Ctrl key).
7 Click OK to start the assignment.
If you activated the Request all names radio button, the number
of boxes suggesting names will be equal to the number of characteristics you selected times the number of features. If a characteristic already exists, the default is the current name, whereas a standard name
(see above) is suggested for new characteristics.
8 Overwrite the names suggested by the system, if applicable.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-23

Defining characteristics

Datums for characteristics


Setting datums for characteristics
Geometrical features

You must assign one or two features in its definition template. The characteristic is determined on these features and the compliance with the
tolerance is checked.

Datums

For many characteristics, it is also necessary to specify features as datums,


e.g. for the True Position. Datums allow you to define what has to be
checked. Depending on the characteristic, you require one to three datums. CALYPSO uses the datums to calculate a datum reference frame
with one origin point.

Selection of datums
Datums are selected on the basis of the following criteria:

A primary datum should constrain the following degrees of freedom:

two rotational degrees of freedom for the calculation of the geometrical feature
one or two translational degrees of freedom

The primary datum must be set by a three-dimensional feature: a


plane, a 3D line, a cylinder or a cone.

The secondary datum constrains usually the remaining rotational degree of freedom.
The secondary datum must be set by the following features: a plane,
a 2D line or a 3D line, a cylinder or a cone.

A single additional feature provides the remaining one or two translational degrees of freedom.

NOTICE
The designations primary, secondary and tertiary datum do not refer to
the order in which they were entered in the definition template as primary, secondary and tertiary datum. For example, you can also enter the
tertiary datum as primary datum.

Calculation of the datum reference frame


You can define for all measurement plans whether the computation of
the datums is to be carried out according to the CALYPSO standard or to
ISO 5459.
NOTICE
For computation according to ISO 5459, only the Outer Tangential Element evaluation method is useful. Moreover, the datums must be
measured with a large number of points.

5-24

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Both methods produce a datum reference frame with the same orientation. However, the systems have different origins.
CALYPSO standard

According to the CALYPSO standard, a feature (a plane in the example)


is computed from the first datum by means of the LSQ best fit. A feature
(a plane in the example) is also computed from the secondary datum. The
origin of the datum reference frame to be created lies on the intersection
line of both features. The second feature is not necessarily perpendicular
to the first feature. Therefore, the plane perpendicular to the first plane
is used as the coordinate plane of the datum reference frame. Proceed in
the same way for the tertiary datum.

0,1 A B

0,1 B A

Bezge nach Calypso

ISO 5459

The ISO 5459 requires that the origin of the datum reference frame is
defined as intersection point of perpendicular planes. Consequently, the
secondary datum cannot be calculated as a computed feature from the
defined feature. It is created as the outer tangential element with restriction of constraints whereas the direction of the coordinate plane is preset
by the required perpendicularity relative to the first coordinate plane.
Proceed in the same way for the tertiary datum.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-25

Defining characteristics

0,1 A B

0,1 B A

90

Bezge nach DIN ISO 5459

Datums for parallelism


It is possible to specify one or two datums for the parallelism of a plane
relative to an axis.
CALYPSO makes it possible to select a secondary datum for both the
cartesian tolerance form and the standard tolerance form.
The possible selection depends on the geometry type of the primary datum.

5-26

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Shape Of Zone

Geometrical feature

Primary Datum

Standard

Plane

Plane

Symmetry Plane

Symmetry Plane

2D Line

2D Line

Secondary Datum

[Nothing]

3D Line

Plane

Cylinder

Symmetry Plane

Step Cylinder

2D Line

Cone

3D Line
Cylinder

3D Line

Plane

Step Cylinder

Cylinder

Symmetry Plane

Cone

Step Cylinder

2D Line

[Nothing]

Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
Step Cylinder

[Nothing]

Cone

Cartesian

3D Line

3D Line

Plane

Cylinder

Cylinder

Symmetry Plane

Step Cylinder

Step Cylinder

2D Line

Cone

Cone

3D Line
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
Cone
Torus
[Nothing]

Datums for perpendicularity


It is possible to specify one or two datums for the perpendicularity of a
plane relative to an axis.
CALYPSO makes it possible to select a secondary datum for both the
cartesian tolerance form and the standard tolerance form.
The possible selection depends on the geometry type of the primary datum.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-27

Defining characteristics

Shape Of Zone

Geometrical feature

Primary Datum

Standard

Plane

3D Line

Symmetry Plane

Cylinder

2D Line

Step Cylinder

Secondary Datum

[Nothing]

Cone
Plane
Plane

Symmetry Plane

Symmetry Plane

2D Line

2D Line

3D Line
Cylinder

3D Line

3D Line

Step Cylinder

Cylinder

Cylinder

Cone

Step Cylinder

Step Cylinder

[Nothing]

Cone

Cone
Plane
Symmetry Plane

[Nothing]

2D Line

Cartesian

3D Line

3D Line

Plane

Cylinder

Cylinder

Symmetry Plane

Step Cylinder

Step Cylinder

2D Line

Cone

Cone

3D Line
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
Cone
Torus
[Nothing]

Characteristics with indexes


Characteristics in loops
To assign indexes to characteristics, place a loop around the feature.
Then, the loop parameters are included in the name of the characteristic.
Example: You place a loop with the start index 1, end index 5 and the
step width 2 around the X-Value1 characteristic. The characteristic
generated in this way is named (1,5,2)X-Value1.
Purpose of the function

This characteristic represents a series of characteristics that differ in the


value of the loop variable (e.g. LOOP1). The LOOP1 loop variable must,
of course, have been used for the definition of the characteristic to make
sure that these characteristics differ from each other.
Example: You use the LOOP1 loop variable in the name of the feature to
which the characteristic refers. This gives a 1:1 relation between several
features (of the same type) and several characteristics (of the same type).

5-28

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Special aspects with patterns: Index exchange


For certain characteristics and constructions, a function is required instead
of a 1:1 relation between the feature and characteristic or construction.
Example: The characteristic has a loop from 1 to 4. The feature has a
rotational pattern (rotation by 45) with an index of 1 to 8. The four first
pattern elements of the feature should not be used for the feature as
pattern elements but only every second pattern feature (rotation by 90).
You can achieve this via the index exchange. You assign parameters
for the index exchange to the feature in question, whereas a certain value
of the loop variables of the feature is assigned to each value of the loop
variables of the characteristic.
You define the index exchange in the Loop (index exchange) dialog
box. Here, you can create several groups of parameters for the index exchange. While the loop variable of the characteristic runs through its values from start to end, the parameters for the index exchange group are
run through, in parallel thereto, group by group. Thus, you can define
any desired index sequence via one or more groups with parameters for
the index exchange.
Example: You defined the (1,8,1)Roundness1 characteristic. You want
the following representation of the characteristic on the feature:
Characteristic

Feature

Roundness1(1)

Circle1(4)

Roundness1(2)

Circle1(6)

Roundness1(3)

Circle1(8)

Roundness1(4)

Circle1(4)

Roundness1(5)

Circle1(2)

Roundness1(6)

Circle1(8)

Roundness1(7)

Circle1(6)

Roundness1(8)

Circle1(4)

You define for the Circle1 feature an index exchange with three
groups:
Start index

End index

Step width

-2

-2

In the feature, the characteristic is referred to as Circle1(4,8,2;4,2,-2;8,4,-2).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-29

Defining characteristics

NOTICE
The example shows that the relation between the characteristic and the
feature may not be clear after the index exchange: The Circle1(4) feature
is not only measured in the Roundness1(1) characteristic but also in the
Roundness1(4) characteristic.
Only the first use found is recorded in the compact printout.

Defining the index exchange


1 Click Feature in the definition template of the characteristic.
2 Select the feature with pattern to be measured and select Index exchange in the context menu.
The Loop dialog box appears on the screen.

3 Enter the definitions for the index exchange.


4 Close the dialog box to accept the modified settings.
A loop is automatically assigned to the feature or a pattern is assigned
to the construction and the defined index exchange is entered.
Note: By selecting Delete Index Exchange in the context menu,
you delete the index and the index exchange as well as the loop placed
over the characteristic.

Example: Determining the distances between


circles of two patterns
The distance between two circles with pattern is to be determined. Without any specific entries, CALYPSO places automatically a loop over the
Distance characteristic and calculates the following distances:

5-30

Distance1(1) between Circle1(1) and Circle2(1)

Distance1(2) between Circle1(2) and Circle2(2)

Distance1(3) between Circle1(3) and Circle2(3) etc.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Job
Calculation of the following distances:

Distance1(1) between Circle1(1) and Circle2(2)

Distance1(2) between Circle1(2) and Circle2(3)

Distance1(3) between Circle1(3) and Circle2(4) etc., i.e.

Distance1(i) between Circle1(i) and Circle2(i+1) with i = 1, ...,7.

Solution
Index exchange between the current loop index of the characteristic and
the Circle2(*) feature.
1 Click Feature in the definition template of the characteristic.
2 In the context menu of the Circle2(*) feature, select Index exchange....
3 Enter the parameters in the Loop window: Start = 2, End = 8, Step =
1.
The distance is calculated as shown above.

Nominal values and tolerances in


characteristics
Working with nominal values and tolerances
CALYPSO compares the measured and computed actual values with the
nominal values and checks whether the differences are within the tolerance. The results are output in printouts. The features and characteristics
are shown in color dependent on their compliance with the tolerances.
Define the tolerances in the definition template of the characteristic [ 531]. For certain characteristics, you can transfer the predefined
tolerances from selection lists.
If necessary, you can define individual tolerance tables [ 537].
You can apply the most-material condition or the least-material condition (MMC/LMC) [ 535] when you specify tolerances of form and
position.
The result of certain form and position characteristics depends on the
reference length of the feature. To do so, you must define the projected
tolerance zone [ 539].

Defining nominal values and tolerances


You can predefine each nominal value and tolerance that the characteristic has to check.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-31

Defining characteristics

Note: The tolerances determine the calculation of the scanning speed for
the measuring strategy. See Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178].
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
2 Enter the desired nominal values in the Nominal input field (or
Nominal Position input field).
3 Enter the tolerance values:
Direct input
Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance input fields
Selection list for the tolerance group
Enter the appropriate values in the Upper Tolerance and Lower
Tolerance fields. The Last input list entry allows you to enter the
most recently selected tolerance.
None check box
This box allows you to define the maximum and minimum tolerances.
4 Click OK.
The elements in this dialog box are fully described under Definition template (Characteristic) 1 in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online
Help.
Keep in mind that the icon of the characteristic is now displayed with
either a green, yellow or red bar, depending on whether it is inside or
outside of the warning limits and tolerance.

If a completely defined feature has not been measured yet, the icon is
displayed with a dark gray bar.

Tolerance specifications for characteristics


CALYPSO provides predefined tolerances in selection lists. Here you will
find General Tolerances and a number of material-specific tolerances
(Rough castings of various manufacturing methods, Plastic parts):

5-32

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Tolerance type

Tolerances

General Tolerances

fine, medium, coarse, very coarse

DIN 1680 Rough castings

DIN 1683 Rough steel castings

General tolerances
group GTA

DIN 1680 General tolerances GTA 12 to GTA 21

General tolerances
group GTB

DIN 1680 General tolerances GTB 12 to GTB 21

Linear measures

DIN 1683 Linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 16/5

Thickness measures DIN 1683 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB


16/5

DIN 1684 Rough castings of GTB 17/5


malleable iron
moulding/not
moulding
GTB 17
moulding/not
moulding
GTB 16/5
moulding/not
moulding
GTB 16
moulding/not
moulding

DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. linear measures / not m.


linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. thickness measures / not
m. thickness measures
DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. linear measures / not m.
linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. thickness measures / not
m. thickness measures
DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. linear measures / not m.
linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. thickness measures / not
m. thickness measures
DIN 1684 GTB 16 m. linear measures / not m.
linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 16 m. thickness measures / not
m. thickness measures

DIN 1685 Rough castings of Linear measures


DIN 1685 Linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
cast iron with spheroidal
Thickness measures DIN 1685 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB
graphite
15
DIN 1686 Rough castings of Linear measures
DIN 1686 Linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
cast iron with foliated graph- Thickness measures DIN 1686 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB
ite
15
DIN 1687 Rough castings of Sand rough
heavy metal alloys
Gravity die casting

DIN 1687 GS GTA 20 to GTA 16 m. / not m.

Pressure die Linear


measures / thickness measures for
low-melting alloys

DIN 1687 GD L / T l. melt GTA 14 to GTA 12


m. / not m.

61212-2011002

DIN 1687 GK GTA 15 to GTA 14 m. / not m.

CALYPSO

5-33

Defining characteristics

Tolerance type

Tolerances
Pressure die Linear DIN 1687 GD L / T h.melt GTA 15 to GTA 13/5
measures / thickm. / not m.
ness measures for
high-melting alloys

DIN 1688 Rough castings of Sand rough Linear


heavy metal alloys
measures / thickness measures

DIN 1688 GS L / T GTA 16/5 and GTA 15/5 m. /


not m.

Gravity die casting DIN 1688 GK L / D GTA 15/5 to GTA 14/5 m. /


Linear measures /
not m.
thickness measures
Die casting Linear
measures / thickness measures

DIN 1688 GK L / D GTA 14/5 to GTA 12/5 m. /


not m.

DIN 16901 Plastic tolerances General Tolerances DIN 16901 Gen. 160 A / 160 B to 130 A / 130
B
Tolerances for values with directly
entered tolerances

DIN 16901 directly entered A. 160 A / 160 B to


110 A / 110 B
DIN 169091 directly entered A. Precision Techn.
A/B

If necessary, you can define individual tolerance tables (Defining custom tolerance tables [ 537]).

Tolerances with MMC/LMC


You can apply the most-material condition or the least-material condition
as necessary when you specify tolerances of form and position. The mostmaterial principle is laid down in DIN ISO 2692. It applies to axes and midplanes and allows for the interrelationships between dimensional tolerance and tolerance of form and position.
When the most-material condition (MMC) or the least-material condition
(LMC) is applied, tolerance extensions are permissible for tolerances of
position for which diameter tolerances are not fully exploited.
MMC/LMC-Mode

There are two modes for the calculation of admissible tolerance extension:
Mode

Tolerance extension

As mechanical
gauge

Difference between actual dimension and minimum dimension

Restriction to di- Difference between actual dimension and minimum dimension restricted to the complete dimenmension tolersion tolerance
ance
As mechanical gauge is preset by default.

5-34

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Settings

There are two options for changing the MMC/LMC mode:

for all measurement plans in the default settings (Extras Settings Measurement, MMC/LMC tab)

for individual measurement plans in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics

Specifying tolerances with MMC/LMC


Applying MMC or LMC to tolerances of position
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
2 If you have not assigned features, click Feature and select the feature
whose position you want to check.
This illustration shows the template for the True Position characteristic for checking a cylinder.

Selection list

3 From the RFS (= Regardless Feature Size) selection list, select the entry:
The Nominals button appears beside the selection list.
MMC to apply the most-material condition, or
LMC to apply the least-material condition.
4 If Diameter has not been defined as a characteristic for the feature,
click Nominals.
CALYPSO opens the definition template of the characteristic:
Enter the nominal value for the diameter.
Press OK to confirm.
5 Define reference features if necessary.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-35

Defining characteristics

You can apply MMC or LMC to the reference features as well. To do


this, click the button of the reference and proceed as described above,
starting at step 3.
6 Click OK.
CALYPSO uses the MMC/LMC mode that is valid for the measurement
plan.

Specifying tolerance additions for MMC/LMC


evaluation
The tolerance addition for the MMC/LMC evaluation for a feature is calculated from the nominal diameter, the upper and lower tolerances and
the actual diameter. You must check in this case whether the feature is
an inside or an outside feature.
Cylinder

The tolerance addition (for MMC) of a cylinder is calculated from the following formulas:
As mechanical gauge

Inside feature

dAct - (dNom + tlower)

Outside feature

(dNom + tupper) - dAct


Restriction to dimension tolerance

Inside feature

min {dAct - (dNom + tlower) , (dNom + tupper) - (dNom + tlower)}

Outside feature

min {(dNom + tupper) - dAct) , (dNom + tupper) - (dNom + tlower)}


This means:

Stepped cylinder

dNom

Nominal diameter

dAct

Actual diameter of the computed feature

tupper

Upper tolerance (value with sign)

tlower

Lower tolerance (value with sign)

In general, there are several diameters for the stepped cylinder. For the
calculation of the tolerance addition, first the tolerance additions for all
pitch cylinders are calculated for which the Diameter characteristic is activated. The smallest of these values applies to the tolerance addition for
the stepped cylinder. If the smallest calculated value is negative, the tolerance addition will be zero.
If the stepped cylinder is used as reference for a True Position or Best
Fit of Bore Pattern with MMC/LMC characteristic, no tolerance addition
will be calculated but the 2D best fit function is used instead.

5-36

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Defining custom tolerance tables


CALYPSO provides predefined tolerances in selection lists. Here you will
find General Tolerances and a number of material-specific tolerances
(Rough castings of various manufacturing methods, Plastic parts).
The tolerances offered in the menu are saved in XML files named
dinxxxx.xml in the <user directory>\data\toldat directory.
If necessary, you can define individual tolerance tables. To do so, create
an XML file named userXXXX.xml (e.g. userworkroom1.xml) and
copy it into the <user directory>\data\toldat directory.
The manner in which the file should be structured can be seen in XML
File with custom tolerances (example) [ 537].

xml file with custom tolerances (example)


With this file, the selection list will have another item called Feinmessraum1, and this item, in turn, will offer you 10 tolerances.
<?xml version="1.0" ?>
<!DOCTYPE tolerancesDefinitionFile SYSTEM "tolerancesDefinitionFile.dtd">
<tolerancesDefinitionFile>
<userNorm name = "Feinmessraum" group = "3" description =
"Feinmessraum1">
<range stop= "18">
<value name = "UT" value = "+4.5"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-4.5"/>
</range>
<range start = "18" stop="30">
<value name = "UT" value = "+7.5"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-7.5"/>
</range>
<range start = "30" stop="50">
<value name = "UT" value = "+8"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-8"/>
</range>
<range start = "50" stop="80">
<value name = "UT" value = "+8.5"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-8.5"/>
</range>
<range start = "80" stop="120">
<value name = "UT" value = "+9.01"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-9.01"/>
</range>
<range start = "120" stop="180">
<value name = "UT" value = "+10"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-10"/>
</range>
<range start = "180" stop="250">
<value name = "UT" value = "+11"/>
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-37

Defining characteristics

<value name = "LT" value = "-11"/>


</range>
<range start = "250" stop="315">
<value name = "UT" value = "+11"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-11"/>
</range>
<range start = "315" stop="400">
<value name = "UT" value = "+12"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-12"/>
</range>
<range start = "400" stop="10000">
<value name = "UT" value = "+13"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-13"/>
</range>
</userNorm>
</tolerancesDefinitionFile>
Meanings of the entries

The following entries are customizable:

group=3
Defines the sequence of the user-defined tolerances in the selection
list

description=Feinmessraum1
Name of the list entry

range stop=18
Nominal range from 0 mm to 18 mm, inclusive

value name=UT value = +4.5


Upper tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (+4.5 mm)

value name=UT value = -4.5


Lower tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (-4.5 mm)

range start=18 stop=30


Nominal range from 18 mm to 30 mm, inclusive

Projected tolerance zones


The result of certain form and position characteristics depends on the
reference length of the feature. To do so, you must define the projected
tolerance zone. Change the position, direction or length of a tolerance
zone if it is not possible to measure the critical range directly.
Characteristics

5-38

CALYPSO makes it possible to define a projected (pre-installed) tolerance


zone (according to DIN ISO 10 578 and DIN 1101):

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Position tolerances

Direction tolerances

Position

Perpendicularity

Symmetry

Parallelism

Coaxiality

Angularity

Example of a projected tolerance zone


Two strong sheets are to be connected by means of a pin. The pin should
pass through two bores, one bore in each of the two sheets. To ensure
that the pin fits the two bores and it does not jam, not only the compliance with the tolerance of the individual bore is important but also the
compliance with the tolerance resulting from the extension of the bore
by a certain distance.
The tolerance required at the bore is directly dependent on the distance
from its effective point. It is therefore easier to define the required tolerance at the bore and project it onto the point where it is actually to be
checked.

Defining the projected tolerance zone


1 Select the feature in a characteristic of the position, coaxiality, symmetry, perpendicularity, parallelism or inclination.
If the feature is axial (cylinder, cone, 3D line) or a theoretical or linked
plane or a 2D line, the icon for the projected tolerance zone appears.
2 Click the icon.
The Projected tolerance zone window is opened.

3 Define the projected tolerance zone.


61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-39

Defining characteristics

Axial features or 2D line: a reference feature plus offset and reference length
Theoretical or linked plane: two reference features
Position tolerance (position, symmetry or coaxiality): an offset and
a reference length for each available feature
You can also enter 0 for the reference length, which, for example,
corresponds to a circle.
Direction tolerance: a reference length not equal to 0
Instead of a feature as reference, you can also select a coordinate system with one of its planes. If a reference feature suitable for the definition of the projected tolerance zone has already been defined for
the characteristic, this reference feature will also be shown in the selection list.
To deselect the coordinate system, select the Nominal position of
Feature entry.
Note: The default value for the offset is 0. The default reference length
corresponds to the nominal length (and nominal width) of the feature.
Note: As long as a feature is already selected as reference in another
characteristic, you cannot change its settings for filter, outlier, method,
etc.
4 Press OK to confirm.
The projected tolerance zone is now defined. The measured results are
evaluated and displayed depending on the compliance with the tolerance
in the projected tolerance zone.

Copying properties of characteristics


Properties of characteristics that can be copied
You can copy certain properties of a characteristic and assign them to
one or more other characteristics. This means that the information in
question has to be defined only once, while at the same time you can be
sure that the common properties are exactly the same for all the features
concerned.
The following are the properties you can copy to all characteristics:

5-40

Nominal

Tolerance Class

ISO286

Upper Tolerance

Lower Tolerance

Shape Of Zone

Evaluation method Characteristic

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Defining characteristics

Datum Reference Frame

Graphic

Parameter: Presettings

Parameter: Postsettings

Copying properties of characteristics into


other characteristics
1 Open the list of characteristics.
2 Highlight the characteristic from which you want to copy properties.
3 Click the Transfer format icon in the upper toolbar.
The Assign Characteristics to Features dialog box appears on
the screen.
4 Click the characteristics icon at the bottom of the window.
The Copy properties from <characteristic_name> window
appears on the screen.

5 Tick the check boxes of the properties you want to copy to other characteristics.
6 Select the characteristics to which you want to copy properties.
7 Click OK.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-41

Evaluation parameters for features

Evaluation parameters for features


Overview of the evaluation parameters
Once a feature has been defined, the evaluation parameters for this feature are also determined. The evaluation parameters determine the way
measured results for a feature are evaluated for the characteristic:

Evaluation method (Best-fit methods [ 53])

Filtering (Filtering and outlier elimination [ 543])

Handling of outliers (Filtering and outlier elimination [ 543])

Degrees of freedom

Reference point (Reference point for feature [ 555])

Actual geometry / nominal geometry

CALYPSO first defines the default settings that are taken from the general
measurement plan settings or the feature. It is also possible that the settings for filtering and outlier elimination were imported from a file.
Changes of the settings defined in this way are performed in the Evaluation window. To do so, open the definition template of the characteristic and select Evaluation parameters in the context menu of the
feature.

5-42

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Evaluation parameters for features

The window shows a summary of the current settings. Changes are performed on the other tabs.
Playing a video

To play a video about filters and outliers elimination, click 018_e_AusreisserFilter/018_e_AusreisserFilter.htm.

Filtering and outlier elimination


Options for filtering and outlier elimination
CALYPSO can edit measured values and exclude certain values from further analysis. A variety of filters are available for this purpose, along with
the functionality for eliminating outliers.

Filters can segregate the waviness profile of a geometric element from


the effects of surface roughness. Filters, therefore, are of assistance
in maximizing measuring accuracy. Gauss (LSQ feature) (ISO
16610-21/28), Spline (ISO 16610-3) and 2 RC (ISO 4291) are filter
types. The filter methods are low-pass, band-pass and high-pass.
The new statistical data of the geometric element is obtained from
the filtered measuring data after the compensating calculation.

Individual measuring points of the geometric elements 2D Line, Plane,


Circle, Cone, Cylinder and Sphere can be purged from the measured
values as Outliers.
The number of outliers eliminated is documented in the printout.

ViSCAN

For the manual optical measurement in the camera image, you define the
parameters of filtering and outlier elimination after the measurement
(Filtering and outlier elimination for ViScan [ 551]).
For more information about filtering and outliers, please refer to Basics
about filtering and outliers [ 543] and Defining filters and outlier
elimination [ 545].

Effect of filtering and outlier elimination


Minimum number of
points for filters

The use of filters is recommended only for a large number of points, i.e.
only for scanned features.
The current standard calls for at least seven points (earlier standards: five
points) as the prerequisite for using filters. This value is set as the default
value for measurement plans in version 3.8 and higher. You can toggle
the minimum number of points between 7 and 5 for the current measurement plan in the compatibility settings.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-43

Evaluation parameters for features

NOTICE
Once the minimum number of points has been changed to 7, filtering
might no longer be possible for certain features in measurement plans
created with older versions of CALYPSO because the number of points is
no longer sufficient. The No result message appears in the default
printout.

Using filter types


The available filter types have the following effects:
Low-pass

Filtering with a low-pass filter (low frequencies pass the filter, high frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness and other longwave profile components are present, while the effects of surface roughness are eliminated.
The average line is produced by analyzing measuring points within equal
sections (double the wave length): The measuring points are analyzed
with weighting within each section. The profile obtained in this way is
compensated and serves as the basis for calculating parameters of waviness.

High-pass

Filtering with a high-pass filter (high frequencies pass the filter, low frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness is suppressed,
while the effects of the surface roughness are still present.

1/2

Blockage

Passage

Low-pass

Band-pass

High-pass

s/100

s/2

100

UPR

Band-pass

Blockage

A band-pass filter results from the combined use of a low-pass and a highpass filter. This suppresses both the long-wave (waviness) and short-wave
(surface roughness) profile components that exceed the respectively
specified limit.

Eliminating outliers
Outliers are measured points that differ significantly from the geometric
form yielded by the other measured points and as such, they can produce
a large error when the computed feature is calculated. An error of this
nature would easily propagate through the actual-value determination of
the characteristic.
Repeated outlier elimination

Outlier elimination runs iteratively. You can predefine the number of iterations. Outlier recognition becomes more precise with each iteration step.

5-44

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Evaluation parameters for features

NOTICE
If the selected number of iterations is too high, the number of remaining
points may decrease to the minimum number of points.
Prefilter

Prior to the outlier recognition, the measured points are filtered through
a band-pass. Thus, measured values that are otherwise not detectable as
outliers can likewise be eliminated.
A measured (prefiltered) point is tagged as an outlier if it is further than
a defined threshold (threshold = factor * standard delta) from the computed Gaussian element (LSQ feature).
For measurement plans version 4.0 and higher, you define the characteristic of the band-pass (Eliminating outliers [ 549]). In previous
versions of CALYPSO measurement plans, the prefilter is not variable. To
activate prefilter setting, you must set the outlier elimination to version
4.0 in the compatibility settings.

Defining filtering and outlier elimination


Validity of the settings for filtering and outlier
elimination
There are several different points in CALYPSO at which you can parameterize and activate filtering and outlier elimination:

Which setting is valid?

As defaults for the characteristic groups and the references and alignment features of the coordinate systems

For a characteristic

For a feature

Priority of the different definitions for evaluation:


1. Setting for the characteristic
2. Setting in the feature
3. Presettings for the characteristic groups
Bear in mind that filtering requires a minimum number of points to be
probed.
A feature obtained by recall from a feature filtered beforehand is automatically not filtered subsequently, even if filtering is activated.
NOTICE
If filtering is active for the feature, make sure that all scanning paths on
the feature have the same step width or the same step distance. Otherwise, the results are not in accordance with standards.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-45

Evaluation parameters for features

Selecting general settings for filter and


outliers
You can define general settings for filtering and outlier elimination per
characteristics group.
1 Select Resources Save / Load Defaults....
The Settings (Measurement Plan) window appears on the screen.
2 Activate the Filter/Outlier tab.

3 Open the file containing the desired presettings if necessary.


4 Edit the settings on the index card:

5-46

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Evaluation parameters for features

Activate the desired filter or the desired outlier elimination and click
Settings.
Make the required settings.
5 Click OK.

Setting and activating a filter


1 Open the definition template of the characteristic and click Feature.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. At the bottom right,
you can see whether or not a filter is activated.

2 Click the button with the information about filtering.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-47

Evaluation parameters for features

The Evaluation (Feature) - Filter index card is opened.

3 Tick the Accept Filter from Feature check box.


- or Tick the Filter on check box and enter the special filter parameters
for the characteristic.
Filter Method and Filter Type
Limit values for the selected filter via the Undulations Per Revolution or via Wavelength Lc.

5-48

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Evaluation parameters for features

4 Tick the Connect Segments check box if the segments of an interrupted contour are to be connected to form a continuous contour
during filtering, with as many points as possible being taken into account.
This means that you can select a stronger filter.
5 Press OK to confirm.

Eliminating outliers
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic and click Feature.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. At the bottom right,
you can see whether or not outlier elimination is activated.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-49

Evaluation parameters for features

2 Click the button with the information about outlier elimination.


The Evaluation (Feature) - Outlier index card is opened.

3 Tick the Take Outlier from Feature check box.


- or Tick the Outlier on check box and enter the special parameters for
the outlier elimination for the characteristic.
Factor For Outlier inside and outside the workpiece
Range Of Data Reduction:
Only Outlier: Only the real outliers are eliminated
Include Adjacent Points: The number of adjacent points to be
eliminated in addition to the outliers can be determined in tests for
manual measurement.
To Computed Feature: For CNC operation, it has been shown to
be effective to eliminate adjacent features until the first probing point
again lies beyond the computed feature.

5-50

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Evaluation parameters for features

Include
Adjacent
Points

Include
Adjacent
Points

Outliers

+3s
Computed Feature
-3s
Permitted value range

Repeated Outlier Recognition: Enter the number of iterations.


Enter the prefilter:
Circle, Cylinder, Cone and Sphere: Enter the lower and upper value
for the Undulations Per Revolution.
All other features: Enter the lower and upper value for the Wavelength.
For more information about the function of the prefilter realized as a
band-pass, see Filtering and outlier elimination [ 543].
4 Press OK to confirm.

Filtering and outlier elimination for ViScan


For the manual optical measurement in the camera image, you define the
parameters of filtering and outlier elimination after the measurement and
prior to the creation of the circle, circle path and line features.
In this case, you exclude from the evaluation the points which would falsify the result.
These settings can only be made in manual mode or set-up mode. The
settings will then be used in the CNC run.
Once you have determined the edge points, the ViSCAN Filter Settings window is automatically opened in the camera view.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-51

Evaluation parameters for features

Use the slider or the direct input option to set the outlier elimination and
the filtering continuously as a percentage of the nominal point number.
It is possible to enter the number of iterations for outlier elimination: In
this case, the algorithm of the outlier elimination is used again for the
points which have already been eliminated.
The effects of your setting are immediately shown in the camera image:
The points to be applied are displayed in green, the measuring points to
be eliminated are shown in red.
In addition, the number of all points and all applied points is shown in
the dialog box.
Select OK to transfer the measuring points to the new segment.
NOTICE
When performing a CNC run at a later stage, the settings made are saved
for the corresponding segment.

Excluding ranges by masking from the


form characteristics
Manual masking of measuring points scenarios
CALYPSO allows you to exclude certain ranges of a feature from the
Roundness and Straightness form characteristics prior to the CNC run or
after a measurement. The masked points will then be shown in another
color than the valid points in the CAD window.

5-52

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Evaluation parameters for features

As this manual outlier elimination is carried out in the feature, CALYPSO


uses the same number of points as for the form evaluation for the size
and location definitions.
Application scenarios

Manual outlier elimination can be performed in three different ways:

Prior to the beginning of the CNC run


The definitions are used for the evaluation.

During the measurement plan run


After measuring the features, the features are opened one after the
other with the outlier marking to be used (sorted according to run of
the feature list) and you can define the outlier range. Then the evaluation and logging takes place.

After measurement plan run


To obtain the corresponding results, a new evaluation is required, e.g.
by opening and closing the corresponding characteristic.

Representation in the
plot

In the plot representation, the manually masked points are treated in the
same way as automatically masked outliers. They can be shown either
with dashed lines or hidden.

Eliminating outliers in the CAD window


CALYPSO allows you to exclude certain ranges of a feature from the
Roundness and Straightness form characteristics prior to the CNC run or
after a measurement. The masked points will then be shown in another
color than the valid points in the CAD window.

Defining ranges
1 Click Evaluation in the definition template of the corresponding
Line Auto Path or Circle feature.
2 Click in the Evaluation window the Manual button under Point
Masking.
The Manual Point Masking dialog box appears on the screen. At
the same time, the CAD window is changed: The view is centered with
regard to the selected feature and rotated accordingly. If a measurement has already taken place, the actual points will be shown with the
selected magnification.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-53

Evaluation parameters for features

3 Click the corresponding icon and enter the ranges to be excluded from
the evaluation in the Masked Areas list.
For a circle you must enter angle ranges with start and end angle, for
a line you must enter line segments with start and end value.
Your entries are immediately shown in the CAD window; the ranges
are marked with read (start) and blue (end) lines.
You can remove a superfluous line from the list using DEL or Delete
in the context menu.

5-54

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Evaluation parameters for features

Note: All angle and coordinate definitions refer to the local alignment
of the feature. Thus the defined ranges are stable with regard to position changes.
4 If required, you can change the size and location of the displayed range
in the CAD window with the mouse.
5 Select the behavior during the CNC run:
Accept areas automatically: In the CNC run, your defined
ranges are excluded from the evaluation.
Manual Input: During the CNC run, you can define ranges by
means of the displayed measuring results immediately after the
measurement of the feature. The representation of the measuring
points is defined by clicking Properties in the Meas. Point Display window.

Note: You may also define the same setting for each feature in the
Measurement Plan Editor Features under Geometry Manual Point Masking.
6 Click Apply to display in the case of existing measuring points the
current evaluation according to the set evaluation ranges.
Afterwards you can make additional changes.
7 If the ranges are correct, confirm your entries with OK.

Reference point for feature


A characteristic referred to a point such as a certain coordinate usually
refers to the origin of the local feature alignment in the case of non-point
features.
To refer the characteristic to another point of the feature, change the
reference point in the evaluation parameters.
To do so, open the definition template of the characteristic and select
Evaluation parameters in the context menu of the feature. Define
the new reference point on the Reference point index card. You can
select the following points:
Feature type

Possible reference points

Plane

One of the corners of the plane


Point (X, Y, Z) in the specified alignment:
Alignment (of the feature)
- Base alignment
- Feature alignment (of the feature)
Center of mass

2D Line, 3D Line, Cylinder,


Cone

Axis start point

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-55

Evaluation parameters for features

Feature type

Possible reference points


Axis end point
Point (X, Y, Z) in the specified alignment:
- Alignment (of the feature)
- Base alignment
- Feature alignment (of the feature)
Center of mass

5-56

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

User-defined characteristic attributes

User-defined characteristic attributes


Working with user-defined characteristic
attributes
Purpose of the function

You can set user-defined attributes with different value ranges for characteristics.
Example: You set the quality class attribute with the three values
low, medium and high. You can assign one of these quality
classes to each characteristic.
NOTICE
There is no default presetting for user-defined characteristic attributes. If
no value is assigned to an attribute, the corresponding field will remain
empty.

Defining attributes with value ranges


Configuration file

Define the attributes and their value ranges in the userattributes.ini


configuration file in the <program directory>\data\config\ path.
When you open a measurement plan with CALYPSO on another computer and want to use the characteristic attributes, you must create a
suitable configuration file on the other computer.
NOTICE
After each modification of the configuration file, you must establish again
the connection to the CMM to activate the changes.
The format of the configuration file corresponds to the format of the INI
file for printout header data (userfields.ini). For more information, please
see Reference: INI file for characteristic attributes [ 560].

Outputting attributes
The values of user-defined attributes are output in additional columns in
the table file for characteristics (*chr.txt) during each run.
NOTICE
If the corresponding setting in the configuration file of the Q-DAS converter was made, these values are transferred to the Q-DAS statistics
program.
You can set the printout output for each attribute in the configuration
file. The characteristic attribute is output if a value is assigned to it.
To do so, you must change the setting of the value from protocolOutput to true. If the entry is missing or it is set to false, the attribute
is not shown in the printout.
The characteristic attributes are only output with the characteristics.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-57

User-defined characteristic attributes

Creating attributes during the generation from CAD


data
When generating a measurement plan from CAD data, you can load the
characteristic from the K2002 field and assign the value of the K2001
field to the characteristic number characteristic attribute.

Assigning values for characteristic


attributes
You have two options for assigning values to characteristic attributes.

Assigning the values in the list of characteristics


1 Select Characteristic attributes in the context menu of the characteristic.
The Characteristic attributes window opens.

2 Enter the values of the attributes.

Assigning values in the measurement plan editor


1 Select Resources Characteristics Settings Editor.
2 Select the desired attribute in the menu under Characteristic attributes.

5-58

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

User-defined characteristic attributes

3 Enter the values of the attributes for one or more characteristics.

Importing characteristic attributes with


values
You can import characteristic attributes with the appropriate values from
an ASCII file.
File import

To import a file with characteristic attributes, select File Import


Characteristic Attributes.
Alternatively, you may also use the readUserAttributes PCM command.
By importing, the values entered in the file are assigned to already existing
characteristic attributes. Characteristic attributes which do not yet exist,
are created and the appropriate value of the file is assigned to them.

Format of the file

The file is a table file. It contains lines and columns separated by tabulator.

The first line contains the column headings (1st column: identifier,
2nd to nth column: keyword of the respective characteristic attribute).

Any further line contains the characteristic name in the first column
and the values of the corresponding attributes in the other columns.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-59

User-defined characteristic attributes

NOTICE
Save in simple ASCII format a file that has been edited in a spreadsheet
program and use tabulators as separators.
NOTICE
If you also want to edit the imported characteristic attributes in CALYPSO,
the userattributes.ini configuration file must contain the corresponding entries with the same keywords.

Reference: INI file for characteristic


attributes
If a userattributes.ini file exists, CALYPSO refers to this file to determine
which attributes are queried in the Characteristic attribute window
and displayed in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics
and which values can be entered for the individual attributes.
Name and location of the
INI file

You must create the INI file as a text file and store it in the <user directory>
\data\config directory.

Format of the INI file

The format of the userattributes.ini file largely corresponds to that of a


normal Windows INI file:

The file consists of individual sections:

The names of the options are firmly assigned. A number of values for
one option are separated by commas. If a value itself contains one or
more commas, this value must be placed in quotes ("). Example:
<option>=X,Y,Z means three individual values <option>="X,Y,Z"
means one value

Comments are ignored. Comments are:

Structure of the userattributes.ini file

5-60

Each section is introduced by a line with the section name in


square brackets.
Each section consists of lines in the form <option>=<value>.

All characters that follow a semicolon. Exception: The semicolon


is located between two quotes (";").
A line that starts with REM.

For the userattributes.ini file, the following has been agreed for the section and option names:

The [Fieldnames] section contains the names of the sections that can
represent an attribute. Deviating from the usual format, this section
consist of lines of the form <option>.

For each of the options defined in the [Fieldnames] section, there is


a separate section with the name of the attribute which contains the
following lines:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

User-defined characteristic attributes

<option>
name

<value>
= <fname>

Meaning

selectiveList

= true

For input via combo box or selection list


Otherwise

false
protocolOutput

The designation of the attribute in the Characteristic attribute window

Output in the default printout and possible inclusion in the


custom printout

= true

No output in the default printout and no inclusion in the


custom printout

false

Additionally for combo boxes and selection lists


selectiveListValues

= <aname>

The name of the section with the entries of the combo box
or selection list

editable

= true

Combo box

false

Selection list
For each attribute with a selection list or combo box, the file contains
an additional section with the list of entries of the selection list or
combo box.
Each line in this section has the form <value>=<display>. The entries
under <display> are offered for selection; however, the entries under
<value> are only entered as attributes.

Example: Configuration file for userdefined characteristic attributes


The configuration file for user-defined characteristic attributes may have
the following structure:
REM userattributes.ini example
[Fieldnames]
REM By convention the userfieldnames begin with "u_"
u_k2005class
u_k2001number
REM Now defining the first userfield named u_k2005class
[u_k2005class]
name=K2005 Class
; the text shown as the name for the inputfield/list
selectiveList=true
; it is a list - either a drop down list
or a combo box
selectiveListValues=u_k2005class_valueList ; the values for this
list are found
; in the profile named "u_field1_valueList"
editable=false
; there's keyboard input possible for the
user ; it is a combo box (not a drop down
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-61

User-defined characteristic attributes

list)
REM Now defining the second userfield named u_k2001number
[u_k2001number]
name=K2001 Number
selectiveList=false ; it is not a list, so it must be an input
field
editable=false
protocolOutput=true ; output in protocol
REM Now defining the valuelist for the userfield with the name
"Part"
[u_k2005class_valueList]
0=0 unimportant
1=1 little important
2=2 important
3=3 significant
4=4 critical

5-62

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Details on defining characteristics


Overview of characteristics
Characteristic types
CALYPSO offers the following characteristics:

Characteristics for size characteristics

Standards
Angle
Distance
Curve Dimensions
More

Characteristics for form and location characteristics

The tables below list the items of information you need to define the
characteristics for size, form and location:

Characteristics for Size - Standards


Under Size Standards, you will find the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

X Value

Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature in X.


tics
The location is stated in coordinates for X, Y and Z.
The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its
center. The values are referenced to the part alignment.

Y Value

Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature in Y.


tics
The location is stated in coordinates for X, Y and Z.
The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its
center. The values are referenced to the part alignment.

Y Value

Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature in Z.


tics
The location is stated in coordinates for X, Y and Z.
The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its
center. The values are referenced to the part alignment.

Diameter

Size Characteris- Determines the diameter of a round feature.


tics

Radius

Size Characteris- Determines the radius of a round feature.


tics

61212-2011002

Description

CALYPSO

5-63

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Description

Radius Measurement

Size Characteris- Determines the radius and the angle (specified in the
tics
local feature alignment) of each individual probing
point in a specified sector. In this way the results for
a small arc segment can be enhanced (Radius Measurement characteristic [ 573]).

Note: The angles are only output, if Additional Position Result is activated in the Measurement Plan
Editor Characteristics.
2 Point Diameter

Size Characteris- Determines a minimum and a maximum diameter for


tics
a circle or cylinder measured by scanning using one
of three methods (2 Point Diameter characteristic [ 574]).

Length of perpendicular

Size Characteris- Determines the length of a perpendicular on a feature


tics
(Length of Perpendicular characteristic [ 573]).

Polar position
Radius

Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature with the


tics
Radius polar coordinate.
The location can be defined in terms of the polar coordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a
circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values
are referenced to the part alignment.

Polar position
Angle

Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature with the


tics
Angle polar coordinate.
The location can be defined in terms of the polar coordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a
circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values
are referenced to the part alignment.

Polar position
Height

Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature with the


tics
Height polar coordinate.
The location can be defined in terms of the polar coordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a
circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values
are referenced to the part alignment.

Characteristics for Size - Angle


Under Size Angle, you will find the following characteristics:

5-64

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Projection Angle
One

Size Characteris- Determines the first projected angle of a certain featics


ture based on the part alignment. In a spatial system
of coordinates, the axial direction can be defined by
two projected angles. A projected angle is an angle
on a workpiece plane viewed from the third axis. Projected angle No. 1 is based on the reference axis (the
axis common to the two planes of projection) of the
feature.

Projection Angle
Two

Description

Feature axis

Angle 1

Y/X

Z/Y

X/Z

Size Characteris- Determines the second projected angle of a certain


tics
feature based on the part alignment. In a spatial system of coordinates, the axial direction can be defined
by two projected angles. A projected angle is an angle
on a workpiece plane viewed from the third axis. Projected angle No. 2 is based on the reference axis (the
axis common to the two planes of projection) of the
feature.
Feature axis

Angle 2

Z/X

X/Y

Y/Z

Cone Angle

Size Characteris- Determines the angle of aperture of a cone.


tics

Half Cone Angle

Size Characteris- Determines the half angle of aperture of a cone (the


tics
angle between the axis of the cone and the cone's
lateral surface).

Inclination Angle

Size Characteris- Determines a features angle of inclination from the Z


tics
axis of the part alignment.

Rotation Angle

Size Characteris- Determines a feature's angle of rotation about the Z


tics
axis, referenced to the X axis of the part alignment.

Feature Angle

Size Characteris- Calculates the angle that the axis of rotation of a featics
ture assumes with the part alignment.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-65

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristics for Size - Distance


Under Size Distance as well as under Form and Location Distance, you will find the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Description

2D Polar Distance

Location Characteristics

Determines the two-dimensional distance between


the midpoints of two features.
This characteristic is used to determine the distance
between the projections of two two-dimensional features on a datum plane.

3D Polar Distance

Location Characteristics

Determines the direct three-dimensional distance between the midpoints of two features.
This characteristic is generally used for two points defined in all three dimensions (e.g. the centers of
spheres).

Cartesian Distance

Location Characteristics

Determines the distance between two features in Cartesian coordinates (along the X, Y and Z axes).

Distance Symmetry point

Size Characteris- Determines the distance between the two reference


tics
features of a symmetry point.

Space Point Distance

Size Characteris- Determines the distance of a space point or net point


tics
referenced to its nominal value.

Simple distance

Size Characteris- Determines the distance of a point feature from the


tics
origin of a coordinate system or the distances of two
point features from each other.
The distances output are those along the Cartesian
axes, along with the point-to-point distance (radius)
and the vector angle.
The reference point for a circle, ellipse, sphere, rectangle or slot is always the midpoint.

Characteristics for Size - Curve Dimensions


Under Size Curve Dimensions, you will find the following characteristics:

5-66

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Description

Curve Slope

Size Characteris- Determines the slope (height or radius difference per


tics
revolution) between two points of a lift curve or spiral
curve.

Curve Stroke

Size Characteris- Determines the axial and radial deviations of a lift


tics
curve.

Curve Distance

Size Characteris- Determines the distance between two curves.


tics

Curve Expansion

Size Characteris- Determines the expansion of a curve in a predefined


tics
direction.

Curve length

Size Characteris- Determines the length of a curve.


tics

Surface Area

Size Characteris- Determines the surface area of a closed 2D curve.


tics

Characteristics for Distance - More


Under Size More, you will find the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Focus 1

Size Characteris- Determines the X value of the first focal point of an


tics
ellipse.

Focus 1

Size Characteris- Determines the Y value of the first focal point of an


tics
ellipse.

Focus 1

Size Characteris- Determines the Z value of the first focal point of an


tics
ellipse.

Focus 2

Size Characteris- Determines the X value of the second focal point of


tics
an ellipse.

Focus 2

Size Characteris- Determines the Y value of the second focal point of


tics
an ellipse.

Focus 2

Size Characteris- Determines the Z value of the second focal point of


tics
an ellipse.

Focus 1

Size Characteris- Determines the radius of the first focal point of an


tics
ellipse.

61212-2011002

Description

CALYPSO

5-67

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Focus 1

Size Characteris- Determines the angle of the first focal point of an eltics
lipse.

Focus 1

Size Characteris- Determines the height of the first focal point of an


tics
ellipse.

Focus 2

Size Characteris- Determines the radius of the second focal point of an


tics
ellipse.

Focus 2

Size Characteris- Determines the angle of the second focal point of an


tics
ellipse.

Focus 2

Size Characteris- Determines the height of the second focal point of an


tics
ellipse.

Diameter Two

Size Characteris- Determines the second diameter of an ellipse.


tics
The first diameter of the ellipse is measured with the
Diameter command.

Radius Two

Size Characteris- Determines the second radius of an ellipse feature.


tics
The first radius of the ellipse is measured by the Radius characteristic.

Slot Length

Size Characteris- Determines the length of a slot or a rectangle.


tics

Slot width

Size Characteris- Determines the width of a slot or rectangle.


tics

Circular Pitch

Size Characteris- Determines the individual pitch error, cumulative


tics
pitch error, pitch error, radial runout and roundness
for a feature with rotational pattern or polar pattern
offset (Circular Pitch characteristic [ 580]).

Linear Pitch

Size Characteris- Determines the individual pitch error, cumulative


tics
pitch error, pitch error for a feature with pattern
(Linear Pitch characteristic [ 584]).

Minimum

Size Characteris- Determines the minimum of multiple characteristics.


tics

Maximum Result

Size Characteris- Determines the maximum of multiple characteristics.


tics

Average

Size Characteris- Determines the average of multiple characteristics.


tics

5-68

61212-2011002

Description

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Description

Result Element

Size Characteris- Determines an actual value via formula or user input


tics
during the CNC and checks the compliance with the
tolerance (Result Element characteristic [ 590]).

Special Program

Size Characteris- Runs a special program or transfers data from a spetics


cial program to a printout (Special Program characteristic [ 591]).

Pipe Evaluation

Size Characteris- This characteristic is optional. It enables the definition,


tics
measurement and evaluation of curved tubes (see
Measuring a tube in the operating instructions for the
Tube Measurement program option).

Characteristics for Form and Location


Under Form and Location, you will find the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Description

Roundness

Form Character- Determines the roundness or circularity of a given ciristics


cular feature (Circle or Circle on Cone). The definition
template includes a button labeled Graphic for form
plots (see Outputting form and location plots for
characteristics [ 872]).

Roundness Ref

Form Character- Defines the roundness or circularity of a given circular


istics
feature within defined sectors. The circle can be on a
cylinder, a sphere, or a cone.
The definition template includes a button labeled
Graphic for form plots (see Outputting form and
location plots for characteristics [ 872]).

Waviness

Form Character- Determines the waviness of a circle or a circle on cone


istics
using the Fourier analysis or roundness evaluation
(Maximum Waviness characteristic [ 593]). The
tolerance can be entered differently referenced to the
frequency length ranges.
The definition template includes a button labeled
Graphic for form plots (see Outputting form and
location plots for characteristics [ 872]).

Flatness

Form Character- Determines the flatness of a flat feature. The definiistics


tion template includes a button labeled Graphic for
form plots (see Outputting form and location plots
for characteristics [ 872]).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-69

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Description

Flatness with
reference length

Form Character- Defines for a flat feature the flatness within given recistics
tangular zones.
The definition template includes a button labeled
Graphic for form plots (see Outputting form and
location plots for characteristics [ 872]).

Straightness

Form Character- Determines the straightness of a line.


istics
The normal tolerance direction reflects straightness
in the probing direction; the parallel tolerance direction reflects straightness parallel to the surface of
the workpiece.
The definition template includes a button labeled
Graphic for form plots (see Outputting form and
location plots for characteristics [ 872]).

Straightness
with reference
length

Form Character- Defines for a 2D line the straightness of the line within
istics
given sections.

Cylindricity

Form Character- Determines the cylinder form of a cylindrical feature.


istics
The definition template includes a button labeled
Graphic for form plots (see Outputting form and
location plots for characteristics [ 872]).

Profile

Form Character- Defines the deviation of a plane from its nominal geistics
ometry. Its value depends on the selected shape of
zone (see Profile [ 576]).

Line Profile

Form Character- Defines the form deviation of a curve from its nominal
istics
geometry analogous to the Profile (see Defining the
Line Profile characteristic in the operating instructions
for the CNC Curve Measuring Software option).

Form

Form Character- From the extreme values of features, determines form


istics
deviation as the difference between the maximum
and minimum measured values perpendicular to the
feature (e.g. cone form or sphere form).

Curve Form

Form Character- This characteristic is optional. It defines the deviation


istics
of a defined curve (see Defining the Curve Form characteristic in the operating instructions for the CNC
Curve Measuring Software option).

5-70

The definition template includes a button labeled


Graphic for form plots (see Outputting form and
location plots for characteristics [ 872]).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Description

True Position

Location Characteristics

Determines the deviation of the position of a given


feature from the nominal position in a datum reference frame. You have the choice of defining the reference features, the base alignment, or one of the
systems of coordinates. Each defined part alignment
can be used as the datum reference frame.
When you define the position tolerance, you can click
the Special button to apply the Offset and Rotate functions with reference to the base alignment
(see Moving or rotating the base / start alignment [ 334]).
Alternatively, you can use the best fit of bore pattern function (see Using best fit of bore pattern [ 5108]).

Concentricity

Location Characteristics

Determines the concentricity of a given feature (e.g.


of a circle) relative to one or two reference features.

DIN ISO 1101


Coaxiality

Location Characteristics

Determines the coaxiality of the axis of a feature (e.g.


of a cylinder) relative to another feature.

Perpendicularity

Location Characteristics

Determines the perpendicularity of a planar, cylindrical, conical or a straight-line feature relative to one or
two reference features.

Parallelism

Location Characteristics

Determines the parallelism of a planar, cylindrical,


conical or a straight-line feature relative to one or two
reference features.

GDT Symmetry

Location Characteristics

Determines the symmetry of a feature relative to two


reference features.

Angularity

Location Characteristics

Determines the deviation of a feature from a reference feature and a defined angle.

Radial

Location Characteristics

Determines the deviation of a feature (circle, circle on


cone, cylinder) normal to the reference axis in the radial direction or the deviation of a cone normal to the
wall of the cone.
If the reference feature has no axis (point or 3D point),
CALYPSO uses, as the reference axis, the axis of the
feature that is moved to the position of the reference
feature.
A measured point is only useful as reference feature,
if it is acquired by self-centering probing.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-71

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristic

Location in
toolbox

Description

Cumulative Radial Runout

Location Characteristics

Determines the total error of a cylinder's circle paths


perpendicular to the reference axis in radial direction.
If a reference feature has no axis (point or 3D point),
CALYPSO uses, as the reference axis, the axis of the
feature that is moved to the position of the reference
feature.
A measured point is only useful as reference feature,
if it is acquired by self-centering probing.

Axial

Location Characteristics

Determines the deviation of a feature in the direction


of the reference axis.

Cumulative Axial Runout

Location Characteristics

Determines the total error of a feature's paths in the


direction of the reference axis.

Angle between
Features

Location Characteristics

Determines the angle between two features. You


have a choice of results: acute angle, this angle's supplement to 180 and the supplementary angles of
both to 360.

Generated characteristics
CALYPSO generates the following characteristics automatically:
Characteristic

From construction

Description

X Value

(from the Circle


in contour best
fit construction)

Determines the X value of the circle for the circle in


contour best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).

Y Value

(from the Circle


in contour best
fit construction)

Determines the Y value of the circle for the circle in


contour best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).

Z Value

(from the Circle


in contour best
fit construction)

Determines the Z value of the circle for the circle in


contour best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).

Radius

(from the Circle


in contour best
fit construction)

Determines the radius of the bend circle of the profile


at the contact point for the circle in contour best fit
(Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).

Gap

(from the Circle


in contour best
fit construction)

Determines the gap between the profile and circle for


the circle in contour best fit (Circle in contour
best fit construction [ 4148]).

5-72

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Characteristic

From construction

Description

Feature Angle

(from the Circle


in contour best
fit construction)

Determines the start angle for the circle in contour


best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).

Angle Range

(from the Circle


in contour best
fit construction)

Determines the angle range between the contact


points for the circle in contour best fit (Circle in
contour best fit construction [ 4148]).

End angle

(from the Circle


in contour best
fit construction)

Determines the end angle for the circle in contour


best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).

Radius Measurement characteristic


Menu: Size Standards Radius Measurement
Tool Box: Size Characteristics Radius Measurement
The radius measurement characteristic determines for a feature whether
the points of the feature lie within a predefined radius ( a tolerance).
Circle, cylinder, cone, sphere and ellipse are possible characteristics.
Evaluation Range

You have the option of restricting the check to an evaluation range. To


do so, define the corresponding sector via the start angle and angle range.
The angles refer to the local feature alignment of the feature.
CALYPSO converts the entries automatically: the start angle into values
between 0 and 360 and the angle range into values between -360 and
+360.
Both angle specifications can be entered as a formula.

Degrees of freedom

If there is no full circle but a circle section, you can improve the stability
of Size Characteristics by specifying the center point of the circle and
checking only the radius.

Printout

All of the evaluation range remaining from the filtering and outlier elimination are output with name and actual-nominal comparison in the
printout. The name is composed of the name of the characteristic and
the point number, e.g. Radius Measurement1^417. The points of an
evaluation range keep their original numbers and are not renumbered.

Length of Perpendicular characteristic


Menu: Size Standards PerpLength
Tool Box: Size Characteristics Length of perpendicular
The Length of Perpendicular characteristic determines for the Perpendicular feature whether the length of the perpendicular lies within a
predefined tolerance.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-73

Details on defining characteristics

NOTICE
The Perpendicular construction is only useful as geometrical feature
for this characteristic.
This characteristic cannot be used to check the length of a measured
rotationally symmetrical feature, e.g. a cylinder or cone. The length of
such a feature is always the same as the nominal value.
For this reason, it cannot be used to check the distance between two
bores by means of a 3D line. You must use the Distance characteristic
to check the distance between two points.

2 Point Diameter characteristic


Menu: Size Standards 2 Point Diameter
Tool Box: Size Characteristics 2 Point Diameter
The 2 Point Diameter characteristic determines a minimum and a maximum diameter for a circle or cylinder measured by scanning.
Prerequisites

Circles and cylinders must be measured with scanning paths whereas only
circle paths are permitted as scanning paths. Each scanning path must
cover an angle of at least 180.

Tolerances

When entering tolerances, definitions in tolerance classes according to


ISO 286 are possible.

Calculation modes
You have the following options for calculation:

Pure two point distance dimension


The circle is fitted into a Gaussian element (LSQ feature). For each
point of each scanning path, the symmetrical point is determined. The
smallest and largest two point distance is determined from all two
point distances. The corresponding points are assigned to them.

a = min
b = max

Gaussian element

5-74

Dimension Definition as per ISO 8015

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

The size definition according to ISO 8015 allows you to check whether
both the tangential element and all two point distances comply with
the tolerance.
With an outside feature, the circumscribed feature is evaluated and
with an inside feature the inscribed feature. For each point of each
scanning path, the symmetrical point is determined.
The two point distances are used to determine the smallest distance
(A) for a circumscribed feature and the largest distance (B) for an inscribed feature. The corresponding points are assigned to them.

Circumscribed feature

Inscribed feature

Two point distance dimension with evaluation range definition


The circle is fitted into a Gaussian element (LSQ feature). The evaluation range is predefined by an angle and an angle range. For each
point of this evaluation range, the symmetrical point is determined.
v

The smallest and largest two point distance is determined from all two
point distances. The corresponding points are assigned to them.
For the angle and angle range you may enter formulas.
Calculation of point facing each other

As there is generally no point-symmetrical equivalent to a point, CALYPSO


interpolates between the two closest points.
If the angle between the two nearest points facing a given point is too
big, CALYPSO assumes a gap between the scanning paths and does not
calculate any two point distance dimension.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-75

Details on defining characteristics

Definition of the angle


position

The angle positions for the evaluation range and the result definition refer
to the u axis of the feature's local feature alignment. The axis vector of
the feature determines the direction of the w axis.
The local feature alignment is displayed in the CAD window when opening the feature.

Result output
The 2 Point Diameter characteristic determines up to two results which
are distinguished by min. and max. designations. Each individual result is
output as an individual characteristic and contains the following definitions:

the designation (e.g. 2 Point Diameter1(2)^Max)

the feature

the position of the corresponding extreme value as an angle (if the


extended position output is activated in the Measurement Plan Editor
Characteristics)

the mode used to calculate the 2 point diameter (not required in the
compact printout)

In the DMIS printout, the 2 point diameter is output as a normal diameter.

Access to result via formula


The getActual PCM function allows you to access the minimum and maximum of a 2 point diameter and the appropriate angles.

Access to minimum and minimum angle:


getMinActual(feature_name[,loop index]).actual
getMinActual(feature_name[,LoopIndex]).angleOfRadiusPoint

Access to maximum and maximum angle:


getMaxActual(feature_name[,loop index]).actual
getMaxActual(feature_name[,LoopIndex]).angleOfRadiusPoint

Enter the name of the characteristic without the ^Min or ^Max suffix. You can access results with indexes by means of the loop index.

Use of the results of average, minimum, maximum


Both results of the 2 point diameter are used for the evaluation in the
average, minimum and maximum characteristics.

Profile characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Profile

Features

CALYPSO determines the profile for the following features:

5-76

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Plane

Cylinder

Cone

Sphere

Stepped Cylinder

Free Form Surface

Symmetry Plane

General Surface

Point

NOTICE
The Profile corresponds to the TOL/PROFS defined in DMIS.
Direction of deviations

The deviations between the actual surface and the nominal surface are
required for the determination of the Profile characteristic. It is assumed that the values increase in outward direction (away from the material) and decrease in inward direction. Depending on whether you use
an inside or an outside feature, the calculated result may be vice versa for
CALYPSO. Therefore, CALYPSO first calculates the difference between
the actual and nominal points and reverses the sign, if necessary.
Further considerations are based on the assumption that the deviations
increase in outward direction (away from the material) and decrease in
inward direction (towards the material).

Shapes of zone

When defining the Profile, you can choose from eight shapes of zone:

Shape Of Zone

The tolerance band is defined by ...

Bilateral one result

Identical distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside

Bilateral with unequal distri- Unequal distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside
bution one result
Unilateral (nominal contour
inside)

Nominal contour and distance to the inside

Unilateral (nominal contour


outside)

Nominal contour and distance to the outside

Bilateral two results

Identical distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside

Bilateral with unequal distri- Unequal distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside
bution two results
Outwards into infinity

Distance of the nominal surface to the inside

Inwards into infinity

Distance of the nominal surface to the outside

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-77

Details on defining characteristics

For the bilateral tolerance with unequal distribution, a further input field
is activated for the Tolerance (one side) where you additionally specify the side to which the tolerance applies using the Inside / Outside
Switch icon.
Result of profile

The result of the profile depends on the selected shape of zone.

Shape Of Zone

Will be output:

Example

Bilateral one result

Double the largest deviation (inside


and outside)

Bilateral with unequal distri- Double the largest deviation (inside


bution one result
and outside) from one of the calculated theoretical center lines
Unilateral (nominal contour
inside)

Double the largest deviation from


the tolerance average to the inside
or outside

Unilateral (nominal contour


outside)

Double the largest deviation from


the tolerance average to the inside
or outside

Bilateral two results

The largest deviation inside (minimum) and the largest deviation


outside (maximum) the workpiece

Bilateral with unequal distri- The largest deviation inside (minibution two results
mum) and the largest deviation
outside (maximum) the workpiece
Outwards into infinity

The largest deviation inside the


workpiece

Inwards into infinity

The largest deviation outside the


workpiece

Calculation of deviations
for the general surface

The General Surface feature contains only a set of points and not a mathematical description of the surface. Therefore, the points can be evaluated only individually: Each actual point is compared with its associated
nominal point. The stylus touch point is calculated based on the stylus
center, stylus radius and the normal vector of the nominal point.
The deviation D of the point is formed from the nominal point and actual
point along the normal vector of the nominal point. The deviation perpendicular to the normal vector of the nominal point is ignored. This corresponds to the procedure for the space point.

5-78

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

The greatest absolute deviation of all point comparisons is then used as


a measure for the profile.
Restrictions

Particularities for the


general surface

Profile with reference


features

The following restrictions apply to the profile:

No restrictions may be set for the best fit.

Negative tolerances are not permitted.

The following particularities apply to the profile of a general surface:

No filters or outlier elimination.

Only the Gauss (LSQ feature) evaluation method is possible.

As in general, the following applies to profile with reference features:


Either no reference feature or all three reference features are defined.
Otherwise, no result will be output.
The free form surface is the only exception: Individual reference features
are permitted in this case.

GDT Symmetry characteristic


Menu: Form and Location GDT Symmetry
CALYPSO determines the symmetry for all features, except for the curve
and the free form surface.
NOTICE
Starting from version 4.4, the definition of reference features for the
GDT Symmetry characteristic is changed and extended. This change
does not apply to older measurement plans; they are still calculated according to the previous algorithm.
Tolerances

The shape of zone determines the direction - referenced to the datum


reference frame - in which the deviation is calculated. Only one-dimensional shapes of zone are possible (Only X, Only Y, Only Z). The list is
further limited depending on the feature type. If a cylinder is the feature,
you cannot select the direction parallel to the axis. The shape of zone for
a plane can only be evaluated in one direction.
The GDT Symmetry characteristic enables the definition of a projected
tolerance zone. If the feature is a circle or a cylinder, it can be evaluated
by means of MMC/LMC.

Result calculation
You can enter a coordinate system instead of reference features. The
procedure is the same as for the True Position characteristic.
A temporary coordinate system is formed from the reference features.
The primary, secondary and tertiary constraints of the coordinate system
are defined according to the sequence, direction and feature type of the
references.
CALYPSO determines the datum reference frame (from reference features or as a coordinate system). The distance to the characteristic is
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-79

Details on defining characteristics

measured based on the origin of the coordinate system. The direction of


the measurement is predefined by the shape of zone: If the shape of zone
is Only X, evaluation takes place in the X axis of the datum reference
frame. The distance corresponds to the actual value. The actual value is
compared with the nominal value (the nominal value is always zero). The
value of the tolerance determines whether the characteristic is inside or
outside of the tolerance.
Feature as part of the datum reference frame

A special feature of the GDT Symmetry characteristic is that the feature


may become a part of the datum reference frame. If the datum reference
frame is formed based on the three reference features and the primary
or secondary alignment is still free, CALYPSO tries to use the feature for
the determination of the coordinate system. If the direction of the feature
corresponds to the free alignment of the coordinate system, the feature
is entered.
The reason for this is as follows: One of the applications of a GDT Symmetry is a plane as a feature and an axis as a reference feature. Here the
X, Y origins and the spatial alignment are defined by the axis. However,
the plane alignment is still free. Thus the result of the symmetry would
not be clearly defined, as the feature (the plane) can still be freely rotated
about the axis of the reference feature. By integrating the plane in the
coordinate system, the plane rotation is no longer free.
The function of the projected tolerance zone is still possible according to
the old symmetry.

Display in CAD window


The display of the True Position, GDT Symmetry and Profile characteristics
in the CAD window does not only comprise the marked features but also
the display of the datum reference frame. The prerequisite is that you
activated the CAD CAD Model Control Highlight selected
Feature(s) menu items.

Circular Pitch characteristic


Menu: Size More Circular Pitch
Tool Box: Size Characteristics More Circular Pitch
CALYPSO determines the circular pitch for all features, except for the 2D
curve, 3D curve, free form surface, general surface and general curve
features and outputs the results either to CALYPSO or according to DIN
3960.
Feature

You have two options for selecting the feature:

You select a feature with rotational pattern or polar pattern offset.

You select several features which are handled in the same way as a
pattern.

Evaluation characteristics

The circular pitch comprises the following evaluation characteristics which


can be enabled and disabled individually:

5-80

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Individual pitch error

Cumulative pitch error

Pitch error

Radial runout (center of the rotational pattern as a circle center)

Roundness (circle center calculated via the pattern features)

Each characteristic has an own nominal value as well as an upper and


lower tolerance for the evaluation according to CALYPSO. The nominal
value is calculated automatically for each characteristic and index. The
tolerances can be defined via formulas (example: getActual("Circle1").x).
For a pattern with n features, n results per evaluation are calculated. The
difference between two geometric elements is calculated cyclically as an
evaluation characteristic. Exception: The difference between two evaluation characteristics is calculated cyclically for a pitch error.
Evaluation characteristic

Definition

Individual Pitch Error fp

Difference between the actual and the predefined distance of two


adjacent features.
The result is an angle or an arc length. The arc length is calculated
based on the distance between the first nominal geometry and the
pitch center point.
The nth result of this evaluation characteristic is the pitch error between the last (the nth) and the first feature.

Cumulative Pitch Error Fp

Total of individual pitch errors. Distance between actual and nominal


distance of a feature from the first feature of the pitch measurement.
The result is an angle or an arc length. The arc length is calculated
based on the distance between the first nominal geometry and the
pitch center point.
The nth result of this evaluation characteristic is always 0 (the angle
between the first feature and the feature itself).

Pitch Error fu

Difference between the current and the previous (for the first result:
the last) individual pitch error (cyclic difference).
The result is an angle or an arc length. The arc length is calculated
based on the distance between the first nominal geometry and the
pitch center point.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-81

Details on defining characteristics

Evaluation characteristic

Definition

Fr Rad.Runout

Radial deviation between a feature and the pitch circle radius of the
pattern. The center point of the pitch circle corresponds to the center
of the pattern. The radius is the distance between the center and the
first actual feature of the pattern.
The result is a length. The nominal value is 0.
The n-th result is always 0.

Fre Roundness

Radial deviation between a feature and the pitch circle radius of the
pattern. The center point of the pitch circle is calculated based on the
actual features of the pattern. The pitch circle is calculated via the
best-fit method according to Gauss (LSQ feature). The radius is the
distance between the calculated pitch circle center point and the first
actual feature of the pattern.
The result is a length. The nominal value is 0.
If the pattern comprises less than 3 features, there will be no result
for the roundness. The n-th result of this evaluation characteristic is
0.

Evaluation mode
The selected evaluation mode is decisive for the evaluation of the results.

With the evaluation according to CALYPSO, the minimum and maximum values for the individual pitch error (fp), cumulative pitch error
(Fp), radial runout (Fr), roundness (Fre) and pitch error (fu) are shown
in the printout. Furthermore, the deviations are compared with the
upper and lower tolerance.

With the evaluation according to DIN 3960, the values for Fp and Fr
are shown as difference between the maximum and minimum value.
The range between maximum and minimum is compared with a tolerance band without reference to a nominal value. All single values
of the pitch error (fu) are shown as absolute values.
The deviations are compared with a single tolerance value. The tolerance band ranges from the zero line to the tolerance value. The individual pitch error (fp) is shown as the highest value of the maximum
and minimum. Unlike fu, all single values are absolute values so that
the tolerance band is symmetrical to the zero line, its width being
twice the tolerance value.

The illustration shows the differences in the evaluation:

5-82

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Evaluation according to CALYPSO

Evaluation according to DIN 3960

mm

mm

0,2000

0,2000

0,0000

0,0000

10

11

-0,2000

12

Pkt.

10

11

-0,2000

0,2 mm

12

Pkt.

12

Pkt.

12

Pkt.

12

Pkt.

12

Pkt.

0,2 mm

50 : 1

50 : 1

mm
1,0000

mm
1,0000

0,0000

0,0000

10

11

12

Pkt.

-1,0000

10

11

-1,0000

1 mm

1 mm

10 : 1

10 : 1

mm

mm
0,2000

0,2000

0,0000

0,1000

10

11

0,1 mm

0,2 mm
-0,2000

0,0000

100 : 1

50 : 1

10

11

12

Pkt.

10

11

12

Pkt.

mm
0,0000

mm
0,0000
1

10

11

-0,5000
-1,0000

-1,0000
0,5 mm

1 mm

-2,0000

20 : 1

10 : 1

mm

mm
0,0200

0,0000
1

10

11

12

Pkt.
0,0000

-0,0100

10

11

-0,0200

-0,0200

10 m

20 m

1000 : 1

500 : 1

Printout
The result name in the printout is composed of the name of the characteristic, the current index number and the abbreviation of the evaluation
characteristic (example: Circular pitch1(3)^Fp).
In the case of individual pitch error, pitch error and cumulative pitch error,
pitch spread and table, the name of the characteristic type is followed by
the unit of measure (arc length or angle) for the results.
The reference names are the feature name and the current indexes which
were relevant for the result (example: Cylinder1(3)-(4)).
The standardized reference sizes for individual and cumulative pitch errors
are shown in the errors of those results. The nominal and actual values
correspond to the angular pitch p or cumulative angular pitch pk.

Extended Pitch Task

After the individual results of the circular pitch, all results of the selected evaluation characteristics are output in tabular form in the default printout.

The compact printout shows the results of the circular pitches and the
table if the scope of the printout is set to All Characteristics or
All Features and all Characteristics. The individual pitch error,
cumulative pitch error, pitch error, radial runout and roundness specification factors are highlighted in color in the table.

In the custom printout and table file, only the individual results (only
minimum/maximum or all) are output without any table.

By activating Extended Pitch Task in the Measurement Plan Editor


Characteristics, not only the extreme values but also all results are output
in the default printout and the table file. Each of these results consists of
the nominal and actual value, upper and lower tolerance, error and histogram of the error.
This setting applies to all circular and linear pitches of the measurement
plan.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-83

Details on defining characteristics

Further use of the circular pitch results


You cannot recall the individual results of the circular pitch via getActual.

Linear Pitch characteristic


Menu: Size More Linear Pitch
Tool Box: Size Characteristics More Linear Pitch
CALYPSO determines the linear pitch for all features, except for the 2D
curve, 3D curve, free form surface, general surface and general curve
features and outputs the results either to CALYPSO or according to DIN
3960.
Feature

Evaluation characteristics

You have two options for selecting the feature:

You select a feature with a 1D linear pattern.

You select several features which are handled in the same way as a
1D linear pattern.

The linear pitch comprises the following evaluation characteristics which


can be enabled and disabled individually:

Individual pitch error

Cumulative pitch error

Pitch error

Each characteristic has an own nominal value as well as an upper and


lower tolerance for the evaluation according to CALYPSO. The nominal
value is calculated automatically for each characteristic and index. The
tolerances can be defined via formulas (example: getActual("Circle1").x).
For a 1D linear pattern with n features, n-1 results per evaluation are
calculated. The difference between two geometric elements is calculated
as an evaluation characteristic. Exception: The difference between two
evaluation characteristics is calculated for a pitch error.
Evaluation characteristic

Definition

Pitch distance p

Distance between the two features of a pitch step.

Cumulative pitch distance pk Distance between the first feature of the pitch measurement and the
second feature of the corresponding pitch step.
Individual pitch error fp

5-84

Difference between the actual and the predefined distance of two


adjacent features in mm or inch.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Evaluation characteristic

Definition

Cumulative pitch error Fp

Total of individual pitch errors. Distance between actual and nominal


distance of a feature from the first feature of the pitch measurement.

Pitch error fu

Difference between the current and the previous (for the first result:
the last) individual pitch error (cyclic difference).

Evaluation mode
The selected evaluation mode is decisive for the evaluation of the results.

With the evaluation according to CALYPSO, the minimum and maximum values for the individual pitch error (fp), cumulative pitch error
(Fp) and pitch error (fu) are shown in the printout. Furthermore, the
deviations are compared with the upper and lower tolerance.

With the evaluation according to DIN 3960, the value for Fp is shown
as difference between the maximum and minimum value. The range
between maximum and minimum is compared with a tolerance band
without reference to a nominal value. All single values of the pitch
error (fu) are shown as absolute values.
The deviations are compared with a single tolerance value. The tolerance band ranges from the zero line to the tolerance value. The individual pitch error (fp) is shown as the highest value of the maximum
and minimum. Unlike fu, all single values are absolute values so that
the tolerance band is symmetrical to the zero line, its width being
twice the tolerance value.

The illustration shows the differences in the evaluation:


Evaluation according to CALYPSO

Evaluation according to DIN 3960

mm

mm

0,2000

0,2000

0,0000

0,0000

10

11

-0,2000

12

Pkt.

10

11

-0,2000

0,2 mm

12

Pkt.

12

Pkt.

12

Pkt.

0,2 mm

50 : 1

50 : 1

mm
1,0000

mm
1,0000

0,0000

0,0000

10

11

12

Pkt.

-1,0000

10

11

-1,0000

1 mm

1 mm

10 : 1

10 : 1

mm

mm
0,2000

0,2000

0,0000

0,1000

0,1 mm

10

11
0,2 mm

-0,2000

0,0000

100 : 1
1

10

11

50 : 1

12

Pkt.

Printout
The result name in the printout is composed of the name of the characteristic, the current index number and the abbreviation of the evaluation
characteristic (example: Linear pitch1(3)^Fp).
The reference names are the feature name and the current indexes which
were relevant for this result (example: Point1(3)-(4)).
The nominal and actual values correspond to the pitch distance p or cumulative pitch distance pk.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-85

Details on defining characteristics

Extended Pitch Task

After the individual results of the linear pitch, all results of the selected
evaluation characteristics are output in tabular form in the default
printout. A comment can be output together with the table.

The compact printout shows the results of the linear pitches and the
table if the scope of the printout is set to All Characteristics or
All Features and all Characteristics. The individual pitch error,
cumulative pitch error and pitch error specification factors are highlighted in color in the table. A comment can be output together with
the table.

In the custom printout and table file, only the individual results (only
minimum/maximum or all) are output without any table.

By activating Extended Pitch Task in the Measurement Plan Editor


Characteristics, not only the extreme values but also all results are output
in the default printout and the table file. Each of these results consists of
the nominal and actual value, upper and lower tolerance, error and histogram of the error.
This setting applies to all circular and linear pitches of the measurement
plan.

Display of references used


The references of the highlighted feature can be displayed via the context
menu of the linear pitch. This tree structure is similar to the tree structure
of the simple distance.

Further use of the linear pitch results


You cannot recall the individual results of the linear pitch via getActual.

Minimum, Maximum and Average


characteristics

Menu: Size More Minimum, Maximum or Average


Tool Box: Size Characteristics More Minimum, Maximum or Average
The Minimum, Maximum and Average characteristics allow you
to determine the minimum, maximum or the average of a series of characteristics.

5-86

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Select the desired characteristics in the definition template. As soon as


you have made a selection, the tolerances and the nominal and actual
values will be recalculated automatically.
Once all selected characteristics have been determined, the minimum,
maximum or the average can be determined. The curve is displayed as
actual value. With Minimum and Maximum, the name of the characteristic which was determined as minimum or maximum appears in the field
above the actual value.
In the default printout, the name of the characteristic which was determined as minimum or maximum is highlighted with a preceding asterisk.
NOTICE
The Minimum and Maximum characteristics are not exported to DMIS
and are not output in the DMIS report.
Display in CAD window

In the case of display with banner, the arrow points to the feature with
the maximum or minimum in the graphic window (in contrast, the arrow
at the Average characteristic points to the first characteristic in the list).

Roundness with reference angle


characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Roundness Ang
For the Circle and Circle on Cone features, the Roundness with reference angle can be determined. In contrast to Roundness, the roundness
of individual part segments of the circle segment concerned is checked.
NOTICE
The Roundness Ang cannot be determined for cylinder and cone. Features created by constructions have no result since they do not have any
measured points. The exceptions are Recall and Recall Feature Points.
You set the size of the part segment (indicated as partial angle 0) and
their degree of overlap (in %).

Overlapping 0%
1

...

Overlapping 25%
1

...

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-87

Details on defining characteristics

The measured values received from the roundness check of the part segments can be evaluated in different ways:

Every roundness based on own partial circle


For each part segment, an own partial circle is calculated from its
points and the difference between the maximum and minimum distance of the actual points of the segment to the fitted partial circle is
specified.

Every roundness based on overall circle


For each part segment, the difference between the maximum and
minimum distance of the actual points of the part segments to the
fitted part segment of the circle is specified.
The Circumscribed and Inscribed and Outer and Inner Tangential
Feature evaluation methods cannot be selected as the angle range
could be too small for this.

NOTICE
The Roundness Ang can only be evaluated according to Gauss (LSQ feature) or Minimum. The standard evaluation method is Minimum.
The Circumscribed and Inscribed and Outer and Inner Tangential
Feature evaluation methods cannot be selected as the angle range could
be too small for this.
This provides you with a measure for the roundness of each part segment.
For output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:

the maximum roundness,

all roundnesses that exceed the given tolerance,

all roundnesses.

A roundness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional


Roundness. Minimum and maximum of the part segment with the greatest roundness are shown in the plot with *.

Flatness with reference length


characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Flatness Ref
For planes, the Flatness with reference length can be determined. In contrast to Flatness, the flatness of partial rectangles of the plane concerned
is checked. You set the size of these rectangles and their degree of overlap.
Using the limit angle, you can specify in addition a limit that the angle
between an individual part rectangle and the entire plane must not exceed.
The measured values received from the flatness check of the rectangles
can be evaluated in different ways:

5-88

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Reference plane in each zone

For each rectangle, the difference between the maximum and minimum distance of the actual points of the rectangle to the fitted part
plane of the rectangle is specified.

Reference overall plane

For each rectangle, the difference between the maximum and minimum distance of the actual points of the rectangle to the fitted overall
plane is specified.
This provides you with a measure for the flatness of each rectangle. For
output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:

all flatnesses

all flatnesses that exceed the given tolerance

the maximum flatness.

A flatness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional flatness. Minimum and maximum of the rectangle with the greatest flatness
are shown in the plot with *.

Straightness with reference length


characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Straightness Ref
For 2D lines, the Straightness with reference length can be determined.
In contrast to Straightness, the straightness of sections of the 2D line
concerned is checked.
NOTICE
Features created by constructions have no result since they do not have
any measured points. The exceptions are Recall and Recall Feature Points.
You set the size of sections (the reference length) and their degree of
overlap.

Overlapping 0%
1

...

Overlapping 25%
1

...

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-89

Details on defining characteristics

The measured values received from the straightness check of the sections
can be evaluated in different ways:

Every straightness based on own partial length


For each section, the difference between the maximum and minimum
distance of the actual points of the section to the fitted partial length
is specified.

Every straightness based on overall length


For each section, the difference between the maximum and minimum
distance of the actual points of the section to the fitted total 2D line
is specified.

This provides you with a measure for the straightness of each section. For
output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:

the maximum straightness,

all straightnesses that exceed the given tolerance,

all straightnesses.

NOTICE
In contrast to Straightness of a 2D line, the shape of zone of the Straightness Ref cannot be switched over. The deviation is calculated in the probing direction this corresponds to the normal shape of zone in the
case of Straightness.
A straightness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional
Straightness. Minimum and maximum of the tolerance zone with the
greatest straightness are shown in the plot with *.

Result Element characteristic


Menu: Size More
The Result Element characteristic determines a result, irrespective of a
feature, and evaluates its compliance with the tolerance. The result can
be a dimensionless number, a length or an angle.
There are now two options for the result determination:

Formula calculation

Result input during the CNC run

Formula calculation

For example, you can enter a PCM expression with getActual commands
and PCM variables for the formula. If a result element accesses the actual
value of a feature that has not yet been measured during the CNC run,
the missing measurement is automatically processed with priority and the
result element is determined.

Result input

A window showing the name of the result element and the dialog text
appears for the entry of a value during the CNC run. You can enter a
number.

5-90

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

If the entry is invalid, you will receive a message.

The CNC run will only continue after entering a number and confirming
with OK. When clicking Cancel, the CNC run is interrupted and the stop
light will turn red.
Tolerances

If the unit of measure length is set, it is possible to enter the tolerance


class (ISO286) instead of the upper/lower tolerance.

Special Program characteristic


Menu: Size More
The Special Program characteristic represents the interface between
CALYPSO and a selected special program. A correctly installed special
program is the prerequisite for a correct program run.
The Special Program characteristic calls the selected special program, executes it and transfers its data to CALYPSO. The results are included in
the printouts.
The Special Program characteristic is defined via the definition template.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-91

Details on defining characteristics

To do so, select the desired special program, transfer in the list the required features and the associated coordinate system.
Creating an alignment

Click Create Alignment in the definition template to insert a new


alignment in the measurement plan below the special program. Its name
is composed of the name of the Special Program characteristic preceded
by WP_. The corresponding Special Program characteristic is entered
as a feature.
During the measurement plan run, this alignment is calculated by means
of the values transferred by the special program.
Use Execute Program Now to start the entered special program from
within the definition template.
Select OK to confirm your entries and close the window.

5-92

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Measurement plan run

Characteristic

Characteristic

Special program
characteristic

Data of the
features

Special program
Results

Characteristic

During the measurement plan run, the selected special program is executed based on the entries made and the results are returned to CALYPSO.

Maximum Waviness characteristic


Basics about the Maximum Waviness
characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Waviness
Tool Box: Form Characteristics Waviness
For the Plane, Circle and Circle on Cone features, the Maximum Waviness can be determined. The waviness is important for the optimum run
of shafts in slide bearings.
Evaluation types

CALYPSO checks the waviness and offers two evaluation types: the Fourier analysis and the roundness evaluation.

In the Fourier analysis, the determined surface contour is shown as a


weighted sum of ideal curves (harmonic waves or harmonics) of a
certain frequency. The result of the Fourier analysis is thus an ampli-

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-93

Details on defining characteristics

tude function of the frequency: for each frequency, the amplitude is


determined with which it enters the start contour.
To avoid balance errors, these amplitudes may not exceed certain values. This is checked by means of the maximum waviness.

Feature

Defaults

In the roundness evaluation, the maximum deviations from the roundness of different, linearly ascending sector sizes are determined and
checked. In this case, the sectors are arranged with a predefined
overlap in the circle and the corresponding deviation from the roundness is determined for each defined sector size.

You can select a feature of the following types as the characteristic:

Plane (only Fourier analysis)

Circle

Circle on Cone

The default for the evaluation method of the feature is Minimum.


The Maximum Waviness characteristic belongs to the Form Characteristics group and uses the outlier elimination set for this purpose. You can
define the treatment of outliers for a measurement plan under Resources Filter / Outlier Elimination in the Form group.
If a filter is set, it will also be used. If you do not require the filtering for
the Fourier analysis, you must deactivate it.
The determination of the characteristic requires at least 7 points (for
meaningful results a considerably higher number of points is required)
which must be spread evenly over the total circle.

Specifying tolerances

The tolerance is specified as a function of the frequency (Fourier) or the


sector size (roundness). As it is not allowed to enter a nominal value for
the maximum waviness, you may only enter one single positive tolerance
value for each frequency or sector size.

Tolerance function

For the Fourier analysis, the frequencies can be specified as number


of harmonics (in undulations per revolution) or as oscillation length
(in angular measure). You can use floating point numbers for both
specifications. The conversion of the number of harmonics n to the
oscillation length T is based on the formula T = 2 / n.

Four options are available for the specification of the tolerance function:

Tolerance steps:
You can enter different tolerances for certain blocks of frequency
ranges/angle ranges. At the limit of both frequency ranges/angle
ranges, the higher tolerance applies.

Single values from file


You can import the tolerance curve from an ASCII file.

5-94

Tolerance polynomial:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

By specifying the coefficients for a polynomial (from the harmonic


waves/sector sizes), you create a continuous and smooth tolerance
curve.

RTA Curve:
The roundness deviation R and the construction form parameters n0
and k saved in a file allow you to define the limit curve for the amplitude.

Results

As a result of the Maximum Waviness characteristic, the following is


output depending on the evaluation type:

the amplitude which belongs to the frequency with the highest difference between the amplitude and tolerance as well as the frequency
itself

the maximum deviation from the roundness for all sector sizes as well
as this sector size itself.

In the default printout and the compact printout, the amplitude, tolerance and deviation are specified in m or 1/1000 inch as well as the appropriate frequency and the information whether the frequency is specified as number of harmonics (number of harmonic waves) or oscillation
length.
The appropriate frequency is not specified in addition in the custom printout.

Use tolerance steps for waviness


CALYPSO can determine the Maximum Waviness for the Plane, Circle and Circle on Cone features. The waviness is important for the
optimum run of shafts in slide bearings. CALYPSO performs a roundness
evaluation with Fourier analysis.
The tolerance for the maximum waviness can be defined in steps you
enter different tolerances for the individual sections of a block of frequency ranges (Fourier) or angle ranges (roundness). At the limit of two
frequency ranges, the higher tolerance applies.

The procedure for specifying the tolerance steps is as


follows:
1 Select Form and Location Waviness.
The characteristic is transferred to the measurement plan.
2 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
3 Go to Tolerance Curve and select the Tolerance steps entry.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-95

Details on defining characteristics

4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle or
Circle on Cone).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
7 Enter the permissible lower limit value of the range to be checked.
8 Define the tolerance steps in the table.

5-96

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

CALYPSO makes sure that the limit values in the table are arranged in
a monotonically ascending order (or in the case of oscillation length in
a monotonically descending order).
Note: You can also determine the tolerance value with a formula. The
numeric result of the formula calculation is assigned to the m or
1/1000 inch unit and evaluated.
Note: The designations lower limit and upper limit refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the angle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in
descending order.
Add new ranges with Add.
Enter the upper limit of the range and the tolerance which is
valid from the previous limit to the current limit.
9 Press OK to confirm.

Note: If you want to define tolerance steps in several Maximum Waviness characteristics:
Copy the characteristic and only make the required changes.
- or Copy the tolerance property of an already completed characteristic into a characteristic which is not yet completed (Copying
properties of characteristics [ 540]).

Importing tolerance curve from ASCII file


CALYPSO can determine the Maximum Waviness for the Plane, Circle and Circle on Cone features. The waviness is important for the
optimum run of shafts in slide bearings. CALYPSO performs a roundness
evaluation with Fourier analysis.
You can import the tolerances for the maximum waviness from an ASCII
file. This files contains the defined tolerances. The corresponding tolerance is defined for each harmonic.

To import the tolerance curve:


1 Select Form and Location Waviness
The characteristic is transferred to the measurement plan.
2 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
3 Go to Tolerance Curve and select the Single values from file
entry.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-97

Details on defining characteristics

4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle or
Circle on Cone).
The default setting for Evaluation type is Fourier.
5 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
6 Enter the path and the file name of the tolerance file under Download tolerance curve from file. You can also enter a formula
here.
- or -

5-98

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Click the Select file for tolerance curve import icon and select
the file in the file selection dialog.
The imported values are displayed as table in the definition template
but cannot be modified.
Note: If you do not enter any path, CALYPSO searches for the file in
the measurement plan directory.
7 If you want to change the data after importing, go to Tolerance
Curve and select the Tolerance steps tab.
The table containing the imported data can be edited. You can modify
the values. Please note that this change does not modify the values in
the file.
After editing the file, the single values in the CNC are no longer imported from the specified file.
8 Press OK to confirm.

Specifying the tolerance polynomial for the


waviness
CALYPSO can determine the Maximum Waviness for the Plane, Circle and Circle on Cone features. The waviness is important for the
optimum run of shafts in slide bearings. CALYPSO performs a roundness
evaluation with Fourier analysis.
The tolerance for the maximum waviness can be defined in the form of
a continuous and smooth function by means of a polynomial from the
harmonic waves.
1 Select Form and Location Waviness.
The characteristic is transferred to the measurement plan.
2 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
3 Go to Tolerance Curve and select the Polynomial function entry.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-99

Details on defining characteristics

4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle or
Circle on Cone).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
The displayed formula is adjusted. If the ai and bi coefficient sequences
are identical, the corresponding formula computes the number of
harmonics and once the oscillation length.

5-100

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

7 Enter the lower and upper limit value for the frequency range or sector
size range to be checked.

Note: The designations lower limit and upper limit refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the angle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in
descending order for the limit values.
8 Define the tolerance polynomial in the table.

Note: The unit m or 1/1000 inch is assigned to the numerical value


of the polynomial.
9 Press OK to confirm.

Note: If you want to define a tolerance polynomial in several Maximum Waviness characteristics:
Copy the characteristic and only make the required changes.
- or Copy the tolerance property of an already completed characteristic into a characteristic which is not yet completed (Copying
properties of characteristics [ 540]).

Specifying the RTA curve for the waviness


CALYPSO can determine the Maximum Waviness for the Plane, Circle and Circle on Cone features. The waviness is important for the
optimum run of shafts in slide bearings. CALYPSO performs a roundness
evaluation with Fourier analysis.
You can define the tolerance for the waviness via a limit curve (RTA curve)
by specifying the roundness deviation R and the construction form parameters n0 and k.
1 Select Form and Location Waviness.
The characteristic is transferred to the measurement plan.
2 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
3 Go to Tolerance Curve and select the RTA Curve entry.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-101

Details on defining characteristics

4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle or
Circle on Cone).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
7 Enter the lower and upper limit value for the frequency range or sector
size range to be checked.

Note: The designations lower limit and upper limit refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the an-

5-102

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

gle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in


descending order for the limit values.
8 If the desired data record is not available in the RTA parameter file:
Select the file and enter the required values.
9 Select the suitable parameter record.
By closing and opening again the definition template, the correct values for the feature are entered.
10Enter the parameter R.
11If needed, activate Double Amplitude (PeakToValley).
12Press OK to confirm.

Reference: Format of the RTA parameter file


The RTA parameter file RTAParameter.txt is used for the transfer of the
construction form parameters n0 and k to the definition template
of the Maximum Waviness characteristic for the specification of the
tolerance via a limit curve.
The RTA parameter file is stored in the <user directory>\data\config directory and can be edited. It contains a table formatted with tabulators.
The first line shows the column headers for the name of the data record
and the n0 and k parameters for the outside circle, the inside circle and
the plane.
The data records are shown in the following lines. The decimal separator
is the point. It is not necessary to enter values for all columns in a line.
NOTICE
If parameters are missing for certain features, these cannot be selected
as a geometrical feature.
The following shows an example of such a text file:
name n0_outerCircle k_outerCircle n0_innerCircle k_innerCircle
n0_plane k_plane
Deep_groove_ball_bearing
0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
Angular_ball_bearing
0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
Four-point_ball_bearing 0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
Taper_roller_bearing
1.2 1.0 1.0 1.0

Reference: Format of the ASCII file with the


tolerance curve
The ASCII file with the tolerance curve serves for the takeover of tolerance
values into the definition template of the Maximum Waviness characteristic.
You can name the file as desired and save it in any directory.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-103

Details on defining characteristics

The file contains several lines showing the upper limit values in UPR of
the tolerated range and the corresponding tolerance in m, separated by
tabs.

Example

The first line may have any column header. If the first character of the
file is not a number, the entire first line is ignored.

The first column shows the limit values [UPR] of the tolerated range
as consecutive natural numbers. Missing or double values in the first
column lead to an error.

The second column shows a tolerance in m for each value in the first
column. The decimal separator is the point.

Other units are not allowed; if a different unit is defined in the default
settings, the values will be converted.

The following shows an example of such a text file:


Upper limit value [UPR] Tolerance [m]
12
2.2
13
1.0
14
0.7
15
2.2

Form plot (Fourier analysis) for waviness


For the Maximum Waviness characteristic, the Fourier analysis can be
created and called as a form plot.

5-104

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Form plot for tolerance steps

Structure of the form


plot

Form plot with tolerance polynomial

The structure of the form plot is similar to the structure of the Fourier
analysis of the roundness. It consists of the graphic with the amplitudes
per frequency and the appropriate value tables.
The unit of the X axis and the left column in the value table depends on
the setting in the characteristic: scale in harmonic waves (without unit) or
in oscillation length (angular unit of the measurement plan).

Special aspects with


maximum waviness

Additionally, the following applies to the maximum waviness form plot:

The tolerance steps or the tolerance polynomial is drawn in the graphic (in blue by default). Only those frequencies that lie within the frequency range will be shown. The X axis is also scaled to this width.
Frequencies that are outside of the tolerance are shown in red by
default; frequencies that are inside of the tolerance are shown in
green.

Selection of table values

The frequency with the largest deviation is set in boldface in the value
table. The values in the table are also highlighted in color.

Usually, there is not enough space in the table of the frequencies with
amplitudes to show all values. Therefore, only a selection of the largest
amplitudes will be output.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-105

Details on defining characteristics

All frequencies whose amplitudes are outside of the tolerance have


priority, especially frequencies with the largest deviations.

If then there is still enough space in the table, all frequencies which
are inside of the tolerance are listed weighted according to the deviation values.

True Position with Best Fit of Bore


Pattern characteristic
Basics about the True Position with Best Fit of
Bore Pattern characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Position
The True Position characteristic offers options for best fit of bore pattern.
Initial values

The nominal points and the appropriate actual points can lie in one or
more parallel planes. For the best fit, the nominal points are moved by
means of plane coordinate transformation so that the selected best-fit
condition is fulfilled.

Results

As the result of this operation, CALYPSO computes the rotation and offset
of the bore pattern. Additionally, the best fit data is used to generate
another coordinate system. You can access the origin of this coordinate
system using formulas.

Best-fit methods

The following best-fit methods are available for the best fit of bore pattern:

5-106

Gauss Best Fit (LSQ feature). With this method, outliers have only a
minimal influence. Limitations due to reference features are not taken
into consideration. Optimum setting parameters can be derived from
this for the machine tools.

Minimum Best Fit (Chebyshov - Minimum Feature). Outliers have a


significant effect on the result when this method is used. Limitations
due to reference features are not taken into consideration. Optimum
setting parameters can be derived from this for the machine tools.

Tolerance Best Fit. Iterative attempts are made to bring all values into
tolerance. Possible movement and rotation ranges are limited due to
the reference features. This corresponds to a good/bad evaluation of
a mechanical gauge with an additional evaluation of the single deviations.

Best fit according to least absolute value feature (L1 feature). Outliers
have less effect with this method than is the case with the Gauss (LSQ
feature) method. Limitations due to reference features are not taken
into consideration. Optimum setting parameters can be derived from
this for the machine tools.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

Evaluation method

The evaluation method for the features used to calculate the best fit of
bore pattern can be changed in the multiple selection dialog box for features.
The Outer Tangential Element evaluation method is set by default.
Some results may not be reproducible, because this method is very susceptible to outliers. Better reproducibility can be achieved using the LSQ
feature evaluation method.

Filter and outlier elimination

In addition to the evaluation method, you can select filtering and outlier
elimination for the selected features.

Shape Of Zone

For the shape of zone, you can select between rectangular and circular
tolerance zone.

Parameterizing the number of features


You can parameterize the number of features of a best fit of bore pattern
indirectly. To do so, select a pattern with variable number of features as
the feature. CALYPSO prompts whether you want to cancel the pattern.

If you cancel the pattern, CALYPSO generates an own nominal value


line for each feature of the pattern. In this case, the number of features is not variable.

If you do not cancel the pattern, only one line is generated, e.g. Circle1(1-x). The number of features depends on the variable.

Coordinate system from best fit of bore


pattern
The True Position characteristic offers options for best fit of bore pattern. The nominal points are moved by means of plane coordinate transformation so that the selected best-fit condition is fulfilled.
When you use best fit of bore pattern, CALYPSO automatically computes
a coordinate system using the rotation and offset of the bore pattern.
The coordinate system is named after the best fit of bore pattern (default:
Best Fit of Bore Pattern x, with x being a serial number in the measurement plan). You can access the origin of the coordinate system using
formulas.

Coordinate system calculation method


The coordinate system is created as soon as the Best Fit of Bore Pattern
option is selected in the True Position characteristic. This coordinate
system is initially identical to the current base alignment.
Once you have selected the references of the True Position, a nominal
coordinate system is calculated using the nominal values of the geometries.
After measurement and computation of the best fit of bore pattern, the
result of the best fit of bore pattern (rotation angle, Y translation and Z
translation) is added to this coordinate system.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-107

Details on defining characteristics

If there are no references for the True Position, the result of the best fit
of bore pattern (rotation angle, Y translation and Z translation) is added
to the nominal datum reference frame of the best fit of bore pattern.

Display in CAD window


When a best fit of bore pattern is selected in the CAD window, the associated coordinate system and the references of the True Position used
to calculate the bore pattern are also displayed.

Access to the origin of the coordinate system


It can be useful to have access to the coordinate system origin for further
operations in the measurement plan, e.g. constructions.
You can use the following formulas to obtain the coordinate system origin:
getActual("bore pattern name").characteristic
getNominal("bore pattern name").characteristic
characteristic is a dummy for the following:
Characteristic

returns:

Origin in x of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)

Origin in y of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)

Origin in z of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)


NOTICE
These functions can also be used for any other coordinate system.
You can thus access the x, y and z origin of the best fit of bore pattern in
the definition template of any feature by entering a formula. This also
allows you to use constructions (e.g. recall) on the bore pattern.

Restricted selection of coordinate systems


Coordinate systems whose calculation depends on the currently open
feature are not offered in the selection menus for coordinate systems.
Otherwise, a circular statement would result.

Using best fit of bore pattern


The True Position characteristic offers options for best fit of bore pattern. As the result of this operation, CALYPSO computes the rotation and
offset of the bore pattern.
1 Select Form and Location Position.
The characteristic is transferred to the measurement plan.
2 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
3 Click the Best fit of bore pattern icon.

5-108

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

This generates the coordinate system with the name of the Best Fit of
Bore Pattern it is initially identical to the base alignment.
4 Use the buttons labeled Primary Datum, Secondary Datum and
Tertiary Datum to specify the reference features so that the bore
pattern can be computed later.
This defines the coordinate system with the name of the best fit of
bore pattern.
If you do not enter a reference, the base alignment is used by default.
5 Click Bore Pattern to call the settings for evaluating the bore pattern.

6 Click the features you need for best fit of bore pattern (Select Features).

- and/or Use the Select Bore Pattern selection list to include bore patterns
(i.e. feature groups) defined beforehand.
7 Select the Shape Of Zone and enter the tolerances.
8 In the case of a parameterized pattern, define here whether you want
to cancel the pattern or whether you want to include it together with
the parameter in the best fit of bore pattern.
In the first case, you will receive several lines with the individual pattern
features, in the other case, you will receive one line with one parameterized pattern.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-109

Details on defining characteristics

Note: In the multiple selection window for features, you can change
the evaluation method for the features (default: Outer Tangential
Element) and set filtering and outlier elimination.
Note: All the features you select are listed in the Features List. The
coordinates as shown here are referenced to the references selected
beforehand. The values are editable and can be shown in Cartesian or
polar form.
Note: You can parameterize the tolerances. You can enter formulas
and nominal values via the context menu.
9 Select a best-fit method from the Best Fit Method group:
Select the best-fit method of your choice from the selection list.
Select Translation and/or Rotation for the means of fitting.
10Click Calculate now to start the calculation.
When computation is completed, the result is displayed in the Best
fit result group.
Note: The coordinate system with the name of the best fit of bore
pattern [ 5107] is automatically corrected by the result of fit.
To see a graphic representation of the best fit bore pattern, tick the
Graphic check box (see Outputting form and location plots for
characteristics [ 872]).
11Click OK.

Characteristics in practice (instructions)


Overview of the characteristics in practice
The following instructions are intended to show you how to work with
the measurement features, characteristics and prerequisites of CALYPSO
in practice.
In the process, you use the possibilities of the desktop and CAD window
of CALYPSO.
The following section contains these instructions:

Checking the wall thickness and wall deviation [ 5110]

Checking the wall thickness and wall deviation


With the aid of the selection menu items in the CAD model, you can
define two space points with a click of the mouse and use these points
to check the wall thickness or the material deviation at this point.

How to define two space points for the distance check


1 Turn the CAD model, so that the position with the wall thickness to
be checked can be seen in the foreground.

5-110

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Details on defining characteristics

2 Select the Distance check menu item from the selection list for selection and definition shown in the CAD toolbar.
3 Click the position on the model at which you wish to check the wall
thickness.
The two space points that are opposite to each other and the connection between them are shown at the selected position.
Two new features of the Space Point type appear in the list of features.
With the aid of these two points, you can check the wall thickness or the
material deviation at the place in question.

How to check the wall thickness


You have created two opposite space points by means of the Distance
check function.
1 Select Features Additional Geometries Symmetry
Point
A symmetry point is added to the list of features.
2 Select the Recall entry under Nominal Definition in the definition
template of the symmetry point.
3 Select the available space points for the definition of the symmetry
point.
4 Add the Distance Symmetry Point characteristic to the list of characteristics and assign it to the symmetry point that was just created.
The wall thickness will be checked at the desired position during the
measurement plan run.

How to check the wall deviation


You have created two opposite space points by means of the Distance
check function.
1 Add two Space Point Distance characteristics to the list of characteristics and assign them the space points just created.
During the measurement plan run, it will be checked whether there is
too much or too little material at the desired position.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-111

Utilities

Utilities
Overview of the utilities
In the Utilities group in the toolbox and under Resources Utilities in the menu, you can find some special elements that are not characteristics. However, they are required for the measurement plan run:
Utilities

Description
Alignment

Utilities for alignments [ 5113]

3D Best Fit Alignment

Utilities for alignments [ 5113]

RPS Alignment

Utilities for alignments [ 5113]

P6 Alignment

Utilities for alignments [ 5113]

Geometry Best Fit

Geometry Best Fit utility [ 5113]

Alignment from Sever- In the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring
al Curves
Software option under Coordinate system from best fit alignment of several curves
Probing system qualifi- Probing System Qualification utility [ 5114]
cation
Qualification of stylus
system holders

Qualification of stylus system holders utility [ 5115]

Gauge Correction
Qualification

Greater accuracy by gage correction qualification [ 492]

Erosion Module (option)

Erosion Module utility [ 5115]

Text element

Text Element utility [ 5118]

5-112

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Utilities

Utilities

Description
Graphics Element

Graphics Element utility [ 5120]

Save Alignment

Saving an alignment [ 5121]

Load Alignment

Loading an alignment [ 5121]

Delete Alignment

Deleting an alignment [ 5121]

Base Alignment Match Base Alignment Match utility [ 5122]

Set Base Alignment to Setting a base alignment to zero [ 349]


zero
CAD Presentation

CAD Presentation utility [ 5127]

Utilities for alignments


Use Resources Utilities Alignment to add the Alignment
utility to the measurement plan.
This alignment is determined according to the default method using the
features that you predefine in the definition template.
To determine an alignment according to an alternative alignment method
(3D best fit, RPS, P6), select the method of your choice under Resources Utilities.
You also obtain the same definition templates, extended by some functions, if you create a new base/start alignment under Prerequisites (for
the start alignment, use the default method only).
For details on the determination of alignments, see Creating a new
base/start alignment [ 324] and Alternative alignment methods [ 349].

Geometry Best Fit utility


Use Resources Utilities Geometry Best Fit or the toolbox to
add the Geometry Best Fit utility to the measurement plan.
The Geometry Best Fit utility makes it possible to define a new coordinate system using the common best fit of several measured features in
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-113

Utilities

their corresponding nominal geometries. Best fit according to Gauss (LSQ


feature) is used.
The best fit movement produces the translation vector and the rotation
about the X/Y/Z axes which are applied to the set coordinate system. The
result is a new coordinate system.
Features

Degrees of freedom

You can use the following features for the geometry best fit:

Planes

2D lines

Points

Cylinders

Circles

Tori

You can restrict the degrees of freedom of the best fit. Click the Evaluation Constraints button and activate the check box for the movements which are to be blocked during the best fit.

Probing System Qualification utility


Use Resources Utilities Probing system qualification to
add the Probing system qualification utility to the measurement
plan:

Here you can define the stylus system qualification settings.


CALYPSO automatically performs qualification during the CNC run of the
measurement plan. If you use a stylus system changer, the correct stylus
system is automatically used. Otherwise, you will be prompted to insert
the stylus system.

5-114

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Utilities

Qualification of stylus system holders


utility
Use Resources Utilities Qualification of stylus system
holders to add the Qualification of stylus system holders utility
to the measurement plan:

Here you can define the stylus system holder qualification settings.
CALYPSO automatically performs qualification during the CNC run of the
measurement plan. If you use a stylus system changer, the correct stylus
system is automatically used. Otherwise, you will be prompted to insert
the stylus system.

Erosion Module utility


Basics about the Erosion Module utility
NOTICE
The erosion module is available in the Preset option which you can
purchase in addition and have enabled.
You can add the Erosion Module utility to the measurement plan by
selecting Resources Utilities Erosion Module.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-115

Utilities

The erosion module provides a file with translation and rotation values
for two related alignments which is suitable for erosion machines.
It will be necessary to enter the type of erosion machine that is being used
along with the name and directory of the file that will be created.
NOTICE
The directory path must be available. It is not created automatically.
These alignments refer to the clamping device on the one hand and to
the erosion electrode on the other. Here, the alignment of the workpiece
or tool (erosion electrode) (Xe, Ye, Ze) will be determined on the basis of
the alignment of the clamping device (X, Y, Z).

5-116

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Utilities

NOTICE
Here you cannot select alignments with index that are based on references with pattern.
NOTICE
If you specify the alignments in an order that is the wrong way around,
you receive other compensation values.
When measuring the feature, the alignments will be formed and the parameter file of the erosion module will be saved.
Procedure

First, your inputs and the manufacturer-specific entries in the Conf.dat


configuration file are used to create an Erodier.Edm parameter file as an
ASCII file.
NOTICE
By editing the Conf.dat configuration file [ 5117], you can control
the output of the file for the erosion machine.

Result

Once the erosion module has been executed, an ASCII file will be available
that can be used with the erosion machine.

Conf.dat configuration file for the erosion


module
The entries in the Erosion machine selection list and the settings for
the coordinate transformation are controlled by the manufacturer-specific settings in the Conf.dat file, which is stored in the same directory as
the Epost.exe file.
The Conf.dat file is an ASCII file that you can edit with an ASCII editor.
Description of Conf.dat
file

For each erosion machine type, two lines in the following form are saved
in the file:
;MachName<serial_number> = <machine_name>
<machine-specific_switch>
The details for the coordinate transformation are in the machine-specific
switches, an 8-digit binary number.
Example:
;MachName01 = Erode de luxe
11110000
The 8 digits of the switch (counted from the left) have the following
functions:

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-117

Utilities

Digit

Function

1 changes sign of X

1 changes sign of Y

1 changes sign of Z

1 changes sign of C

1 changes the datum reference frames

Manufacturer-dependent

Not used

Code electrode/tool; e.g.:


0 = ELEKEle,X-38.611,Y34.783,Z50.202,C-7.023
1 = WKSEle,X-38.611,Y34.783,Z50.202,C-7.023

A 1 in the 5th digit thus has the same effect as swapping the alignments
of the clamping device and the erosion electrode.

Text Element utility


Use Resources Utilities Text element to add the Text element utility to the measurement plan.
Double click to open a window which will allow you to enter a text.

5-118

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Utilities

Text output

In the case of a CNC run of the measurement plan, the text will be output
in the printouts and protocols (the default printout, the custom printout
and the compact printout).
Only the text itself is output in the default printout and compact printout.
The custom printout also includes the name of the feature (e.g. Textelement7).
The text will only be written in the printouts and during CNC run and not
when opening or closing the definition template (as is usual in the case
of characteristics).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-119

Utilities

Graphics Element utility


Use Resources Utilities Graphics Element to add the
Graphics Element utility to the measurement plan.
Double click to open the definition template for the graphics element.

Defining the graphics element

In addition to the form and locations plots in the characteristics, the


graphics element offers another possibility to output results in graphic
form.
You must define the form (layout) and the contents of the graphic to be
output. Various default layouts are available.

Use the icons to define whether the graphic is to be displayed and output
to the printer during the CNC run.

Saving an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Save Alignment utility, enter the file
name and select the alignment to be saved. If the alignment has a pattern,
you must determine the desired index.

5-120

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Utilities

When the utility is executed in the CNC run, the actual alignment (calculated from the actual values) is saved in the <user directory>\workarea
\basesystems directory. A subdirectory is created with the name that was
entered in the definition template. Use backslashes \ to create further
subdirectories.
If there is no actual alignment of the set alignment, this will be calculated
during the CNC run and, if necessary, measured.
If the alignment cannot be measured and calculated, the symbol for the
utility will turn red in the measurement plan.

Loading an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Load Alignment utility, enter the file
name for the alignment to be loaded. If the alignment has a pattern, you
must determine the desired index.
When the Load Alignment utility is executed in the CNC run (e.g. because
a feature refers to this alignment), the alignment is loaded from the <user
directory>\workarea\basesystems directory.
If the file name contains backslashes \, the program will branch to the
appropriate subdirectories.
If a Load Alignment utility is contained in the measurement plan, it will
be treated as a normal alignment. Its name (not identical to the file name)
appears in the geometry datum reference frame lists and the lists for
linked alignments, for example.
No distinction is made between nominal values and actual values when
loading.
In the case of a DMIS run, the loaded alignment is used as the current
alignment.
Special aspects

The name of the alignment to be loaded need not necessarily be the file
name.
An error message will be issued if an alignment cannot be loaded (because the file is not present). In addition, a message stating this will appear
in the status window, and the CNC run will be interrupted if necessary.
The base alignment is returned for critical calls such as the nominal alignment for the nominal geometry.

Deleting an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Delete Alignment utility, enter the
file name for the alignment to be deleted.
All alignments are listed in the <user directory>\workarea\basesystems
directory.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-121

Utilities

If the file name contains backslashes \, the program will branch to the
appropriate subdirectory.
The file you specified in the definition template is deleted during the CNC
run.
If the file is not present, the run will continue without a message. The
symbol for the utility in the measurement plan will turn red. If the file is
write-protected, an error message will appear. The CNC run is resumed.

Base Alignment Match utility


Basics about the Base Alignment Match utility
Purpose

Mobile measuring systems, e.g. a Leica laser tracker, allow you to measure
very large parts. However, the position of the measuring system must be
changed during the CNC run. To ensure that the data recorded beforehand and afterwards match, the coordinate systems must be converted.

The Base Alignment Match utility makes it possible to obtain again a valid
coordinate system after changing the position of the measuring system.
Use Resources Utilities Base Alignment Match to add it to
the measurement plan.
Principle

5-122

For the base alignment match, CALYPSO measures a number of features


once in the old position and once in the new position.

At the old position (prior to changing the position), it is possible for


CALYPSO measure the selected features automatically during the
CNC run.

After changing the position, CALYPSO does not recognize the locations of the features. Therefore, you must probe these features manually. This corresponds to the manual probing of the base alignment

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Utilities

at the beginning of the CNC run with unknown position of the workpiece in the CMM measuring range.
NOTICE
For the base alignment match, it is irrelevant whether the position of the
measuring system or workpiece has been changed, the procedure is the
same for both applications.
CALYPSO uses the coordinates of the feature datum targets to carry out
an internal 3D best fit. The resulting coordinate system becomes the new
internal base alignment in the CNC run.
The new base alignment is saved under the name of the base alignment
match in the <user directory>\workarea\basesystems directory. During
the automatic run, the file name is assigned the (CNC) extension.
Bundle Alignment

If your mobile measuring system has the corresponding equipment, you


can also use the more accurate Bundle Alignment trigonometric method.
CALYPSO is familiar with this calculation method.

Changing the position


several times

It is possible to change the position of the mobile measuring system several times and use an additional base alignment match for this. This will
enable you to measure also larger workpieces with the corresponding
precision.

Run according to list of


characteristics

The CNC run differs depending on whether the measurement according


to list of features or list of characteristics method is used. When using run
according to list of characteristics, the base alignment match is performed
as soon as the feature is to be measured. No preparations are required
for the run according to list of characteristics.

Run according to list of


features

The run according to list of features is performed differently. To enable


CALYPSO to carry out the run according to list of features, each feature
must know to which base alignment it is assigned.
Therefore, you must add the Base Alignment Match utility to the measurement plan and go to the Measurement Plan Editor Features to
define for each feature the position from which it is to be measured.

Warning limit

You can enter and define a warning limit for the standard deviation so
that CALYPSO stops as soon as the limit is exceeded during the measurement. It is possible to repeat the measurement or to cancel the run.

Printout

The results of the manually measured features in the new base alignment
are saved in the default printout. The base alignment match is output in
the printout in much the same way as a 3D best fit.

Preparing a base alignment match


Purpose

Mobile measuring systems, e.g. a Leica laser tracker, allow you to measure
very large parts. However, the position of the measuring system must be
changed during the CNC run. To ensure that the data recorded beforehand and afterwards match, the coordinate systems must be converted.
1 Open the measurement plan.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-123

Utilities

2 In the list of characteristics, go to the position at which the measuring


system must be changed.
3 Select Resources Utilities Base Alignment Match.
Here, you add the Base Alignment Match utility to the measurement plan.
4 Open the definition template for the base alignment match.
Base Alignment Match

Base Alignment Match1

Comment

Bundle Alignment

Select Features

Feature

Check Standard Deviation

Executing During Run As:

Execute

Automatic Measurement

Manual Run
Now

OK

Reset

5 Click Select Features and add the features for the base alignment
match.
Alternatively, It is also possible to select the features in the CAD view,
extract them or probe them on the machine while the definition tem-

5-124

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Utilities

plate is open. This can be compared to the alternative alignment


methods (3D best fit, RPS, P6).
Note: The following features are suitable for the base alignment
match: point, circle, circle on cone, sphere, ellipse, 3D point, rectangle,
slot, torus, symmetry point, radius point, angle point and sphere point.
Note: When selecting the features for the base alignment match, observe that CALYPSO must measure all features required for the selected features. This also includes all features of a coordinate system, constructions, etc.
Note: To avoid that many of the features must be measured again, it
is recommended to select only features in the base alignment for the
base alignment match.
6 Activate Check Standard Deviation and enter the warning limit
upon exceeding of which CALYPSO should stop and repetition of the
measurement should be possible.
7 Activate Automatic Run if CALYPSO is required to probe again the
comparison features in the CNC run after changing their position and
probing them manually.
Thus, the base alignment match becomes more accurate.
8 If needed, add additional base alignment matches to the measurement
plan.
9 To carry out the measuring run according to list of features: In the
Measurement Plan Editor Features, select the Travel Sequence after base alignment match item and assign either the
base alignment or a base alignment match to each feature.
During the run according to list of features, CALYPSO sorts all features.
The sequence of the measurements depends on the sequence of the
base alignment matches in the list of characteristics.
10Save the measurement plan.

Example of a run according to list of features


The measurement plan contains four features (Circle1 to Circle4) and
three base alignment matches (Base Alignment Match1, Base Alignment
Match2 and Base Alignment Match3 in this sequence).
The features are assigned to the base alignment matches:
Feature

Base Alignment Match

Circle1

Base Alignment Match2

Circle2

Base Alignment

Circle3

Base Alignment Match1

Circle4

Base Alignment Match3

The measurement sequence is as follows: Circle2, Circle3, Circle1, Circle4.


61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-125

Utilities

Performing base alignment match


Purpose

Mobile measuring systems, e.g. a Leica laser tracker, allow you to measure
very large parts. However, the position of the measuring system must be
changed during the CNC run. To ensure that the data recorded beforehand and afterwards match, the coordinate systems must be converted.
1 Start the measurement plan with the base alignment match.
After execution of the characteristics that can be measured at the first
position, CALYPSO measures the features that you defined in the Base
Alignment Match utility in the CNC run.
A remark window is displayed showing the name of the alignment
feature and the text Features for aligning the base alignment have to
be measured manually.
CALYPSO switches to manual control of the CMM.
2 Change the position of the mobile measuring system and click OK.
CALYPSO instructs you which features must now be measured manually at the new position.
3 When prompted, measure all features that are required for the calculation of the alignment.
CALYPSO calculates a new base alignment and uses it internally for
the rest of the run for the following characteristics.
If the standard deviation check is activated, an information window
opens once the warning limit has been exceeded in which you can
define the rest of the procedure: Cancel or repeat the last measurement.
If the alignment was not successful, the CNC run will be interrupted
and the stop light will turn red. The message CNC canceled: Base
Alignment cannot be computed appears on the status monitor.
The reason for the failed alignment may be, for example, that a feature
could not be calculated due to insufficient number of points or incorrect probing strategy.

Performing the base alignment match in the dialog


mode
By clicking Execute Manual Run Now in the definition template of
the base alignment match, CALYPSO checks whether all features have
been measured in the old base alignment. If not, the missing features
must be measured again in the old base alignment. The remark Features
for aligning the base alignment have to be measured manually is then
displayed. You must now change the position of the mobile measuring
system and measure all features manually at the new position for the
alignment.

5-126

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Utilities

CAD Presentation utility


Use CAD CAD Presentation to add a CAD-Presentation utility
to the list of characteristics.
Alternatively, you can also click the icon in the Results Presentation
window to add a CAD-Presentation utility in which the current CAD
view is already preset.
Double click to open the definition template for the CAD presentation.

You have the following options:

You can define the output method (screen, printer).

You can select the format of the output (portrait or landscape) by


means of a format file.

You can select the CAD view to be represented.

By way of confirmation, you can immediately output the presentation


by clicking Plot.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

5-127

Utilities

The selected CAD view is output on the selected media (screen, printer)
during the CNC run.

5-128

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Chapter

Editing the measurement plan

.................................................................................................................

This chapter contains:


Overview: Editing the measurement plan ................................................. 62
Editing the entire measurement plan ........................................................ 63
Editing features of the measurement plan .............................................. 629
Formula input and run control ............................................................... 637
Using macros in the measurement plan .................................................. 650
Toolboxes .............................................................................................. 657
Editing the travel paths .......................................................................... 664
Multimedia user information .................................................................. 675

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-1

Overview: Editing the measurement plan

Overview: Editing the measurement plan


You have the following options of editing the created measurement plan:

6-2

You can edit the entire measurement plan [ 63].

You can edit the features of the measurement plan [ 629].

You can enter formulas and define the run control [ 637].

You can use macros [ 650] in the measurement plan.

You can enhance the structure and processing of the measurement


plan by using the tool boxes [ 657].

You can edit the travel paths of the CMM [ 664].

You can add multimedia user information [ 675] to the measurement plan.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Editing the entire measurement plan


Overview: Editing the entire
measurement plan
With CALYPSO you have the following options of editing the entire
measurement plan:

You can save, copy and rename measurement plans [ 63].

You can activate the saving of measurement plan versions [ 64].

You can edit the compatibility of the measurement plan with certain program versions of CALYPSO [ 65].

The stylus system names and stylus names used [ 67] in the
measurement plan can be replaced.

You can use the measurement plan editors [ 68] to modify


settings that are effective throughout the measurement plan in one
or more measurement plan features.

You can define the names which CALYPSO then assigns to features,

characteristics, certain utilities and form and location


plots [ 618].

You can also mirror the entire measurement plan on a selected axis [ 624] (not with Calypso Light).

You can also combine several individual measurement


plans [ 627] to obtain combined evaluations.

Managing measurement plans


With CALYPSO you have the following options of editing an own entire
unlicensed measurement plan:

Saving the measurement plan

Copying a measurement plan

Renaming a measurement plan

NOTICE
You can use the Windows Explorer to save or to delete measurement
plans.
Measurement plan in the
file system

CALYPSO creates a separate folder with the name of the measurement


plan for each measurement plan in the <user directory>\workarea\inspections directory. All subfolders and files in this folder belong to the
measurement plan.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-3

Editing the entire measurement plan

Saving the measurement plan


To save the CAD model together with the measurement plan, you must
define this under File in the CAD settings. Otherwise, the CAD model
is saved separately and can be loaded into other measurement plans.
1 Click the Save Current Measurement Plan icon if you want to
overwrite the old measurement plan.
- or If you want to keep the old measurement plan, select File Save
As and save the measurement plan under a new name.

Copying a measurement plan


1 Select File Move....
2 Select the desired directory in the Search Folder window.
The measurement plan is copied with the previous name into the desired directory.
NOTICE
It is also possible to copy measurement plan directories and files using
the Windows Explorer.

Renaming a measurement plan


1 Save the measurement plan under a new name (File Save As...).
2 Delete the measurement plan with the old name.

Saving measurement plan versions


If the AutoSave function is activated, your measurement plans are
saved automatically at certain intervals. In this case, you can return to one
of the saved versions (depending on the settings).
Playing a video

To play a video about the AutoSave function, click 001_e_Autosave_/


001_Autosave_e.htm.
1 Select Extras Settings Environment Save.

6-4

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

System Set Up
File

Menus

Environment For User Master


Autom. backup copies of the respective active measurement plan
Start
Autom. Backup Copy

Paths

Con!rm activation at CALYPSO start

Language

Dialog before Saving

Dual arm
Optics

Dialog For Measurement Plan Change

Font
Switch off AutoSave for this measurement plan

Dynalog

Backup Copies Directory

Printer

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Zeiss\CALYPS

Dialogs
Export DMIS

Interval Time in Minutes

Default Name
Strategies
No. of Versions

Save
PCM

Current Status

OFF
Switch ON quick save

OK

Cancel

Apply

2 Define the parameters for automatic saving of the measurement plan


versions:
Backup interval
Number of available versions
Backup copies directory
Type of activation of the function
If the function is activated, backup copies of the measurement plan are
saved at regular intervals in the predefined directory.

Editing compatibility settings


Every new version of CALYPSO contains modifications and improvements
of the algorithms and evaluation methods. However, any new measurement plans created in CALYPSO contain the methods and modes of the
current version.
It may be useful for you to run older measurement plans with a more
recent behavior or new measurement plans with an older behavior.
You can define these settings for each individual measurement plan or
(with the appropriate rights) also for several measurement plans.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-5

Editing the entire measurement plan

1 To edit an individual measurement plan, select Resources Compatibility Settings for this Measurement Plan and define
the settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement Plan window.
2 To edit several measurement plans, select Resources Compatibility Settings for several measurement plans and define
the settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement Plans window.
3 Select the corresponding measurement plans.
4 The Performance as if created with Rev. list item allows you to
set the entire behavior of the measurement plan or the measurement
plans to a certain version of CALYPSO.
Filter limit points per wave
Outlier Elimination
Calculate Alignment as Base Alignment
Scanning speed circle referring to surface
Evaluate Features from point recalls
Point Recall via Box with Actual Geometry
Point recall of individual points with path()
Circle path on plane is calculated as for circle
Take into account the offset angle for RT axes measurement with start system
Old positioning for optical measurement fields
DMIS Printout: Unique Feature Names
DMIS Printout: Length of feature name
DMIS Printout: Definition of TOL/WIDTH
DMIS Printout: Source of nominal data for measured features
Take the retract distance for multiple safety data into consideration
Adapt font when printing the custom printout
Staggered end message to FACS
RT navigation: Move to a higher clear position when executing Retract to top.
Optimized travel paths with rotate/swivel position with preset path
Performance as if created with Rev.
Optimized travel performance before stylus system change
Always use Arc Motion mode

5 Define in addition certain additional functions and behaviors.


The Info button provides you with a short explanation of the corresponding setting.

6-6

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Exchanging styli in a measurement plan


The stylus systems and styli to be used are saved with their names in the
measurement plan. When using other stylus system names and stylus
names for the current CMM, it is possible to exchange the names in the
measurement plan. To do so, you do not need to edit each individual
feature.
Prerequisite: The stylus system names to be assigned are known in CALYPSO.
1 Select Resources Stylus system Exchange the stylus
system names / stylus in the measurement plan.
The Exchange the stylus system names / stylus in the
measurement plan window opens.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-7

Editing the entire measurement plan

2 Select the stylus names to be exchanged in the list and assign the desired new name in the to selection field.
3 Click Execute Now! to apply the exchange.

Editing a measurement plan


Measurement plan editors
CALYPSO supports two measurement plan editors:

Purpose of the editors

the measurement plan editor for features (called via Resources Features Settings Editor or the icon in the measurement
plan area on the Measurement Plan tab)

the measurement plan editor for characteristics (called via Resources Characteristics Settings Editor)

The measurement plan editors provide you with a quick and easy way of
checking and changing measurement plan settings and values for the
entire measurement plan or for selected features.
NOTICE
Once you have selected features in the corresponding list of measurement plan features, these are also highlighted after opening the measurement plan editor.

Structure of the editors

The structure of both editors is identical. This illustration shows an example of the measurement plan editor for features.
Measurement Plan Editor Features
** = from higher setting (Measurement Plan/Group)

Clearance Group

!! = Not Available On System


Travel

List of settings

Accept for:
selected features

Measurement Plan

Probing
Stylus system
Units

Selection list
of defaults

Set To

Manual Point Masking


MAN CNC Mode

Type
Cylinder

Value
CP +Z

Setup Mode

Plane

CP -Y

Printer

Point

CP +Z

Plane

CP +Z

CMM Parameters
Geometry (Evaluation Settings)

Evaluation...

Geometry (Nominal Data)

Outlier Elimination

Warning Limits

Filter

Optical Settings

Manual Point Masking

CircTopFroLe
CircTopFroRi
CylFroCe

Pattern
Export Points
Best fit accuracy (free form surface)

Features

CylFroRiDow
Cylinder

CP -Y

CylRiCe

Cylinder

CP +X

Feature types

CircRi

Circle

CP +X

CircRiTop

Circle

CP +X

CylFroRe

Currently valid
settings

2-D LineBack

2D Line

CP +X

PlaFroTop

Plane

CP +Z

ConeTopCe

Cone

CP +Z

Cone Addition1

Circle

OK

Cancel

Help

NOTICE
With settings that cannot be referenced to the feature, the list of features
is empty.

6-8

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Procedure

To make the settings:


1 Select the desired setting.
2 Determine the area of application (entire measurement plan or selected features).
3 Set the desired value.

Working with the context menu

The menu items of the context menu allow you to copy, check individual
columns or the entire measurement plan editor, highlight all or set all to
default.
You can open and close the view of the tree structure completely or partially.

Working with the table


menu

The menu items of the table menu allow you to modify the sorting of the
measurement plan features, browse the table columns and add additional
columns with nominal data to the list of measurement plan features. Depending on the setting, the additional columns are displayed only when
selecting nominal data or always.

Tabular editor

CALYPSO opens a tabular editor for setting the evaluation, filter and
outliers. Here, you can check and change the individual attributes without having to open each individual definition template (Working with
the tabular editor [ 611]).

Editing nominal data

The Geometry (Nominal Data) or Characteristics (Nominal


Data) menu items allows you to display the nominal data of the measurement plan features and to edit them for individual or several measurement plan features.

Further information

Additional information about the dialog boxes of the two measurement


plan editors can be found under Measurement plan editor features and
Measurement plan editor characteristics in the CALYPSO dialog reference
in the Online Help.

Working with the table menu


You can use the menu items of the table menu to edit the table of a
measurement plan editor.
Call the table menu by clicking with the left mouse button in the table
header.
Original order
Alphabetic order
Search...
Customize...

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-9

Editing the entire measurement plan

Menu item

Function

Original order

Sorts the measurement plan features in the table according to the


sequence in the measurement
plan.

Alphabetic order

Alphabetically sorts the measurement plan features in the table

Search

Opens the Search window that


can be used to search for texts in
the columns of the table.

Customize

Opens the Customize view dialog box. In this window, you can
define the displayed columns with
nominal data for the editor.

Customize view
You extend the table of a measurement plan editor by additional columns. These columns are only used for displaying the value and not for
editing.
Use Customize in the table menu to open the Customize view dialog
box.
Customize view
Edit
Displayed columns
Comment
Inside/Outside
Alignment
X
Y
Z
NX
NY
NZ
W1
W2
Inclination Angle
Display always

OK

Cancel

Here you select the additional columns to be displayed in the table. The
order of the additional columns is preset.

6-10

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

If the window of the measurement plan editor becomes too small to display all additional columns, the preset columns Name, Type and Value will be fixed and a scrollbar displayed.

Working with the tabular editor


CALYPSO opens a tabular editor for setting the evaluation, filter and
outliers. This illustration shows an example of the measurement plan
editor for features.

Selected line

Edit modes

List of settings

Edit line for multiple


selection

Table with all features and the


corresponding attributes

There are two edit modes available for the table. To switch between the
two modes, use F2 or select/deselect the Edit line entry in the context
menu.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-11

Editing the entire measurement plan

Individual mode
Carry out the changes directly in the individual lines.

Multiple mode (editing several lines at the same time)


Highlight the desired lines. Carry out the changes in the upper edit
line.

Measurement plan editor features

The Measurement Plan Editor Features makes it possible to show


and hide the characteristics of a feature (if available) in the lines underneath by double-clicking a line. You can edit these lines in the same way
as the other lines.
The Change to geometry entry in the context menu is active if you
selected exactly a line with a feature. By selecting Change to geometry, the line in which the feature which is used as the characteristic is
entered is selected.

Measurement plan editor characteristics

The Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics makes it possible


to show and hide the references of a characteristic in the lines underneath
by double-clicking a line. You can edit these lines in the same way as the
other lines.
Additional information about the dialog boxes of the two windows can
be found under Measurement plan editor features and Measurement
plan editor characteristics in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online
Help.

Editing nominal data in the measurement plan


editor
You can display and modify the nominal data of all features in your measurement plan in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
You can display and modify the nominal data of all characteristics of your
measurement plan in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
The list form provides you with a better overview than in the definition
template of the individual feature.
If you select Geometry (Nominal Data) and the desired type of
nominal data in the submenu, the measurement plan editor changes its
appearance (example: measurement plan editor for features).

6-12

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Measurement Plan Editor Features


X
Travel
Probing
Stylus system
Units

Show formulas

Manual Point Masking

Set To
Type

MAN CNC Mode

Value

Cylinder

Setup Mode

Plane
Point

Printer

Plane

CMM Parameters

Plane
Geometry (Evaluation Settings)

Cylinder

Geometry (Nominal Data)

Inside/Outside

Warning Limits

Alignment

Plane

Optical Settings

Circle

Circle

CircTopFroLe
CircTopFroRi

CylFroCe

NX

CylFroRiDow
NY

CylFroRe

Plane

Circle
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder

CylRiCe

NZ

Cylinder

CircRi

W1

Circle

CircRiTop

W2

Circle

2-D LineBack

Inclination Angle

PlaFroTop

Rotation Angle

2D Line
Plane
Cone

ConeTopCe

Start Angle

Cone Addition1
Angle Range

PlaRe

Diameter

PlaBack

Circle
Plane
Plane

Diameter Two
Length
Width

Cancel

Help

This is where you can modify each individual value, but you cannot make
any modifications that are effective throughout the measurement plan.
If you select Show formulas, no numerical values will be displayed but
only the formulas defined in the features. You can modify the formulas.

Details on the measurement plan settings:


Offset for laser tracker
Laser measurement with
reflectors

When using a laser tracker together with a reflector tool for the measurement, the result of the measurement always refers to the center point
of the reflector sphere. The surface of the workpiece shows a tool-dependent distance in two possible directions between this point and the
point to be measured.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-13

Editing the entire measurement plan

Reflector
diameter
Workpiece

Offset 1

Offset 2

Reference plane

CALYPSO has to use the valid offset in the correct direction for the evaluation of the measuring results.
CALYPSO handles the reflector tools as a special stylus. Therefore, CALYPSO does not perform any stylus radius correction but adds a tooldependent offset, the reflector tool offset, or the reflector radius to
the measured coordinates.
The Offset 1 and Offset 2 applying to the corresponding reflector tool
must be entered in the stylus system management when creating the
stylus.
The offset to be used for the feature type is set by default in CALYPSO.
You can display this setting in the Measurement Plan Editor Features. This is where you can set the desired offset for feature types as
well as for individual features of the measurement plan:
Value

Meaning

Standard

The default tool offset for the feature.

No Offset

No tool offset. Instead, the reflector radius is used.

6-14

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Value

Meaning

Offset 1

Tool Offset1 for the stylus radius correction.

Offset 2

Tool Offset2 used for the stylus radius correction.

Details on the measurement plan settings:


Point masking
Technical background

Involved strategies

Settings

During scanning, oscillations of the CMM may occur which have an effect
on the measuring results. This applies mainly to the acceleration phase at
the beginning and, to a lesser extent, to the deceleration phase at the
end of the scanning process. The inaccurately measured points can be
removed from the evaluation.

With closed scanning paths, CALYPSO compensates the effect by


scanning the path with overlapping by the CMM and CALYPSO does
not include the points of the overlapping area in the evaluation. This
does not depend on the point masking settings, except for curves.

With open scanning paths (and curves), you compensate the effect
by masking a certain area at the beginning and the end of the scanning path. This setting is used for each individual scanning path in the
feature.

The point masking applies to the following scanning paths (not in the
case of discrete-point measurement):

Circular section with circles, cylinders, cones or spheres if the scanned


angle range is less than or equal to 360

Large and small circle paths with a torus if the scanned angle range
is less than or equal to 360

Helix with circles, cylinders, cones

VAST helix with cylinders

Grid (lines and meanders) on planes

Polyline on planes

Circle on plane on planes if the scanned angle range is less than or


equal to 360

Line of 2D lines

Unknown contour with circles, cylinders, cones, spheres, ellipses,


slots, rectangles, torus, 2D and 3D curves

Curve segments of 2D and 3D curves

You can carry out masking of the points at two points at the beginning
and at the end of the scanning path:

for all measurement plans in the default settings (Extras Settings Measurement, Point masking tab)

for individual measurement plans and for individual features in the


Measurement Plan Editor Features

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-15

Editing the entire measurement plan

You have two options for point masking which may also be combined:

Point masking after time interval: You define the travel time
in seconds at the beginning and the end of the scanning process. The
points measured during this period are masked. In the default settings, you can transfer the values 0.25 sec and 0 sec to the input fields
using the Default button. These are values which are generally used
in practice.

Point masking according to the number: You define the


number of points to be masked at the beginning and the end of the
scanning path.

NOTICE
If you combine both masking options, all points which fulfill at least one
of the two conditions are masked.
Example

The following table shows the result of the point masking when both
options are combined:

Masked

Points

after time interval

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

according to the number 01


(2, 4)

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

05

06

07

08

09

points used
Effect

The masked points are treated in the same way as points which are outside the evaluation range. They can be displayed in the form plot and in
the CAD window, but are not used for the evaluation of the feature. The
masked points are also not counted in the number of points (printout).

Details on the measurement plan settings:


Decimal places for output
CALYPSO makes it possible to set the number of decimal places for the
display of the values and the output of the results.
Display of the values

The settings for the display in the complete system are defined in the
default settings (Environment) on the Language index card. You can
enter between 0 and 6 decimals.
This setting applies to the values in all features and characteristics, i.e. for
actual and nominal values as well as for tolerances.

Output of results

For the output of results you can define the number of decimal places
which is different from the setting for the display of values.
You can define this setting for the entire measurement plan or for an
individual characteristic in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics. This setting has an influence on the representation of the
nominal and actual values and the tolerances in the following outputs:

6-16

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Display in CAD window

Default printout

Default printout, custom printout and BasicReport

Form and location plots

Table files for characteristics (furthermore, the table file contains the
decimalplaces column showing the number of decimal places of
the corresponding characteristic)

Define the setting under Units Number of decimal places in the


Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics. You have the following options:

Possible inputs

Input

Effect

** Proposal

Accept for measurement plan: Number of decimal places in the default settings
Accept for selected features: Number of decimal places in the higher-order
element (group or measurement plan)

0 to 6

Fixed number of decimal places

-1

Automatic mode 1: the tolerance width (the difference between the upper and
lower tolerance) determines the number of decimal places:
Tolerance width > 1 results in 1 decimal place
Tolerance width < 1 results in 2 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.1 results in 3 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.01 results in 4 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.001 results in 5 decimal places

-2

Automatic mode 2: the effective decimal places of the tolerances and the nominal
value determine the number of decimal places of the output:
The highest value of the effective decimal places (decimal places without filled
zeros) of the tolerances and the nominal value increased by 1 determines the
number of decimal places for the output of the characteristic.
Example 1: Nominal value = 235.0500
Upper tolerance = 0.1000
Lower tolerance = -0.1000
Number of decimal places = max (2,1,1) + 1 = 3
Example 2:
Nominal value = 21.4500
Maximum dimension = 21.455
Minimum dimension = 21.445
Number of decimal places = max (2,3,3) + 1 = 4

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-17

Editing the entire measurement plan

Specifying feature names in the


measurement plan
Name default in CALYPSO
CALYPSO assigns a name to new measurement plan features, utilities as
well as to form and location plots. You can influence the assignment of
names.

Newly defined features

Automatically assigned names


CALYPSO assigns element names to newly defined features. The serial
number is attached to the name. The numbering is also continued when
changing the language.
Example: Circle1, Circle2, Circle3, Cerchio4, etc.

Derived features

CALYPSO also assigns a derived name to the characteristics saved automatically by specifying tolerances in a feature. The name consists of the
name of the characteristic, a blank and the name of the feature.
Examples: X value Circle3, Z value Perpendicular1, etc.

Individually assigned names


You can influence the assignment of new names in CALYPSO.

Changing element
names

Changing derived names

You can define your own defaults for element names in the measurement plan.

You can change the way derived names are created.

Follow the following steps to enable own defaults for the element names:

You define own default names for the desired features, characteristics, utilities and form and location plots (see File with default name:
Internal feature names [ 620] in the CALYPSO Online Help).

Save these names in a text file with special format (Format of the
file with default names (reference) [ 619] and Creating and editing the file with default names [ 619]).

Activate the default names and load the prepared file (Loading a
file with default names [ 624]).

To change derived names:


1 Select Extras Settings Environment and open the Default
Name notebook page.
2 Under Derived names you select the order of the two elements of
the derived names as well as the separator.

6-18

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Creating and editing the file with default


names
The file with the default names must be stored as an ASCII text file. It can
be created and edited with a common text editor or with MS Excel.

Creating a file with default names using MS Excel


1 Enter the header line along with the lines with the default names in
Excel.
2 Save the file in the Text (separated tabs) format.
3 Confirm the message in Excel with OK and Yes.

Editing the file with the default names in MS Excel


1 Load the desired file with the default names into Excel and select Text
Files as file type.
2 Accept the defaults in the subsequently displayed Text conversion
assistant dialog box with Complete.
3 Edit the file in Excel.
4 After editing, save the file again in the Text (separated tabs) format.

Reference: Format of the file with default


names
CALYPSO accepts any ASCII text file as a file with default names that has
the form indicated below.
Structure of the file

The file consists of several similarly structured lines. Each line is composed
of eight entries that are each separated by a tab.

Header line

The first line of the file, the header line, contains the following entries
(divided by a tab):
Symbol Comment Name1 Name2 Name3 Name4 Name5 IndexColumn

Name lines

The lines with the default names follow thereafter. A separate line is created for each element type that is supposed to receive an individual default name.
A default name can be composed of up to five partial names. One of the
partial names must contain the start value for the sequential index. Which
partial name that is, is defined extra for each line in the IndexColumn
(column 8) by input of the column number.
Example:
Icon Comment Name1
Name2
Name3 Name4 Name5 IndexColumn
circle Bore Table_ Bore_ 1
5
line2d Edge
Table_ Edge_ 1
5
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-19

Editing the entire measurement plan

All features of the Circle type receive the names Table_Bore_x where
x is assigned a sequential number beginning with 1.
The columns have the following meanings:
Column

Meaning

Icon

The internal name used by CALYPSO for the corresponding feature,


e.g. circle for the Circle feature.
An overview of all the internal names can be found under File with
default name: Internal feature names [ 620] in the Online Help.

Comment

Any comment that, for example, explains the allocation of a feature


to the default name.

Name1

Partial names out of which the default name is composed.

...

One of these columns must contain the start value for the index.

Name5
IndexColumn

The number of the column that contains the start value for the index.
Value range from 3 (Name1) to 7 (Name5).
When the first character in the specified column is not a number, the
start value 0 is used.
If still other characters follow in the specified column of a number,
they will be ignored.
Example: 42_Circle_2 designates 42 as start value, Circle designates 0 as start value.

File with default name: Internal feature names


Individual default names can be defined for the following features of the
measurement plan:
Feature name (English)

Feature name (English)

Internal name

2 Point Diameter

2-Point-Diameter

twoPtDistance

2D Line

Line2D

line2d

Curve

Curve

d2Curve

3D Best Fit

Best Fit 3D

bestfit3d

3D Line

Line3D

line3d

3D Curve

Curve

d3Curve

General Curve

General Curve

gCurve

General Surface

General Surface

gSurf

Base Alignment Match

Adjust Basesystem

adjustBS

Width

Width

width

6-20

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Feature name (English)

Feature name (English)

Internal name

Flatness

Flatness

gdtFlat

Flatness Ref

Flatness with reference

gdtFlatRef

Profile

Profile

gdtProfile

Straightness

Straightness

gdtStraightCart

Straightness Ref

Straightness with reference

gdtStraightCartRec

Coaxiality

Coaxiality

gdtCoa

Concentricity

Concentricity

gdtCon

Line Profile

Line Profile

gdtProfileofALine

Angularity

Angularity

gdtAngle

Parallelism

Parallelism

gdtPar

Axial Runout

Run flat

gdtRunFlat

Position

Position

gdtPosPol2d

Perpendicularity

Perpendicularity

gdtPerp

Roundness

Roundness

gdtRound

Roundness Ang

Roundness with reference

gdtRoundRef

Radial Runout

Run round

gdtRunRound

GDT Symmetry

Symmetry

gdtSym

Cylindricity

Cylinder form

gdtCyl

Distance

Distance 2d

distance2d

Cartesian Distance

Distance cartesian

distanceCart

2D Polar Distance

Distance polar 2d

distancePol2d

3D Polar Distance

Distance polar 3d

distancePol3d

Dist. Symmetry point

Distance symmetry point

distance

Rotation Angle

Rotation angle

rotationAngle

Diameter

Diameter

diameter

Diameter Two

Diameter 2

diameter2id

Plane

Plane and Offset Plane

plane

Plane with Offset

Plane with offset

planeOffset

Probing system qualification

Probe Calibration

probeCalib

Feature Angle

Element angle

elementAngle

Ellipse

Ellipse

ellipse

Elliptical Cylinder

Ellipse

ellipticalCylinder

Erosion Module

Eroding Module

erodingModule

Surface Area

Surface Area

area

Form

Form

form

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-21

Editing the entire measurement plan

Feature name (English)

Feature name (English)

Internal name

Gear

GEAR PRO

GEAR PRO

Geometry Best Fit

Geometry Best Fit

bestfit3dToNominalGeometry

Graphics Element

Graphics element

graphicElement

Group

Group

setOfTasks

Half Cone Angle

Half apex angle

apexAngleHalf

HOLOS

HOLOS

HOLOS

Cone

Cone

cone

Cone Angle

Apex angle

apexAngle

Cone Addition

ConeAddition

coneAddition

Inclination Angle

Inclination angle

inclinationAngle

Kink Point

Kink

kink

Alignment

Coordinate System

coordsys

Load Alignment

Load Coordinate System

recallPCS

Delete Alignment

Delete Coordinate System

deletePCS

Save Alignment

Save Coordinate System

savePCS

Circle

Circle

circle

Circle on Cone

Circle On Cone

circleOnCone

Circle in contour best fit

Circle in Contour - Best Fit

circleInContour

Sphere

Sphere

sphere

Sphere Point

Sphere Point

spherePoint

Curve Form

Curve form

ESCurveCurveForm

Length

Length

len

Slot

Slot

slot

Gauge Correction Qualification

Gauge Calibration

gaugeCalibration

Linear Pitch

Linear Pitch

linearPitch

Perpendicular

Perpendicularity

perp

Length of perpendicular

Length of perpendicular

lengthOfAxis

Maximum

Maximum

maximum

Maximum Point

MaxPoint

maxPoint

Maximum Feature

Maximum Element

maximumGeo

Minimum

Minimum

minimum

Minimum Point

MinPoint

minPoint

Minimum Feature

Minimum Element

minimumGeo

Average

Average

average

6-22

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Feature name (English)

Feature name (English)

Internal name

Average-Feature

Average Element

averageGeo

Offset Plane

Offset Plane

offsetPlane

P6 Alignment

P6 Alignment

p6Alignment

Polar position Height

Height in polar coordinates

coordPolHeight

Polar position Radius

Radians in polar coordinates

coordPolRadius

Polar position Angle

Angle in polar coordinates

coordPolAngle

Projection

Projection

projection

Projection Angle One

Projected angle 1

a1id

Projection Angle Two

Projected angle 2

a2id

Point

Point

point

Space Point Distance

Space point

gdtSpacePoint

Radius Measurement

Radians measurement

radiusMeasurement

Radius

Radius

radius

Radius Two

Radius 2

radius2id

Radius Point

Radius Point

radiusPoint

Rectangle

Rectangle

rectangle

Result Element

Result Element

resultElement

RPS Alignment

RPS Alignment

rpsAlignment

Circular Pitch

Circular Pitch

circularPitch

Intersection

Intersection

intersection

Step Point

Step Point

stepPoint

Stepped Cylinder

Stepped Cylinder

steppedCylinder

GDT Symmetry

Symmetry

symmetry

Symmetry Plane

Symmetry Plane

symmetryPlane

Symmetry Point

Symmetry Point

symmetryPoint

Tangent

Tangent

tangent

Text element

Text element

textelement

Torus

Torus

torus

Turbine Blade

Curve Blade

CurveBlade

Edge Point

EdgePoint

edgePoint

Maximum Waviness

Waveness

waveness

Angle between Features

Angle between features

anglebF

Angle Point

Angle Point

anglePoint

X Value

X-Value

xValue

Y Value

Y-Value

yValue

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-23

Editing the entire measurement plan

Feature name (English)

Feature name (English)

Internal name

Z Value

Z-Value

zValue

Gear

GEAR PRO

GEAR PRO

Cylinder

Cylinder

cylinder

You find all this information in the NamePatternsdefault.txt file in the


<user directory>\data\config directory.

Loading a file with default names


Default names can be set for features, characteristics, some utilities, as
well as for form and location plots, and then be stored in a text file.
This text file can be assigned to a measurement plan that then utilizes
your default names for newly created features.

Note: When a file with default names is loaded in which not all possible
default names are defined, only those names contained in the file replace
the names already defined.
1 Select Extras Settings Environment and open the Default
Name notebook page..
2 Tick the Activate name allocation check box.
3 Select the file with the default names and click Open.

Mirroring a measurement plan


Mirrored measurement plans
You can mirror an entire measurement plan along a coordinate axis of
the base alignment.
All features with their strategies (e.g. probing points) are mirrored on the
plane formed by the other two coordinate axes.

6-24

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

Mirror along x axis

About mirroring

Bear the following in mind:

No actual values are mirrored. The actual values are deleted prior to
mirroring.

After mirroring, the nominal values of the characteristics that mirroring can change (these include distances and X values, for example)
are updated.

You have to assign styli to the mirrored measurement plan manually.

The coordinate systems in the measurement plan are not mirrored,


because the mirrored direction of rotation would be counterclockwise. The coordinate systems are computed again on the basis of the
mirrored elements.

The DSE angles are saved in the machine system in CALYPSO. If you
want to mirror also DSE angles, you must specify this separately. A
valid base alignment is needed for this purpose.

NOTICE
Parameters and patterns are not mirrored. If your measurement plan
contained parameters or patterns, they would have to be re-entered after
mirroring.
Formulas can also not be adapted automatically. If you mirror a measurement plan with formulas, you must check the formulas in the mirrored
measurement plan with regard to correctness and correct them if necessary.

Mirroring a measurement plan


When a measurement plan is mirrored along a coordinate axis of the base
alignment, all features with their strategies (e.g. probing points) are mirrored on the plane formed by the other two coordinate axes.

Note: The exceptions are 2D curves and 3D curves.


61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-25

Editing the entire measurement plan

1 Open the measurement plan you want to mirror.


2 Select Plan Advanced Mirror Measurement Plan.
You will be informed if formulas are used in the measurement plan.

In this case, you can interrupt the process and see in the Features
with Formulas window which features contain formulas in order
to check and adapt them if necessary. To access the function again,
select Plan Advanced Mirror Measurement Plan.
3 Use Yes to proceed with the mirroring of the measurement plan.
The Mirror Measurement Plan dialog box appears on the screen.

4 Click Mirror on plane and select the mirror plane.

6-26

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing the entire measurement plan

5 Go to Change stylus system data and select a different stylus


system, if applicable.
The data applicable to your selection is listed in the display area.
6 When using a DSE: Activate Mirror DSE Angle (base alignment
required) to mirror its angle.
7 Click Mirror.
8 Save the mirror measurement plan under a different name.

Combining several measurement plans


Combining several measurement plans
You can combine measurement plans and thereby create combined evaluations. The measurement plans you combine in this way need not necessarily be on the CMM they can be created and run on CMMs at different points in the network.
The primary use of this function, however, is to generate a common log
for measurements on a horizontal-arm CMM with two measuring columns.
NOTICE
If you want to combine the measurement plans of a horizontal-arm CMM
with two measuring columns, you should, if possible, use the same features for alignment (definition of the base alignment).
To combine measurement plans, you must create a master measurement plan on a CMM designated for the purpose, and import the measurement plans from other CMMs into this master.

Creating a master measurement plan


After performing measurements on a horizontal-arm CMM with two
measuring arms, you can combine the measurement plans to form a
master measurement plan in order to create combined evaluations.
1 Select File Create Master Measurement Plan.
CALYPSO opens a new, empty measurement plan whose name begins
with the character $. CALYPSO uses the character $ to identify a
master measurement plan.
The next step is to import the measurement plans run to date on individual networked CMMs onto your computer.
2 Select Resources Import Measurement Plan.
3 Navigate to the desired measurement plan in the Load Measurement Plan window and click Open.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all desired measurement plans.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-27

Editing the entire measurement plan

All nominal values, actual values and tolerances are imported into the
master measurement plan.
The names of the individual features and characteristics have to be
unique only within a single measurement plan incorporated into the
master: In the master measurement plan itself, each name of a feature
or characteristic is preceded by the name of the original measurement
plan, with a point as separator.
Example: Two features of the same name, Cylinder1, from the
measurement plans Testblock1 and Base are named Testblock1.Cylinder1 and Base.Cylinder1 in the master measurement
plan.
5 Edit the master measurement plan: Delete superfluous characteristics
and add constructions of features across individual measurement
plans.
6 Save the master measurement plan.

Note: When saved in the file system, the $ will be removed from
the name. To make it easier to distinguish the master measurement
plans from regular ones, you should save them in a separate directory.

Obtaining a combined evaluation


The master measurement plan is not used to measure features: its purpose is only to calculate combinations of several measurement plans.

Performing the calculation with a master measurement plan


1 Open the master measurement plan.
2 Select Plan CNC-Start to start the CNC run.
The Start Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
3 In the CMM group, go to Navigate-Feature To Feature and select the Use Position Points Only entry.
4 If individual measurement plans have been run in the interim and you
want to update the results: Tick the Clear existing results check
box.
The current values (actual values, nominal values and tolerances) of
the individual measurement plans are reimported and the results are
updated.
5 Click OK to start the CNC run.

Note: No further measurements take place in this CNC run. Instead,


the process is used for calculations only, and the results are printed
out or generated as result files.

6-28

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing features of the measurement plan

Editing features of the measurement plan


Overview: Editing features of the
measurement plan
You can edit a measurement plan at any time. You have the following
options:

adding features or characteristics [ 629]

highlighting features or characteristics [ 630]

editing features or characteristics [ 630]

copying features or characteristics [ 631]

copying features together with characteristics and datums [ 631] (copying with details)

moving features or characteristics [ 632]

moving features or characteristics to the Waste Basket or deleting


them [ 632]

restoring contents from the Waste Basket [ 633]

grouping features or characteristics [ 633]

copying features, characteristics and groups together with datums

into another measurement plan [ 633]

renaming features, characteristics or groups [ 635]

undoing unsaved changes [ 635]

searching for measurement plan features in the measurement plan


and [ 636]

converting the selected cylinders in the measurement plan to cir-

cles. [ 636]
NOTICE
All of the following sections assume that you have a measurement plan
open on the Calypso user desk.

Adding features or characteristics to a


measurement plan
You can extend your measurement plan:

You can learn how to add a feature at Defining features [ 42].

You can learn how to add a characteristic at Defining characteristics [ 57].

The features and characteristics are located in the measurement plan area
on different tabs. However, you can add characteristics and features ir61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-29

Editing features of the measurement plan

respective of which tab is on top. CALYPSO automatically adds new features or characteristics to the corresponding tab.
The icons on the tabs are a toggle for switching from one tab to the other.

Highlighting features and characteristics


To work with measurement plan features, you first have to highlight
them. You have the following options:
Selection

Operation

one feature

Click the icon

several features

Hold down the CTRL key and click icons

several connected features

Click the first feature, press and hold down the SHIFT KEY and click the
last feature
The selected measurement plan features have a dark gray background.
When you select a characteristic, its features in the CAD window are displayed in color.

Working with measurement plan features


1 Open the context menu and use the desired function for the selected
features.

Editing a measurement plan feature


You have two options of editing the values and properties of a measurement plan feature.

Open the measurement plan feature in the measurement plan area


by double clicking the icon or by highlighting it and clicking the Open
selected object icon.
You can then edit the values and settings of the measurement plan
feature in the definition template.

Open the corresponding measurement plan editor and edit the values
and settings (nominal data) of the measurement plan feature.
For features, you edit here the values for inside/outside, inclination
angle, rotation angle, start angle, angle range, diameter, diameter 2,
length and width.
For characteristics, you edit here the nominal value, upper and lower
tolerance, geometrical features and datums.

6-30

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing features of the measurement plan

Copying measurement plan features


Copying features or characteristics
Features or characteristics can be copied. This is a quick way to add another feature or characteristic of the same type.
What does a copy contain?

A copy does not contain the measured data of the original feature only
the properties, nominal data and tolerances.
1 Highlight the features you want to copy.
2 Press CTRL+C or click the Copy icon.
3 If you want to add the features to another measurement plan, open
the desired measurement plan.
4 Click the desired position in the list.
5 Press CTRL+V or click the Paste icon.
The features or characteristics will be pasted into the list at the position
you selected.

Simply copying and copying with details


When you just copy features, the corresponding characteristics and references are not copied. If you also copy the desired characteristic or the
reference, these copies are not connected with the copy of the feature,
but merely with the initial feature.
Example

You copy Cone1 and Cone Addition1(Cone1). This delivers Cone2 and
Cone Addition2(Cone1). However, if you want to obtain Cone2 and Cone
Addition2(Cone2), you must copy the Cone Addition1 together with its
references.
To copy characteristics and references with a feature, use the Copy with
details [ 631] function.

Copying features with details


To copy characteristics and datums together with a feature, use the
Copy with details function.
What does a copy with
details contain?

The Copy with details function creates a new feature with the properties, nominal values and tolerances of the original feature. The measured values are not copied. Furthermore, copies of the corresponding
characteristics and datums of the original are created and connected to
the copy of the feature.
1 Highlight the features you want to copy with details.
2 Press CTRL+C or click the Copy icon.
3 If you want to add the features to another measurement plan, open
the desired measurement plan.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-31

Editing features of the measurement plan

4 Click the new position in the list and then select Paste Contents in
the context menu.
The Paste Contents... window is opened.

5 Tick the check box for the desired details and confirm with OK.
The new features will be pasted into the list at the position you selected. The copies of the corresponding characteristics and datums are
pasted to the corresponding tab.

Moving features or characteristics


You can change the order of the features and characteristics in the list in
the measurement plan area. The order of characteristics determines the
order of measurements when the measurement plan is executed.
You have the following options of moving features or characteristics:
1 Highlight the features you want to move.
2 Drag the features to the desired position in the list.

Deleting features or characteristics


You can remove highlighted features and characteristics from the measurement plan in a variety of ways:
1 Cutting an element
Use CTRL+X to move the features to the clipboard. The feature that was
last cut can be pasted using CTRL+V.
2 Moving an element to the Waste Basket
Drag the feature to the Waste Basket icon.
You can drag the feature in the waste basket to any measurement
plan.
3 Deleting an element for good
In the context menu, select Delete.

6-32

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing features of the measurement plan

Working with the waste basket


CALYPSO gathers all of the elements which were dragged to the Waste
Basket icon in the Waste Basket.

Note: As soon as CALYPSO is terminated, the waste basket is emptied.

Showing the contents


1 To show the contents of the waste basket, click the Waste Basket
icon.

Loading an element from the waste basket


1 To load an element from the waste basket, drag it to the measurement
plan area.
A copy of the feature will be added in the measurement plan area while
the original copy will remain in the Waste Basket.

Deleting an element for good


1 To delete an element from the waste basket, highlight it and select
Delete in the context menu.

Grouping and ungrouping characteristics


Grouping measurement
plan features

Sometimes a measurement plan has so many characteristics that it gets


cumbersome to view and edit. In this case, group any measurement plan
features.
Each group is assigned a name and an individual icon in the list of features
or characteristics.
You can read about how to create these groups and ungroup them in
Defining the scope of measurement [ 73].

Defining mini-plans

If you want to evaluate only certain characteristics, define a characteristics


group, known as a mini-plan, within the measurement plan. Mini-plans
have the advantage that they can be selected as scope of measurement
when starting the CNC run.
This allows you to check, edit and run this mini-plan, but leaves the other
characteristics unchanged in the measurement plan area.
You can read about how to create mini-plans and ungroup them in
Defining the scope of measurement [ 73].

Copying features with references


Sometimes, certain already defined features and measurement plan components are required in another measurement plan.
During normal copying, the features and characteristics, but not the connected features and measurement plan components, are copied into another measurement plan.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-33

Editing features of the measurement plan

If you copy with references, you can use features and entire parts of
your measurement plan in another measurement plan without losing the
connections and references of the features.
1 Highlight in the corresponding measurement plan list the features you
want to copy with references.
2 Select Copy with References in the context menu.
3 Open the measurement plan into which you want to paste the features, open the desired list of features or characteristics and select
Paste with References in the context menu.

You will see the list of selected features which are currently to be
pasted.
4 Define the type of pasting into the measurement plan using OK just
in case names are identical.
The features will be pasted into the measurement plan with a new
name if necessary.
The copied features and references are then stored in the measurement
plan lists:
Once you have selected a feature, the copied features will be pasted. The
corresponding characteristics and alignments will be added to the end of
the measurement plan page.
Once you have selected a characteristic, the copied characteristics and
alignments will then be pasted. The corresponding features will be added
to the end of the feature page.

6-34

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Editing features of the measurement plan

If no feature has been selected, the copied features will be added to the
end of their corresponding list.
Styli and travel path settings (e.g. retract distance, clearance distance and
speed) are generally transferred from the original measurement plan.
However, if this data in the initial measurement plan originated from the
measurement plan-specific predefinitions, the values will adopt new values after pasting according to the predefinitions of the measurement plan
in which the feature has been pasted.

Renaming measurement plan features


You can name each measurement plan feature individually.

Note: You should name features before you define them (probe them, in
other words).
You have the following options:
1 Changing the name in the definition template
2 Changing the name in the measurement plan area
In the context menu, use the F2 key or the Rename entry to enter a
name and a comment.
The comment is output in each printout for this characteristic.

Undoing changes in the measurement


plan
In There is no way of undoing an action in CALYPSO while the measurement plan is being edited.
The Edit Undo last probing command makes it only possible to
delete single probing points within a feature.
However, you can revert to the last saved version of your measurement
plan.

Note: All changes made since the last time the measurement plan was
saved will be lost.
1 Save the measurement plan without saving it beforehand.
2 Reopen the measurement plan.
The contents of the measurement plan are now as they were when last
saved.
To limit the loss of routine procedures, you can use the AutoSave function (see Saving measurement plan versions [ 64]).

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-35

Editing features of the measurement plan

Searching and replacing measurement


plan feature names
You can look for specific names of features, characteristics and groups in
a measurement plan and replace them with other names if necessary.

Note: CALYPSO always checks in the currently displayed list, i.e. either in
the list of characteristics or list of features.
1 Click the Search icon.
2 Select the name of the feature you need in the Find/Replace window.
You can specify the search:
Differentiate between cases
Search for whole words only
Search in comments and text elements only
CALYPSO checks in the current list and highlights the next entry found.
3 Activate the Replace tab to replace names.

Converting selected cylinders to circles


The measurement of a cylinder takes more time than the measurement
of a circle and in many cases delivers too much information. Therefore,
we recommend measuring circles instead of cylinders.
You can convert several cylinders of the measurement plan to circles. All
circles converted at the same time sit at their cylinders at the same relative
measuring height. You can predefine this relative measuring height.

Note: By selecting all cylinders for conversion, all cylinders will be converted - with the exception of the cylinders that are used as primary or
secondary reference in the base alignment.
1 Select Plan Measurement Plan Functions Convert cylinder to circles.
The Selected cylinders will be converted to circles window
shows a list of all cylinders of the measurement plan with the exception
of the cylinders that are used as primary or secondary reference in the
base alignment.
By default, all cylinders that you selected in the list of features are also
selected in this list.
2 Highlight the desired cylinders.
3 Enter the desired relative height at which the circles should be created.

Note: Specification is made in percent; the height is measured from


the origin of the local feature alignment. When a value of 50% (default) is entered, the circle is created at half the cylinder height.
4 Press OK to confirm.

6-36

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Formula input and run control

Formula input and run control


Overview of the formula input and run
control
The PCM Technology option gives you many options for the run control
and programming of CNC runs via CALYPSO. However, some basic options for the control of the CNC run are already included in the CALYPSO
base program:

Many input fields allow you to enter formulas [ 638] instead of


constant values.

You can conveniently adopt functions and parameters from the function and parameter list.

You can have the features and characteristics which contain formulas displayed on the screen [ 639].

You can set conditions [ 640].

You can place loops around characteristics [ 642].

With the aid of external batch files with Windows system commands,
you can start external programs and execute other commands during the CNC run [ 648].

Formula input
By entering formulas you can

calculate function values of measurement results (sin, cos...)

use operators to link measurement results with constants

use operators to interlink multiple measurement results.

NOTICE
The decimal separator in formulas is the point. The comma is used exclusively as separator.

Formulas in input fields for angles


NOTICE
If you enter a formula for an angle, the calculated value is read as a radian
measure. However, the corresponding value in degrees is shown in the
input field.
If the result of the formula you entered is, for example, 90, the field for
the angle shows the value -63.3798 (degrees). To ensure that the input
field for the angle shows 90, you must enter the corresponding radian
measure in the formula.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-37

Formula input and run control

If the expression does not produce a radian measure but a value in degrees, you must therefore add *pi/180 to it or use the rad function for
it: rad(value in degrees). Thus, the radian measure is calculated by the
formula and the input field for the angle shows the exact calculated numerical value in degrees.
Formula input

Calculation

Display in the input field

90

5156,6202

-63,3798

90*pi/180

90,0000

90,0000

rad(90)

90,0000

90,0000

1.570796

90,0000

90,0000

Entering formulas
Various input fields allow you to enter formulas instead of absolute values
and to make the value used dependent on other values or measuring
results.

Defining formulas
1 Select Formula in the context menu of the input field.
2 Enter the formula in the Formula window:
CALYPSO helps you when viewing the syntaxes for formulas:
Function opens a list of all operators, functions and commands
as well as of all available parameters.
Double-click a feature to transfer it to the formula input field.
Loop inserts a loop variable in the formula.
Double-click an attribute to insert the return value of the characteristic or feature into the formula.
Compute shows the formula's return value for test purposes.
3 Press OK to confirm.
The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from which
you called the formula input. Note that the color of this field has changed
to yellow.

Entering formulas for clearance planes/


clearance groups
You can use formulas to define the assignment of clearance planes and
groups in the clearance data and travel paths of a feature. In the formulas,
you must assign a language-neutral designation to the clearance planes
and groups.

6-38

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Formula input and run control

Element

Name

Internal
name

Clearance plane

CP +X

SP +X

Clearance group

CG +X

GRP +X

RT clearance plane

RTCP +x

RTSP +X

RT clearance group

RTG +X

RTG +X

Example: If you define param=SP +Z and enter param - then CP +Z


will be displayed.

Entering formulas for clearance planes/clearance


groups
Conditions:
The definition template of the feature is open.
1 Select the Formula entry in the in the menu of the Clearance
Group input field.
The Formula dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Enter the desired formulas.
After input of the formula, the background of the input field will be
highlighted in yellow.
The value of the parameter will be computed and displayed if possible.
3 Select the Input Field entry in the in the menu of the Clearance
Group input field to cancel the entered formula.
NOTICE
The current value of the formula is displayed in the Measurement Plan
Editor Features, but cannot be modified there.

Showing formulas in the measurement


plan
You can have the features and characteristics in a measurement plan
which contain formulas displayed on the screen.

Displaying features with formulas


1 Select Plan Advanced Search Features with Formulas.
The Features with Formulas dialog box is opened.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-39

Formula input and run control

The tree structure shows all elements (features, characteristics, base


alignments, rotary table functions, navigation paths, etc.) that contain
a formula.

2 Use the buttons to open and close the branches that interest you.
Under the feature, the formulas used in it are shown.

Setting conditions
Processing conditions
You can link the computation of characteristics to conditions that enable
CALYPSO to execute a jump in the CNC run in accordance with the
measuring results and not to measure the corresponding characteristic.
NOTICE
A basic knowledge of programming structures will help you understand
the following.
You can choose whether to have the condition queried before or after
the characteristic is computed. CALYPSO ascertains whether the condition is fulfilled or not.
If the condition is queried before computation, CALYPSO either computes
the characteristic and continues or executes the instruction linked to

6-40

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Formula input and run control

compliance with the condition. This instruction can be either of the following:

cancel the automatic measuring run

do not compute the characteristic and continue.

If the condition is queried after computation, the only alternatives are:

cancel the automatic measuring run

continue.

If a loop has been defined around the characteristic, processing depends


on what was defined first.

Linking a condition to a characteristic


Setting a condition for a characteristic
1 Select Condition in the context menu of the characteristic.
The Condition window is opened.

2 Select Formula in the context menu of the yellow input field and
enter the condition (see Entering formulas [ 638]).

Note: The only possible return values for the condition are true and
false. Use the comparison operators.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-41

Formula input and run control

3 Enter additional settings for the condition:


Only with the PCM Technology option: Use Settings to enter the
presettings and postsettings.
Tick the Post condition check box if the condition is not queried
until the characteristic has been computed.
Yes button next to End program:
The automatic run is canceled or the measurement of the feature is
omitted if the condition is true (satisfied).
If this is not necessary, click Yes or No.
No button next to End program:
The automatic run is canceled or the measurement of the feature is
omitted if the condition is false (not satisfied).
If this is not necessary, click Yes or No.
The condition will be checked and evaluated in the next automatic measuring run.

Inserting loops
Processing loops
NOTICE
This section is intended for advanced users who are familiar with the
basics of programming structures.
Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for example,
with a perforated plate). You can also use loops when you configure the
base alignment.
If you place a loop around a characteristic or the entire measurement plan,
the characteristic or measurement plan is processed several times in succession.
NOTICE
Note that you cannot enter loops directly in the input/output parameters.
Loops for characteristics and features are realized in different ways:

Characteristics: direct loop definition


Select in the context menu of the characteristic the Loop entry and
enter the desired values:
The loop variable starts the first run with the start index. Prior to each
run, it is increased by the increment and compared with the end index.
As soon as the loop variable has exceeded the end index (with pos-

6-42

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Formula input and run control

itive increment: greater than the end index; with negative increment:
smaller than the end index), the loop will not be repeated any more.

Features: indirect loop definition


You define a pattern for a feature or a group of features (see Multiplying features by patterns [ 421]).
Similar to the loop, a run is repeated several times, each time with a
modified index. Additionally, another abortion condition is defined
with Real number: As soon as the number of runs has reached the
value of the real number, the computation is terminated.

Loop variables and loop indexes


The loop variables have fixed names, and they are called LOOP1 to
LOOP4 in each loop. In the characteristic and the associated features,
you can use these loop variables in formulas to vary the way in which the
characteristic is processed.
If a condition is also linked to the object, the sequence of processing
depends on what was defined first.
CALYPSO uses the loop variable as an index to mark similar objects that
differ in the value of the corresponding loop variable.
Example: Circle1(1), Circle1(2), Circle1(3).
Each of the four loop variables corresponds to a certain loop index definition or type of bracket:
Loop variable

Nest Level

LOOP1

()

round

LOOP2

[]

square

LOOP3

<>

angle

LOOP4

{}

brace

Placing loops around features or measurement


plans
You can place the loop around a characteristic or the entire measurement
plan:
1 To place a loop around the measurement plan, select Loop in the
context menu of the measurement plan (none of the characteristics is
highlighted).
- or To place a loop around a characteristic, select Loop in the context
menu of the characteristic.
2 Enter the values for Start, End and Step for each loop index range.
61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-43

Formula input and run control

3 Under Nest Level, select a type of bracket for the loop.

Note: The PCM Technology option allows you to define input and
output parameters for the loop. To do so, click Settings.
4 If necessary, enter an abortion condition.

Note: You can define only one abortion condition per loop.
The loop will be executed in the next CNC run.
To ensure that something happens each time the loop is run, you have
to use the LOOPi (i = 1,...,4) loop variable in the characteristic and/or in
the features to vary the measurement run.
For example, you could multiply the loop variable with a constant offset
in order to increase an X value step by step.

Including features in loops


Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for example,
with a perforated plate).
If you defined a loop by a characteristic, the data of the associated feature
has to be varied in each loop run in order to ensure that the loop can be
executed correctly.
You accomplish this by using the loop variables in the definition of the
feature, or incorporating a pattern into the feature.
Make sure that the value for Real number corresponds to the number
of loop runs resulting from the loop placed around the characteristic.

Incorporating a pattern into a feature


1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Pattern entry.
The Selection (Pattern) window appears on the screen.

6-44

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Formula input and run control

3 Click New and Edit.


4 Select the desired pattern type (Polar Pattern Offset, 1-D Linear
Pattern, 2-D Linear Pattern, Rotational Pattern, Pattern
with position list) and click OK.
The dialog box for defining the pattern (example: 1-D Linear Pattern)
appears on the screen.

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

6-45

Formula input and run control

5 Enter the values for the pattern. Make sure that the value for Real
number corresponds to the number of loop runs resulting from the
loop placed around the characteristic.
6 Click OK to confirm and close the window.
7 Click OK to close the feature template.
The loop is executed as soon as you start an automatic measuring run
(see Running a measurement plan [ 72]).

Example: Loop for alignment to RPS


You can place a loop around a base alignment. If you do this, the alignment is repeated for the defined number of loop repetitions unless the
abortion condition is satisfied beforehand.
RPS alignment, for example, works best with a loop. The effect of this
loop is to repeat alignment until it achieves your user-defined fit.
The illustration below shows the definition of the loop.

6-46

61212-2011002

CALYPSO

Formula input and run control

The baseSystem().valueA<0.1 abortion condition (for syntax, see in the


operating instructions for the PCM Technology option under baseSystem)
means that once measuring has commenced, the measuring process will
continue until the valueA best-fit value is less than 0.1.

Purpose of Nest Level


CALYPSO provides you with four forms of brackets for four loop levels.
Which are the applications of these four loop variables?
You have to use brackets of different types in independently defined